JP6643594B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine, and is particularly applicable to a pachinko gaming machine and the like.

  In a conventional gaming machine, based on the ball entering the starting port, the hit determination is performed with a predetermined big hit probability and the symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and when the hit result is a big hit, the symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol. There was a game that executed a jackpot game that opened a winning opening. In addition, a game effect (reach effect, character effect, etc.) is executed in accordance with the change display of the symbol, and the result of the hit determination may become a big hit depending on the execution mode of the game effect, that is, the symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol. (For example, Patent Document 1).

  Also, by displaying the amount of prize balls acquired by the jackpot game, when a series of jackpot games is executed in a short period of time, the amount of the prize ball acquired in the series is displayed. There was a gaming machine that performed the effect shown. As a result, the expectation of the occurrence of the big hit by the game effect is increased, and the amusement of the game is enhanced by grasping the prize ball amount acquired in the big hit game.

JP-A-10-57583

  In the gaming machine described above, although the amount of prize balls acquired by the jackpot game is indicated, it is difficult to grasp whether the acquired amount is relatively large or small. As a result, there is a fear that the player may have a sense of distrust in the game, and may cause a decrease in the interest in the game.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and provides a gaming machine that can prevent a decrease in gaming interest while indicating an acquired gaming profit.

A gaming machine according to a first aspect of the present invention for solving the above-described problems,
Identification information display means for variably displaying identification information based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition;
Special game execution means for executing a special game capable of obtaining a predetermined amount of game profit when the result of the variable display of the identification information is a specific result,
Along with the variation display of the identification information, a game effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined game effect,
A profit information display unit capable of displaying profit information indicating a total amount of game profit obtained when the game state is in a specific state advantageous to the player,
A specific profit display portion that is displayed when the total amount of game profits acquired when in the specific state is a specific amount ,
The specific amount of profit information cannot be obtained by executing the special game once, but can be obtained by executing the special game a plurality of times,
The game effect performed in accordance with the change display of the identification information includes a first game effect and a second game effect,
The first game effect indicates a higher possibility of the execution of the special game than the second game effect,
A specific character is displayed in the first game effect,
During the execution of the special game, when the total amount of the acquired game profits reaches the specific amount, the specific profit display section is displayed, and the specific profit display section includes information indicating the specific character and the game profit of the specific amount. Is displayed,
The profit information display unit and the specific profit display unit are both displayed,
The specific profit display unit is continuously displayed for a specific period while maintaining the display of the information indicating the specific character and a specific amount of game profit,
The profit information display unit is characterized in that, while the specific profit display unit is continuously displayed for the specific period, when the game profit is obtained, the display of the profit information is updated. It is.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first gaming effect and the second gaming effect, which are executed in accordance with the change display of the identification information and indicate the feasibility of the special game, are provided. In addition, the first game effect is a game effect that shows a higher possibility as a special game execution possibility than the second game effect, and is a game effect that displays a specific character. In addition, a profit information display unit that displays profit information indicating the amount of the acquired game profit is provided, and when the profit information displayed on the profit information display unit is a specific amount, the specific character is displayed. I do. Thereby, at the timing when the profit information becomes the specific amount, the specific character used in the first game production indicating the relatively high special game execution possibility is displayed, so that the player can obtain many game profits. This allows the player to easily recognize that many game profits have been obtained.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to the gaming machine of this invention, it becomes possible to aim at provision of the gaming machine which shows the acquired game profit amount, and prevents the fall of gaming interest.

1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a rear view of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view showing the composition of the game board of an example of the present invention. FIG. 4 is an enlarged view of the main display shown in FIG. 3 and is a view showing displays provided in the gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electric configuration of the gaming machine. It is a table showing the correspondence between the type of winning and the opening pattern of the special winning opening. It is a table which shows various random numbers which a microcomputer for game control acquires. (A) is a big hit determination table, (B) is a big hit type determination table, (C) is a reach determination table, (D) is a normal symbol hit determination table, and (E) is a normal symbol variation. it is a pattern selection table. It is a table | surface which shows a fluctuation pattern table. It is a flowchart of a main control main process. It is a flowchart of an interruption process. It is a flowchart of a starting port sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of a process at the time of starting ball entry. It is a flowchart of a general-purpose operation process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol hit determination process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol random number shift process. It is a flowchart of processing during a normal symbol change. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of a normal electric accessory process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 1 operation | movement process. It is a flowchart of special symbol 1 standby processing. It is a flowchart of a special figure 1 hit determination process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 1 variation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 1 variation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 1 random number shift process. It is a flowchart of a special symbol 1 changing process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 1 change interruption process. It is a flowchart of special symbol 1 determination processing. It is a flowchart of a special figure 2 operation | movement process. It is a flowchart of a special symbol 2 standby process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 2 hit determination process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection process. 7 is a flowchart of a special figure 2 random number shift process. It is a flowchart of a special symbol 2 changing process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 2 change interruption process. It is a flowchart of special symbol 2 determination processing. It is a flowchart of special electric auditors product processing 1 (big hit game). It is a flowchart of a big hit game start process. It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. 9 is a flowchart of a special figure operation status setting process 1; It is a flowchart of special electric auditors product processing 2 (small hitting game). 9 is a flowchart of a special figure operation status setting process 2; It is a flowchart of a reserved ball number process. It is a flowchart of a power-off monitoring process. It is a flowchart of a sub control main process. It is a flowchart of a reception interruption process. It is a flowchart of a 2ms timer interruption process. It is a flowchart of a 10 ms timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart of a reception command analysis process. It is a flowchart of a fluctuation effect start process. It is a table | surface which shows the symbol type of an effect symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the effect design game effect of state A. It is an explanatory view showing a flow of an effect symbol game effect in state B. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display screen of effect mode C, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen of effect mode D. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the effect design game effect of effect mode C. It is an explanatory view showing a flow of an effect symbol game effect in effect mode D. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the display screen during the small hit change in effect mode D, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the display screen during the small hit game in effect mode D. It is a flowchart of a small hit prefetch effect processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the effect when a specific period is started. It is a figure showing an example of a mode selection screen during an ending period. It is a figure showing an example of a display screen from before the start of the mode selection period during the big hit game to after the start. (A) is a table showing types of second effect patterns (battle effect patterns in effect mode C), and (b) is a table showing types of third effect patterns (battle effect patterns in effect mode D). It is a figure showing an example of a display of a notice image in effect mode D. It is a display pattern determination table of a preview image. It is a figure showing an example of the display contents of an effect design game effect. It is a figure showing an example of the display contents of the 1st specific production. It is a figure showing an example of the display contents of the 1st specific production. It is a figure showing an example of the display contents of the 2nd specific production. It is a figure showing an example of the display contents of the 2nd specific production A. It is a figure showing an example of the display contents of the 2nd specific production B. It is a figure showing an example of the display contents of the 2nd specific effect C. (A) It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of a 1st notice effect (effect hold notice), (b) is an effect hold notice decision table. It is a figure showing an example of display contents of the 3rd notice production (fireworks notice). It is a figure showing an example of display contents of the 4th notice production (chance zone notice). It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of a 5th notice effect (full rotation notice) and a full rotation effect. Is a diagram showing an execution mode of a specific reach effect. Is a diagram showing an execution mode of a specific reach effect. It is a table | surface which shows an example of a notice effect. It is a figure showing an execution mode of a notice effect. It is a figure showing an execution mode of acquisition profit display production. It is a figure showing an execution mode of acquisition profit display production. It is a figure which shows the transition state of a game state and a big hit game. It is a table | surface which shows the game effect in each effect mode. It is a figure showing an execution mode of each production mode. It is a figure which shows the presentation mode of a confrontation reach. It is a figure showing other execution modes of an acquisition profit display effect. It is a figure showing other execution modes of an acquisition profit display effect. It is a figure showing other execution modes of an acquisition profit display effect. It is a figure showing other execution modes of an acquisition profit display effect. It is a figure showing other execution modes of an acquisition profit display effect. It is a figure showing other execution modes of an acquisition profit display effect. It is a figure showing other execution modes of an acquisition profit display effect.

  Next, embodiments of the present invention will be described using examples. In the following, when the accompanying per symbol completion of variable display of the symbols is stopped and displayed, a predetermined amount of game profit to the player (e.g., winning balls) pachinko game machine capable of performing per game that can impart An example to which the present invention is applied will be described.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment includes a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2 mounted in the gaming machine frame 50. It is configured to be detachable from the machine frame 50. FIG. 3 shows a state in which the gaming board 2 is removed from the gaming machine frame 50. The gaming machine frame 50 includes a front frame 51 having a decorative surface, a main body frame 52 on which the gaming board 2 and the like are attached, and an outer frame 53 for attaching the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a hall island facility. ing. The outer frame 53 is fixed to the island facility, and the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are attached to the outer frame via upper and lower frame hinges 56, 56. The front frame 51 and the body frame 52 are pivotally supported on one side end (the left side in FIG. 1) in the up-down direction, and can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 53 around the one side end. It is configured. In addition, from the closed state shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, only the front frame 51 can be opened (opened), or both the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 can be opened (opened).

  Further, the front frame 51 has a firing handle 60 for firing game balls with a firing intensity corresponding to the operation amount (rotation angle) of the player, and stores the game balls and supplies the stored game balls to the launch device side. A high-strength ball supply tray (upper plate) 61 and a surplus ball tray (lower plate) 62 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply tray 61 are provided. Also, a front effect button 63a and a second effect button 63b (these two effect buttons are collectively referred to) that can be operated by the player during the execution of the game effect executed as the game progresses, etc. (Hereinafter simply referred to as “effect button 63”). The effect buttons to be used can be properly used for the plurality of effect buttons according to the type of the game effect. Note that the configuration of the effect button 63 is not limited to the mode of the first embodiment, and may be any as long as it can detect an input from a player, or an input detecting means (for example, a player directly touching the button portion to make an input). , A retractable type, a touch sensor type, etc.) or a non-contact type input detecting means (a photoelectric type, etc.) for detecting that a part of the player's body has approached and performing an input. Good.

  The front frame 51 is provided with a decoration frame lamp 66, a speaker 67, and an image display device (second image display device 71, third image display device 72). Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are provided in front of the front frame 51 (on the player side) so that the display screens 71a and 72a can be easily recognized by the player. And is installed so as to be inclined toward the outside. In addition, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72, like the image display device 7 described below, execute / non-execute a game, the state of the game, the game effect to be executed, and the like. Game effects (characters and staging patterns, etc.), demonstration effects, and information related to games (acquired payout information, number of rounds, number of consecutive play, remaining period of game state, game mode, reliability and explanation of game effects, etc.) , Information on the setting of the gaming machine (volume setting information, luminance setting information, etc.) is displayed. The second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 may display different information or the same information among these pieces of information. The image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 display the same information when displaying different information among these information. There are times when you do. Also, any two of the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 display the same information, and the other one displays different information. May be displayed. Note that any or all of the image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 may be simply referred to as an "image display device".

  The image display device 7 is provided in an area inside the game area 3 formed on the game board 2, and the second image display apparatus 71 and the third image display apparatus 72 are provided in an area outside the game area 3. ing. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the second image display device 71 (provided at the non-open side end) is attached to the front frame 51 via a second image display device hinge 75 (hinge portion). Have been. Therefore, it is rotatable in the left-right direction about the upper and lower second image display device hinges 75 as axes. More specifically, it is configured to be rotatable to the right by a predetermined angle (about 45 degrees) from the state shown in FIG. 1 (normal state). This is because, when the front frame 51 and the main frame 52 are opened around the upper and lower frame hinges 56, 56, the second image display device 71 provided to protrude forward of the front frame 51 is provided with a pachinko machine. This is a configuration for preventing the gaming machine 1 from being damaged by colliding with a hall facility (ball rental machine, inter-chamber facility, etc.) provided adjacent to the frame hinge 56 side (left side in FIG. 1). . On the other hand, the third image display device 72 (provided at the open end) is fixed to the front frame 51 and cannot be rotated.

  In the game board 2, a game area 3 in which a game ball fired by operating the firing handle 60 flows down is formed by being surrounded by a rail member 4. The game board 2 is provided with a board lamp 5 for decoration. In the game area 3, a plurality of game nails 16 for guiding game balls are protruded. Further, a ball return preventing piece 6 is provided at the tip of the rail member 4, and it is possible to prevent a game ball once guided to the game area from returning to the launching device side.

  In the vicinity of the center of the game area 3, an image display device 7 including a liquid crystal display device is provided. The image display device 7 is attached to the game board 2 from the back side of the game board 2. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, an effect symbol display area 7b (also referred to as an "effect symbol display portion") in which effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R (also simply referred to as "effect symbols") are displayed side by side. ) Is provided, and the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the gaming state according to the gaming state (low-accuracy low-base state, high-accuracy low-base state, low-accuracy high-base state, high-accuracy high-base state). The variable display is performed in synchronization with the variable display of a special symbol (a first special symbol or a second special symbol described later) set as the main body of the game. The effect design 8L is also referred to as “left design”, the effect design 8C is also referred to as “middle design”, and the effect design 8R is also referred to as “right design”.

  The display mode of the effect symbol display area 7b shown in FIG. 3 shows one scene when the gaming state is in the normal state (low-precision low-base state, state A described later). As will be described in detail later, in this low-probability low base state, the frequency of entering game balls into the starting port (the second starting port 21) is set lower than in the high base state, and whether a special symbol is hit or not. The determination probabilities (the first special symbol hit / fail judgment and the second special symbol hit / fail judgment) are low probabilities (also referred to as “predetermined probabilities”), and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. (more than twice) are set (all out change 10 minutes). For this reason, in the normal state, the left game area 3A (the second game area) is displayed rather than the game ball being fired in the right game area 3B (the second game area) and the second special symbol is variably displayed by entering the second starting port 21. Write play a game which variably displays the first special symbol to be fired game ball into a game area) was ball entrance to the first start hole 20 is advantageous to the player. That is, in the normal state, it can be said that the first special symbol (effect symbol) is the main game state in which the variable display is performed. For this reason, in the normal state (state A), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the effect symbol display area 7b perform variable display and stop display in synchronization with the first special symbol.

  Further, each of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is composed of a plurality of symbols (identification information) representing numbers from “1” to “9”, for example. Depending on the display mode (stop display mode) of the left, middle, and right effect symbols stopped and displayed (derived display) in the effect symbol display area 7b, a first special symbol display 41a (see FIG. 4) described later (see FIG. 4). The result of the variable display of the first special symbol displayed on the "special symbol display section" and the second special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 41b (also referred to as the "second special symbol display section"). The result of the symbol change display (the result of the special symbol hit / fail determination) is displayed (notified) so that the player can easily recognize it. It should be noted that any one (or all) of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the effect symbol may be simply referred to as “symbol” or “identification information”. In addition, the special symbol hit / fail judgment is also referred to simply as “hit / fail judgment” or “first hit / fail judgment”. In addition, the control unit (main control unit 80) that performs the special symbol hit / fail judgment is also referred to as “hit / fail judgment execution means” or “first hit / fail judgment execution means”.

  For example, when the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit (first specific hit), the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with the same three-digit symbol (zolo) such as “777” (also referred to as “big hit symbol”). Say). In the case of a small hit (second specific hit), a special chance design such as “135” or a special hit design such as “3 ★ 3” (also referred to as a “small hit design”) is produced. Stop and display the symbol. In addition, when the small hit occurs, instead of the mode in which the small hit special symbol is stopped and displayed, a symbol having the same mode may be stopped and displayed in the small hit symbol and the off symbol. Also, when there are a plurality of small hits (first small hit, second small hit, etc.) as small hits, different small hit symbols (first small hit symbol, second small hit symbol) can be distinguished from each other. ) May be stopped or the same (common) small hit symbol may be stopped and displayed so that it is difficult to distinguish them.

  If the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is out of order, at least one of the three symbols such as "637" or "373" is stopped and the effect symbol is displayed in a different symbol (the "off symbol"). ”). Thus, the player can easily grasp the progress of the game (the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment) by looking at the effect symbol stopped and displayed. That is, in general, the player does not directly grasp the result of the special symbol correct / improper judgment by looking at the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b. It is understood by looking at the effect symbols displayed in the symbol display area 7b. In addition, as the aspect of the effect symbol change display, for example, an aspect of scrolling display in up, down, left, right, diagonal directions, or the like, an aspect of effect display using only the first effect symbol display section 7b, or a first effect symbol display section 7b In addition to the above, there is a mode in which an effect is displayed by using one or both of the second effect symbol display section 71a and the third effect symbol display section 72a. In addition, in addition to this, a mode in which the effect is displayed using only the second effect symbol display unit 71a or the third effect symbol display unit 72a may be provided.

  In addition, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, in addition to displaying the game effect (effect design game effect) using the effect symbol as described above, the game effect is executed in accordance with the hit game (big hit game, small hit game). A hit game effect (big hit game effect, small hit game effect), a demonstration effect for customer waiting, and the like are displayed. In the effect design game effect, the hit game effect, and the demonstration effect, in addition to the effect design such as a numeral, an effect image other than the effect design such as a background image or a character image is displayed. As will be described later in detail, a game state (state A, state B or state C), a state in which a game ball is fired in the left game area 3A to play a game, or a game ball is fired in the right game area 3B. The display mode on the effect symbol display area 7b is different depending on whether the game is performed or not. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, a first special symbols and in parallel both the second special symbol (simultaneously) the gaming machine capable of varying display, a game of such type Machine is also referred to as a “simultaneous variation machine (parallel variation machine)”.

  In addition, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes a first effect suspension display area 9c (first effect suspension display unit) for displaying the first effect suspension 9a according to the number of first special figure suspensions described later, There is a second effect hold display area 9d (second effect hold display unit) that displays the second effect hold 9b in accordance with the number of second special figure holds stored, which will be described later. The first special figure reservation displayed on a first special figure reservation display 43a (see FIG. 4) described later according to the display mode (the number of displays) of the first production reservation 9a or the second production reservation 9b in the production suspension display area. And the number of stored second special figure reservations displayed on the second special figure reservation display 43b can be easily shown to the player. The display position of the first effect hold display unit and the display position of the second effect hold display unit may change depending on the game state, the game mode, or the game effect (reach effect, etc.) to be executed. In some cases, only one of the first effect hold display unit and the second effect hold display unit (for example, only the effect hold display unit corresponding to the main special symbol) is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a center decorative body 10 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7 so as to surround the effect symbol display area 7b. A stage 11 having a game ball rolling surface on which the game balls can roll is provided below the center decorative body 10. A hollow warp portion 12 is provided on the left side of the center decorative body 10. The warp section 12 is provided with a warp entrance and a warp exit, receives game balls flowing down the game area 3 from the warp entrance, discharges the game balls from the warp exit, and guides them to the stage section 11. The game balls guided to the rolling surface of the stage unit 11 can enter the first starting port 20 described later with a higher possibility than game balls not guided to the stage unit 11. Further, on the upper part of the center decorative body 10, a decorative member 13 having an electric decoration member (a board lamp 5) such as an LED, which can be turned on according to a game state, and which forms characters, figures, and the like is arranged. I have.

  A movable decorative member 14 operable in accordance with the game effect is provided above the center decorative body 10 and behind the decorative member 13. In Figure 3, only a portion of the movable decorative member 14 is visible, for example, along with the execution of relatively per the likely game effects, the movable decorative member 14 falls down (predetermined The movable decorative member 14 covers the front surface of the display screen 7a, and most of the movable decorative member 14 becomes visible. As a result, the player can enhance the interest in the game and the expectation of winning.

  Below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, fixed winning device 19 comprising a first start hole 20 of the non-variable type ball entrance easiness of the game ball is not changed is provided. Based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 20, a random number for a special symbol hit determination is acquired, and when a predetermined condition (variation start condition) is satisfied, a hit determination related to the first special symbol ( The first special symbol determination is performed, and the first special symbol starts to fluctuate, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the determination.

  Above the right side area (right game area 3B) of the center decorative body 10 in the game area 3, a gate 28 (a general-purpose starting port, a passing port, an entrance port, a specific starting port) through which game balls can pass (can enter). Mouth). Game balls that have entered from the upstream side of the gate 28 pass through the gate 28 and flow down the game area 3 in the downstream direction. The gate 28 also serves as a start gate 29 (also called a combination gate or an operation gate) for starting a big hit game. That is, the present gate is the gate 28 and also the start gate 29. When a game ball enters (passes) the gate 28, the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a, a random number for determining whether or not the symbol is correct is usually obtained, and when a predetermined condition (variation condition) is established, the normal In addition to executing the symbol win / fail determination (also referred to as "second win / fail determination"), the normal symbol starts to fluctuate, and after a lapse of a predetermined time, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the normal symbol win / fail determination. When the hit ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed, the movable member 23 operates (opens), and the second starting port 21 is opened. In addition, the control unit (main control unit 80) that performs a normal symbol hit / fail determination as to whether or not the movable member 23 is operated (opening operation) to open the second starting port 21 is referred to as a “hit / hit determination execution unit”. It is also referred to as "second validity determination execution means". The gate sensor 28a also serves as a start gate sensor 29a for starting a big hit game. That is, the sensor that detects the ball entering the main gate is the gate sensor 28a and the start gate sensor 29a.

  Further, as will be described in detail later, when passing through the gate 28 (start gate 29), the function as the start gate 29 is exhibited when the condition for executing the big hit game is satisfied (executing the big hit game). (Also referred to as a possible state or a jackpot standby state). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 (start gate 29) when the condition (big hit standby state) is not satisfied, a control process for a normal symbol is performed, and the big hit start process is not executed. Also, when the game ball passes through the start gate 29 (gate 28) when the condition is satisfied (in the jackpot waiting state), the jackpot game in the standby mode is started, and the predetermined jackpot ( A round game in which the first winning port 30) is in an open state (a state in which a ball can be entered) starts.

  In the right side area (right game area 3B) of the center decorative body 10 in the game area 3 and below (downstream) the gate 28 (start gate 29), a first area having a first special winning opening 30 is provided. A large winning device 31 (also referred to as a “first variable ball entrance”) is provided. The first special winning device 31 includes an opening and closing member 32, and opens and closes the first special winning opening 30 by operating the opening and closing member 32. The opening / closing member 32 has a substantially rectangular (elongated plate) game ball path on the upper surface. In a closed state, the opening of the first special winning opening 30 is closed, and a game ball is placed on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32. It is possible to pass. As shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 is formed to be inclined from the upstream side to the downstream side (from left to right on the paper). Thereby, when the opening / closing member 32 is in the closed state, the game ball flowing down to the entrance of the first special winning opening 30 passes through the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 without entering the first special winning opening 30. Then, it flows down in the downstream direction of the game area.

  The opening / closing member 32 is driven by a first special winning opening solenoid 33 (see FIG. 5), and the opening / closing member 32 is retracted in the direction of the back of the game board 3 so that the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 forming the game ball passage. Disappears. Thus, when the closing member 32 is open, the game ball that has flowed down to the inlet portion of the first special winning opening 30 becomes to be ball entrance to the first bonus prize hole 30. As described above, the opening / closing member 32 that opens and closes the entrance of the first big winning opening 30 is a retractable opening / closing member, and when opened (at the time of opening), smoothly plays the flowing game balls in the first large winning opening 30. When the ball enters the winning opening 30 and is in the closed state (at the time of closing), the flowing game ball can be guided in an arbitrary direction (a second starting opening 21 described later) by an inclined upper surface passage. It becomes possible. The first special winning opening 30, only game ball becomes possible ball entrance when closing member 32 is open. That is, the first large winning device 31 (first variable entrance) is configured such that the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 32 causes a non-entering state (closed state) in which game balls cannot enter, and an entry in which game balls enter. It can be changed to a ball possible state (open state).

  In the right side area (right game area 3B) of the center decorative body 10 in the game area 3 and in the game area below (downstream) the first big winning opening 30, there is no change in the ease of entry of the game ball. A second fixed winning device 25 having a variable third starting port 26 is provided. Based on the entry of a game ball into the third starting port 26, a special symbol hit / fail judgment random number or the like is acquired, and when a predetermined condition (variation start condition) is satisfied, a hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol ( together with a second special symbol spruce determination) is performed, the second special symbol starts displaying variation, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of spruce determination after a predetermined time has elapsed. In addition, the game ball passage branches below (downstream) the first big winning opening 30 (upper and lower), and the upper game ball passage in which the third starting port 26 is provided, the second starting port 31 and the second starting ball 31. A lower game ball passage in which the two major winning openings 35 are provided is formed. Also, as shown in FIG. 3, the game ball guided to the upper game ball passage enters the third starting port 26 by contacting the game nail 16 provided near the third starting port 26 or the like. Alternatively, it flows downstream without entering the third starting port 26 and flows into the out port 34. In addition, since the third starting port 26 is a fixed winning device that can always enter a ball, a large hit is made in a left hit game (a so-called first hit), and the first big hit game is executed in a right hit game. During the big hit game, the game ball is put into the third starting port 26 (reserved), and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol can be executed immediately after the big hit game ends.

  In the right side area (right game area 3B) of the center decorative body 10 in the game area 3 and in the game area below (downstream of) the first big winning opening 30, the ease of entry of the game ball is changed. A variable winning device 22 (also referred to as a “variable starting port” or a “variable starting port”) having a second starting port 21 is provided. Based on the game ball entering the second starting port 21, a special symbol hit / fail judgment random number or the like is acquired, and when a predetermined condition (variation start condition) is satisfied, a hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol (the The second special symbol starts to fluctuate and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed based on the result of the determination.

  The variable winning device 22 includes a movable member 23 (also referred to as an “open / close member”), and opens and closes the second starting port 21 by the operation of the movable member 23. By this opening / closing operation, the second starting port 21 can be changed from the first mode (closed state) to the second mode (open state) in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than in the first mode. is there. In the first embodiment, the second starting port 21 allows game balls to enter only when the movable member 23 is in the open state, and disables game balls to enter when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. there. The second starting port 21 is completely closed when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, as long as the game ball is more difficult to enter when the movable member 23 is in the closed state than in the open state. It is not necessary that the ball cannot be entered.

  The movable member 23 has a substantially rectangular (elongated plate) game ball path on the upper surface, similar to the opening / closing member 32. In the closed state, the movable member 23 closes the entrance of the second starting port 21 and the movable ball 23 is closed. game ball is a can pass through the movable member 23 top surface. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the movable member 23, from the upstream side to the downstream side (from the paper right to left) are formed in an inclined shape. Thus, when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, the game ball that has flowed down to the inlet portion of the second start hole 21, without ball entrance to the second start hole 21, it passes through the upper surface of the movable member 23, It flows down in the downstream direction of the game area.

  The movable member 23 is driven by the second start hole solenoid 24 (see FIG. 5), that the movable member 23 retracts in the game board 3 backside direction (the game board and the vertical direction), to form a game ball passage The movable member 23 disappears from the entrance of the second starting port 21. As a result, when the movable member 23 is in the open state, the game ball flowing down to the entrance of the second starting port 21 enters the second starting port 21. As described above, the movable member 23 that opens and closes the entrance of the second starting port 21 is a retractable opening and closing member similar to the opening and closing member 32, and when opened (at the time of opening), the game ball that has flowed down. The game ball smoothly flows into the second starting port 21 and, when in the closed state (at the time of closing), allows the flowing game ball to flow in an arbitrary direction (a second large winning opening 35 described later) by an inclined upper surface passage. To guide.

  In the game area 3 on the right side (right game area 3B) of the center decorative body 10 and below (the downstream of) the second starting port 21, a second large winning opening 35 is provided. A large winning device 36 (also referred to as a "second variable entrance") is provided. The second big winning device 36 includes an opening and closing member 37, and opens and closes the second big winning opening 35 by the operation of the opening and closing member 37. Like the opening / closing member 32, the opening / closing member 37 has an upper surface formed as a game ball passage having a substantially rectangular shape (a long plate shape). In the closed state, the opening / closing member 37 closes the entrance of the second big winning opening 35 and opens and closes the opening. A game ball can pass through the upper surface of the member 37. As shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the opening / closing member 37 is formed to be inclined from the upstream side to the downstream side (from right to left on the paper). Thereby, when the opening and closing member 37 is in the closed state, the game ball flowing down to the entrance of the second big winning opening 35 passes through the upper surface of the opening and closing member 37 without entering the second big winning opening 35. Then, it flows down in the downstream direction of the game area.

  The opening / closing member 37 is driven by a second special winning opening solenoid 38 (see FIG. 5), and the opening / closing member 37 retracts in the direction of the back surface of the game board 3 (in the direction perpendicular to the game board surface), thereby forming a game ball passage. The opening / closing member 37 that has been used disappears from the entrance of the second big winning opening 35. Thus, when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state, the game ball flowing down to the entrance of the second special winning opening 35 enters the second special winning opening 35. As described above, the opening / closing member 37 for opening and closing the entrance of the second special winning opening 35 is a retractable opening / closing member similar to the opening / closing member 32, and the game ball that has flowed down in the open state (at the time of opening). Smoothly into the second special winning opening 35, and guides the flowing game balls in the closed state (when closed) to an arbitrary direction (out opening 34) by the inclined upper surface passage. It becomes possible. It should be noted that the second large winning opening 35 allows game balls to enter only when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state. That is, the second large winning device 36 (second variable entrance) is opened and closed by the opening / closing member 37 to enter a non-enterable state (closed state) in which a game ball cannot enter and an enterable state in which a game ball can enter. It can be changed to a ball possible state (open state).

  Further, a plurality of (three) general entrance holes 27 are provided in a game area below the left side area (left game area 3A) of the center decorative body 10 in the game area 3. In this manner, the game area 3 where various entrances and the like are arranged is divided into a left game area (first game area) 3A on the left side from the center in the left-right direction and a right game area (second game area) 3B on the right side. , Can be divided into A hitting method in which a game ball is fired so that a game ball flows down the left game area 3A is called left hitting, and a hitting method in which a game ball is fired so that a game ball flows down the right game area 3B is called right hitting. . In the pachinko gaming machine 1, in the normal state (low-probability low-base state, state A) at the start of the game, the player aims to enter the first starting port 20 by left-handing. That is, the normal state at the start of the game is a left-handed game mainly based on entering the first starting port 20 by the left-handed hit (first special symbol hit / fail judgment).

  On the other hand, when a hit is determined in the hit determination (first special symbol hit / fail determination) based on the ball entry into the first starting port 20, after the big hit game and the big hit game (special game) end (low-precision high base state or high accuracy The low base state) is a game in which the player hits the gate 28, the first winning port 30, the second starting port 21, or the second winning port 35 by right-handing. In other words, the jackpot game and the low-probability high-base state (state B) or the high-probability low-base state (state C) mainly involve entering the second starting port 21 by right-handing (second special symbol hit / fail judgment). It becomes a right-handed game. When a game ball enters the first starting port 20, the second starting port 21, the first special winning opening 30, the second special winning opening 35, and the general receiving opening 27, the respective starting openings are provided. , A predetermined number of game balls (also referred to as “prize balls” and “game profits”) are paid out (given). In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls (amount of game profit) paid out based on the ball entering the first large winning opening 30 is determined by the number of prize balls paid out based on the ball entering the second large winning opening 35. More than the number (the amount of game profit) is set. Specifically, the first special winning opening 30 pays out 15 winning balls for one entering ball, and the second special winning opening 35 provides 10 winning balls for one entering ball. Prize balls.

  As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, a main display 40 is arranged at a lower right portion of the game board 2. The main display unit 40 has a first special symbol display unit 41a (first special symbol display unit) for changing and displaying the first special symbol, and a second special symbol display unit for changing and displaying the second special symbol. And a normal symbol display 42 (ordinary symbol display unit) for changing and stopping and displaying a normal symbol (also referred to as "specific identification information"). In addition, the main display 40 includes a first special figure suspension display 43a that displays the number of pieces of the validity determination information (first special figure reservation) related to the first special symbol, and the validity determination information (second number) related to the second special symbol. A second special figure hold display 43b for displaying the number of stored (two special figure hold) and a general figure hold display 44 for displaying the number of operation hold (normal figure hold) of the normal symbol display 42 are included. ing.

  The main display 40 has a hit indicator 48 indicating that the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination or the second special symbol hit / fail determination has been hit, and a first special symbol hit / fail determination or a second special symbol hit / fail determination. When the result is a hit, a round indicator 45 indicating the number of rounds of the hit game to be executed, a game status indicator 46 indicating that the probability variation function is activated, and a launch direction of the game ball, that is, a right strike. A firing direction indicator 47 indicating whether the state should be left or left should be included. Various displays included in the main display 40 are display-controlled by a main control unit described later.

  The change display of the first special symbol is performed based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 20. The change display of the second special symbol is performed based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 21. In the following description, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol. Further, the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b may be collectively referred to as a special symbol display unit 41. Further, the first special figure reservation display 43a and the second special figure reservation display 43b may be collectively called a special figure reservation display unit 43.

  In the special symbol display section 41, the special symbol (identification information) is fluctuated for a predetermined time and then stopped, and the first symbol 20 or the second symbol is displayed by the special symbol (stop symbol) stopped (derived). The result of the hit judgment (special symbol hit / fail judgment, jackpot lottery) based on the ball entry into 21 is notified. The special symbol that is stopped and displayed is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by the special symbol hit / fail determination. In the case where the stop symbol is a predetermined special symbol (specific identification information) (that is, a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol), the stop pattern is an open pattern corresponding to the type of the specific special symbol stopped and displayed. A special game (big hit game, small hit game) for opening the first big winning port 30 or the second big winning port 35 is performed. The opening pattern of the special winning opening (the first special winning opening 30 and the second special winning opening 35) in the special game will be described later.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the first special symbol display 41 a is configured by eight LEDs indicated by “i to p” and displays a special symbol according to the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment. indicate. For example, when the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination is the first big hit (4R first big hit), the three LEDs “ijn” are turned on and the rest are turned off. When the second big hit (4R second big hit) occurs, the four LEDs of “jnkl” are turned on, and the remaining LEDs are turned off. In the case of disconnection, two LEDs of “lo” can be turned on, and the rest can be turned off. The second special symbol display 41b is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "a" to "h", and displays a special symbol according to the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment. As in the case of the first special symbol display 41b, the stop display mode is set to a different display mode according to the result (big hit, small hit, miss) of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment. Further, before the special symbol is stopped and displayed (before the derivation display), the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined variation time. The variation display mode is, for example, in a predetermined order from left to right. Each LED may be turned on so that light flows repeatedly.

  Here, among the stop display modes of special symbols and effect symbols (display results of variable display), the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is a hit (big hit or small hit) is referred to as “hit style. , "Specific Mode", "Specific Display Mode" or "Specific Display Result", and the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is "Off" or "Non-specific mode". , "Non-specific display mode" or "non-specific display result". Further, the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol hit determination is a big hit is also referred to as “big hit mode”, and the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol hit determination is a small hit is referred to as “small hit”. It is also referred to as "hit mode." Further, it refers to any or all of the image display device, the first special symbol display 41a (first special symbol display), the second special symbol display 41b (second special symbol display), and the special symbol display 41. Also referred to as “variation display means” or “identification information display means”.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, various kinds of information such as a random number for determining a special symbol hit / fail (such as “acquisition information”) are entered based on the entering ball. ), And the obtained various information is temporarily stored in a special figure holding storage unit 85 formed in the RAM of the main control unit 80. More specifically, if the information is acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 20, it is stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a as the first special figure reservation (also referred to as "first acquisition information"), If the information is acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 21, it is stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b as a second special figure reservation (also referred to as “second acquired information”). An upper limit is set for the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage unit 85, and the upper limit value in the first embodiment is four. The first special figure reservation storage unit 85a and the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b are also referred to as “first acquisition information storage unit” and “second acquisition information storage unit”, respectively, and are also generally referred to as “acquisition information storage unit”. .

  The special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage unit 85 is exhausted when the special symbol change display based on the special figure reservation becomes possible. Extinguishing the special figure suspension means determining a special symbol success / failure determination random number or the like corresponding to the special figure suspension and executing a special symbol variation display for indicating the determination result. Accordingly, in the present pachinko gaming machine 1, when the special symbol change display based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 cannot be immediately executed at the time of entering the ball, that is, the respective special change running and display of symbols, either during the execution of the special game is based on the special symbol spruce determination, a maximum of a predetermined number (four each), reserves the right special symbol spruce determination for the ball entrance (pending ) Can be.

  The number of such special figure reservations is displayed on the first special figure reservation display 43a and the second special figure reservation display 43b. Specifically, the first special map reservation display 43a is configured by two LEDs of “uv”, and by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of the first special map reservation, the first special map reservation display 43a is provided. Displays the number of holds. For example, when the number of reservations is 0, a display mode in which both LEDs are turned off, such as “u □ v □” (for example, □: turn off, ●: turn on red, ▲: turn on green), and the number of holds is 1 In this case, the display mode may be such that the LED of u is turned off and the LED of v is turned on in red, such as “u □ v ●”. When the number of reservations is 2, a display mode in which the LED of u is turned on in red and the LED of v is turned off, such as "u.multidot.v". When the number of reservations is 3, a display mode in which both LEDs are lit in red, such as "u.multidot.v.multidot." When the number of reservations is four (upper limit number), both LEDs can be lit in green, such as "u v v," to provide a display mode. Further, the second special figure reservation display 43b is composed of two LEDs “wx”. By controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of second special figure reservations, the second special figure reservation display 43b is displayed. It displays the number. For example, when the number of holds is 0, a display mode in which both LEDs are turned off, such as "w □ x □" (for example, □: turned off, ●: turned on red, ▲: turned on green), is used. 4 is also determined in the same manner as the first special figure reservation display 43a.

  Normally, the fluctuation display of the symbol is performed based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 (detection by the gate sensor 28a). In the ordinary symbol display 42, the ordinary symbol is fluctuated and displayed for a predetermined time, then is stopped and displayed, and the result of the ordinary symbol hit / fail judgment based on the passing of the game ball to the gate 28 is displayed by the stopped and displayed ordinary symbol (stop symbol). Notify. The ordinary symbol stopped and displayed is one ordinary symbol selected from a plurality of types of ordinary symbols by the ordinary symbol hit / fail judgment. When the stop-displayed ordinary symbol is a predetermined specific ordinary symbol (hit ordinary symbol), an auxiliary game for opening the second starting port 21 in an opening pattern according to the current game state (“specific game”). Is also performed). The means (main control unit) for executing the auxiliary game (specific game) is also referred to as auxiliary game executing means (specific game executing means). The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the normal symbol display 42 is composed of two LEDs of “st”, and displays the normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol pass / fail determination according to the lighting mode. It is. For example, when the determination result is a hit, the hit ordinary symbol in which both LEDs are turned on is stopped and displayed as "s @ t @" (for example, ■: turned on, □: turned off). If the determination result is out of order, an out-of-usual ordinary design in which only the t LED is turned on, such as "s @ t @", is displayed. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed for a predetermined predetermined fluctuation time. The mode of the variable display is, for example, a mode in which both LEDs are alternately turned on and off.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 28, the pachinko gaming machine 1 acquires various information (also referred to as “acquisition information”) such as a random number for determining whether or not the symbol is correct, based on the passage, and acquires the acquired various information. Is temporarily stored as a general drawing reservation in a general drawing storage unit 86 formed in the RAM of the main control unit 80. An upper limit is set for the number of general drawing reservations that can be stored in the general drawing storage unit 86, and the upper limit in the first embodiment is four. The general figure holding stored in the general figure holding storage unit 86 is exhausted when it becomes possible to change and display the ordinary symbol based on the general figure holding. The term “extension of the ordinary symbol holding” means that a random number for determining whether or not the ordinary symbol corresponds to the ordinary symbol holding is determined, and the variation display of the ordinary symbol for indicating the determination result is executed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol based on the passing of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be immediately executed at the time of passing, that is, during the execution of the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol or during the execution of the auxiliary game. Can reserve (reserve) the right to judge whether or not a normal symbol is accepted for the passage, with a predetermined number as an upper limit.

  The number of the general-purpose reservations is displayed on the general-purpose display 44. Specifically, the general-purpose reservation display 44 includes two LEDs “qr”, and displays the number of general-purpose reservations by lighting the LEDs according to the number of general-purpose reservations. For example, when the number of holds is 0, the display mode is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as “q □ r □” (for example, □: turn off, ●: turn on red, ▲: turn on green), and the hold number is 1 In this case, the display mode can be set such that the LED of q is turned off and the LED of r is turned on in red, such as “q □ r ●”. Also, the number of reservations 2 to 4 is determined in the same manner as in the first special figure reservation display 43a.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment includes a main control board 80 (a “main control unit”, a “main control unit” A sub-control board 90 (also referred to as a "sub-control unit", a "sub-control unit", or an "effect control unit") for performing control relating to an effect performed in accordance with the progress of the game, a game ball A payout control board 110 (also referred to as a “payout control unit”) that controls the payout of the game, an effect symbol 8 displayed on the image display device 7, a symbol displayed on the effect display 102, a third effect hold display 103a, And an image control board 100 (image control unit) for controlling display of the fourth effect suspension display 103b and the like. As shown in FIG. 2, a main control board storage case housing a main control board 80 is provided substantially at the center of the rear side (back side) of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Above the main control board case, A storage case such as an image control board that stores the audio control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the image control board 100 is provided, and a sub-control board storage case that stores the sub-control board 90 is provided on the storage case such as the image control board. Is provided. On the lower left side of the main control board case, a payout control board case for housing the payout control board is provided. On the right side, a power supply board case for housing the power supply board 109 is provided.

  On the main control board 80, a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as "game control microcomputer") 81 for controlling the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a ROM storing a program for controlling the progress of the game and the like, a RAM used as a work memory, and a CPU executing the program stored in the ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits / receives data (information) to / from another board or the like via an input / output circuit 87 (I / O port unit). The input / output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81. Further, the ROM may be provided externally. The RAM of the game control microcomputer 81 is provided with the above-described special figure reservation storage unit 85 (the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a and the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b) and the general figure reservation storage unit 86. .

  Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via a relay board 88. Therefore, a signal is input to the main control board 80 from each sensor, and a signal is output from the main control board 80 to each solenoid. Specifically, the sensors include a first starting opening sensor 20a, a second starting opening sensor 21a, a gate sensor 28a (starting gate sensor 29a), a first winning opening sensor 30a, a second winning opening sensor 35a, and The general entrance sensor 27a is connected. These various sensors are also referred to as “detection means”.

  The first starting port sensor 20a is provided in the first starting port 20 and detects a game ball that has entered the first starting port 20. The second starting port sensor 21a is provided in the second starting port 21 and detects a game ball that has entered the second starting port 21. The gate sensor 28a (start gate sensor 29a) is provided in the gate 28 and detects a game ball passing through the gate 28. The first special winning opening sensor 30a is provided in the first special winning opening 30 and detects a game ball that has entered the first special winning opening 30. The second special winning opening sensor 35a is provided in the second special winning opening 35 and detects a game ball that has entered the second special winning opening 35. The general entrance sensor 27a is provided in each of the general entrances 27 and detects a game ball that has entered the general entrance 27.

  Further, as the solenoids, a second starting port solenoid 24, a first winning port solenoid 33, and a second winning port solenoid 38 are connected. The second starting port solenoid 24 is for driving the movable member 23 of the variable winning device 22. The first special winning opening solenoid 33 is for driving the opening and closing member 32 of the first special winning device 31. The second special winning opening solenoid 38 is for driving the opening and closing member 37 of the second special winning device 36. Further, the main control board 80 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol reservation display 43a, a second special symbol reservation display 43b, and a A drawing hold display 44, a round display 45, a game status display 46, a launch direction display 47, and a hit display 48 are connected. That is, the display control of the main display 40 is performed by the game control microcomputer 81 (main control unit 80).

  The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The payout control board 110 is connected to a payout apparatus 120 for paying out a prize ball or a lending ball, and a card unit 135, and is also connected to a firing control board 111 (also referred to as a “fire control unit”). Is connected. The firing device 112 includes the firing handle 60 (see FIG. 1). The card unit 135 is installed adjacent to one end of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (usually on the left side of FIG. 1), and when a player performs a predetermined ball lending operation, the inserted prepaid card (game) This allows a ball to be lent based on information stored in a value storage medium or the like.

  The payout control board 110 is mounted with a payout control one-chip microcomputer 116 (also referred to as a “payout control microcomputer”) that controls the payout of gaming balls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The payout control microcomputer 116 includes a ROM storing a program for controlling the payout of game balls, a RAM used as a work memory, and a CPU executing the program stored in the ROM. The payout control microcomputer 116 controls the payout motor 121 of the payout device 120 based on a signal from the game control microcomputer 81 and a signal from the card unit 135 connected to the pachinko gaming machine 1 via the input / output circuit 117. It drives to pay out prize balls or pays out rental balls. The payout game balls are detected by the payout sensors 122 and 123 for counting. When the player operates the handle 60 (see FIG. 1) of the firing device 112, the touch switch 114 detects the contact of the player with the firing handle 60, and the firing volume 115 of the firing handle 60 Detect the amount of rotation. Then, the driving of the firing motor 113 is controlled so that the game ball is fired with an intensity corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the firing volume 115.

  Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 is a unidirectional (one-way) communication connection that can only transmit signals from the main control board 80 to the sub-control board 90. That is, an unillustrated unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) as a communication direction regulating unit is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90. As shown in FIG. 5, on the sub-control board 90, an effect control one-chip microcomputer 91 (“effect control microcomputer”) for controlling the effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted. The effect control microcomputer 91 includes a ROM storing a program for controlling a game effect as the game progresses, a RAM used as a work memory, and a CPU executing a program stored in the ROM. I have. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits and receives data to and from another substrate or the like via the input / output circuit 95. The input / output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91. Further, the ROM may be provided externally.

  An image control board 100, a sound control board 106, and a lamp control board 107 are connected to the sub control board 90. The effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 sends a command to the CPU (VDP) of the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 (“image control microcomputer”) of the image control board 100 based on the command received from the main control board 80. , Image display device 7 (first image display device), second image display device 71, third image display device 72, effect display device 102, third effect hold display device 103a, and fourth effect hold display device 103b Perform control. The RAM of the image control board 100 is a memory for developing image data. In the ROM of the image control board 100, still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers, and symbols (including effect designs, reserve designs, and the like), Image data such as a background image is stored. The CPU (VDP) of the image control board 100 reads out image data from the ROM based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91. Then, display control is executed based on the read image data.

  The effect indicator 102 is composed of two LEDs, one of which performs a variable display and a stop display in accordance with the variable display and the stop display of the first special symbol, and the other LED performs a variable display of the second special symbol. A display mode in which a fluctuation display and a stop display are performed in accordance with the stop display and the corresponding special LED is turned on or off or the color indicates the display result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (the result of the special symbol hit / fail determination). To stop display. Similarly, the third effect hold display 103a and the fourth effect hold display 103b are also each composed of two LEDs. Then, by turning on / off the two LEDs or by combining the colors, the third effect holding display 103a is displayed on the number of holdings displayed in the first effect holding display area 9c and the first special figure holding display 43a. The display is controlled in a display mode that indicates the same number of held items as the number of held items. Further, the fourth effect hold display 103b is controlled to be displayed in a display mode showing the same number of holds as the number of holds displayed in the second effect hold display area 9d and the number of holds displayed in the second special figure hold display 43b. You.

  The character design is displayed on a part or substantially the entirety of the display screen 7a (production design display unit), or the movable decorative member 14 is operated in front of the display screen 7a (production design display unit) to display the display screen 7a (production design display). By covering a part or substantially the entire part, the effect design 8, the first effect suspension display unit 9c, or the second effect suspension display unit 9d may become invisible. is there. Even in such a covered state, the effect display 102, the third effect hold display 103a, In addition, a fourth effect hold display 103b is provided. In addition, the display mode of the effect display 102, the third effect suspension display 103a, and the fourth effect suspension display 103b is such that the visual recognition is not hindered by the operation of the movable decorative member 14 and the like, and is always visible. Has become. Further, a VDP (Video Display Processor) may be provided instead of or in addition to the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 of the image control board 100.

  The effect control microcomputer 91 outputs sound, music, sound effects, and the like from the speaker 67 via the sound control board 106 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The sound data such as the sound output from the speaker 67 is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. Note that a CPU may be mounted on the audio control board 106, and in that case, the CPU may execute the audio control. Further, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the audio control board 106, and the ROM may store sound data. Further, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU of the image control board 100 may execute voice control. Further, in this case, the sound data may be stored in the ROM of the image control board 100. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 is based on a command received from the main control board 80, and is configured to emit light pattern data (light / light off, light color, etc., for determining the light emission mode of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5). , Lamp data) is determined from the data stored in the ROM, and lighting control of the lamps (LEDs) such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 is performed via the lamp control board 107.

  Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 operates the movable decorative member 14 connected to the lamp control board 107 via the relay board 108 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Although only a part of the movable decorative member 14 is visible in FIG. 1, it is a movable so-called gimmick (movable member) provided in the center decorative body 10. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines operation pattern data (also referred to as “drive data”) for operating the movable decorative member 14 in a predetermined operation mode from data stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90, and determines the operation pattern data. The operation of the movable decorative member 14 is controlled based on the operation pattern data thus obtained. Note that a CPU may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and in that case, the CPU may control the lighting of the lamp and the operation of the movable decorative member 14. Further, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and data on the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

  The sub-control board 90 includes a first effect button detection switch 63c for detecting that the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b (see FIG. 1) has been operated (pressed, rotated, pulled, etc.) and a second effect button 63b. The two effect button detection switch 63d is connected. Therefore, when the player performs a predetermined input operation on the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b, a signal is output from the corresponding effect button detection switch to the sub-control board 90.

  Next, control related to special symbol hit / fail judgment in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described. As a result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment, there are “big hits”, “small hits”, and “missing”. At the time of "big hit", "big hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display section 41. In the case of "small hit", the "small hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display section 41. In the case of “missing”, the “missing symbol” is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display section 41. If it is determined to be a big hit or a small hit, a “special game” in which the first big winning opening 30 or the second big winning opening 35 is opened in an opening pattern according to the type of the special symbol stopped and displayed is executed. . A special game executed as a big hit is called "big hit game", and a special game executed as a small hit is called "small hit game".

  There are a plurality of types of hits, and a hit type corresponding to the result (specific result) is executed according to the result (specified result) of the special symbol hit / fail determination. That is, different hit types (big hits) depend on whether the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is the first specified result, the second specified result, the third specified result, or another specified result. , Including small hits). In addition, the special game to be executed may be different depending on the hit type, and the game profit amount that can be obtained by the special game is different, and the game state after the end of the special game is different. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, the types of hits are “4R (round) first big hit”, “4R second big hit”, “15R third big hit”, “4R fourth big hit”, “2R No. There are "5 big hits", "2R sixth big hits", "2R seventh big hits", and "2R eighth big hits". In the “15R third big hit”, the number of times (number of rounds) of opening of the special winning opening (first large winning opening 30) is 15 times. The “4R first big hit”, “4R second big hit”, and “4R fourth big hit” have the number of open times (number of rounds) of the special winning opening (first large winning opening 30) of four. The “2R fifth big hit”, “2R sixth big hit”, “2R seventh big hit”, and “2R eighth big hit” have the number of open times (number of rounds) of the big winning opening (the first big winning opening 30). Two times. In this way, in the big hit, the first big winning opening 30 is all opened, and the second big winning opening 35 is not opened. For this reason, the first special winning opening 30 is also referred to as a "big hit winning prize opening (variable winning opening for big hit)".

  In addition, “4R first big hit”, “15R third big hit”, “4R fourth big hit”, “2R fifth big hit”, and “2R sixth big hit” indicate the game state after the end of the big hit game. To the high probability state (activate the probability change function). Therefore, these five types of jackpots are also referred to as “probable jackpots (high probability jackpots)”. This high probability state (probable change function) continues until the next big hit occurs. The “4R second big hit”, “2R seventh big hit”, and “2R eighth big hit” shift the game state after the end of the big hit game to a low probability state described later (the probability changing function is not activated). . Therefore, these three types of jackpots are also referred to as "low probability jackpots (low probability jackpots, normal jackpots)".

  In addition, “4R first big hit”, “15R third big hit”, and “4R fourth big hit” are the “second special symbol time saving” in which the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to a short time after the end of the big hit game. Activate the function and do not activate the high base generation function. As a result, the game state after the end of the big hit game is a high-accuracy low base state (state C). This highly accurate low base state continues until the next big hit occurs. Further, the game characteristics in the high-accuracy low base state (state C) will be described in detail later, but by performing a right-handed game in the right game area 3B where various entrances are arranged as described above, the second special game is performed. This is a period in which a symbol hit is determined, a small hit is generated, and the number of game balls can be increased in a period (big hit) between the previous big hit and the next big hit. In addition, by frequently causing small hits in the high-probability and low-base state between the big hits, it is expected that a large number of game balls will be acquired in a short time due to the small hits. In other words, this is a period that is advantageous for the player, and is a period in which the interest in the game can be enhanced.

  In addition, "4R second big hit", "2R seventh big hit", and "2R eighth big hit" activate the "second special symbol time saving function" and "high base generating function" after the end of the big hit game. Thereby, the game state after the end of the big hit game is a low-probability high base state. In the case of "4R 2nd big hit" and "2R 8th big hit", the low-probability high base state ends when the next big hit occurs or when the special symbol change display is executed 100 times. . When the special symbol change display is completed based on 100 executions, the gaming state is set to the low-probability low-base state (normal state). In the case of “2R seventh big hit”, the low-probability high base state ends when the next big hit occurs or when the special symbol is displayed 50 times. When the special symbol change display is completed 50 times, the game state is set to the low-probability low-base state (normal state). In addition, as will be described in detail later, in the low-probability and high-base state, the right special game is performed in the right game area 3B where various entrances are arranged as described above, and the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is performed. This is a period in which a game is played in anticipation of the occurrence of a big hit.

  In the “2R fifth big hit” and “2R sixth big hit”, the “second special symbol time reduction function” and the “high base generation function” are activated after the end of the big hit game. As a result, the game state after the end of the big hit game is a high-accuracy high base state. In the case of “2R fifth big hit”, the “second special symbol time saving function” continues until the next big hit occurs, and the “high base generating function” determines whether the next big hit occurs or the special symbol changes The process ends when the display is executed 50 times. As described above, the “probable change function” is continued until the next big hit occurs. In other words, in the case of "2R 5th big hit", after the big hit game ends, until the variation display of the special symbol elapses 50 times, the state is set to the high-accuracy high base state. , The game state is set to the high-accuracy low-base state.

  In the high-accuracy high base state, similar to the low-precision high base state, by performing a right-handed game in the right game area 3B, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is performed, and the game is expected in the next big hit. As described above, the high-probability low-base state is a period that is advantageous for a player who can expect to obtain many game balls in a short time due to small hits by frequent small hits as described above. is there. It is assumed that more game balls can be obtained in the high-accuracy low-base state than in the high-accuracy high-base state. Therefore, when the big hit does not occur until the number of times the special symbol is fluctuated and displayed after the big hit game ends, the game state changes to a more advantageous game state (specific game state) than before.

  In addition, "2R sixth big hit" is, after the big hit game ends, until the fluctuation display of the special symbol elapses 100 times, it is in the high-accuracy high base state, and if the big hit does not occur even after 100 times, This is the same as “2R fifth big hit” except that the gaming state is set to the high-accuracy low-base state, that is, the period in which the gaming state changes is different. In addition, the timing when the gaming state changes from the high-accuracy high base state to the high-accuracy low base state is set earlier for “2R fifth big hit” than for “2R sixth big hit”. Therefore, it can be said that “2R fifth big hit” is a big hit that is more advantageous to the player than “2R sixth big hit”.

  In addition, the high-probability high base state after the big hit game (2R fifth big hit) related to “2R fifth big hit” and the low probability after the big hit game (2R seventh big hit game) related to “2R seventh big hit” are completed. By executing a common game effect (first game effect: background, game mode, character pattern, reach effect, and the like) in the certainty-based state, it is difficult for the player to recognize which game state. As shown in FIG. 9, these gaming states are set to state B, and a variation pattern is determined using a common variation pattern determination table. As a result, both game states are set to the non-report state in which the game state (high-precision high-base state or low-precision high-base state) is not reported (it is difficult to recognize).

  When the type of the big hit is “2R fifth big hit”, the game state becomes the high-accuracy low base state (an advantageous state advantageous to the player) after the special symbol change display has elapsed 50 times, and the “2R In the case of "seventh big hit", the game state becomes a low-probability low-base state (a normal state disadvantageous to the player) after the special symbol change display has elapsed 50 times, so that the player is not notified. In any state, regardless of the game state, the player is expected to make a transition to the high-accuracy low-base state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

  In addition, the high-probability high base state after the big hit game (2R sixth big hit) related to “2R sixth big hit” and the low probability after the big hit game (2R eighth big hit game) related to “2R eighth big hit” are completed. By executing a common game effect (second game effect: background, game mode, character pattern, reach effect, etc.) in the certainty base state, it is difficult for the player to recognize which game state. As shown in FIG. 9, these gaming states are set to state B, and a variation pattern is determined using a common variation pattern determination table. As a result, both game states are set to the non-report state in which the game state (high-precision high-base state or low-precision high-base state) is not reported (it is difficult to recognize).

  If the type of the big hit is “2R sixth big hit”, the gaming state becomes the high-accuracy low base state (an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player) after 100 times of the special symbol change display has elapsed, and “2R In the case of "8th big hit", the gaming state becomes the low-probability low-basis state (normal state disadvantageous to the player) after 100 times of the change display of the special symbol has elapsed. In any state, regardless of the game state, the player is expected to make a transition to the high-accuracy low-base state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

  In addition, the high-probability high base state after the big hit game (2R fifth big hit) related to “2R fifth big hit” and the low probability after the big hit game (2R seventh big hit game) related to “2R seventh big hit” are completed. The high-probability base state, the high-probability base state after the big hit game (2R sixth big hit game) related to “2R sixth big hit”, and the big hit game (2R eighth big hit game) related to “2R eighth big hit” By executing a common game effect (second game effect: background, game mode, character pattern, reach effect, etc.) in the low-probability high base state after the end, the player recognizes which game state it is in. Difficult. As shown in FIG. 9, these gaming states are set to state B, and a variation pattern is determined using a common variation pattern determination table. As a result, these game states are set to a non-notification state in which the game state (high-precision high-base state or low-precision high-base state) is not notified (it is difficult to recognize).

  When the type of the big hit is “2R fifth big hit”, the game state becomes the high-accuracy low base state (an advantageous state advantageous to the player) after the special symbol change display has elapsed 50 times, and the “2R In the case of "seventh big hit", the game state becomes the low-probability low-base state (normal state disadvantageous to the player) after the special symbol change display has elapsed 50 times. In addition, when the type of the big hit is “2R sixth big hit”, the gaming state becomes a high-accuracy low-base state (an advantageous state for the player) after 100 times of the change display of the special symbol, In the case of "2R 8th big hit", the gaming state becomes a low-accuracy low-base state (a normal state disadvantageous to the player) after 100 times of the special symbol change display has elapsed. For this reason, in the non-notification state, the player plays a game in the non-notification state, expecting to shift to the high-accuracy low-base state when the special symbol change display is performed 50 times. , Will increase the entertainment interest of the game.

  In addition, even if the game does not shift to the high-accuracy low-base state, the game is expected not to shift to the low-accuracy low-base state but to at least continue to the high-base state (that is, to continue the non-notification state). I do. If the non-notification state continues after the special symbol change display has passed 50 times, it is expected that a big hit will occur, and when the special symbol change display has passed 100 times, the state will shift to the high-accuracy low base state. Playing with the expectation that the game will be played will enhance the entertainment interest of the game. As described above, in the non-notification state, the points for increasing the player's sense of expectation are set a plurality of times, and it is possible to further enhance the game interest and maintain the high game interest for a long time.

  In addition, the number of small hits that can occur as a result of the second special symbol winning / falling determination is that the number of times the large winning opening (the second large winning opening 35) is opened is six times, and one (and one) compared to other large hits. (Total) opening time is also set short. Specifically, opening is performed for a total of 1.8 seconds by opening six times in 0.3 seconds. Therefore, as compared with the big hit game (for example, the 15R third big hit game, the 4R fourth big hit game, and the like), the number of the game balls that can be acquired by one small hit game is set. However, by generating the small hits a plurality of times (many times), it is possible to execute the small hit games a plurality of times and acquire more game balls. In the case of small hits, the second special winning opening 35 is opened, and the first special winning opening 30 is not opened. For this reason, the second special winning opening 35 is also referred to as a “small winning large winning opening (variable winning opening for small hits)”. In the case of a small hit (small hit game), unlike the big hit (big hit game), the number of times the large winning opening is opened is not called the number of rounds, but simply the number of times of opening. Also, based on the occurrence of a small hit, the probability change function does not operate, and if the game state at the time of the small hit occurrence is a high probability state, it is also set to a high probability state after the end of the small hit game, and when the small hit occurs Is a low-probability state, the low-probability state is maintained even after the small hitting game is over. Similarly, the time saving function and the high base generation function of the second special symbol are not activated based on the occurrence of the small hit.

  In addition, the distribution probability to each big hit in the determination of the success or failure of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is 65% for the 4R first big hit and 35% for the 4R second big hit. On the other hand, the big hit in the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is 50% for the 15R third big hit, 5% for the 4R fourth big hit, 5% for the 2R fifth big hit, and 5% for the 2R sixth big hit. 5%, 2R seventh big hit is 25%, and 2R eighth big hit is 10%. In other words, when the second special symbol time-saving function described later is activated, a hit is determined by a hit / fail determination based on a ball entering the second starting port 21 whose frequency of change is improved (a second special symbol hit / fail determination). It becomes a big hit (15R third big hit), and it becomes possible to acquire a large amount of game balls in a short time. As described above, in the present pachinko gaming machine 1, the game is played in the second starting port 21 rather than in the hit / fail determination (the first special symbol hit / fail determination) performed when the game ball enters the first starting port 20. It is set so that the big hit in the hit / fail judgment (the second special symbol hit / fail judgment) performed when the ball enters the ball is more likely to be advantageous (a large amount of game balls can be obtained) to the player. I have. Further, the player plays the game in expectation of the occurrence of the 15R third big hit and the occurrence of the high-accuracy low base state in which the number of game balls can be increased by the small hit.

  Here, in the present pachinko gaming machine 1, a big hit, a small hit, or a miss is determined based on a "special symbol hit / fail judgment random number (also referred to as" hit / fail judgment information ")". Is determined based on “big hit type determining random numbers (also referred to as“ symbol determining random numbers ”and“ symbol determining information ”)”. As shown in FIG. 7A, the special symbol hit / fail judgment random number takes a value in a range of 0 to 629. The big hit type determining random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 99. The random number (acquisition information) obtained based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 includes, in addition to the special symbol success / failure determining random number and the jackpot type determining random number, a “variation pattern”. Random number (also referred to as “variation pattern information”) ”. The variation pattern random number is a random number for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) including the variation time of the special symbol. The variation pattern random number takes a value in a range from 0 to 198. Further, the random numbers acquired based on the passage through the gate 28 include a random number for determining whether or not a symbol is correct as shown in FIG. The normal symbol hit / fail determination random number is a random number for determining whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the second starting port 21 (normal symbol hit / fail determination). Normally, the symbol random number takes a value in a range of 0 to 240.

  Next, a gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the functions of the probability variation function (probability variation function) for the special symbol and the ordinary symbol, the variation time reduction function for the special symbol and the ordinary symbol, and the opening extension function of the second starting port are activated or inactive. There are a plurality of game states depending on the combination of the states. The state in which the probability variation function is activated for the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is referred to as a “high probability state”, and the state in which the probability variation function is not activated is referred to as a “low probability state”. In the high probability state (big hit probability: 1/315), the probability of being determined as a big hit in the special symbol hit / fail determination is higher than in the low probability state (big hit probability: 1/63). In other words, in the low-probability state, the hit / fail judgment is performed by using the jackpot determination table for the low-probability state. The determination is made using the table (see FIG. 8A). That is, when the special symbol probability variation function is activated, the probability of the special symbol variation display being a big hit (stop symbol being a big hit symbol) is higher than when the special symbol is not activated. The means (main control unit) for setting the high probability or the low probability as the probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol hit determination is referred to as “probability setting means”.

  Further, a state in which the variation time reducing function is activated for the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is referred to as a “time reduction state”, and a state in which the function is not activated is referred to as a “non-time reduction state”. In the time saving state, the average value of the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the time of the confirmation display) is shorter than the average value of the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the non-time reduction state. That is, in the time-saving state, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern table determined so that the fluctuation pattern with the shorter fluctuation time is selected more than in the non-time-saving state (see FIG. 9). As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure reservation becomes faster, and an effective ball entry (a ball that can be stored as the special figure reservation) into the starting port is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit with a smooth progress of the game.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the length of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is particularly related to the advantage / disadvantage of the player, it is set as the “second special symbol time reduction function” as shown in FIG. I have. When the second special symbol time reduction function is not activated, that is, in the state A shown in FIG. 9, when the player performs a right-handed game and causes a game ball to enter the second starting port 21, the second special symbol The symbol correct / non-permissible determination is executed, and the second special symbol is variably displayed. However, since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the state A is set to a very long time (10 minutes, 3 minutes for big hits, 2 minutes for small hits), the game cannot proceed smoothly (such a state). Is also referred to as a “first condition state”). Therefore, it is difficult for the player to acquire a large number of game balls even if the player performs a right-handed game in the state A. Therefore, in the state A, the game proceeds with the left-hitting game aiming at the first starting port 20 in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is set to an appropriate length. On the other hand, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine that can simultaneously (in parallel) perform the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. In the state A, even if the second special symbol is erroneously displayed in a variable manner, the game ball is inserted into the first starting port 20 without waiting for the variation display of the second special symbol to end. , The first special symbol can be changed and displayed.

  When the second special symbol time reduction function is activated, that is, in the state B or the state C shown in FIG. 9 (such a state is also referred to as a “second condition state”), as shown in FIG. 2 Since the fluctuation time of the special symbol is short, the player plays the right-handed game without reducing the number of possessed balls as compared to the left-handed game (maintained or slightly decreased in state B, state C ), It is possible to smoothly execute the game (the second special symbol hit / fail judgment, the variable game of the second special symbol). In the present embodiment, the first special symbol time reduction function is also activated during the period in which the second special symbol time reduction function is activated, but the first special symbol time reduction function may not be activated.

  The probability variation function and the variation time reduction function (second special symbol time reduction function) for special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) operate simultaneously. Then, the probability variation function and the variation time reduction function for the ordinary symbol operate in synchronization with the high base generation function. That is, the probability variation function and the variation time reduction function of the ordinary symbol operate in the high base state (low-precision high-base state, high-precision high-base state) in the gaming state, and are operated in the low base state (low-precision low-base state, high-precision state). It does not work in the low base state). Therefore, in the high base state (state B), the hit probability in the normal symbol hit / fail determination is higher than in the low base state (also referred to as the “general figure high probability state”). That is, in the high base state (state B), the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) determined to be a hit is larger for the state B than in the normal symbol hit determination table used in the low base state (states A and C). A normal symbol hit / fail judgment (ordinary symbol judgment) is performed using the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 8C). That is, when the probability variation function of the ordinary symbol display 42 is activated, the probability of the result of the variation display of the ordinary symbol being a hit (a stopped symbol is an ordinary hit symbol) is higher than when it is not activated. .

  In the high base state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the low base state. In the first embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 3 seconds in the low base state, but is 1 second in the high base state (see FIG. 8E). Furthermore, in the high base state, the opening time of the second starting port 21 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the low base state. That is, the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 is activated. Specifically, when the result of the ordinary symbol hit / fail judgment is a hit in the low base state, the opening / closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 performs the opening operation of 0.9 seconds three times (opening time: 2.7 seconds) and opens. The second opening is in an open state during the operation. In addition, when the result of the normal symbol hit / fail judgment is a hit in the high base state, the opening / closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 performs the opening operation of 6.0 seconds once (opening time: 6.0 seconds). . Further, the closing time between the opening operations in the low base state is set to 0.1 second. In the present embodiment, the number of times of the opening operation of the opening / closing member 37 is made different between the time of the low base state and the time of the high base state. However, the number of times of the opening operation may be the same. For example, the opening operation in the low base state may be opened once for 2.7 seconds, and the opening operation in the high base state may be opened three times in 2.0 seconds. Further, the opening operation in the high base state may be performed six times in 1.0 second, which may be larger than the number of times of opening in the low base state. In such a case, the opening number increasing function of the variable prize device 22 is also activated.

  In the high base state, the probability fluctuation function, the fluctuation time shortening function, and the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 of the normal symbol are activated, so that these functions are not activated compared to the low base state. The period during which the second starting port 21 is open becomes longer (opening time per unit time becomes longer), and the frequency of game balls entering the second starting port 21 becomes higher (also referred to as a “high frequency state”). ). As a result, the execution frequency of the second special symbol hit / fail determination is increased. As described above, in the high base state, a big hit can be aimed at without greatly reducing the number of game balls in hand.

  If the opening time is the same, the smaller the number of times of opening, the lower the possibility that the game ball passes through the second starting port 21. In the present embodiment, the opening mode of the second starting port 21 in the high base state is set to open once every 6.0 seconds, and furthermore, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to an extremely short time (1 second). Since the second starting port 21 is in the closed state during the change of the ordinary symbol, the variation time of the ordinary symbol is such that the game ball starts flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the closed second starting port 21. The time is set such that the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 is opened before passing through the upper surface. When the movable member 23 is opened while the upper surface of the movable member 23 in the closed state is flowing, the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 enters the second starting port 21 in the opened state. Further, in order to prevent a game ball flowing down on the upper surface of the movable member 23 from passing through the upper surface of the movable member 23, a material constituting the upper surface (game ball passage) of the movable member 23 is replaced with a game on the front side thereof. The material has a higher coefficient of friction than the material constituting the ball passage (the material is different). Thereby, the speed at which the game ball flows down on the upper surface of the movable member 23 is set to a speed lower than the game rapid flow or the speed of the game ball passage on the front side thereof. In addition, as a mode of reducing the falling speed, the inclination angle may be reduced, or an obstruction member (a protrusion or the like) for reducing the falling speed may be provided. In this way, in the high base state, the game ball that has flowed down to the second starting port 21 does not enter the second starting port 21 (flows down the upper surface of the movable member 23), and the second big winning port. The possibility of flowing down to 35 is further reduced. That is, in the high base state, even if the small hit and the second large winning opening 35 are in the open state (ball entry possible state), the flowing game ball enters the second starting port 21 and enters the second starting port 21. It is difficult to enter the large winning opening 35.

  The high base state may not be where all of the above functions are activated. That is, the activation of at least one of the probability variation function, the variation time reduction function, and the opening time extension function of the variable prize device 22 for the ordinary symbol has a second starting port than when the function is not activated. It is only necessary that the ball 21 is easily opened (the frequency of ball entry is high). Further, the high base state may be controlled independently without accompanying the special symbol time reduction state. The function of generating such a high base state is called a “high base generation function”.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the determination of the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the determination of the first special symbol. There is a possibility that the second special symbol is variably displayed without being variably displayed. That is, even in the normal state (low-probability low-base state), there is a possibility that a right-handed game is attempted. However, as described above, in the normal state (low-probability low-base state), the fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) of the second special symbol is much longer than the fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) of the first special symbol. Therefore, even if the second special symbol is variably displayed in the normal state, the variance display cannot be performed many times, and the game efficiency is extremely poor. That is, it is more advantageous for the player to variably display the first special symbol by the left-handed game than to variably display the second special symbol by the right-handed game. Here, "the state in which the first special symbol is not being played (non-game state)" means that the first special symbol is not in the variable display (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of reserved first special symbols is "0". ". The “state in which the second special symbol is not being played (non-game state)” means that the second special symbol is not in the variable display (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of reserved second special symbols is “0”. It means that.

  In the high base state such as the high-accuracy high base state and the low-accuracy high base state, and in the high-accuracy low base state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shortened by the second special symbol time-saving function, and the right-handed game Game efficiency is improved. In such a case, performing the right-handed game and performing the second special symbol win / fail determination which is advantageous for the player can advantageously advance the game. Further, in the high base state, the second starting port 21 is more easily opened than in the low base state, and it is easier to enter the second starting port 21 than to enter the first starting port 20. Because it is. For this reason, a right hit is performed to allow the game ball to enter the second starting port 21 while allowing the game ball to pass through the gate 28, which is a trigger for determining whether or not the symbol is correct.

  In the high-accuracy low-base state, the frequency of ball entry into the second starting port 21 is the same as that in the low-accuracy low-base state (normal state). Since the variation time of the second special symbol to be changed is changed in a short time, a right-handed game is performed in which the second special symbol determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol determination can be executed. Further, in the high-accuracy low-base state, since the probability variation function, the variation time reduction function, and the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 for the normal symbol are not activated, the entry into the second starting port 21 is not performed. The ball frequency is low compared to the high base state. Therefore, the prize ball based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 cannot be obtained as much as the high base state. However, instead of this, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment determines that the small hits (small hit probability: 300/630) that occur with a high probability prevent the game balls from being reduced during the big hits, and rather cause the small hits to occur frequently. It is also possible to increase the number of holding balls by performing (generating multiple times).

  That is, in the high base state (low-probability high base state, high-probability high base state), the right-handed game allows the ball to frequently enter the second starting port 21 without greatly reducing the number of balls held. 2 Aim for the next big hit by the special symbol hit / fail judgment. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 is set to one. The sphere does not increase (is maintained). Further, in this embodiment, since about 90 to 95% of the right-hitting game balls are set so as to enter the second starting port 21, the high baseball is used as long as the ball does not enter another entry port. If the condition is continued for a long period of time, the ball will be slightly reduced.

  On the other hand, in the high-accuracy low-base state, a small hit is generated at a high frequency by the right-handed game by the second special symbol hit / fail judgment based on the ball entering the second starting port 21, and the possession of the ball in the small hit game is performed. At the same time as increasing the number, the second special symbol is judged to be the next big hit. In the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, in the high-accuracy low-base state, the longer the period during which the next big hit does not occur (the longer the high-accuracy low-base state lasts), the more small hits are generated. There are many opportunities (to execute a small hit game), which is advantageous to the player.

[Explanation of board configuration and game state]
As shown in FIG. 3, in the right game area 3B (second game area), various entrances are provided from the upstream side of the game area with a gate 28 (start gate 29), a first special winning opening 30, The two starting ports 21 and the second winning port 35 are arranged in this order in an optimal order. In addition, since the game ball flow-down passage in the right game area 3B is formed as shown in FIG. 3, when each of these winning ports is in the closed state, most (90%) of the game balls fired in the right game area 3B Above) passes through the gate 28 (start gate 29), then flows down the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 of the first special winning opening 30, then flows down the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21, and then flows down the second It flows down the upper surface of the opening / closing member 37 of the winning opening 35 and flows down to the out opening 34. If there is a winning opening in the middle of the flow, the ball enters the winning opening, is discharged from the winning opening to the back of the game board, and the entered game ball is located in the game area downstream therefrom. It has a configuration that does not work.

  By arranging the gate 28 at the uppermost stream, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the second starting port 21 or the like that is opened prevents a game ball from reaching the gate 28. In addition, it is possible to minimize the occurrence of waiting time (a state in which the ordinary symbols do not fluctuate) due to the ordinary symbol holding being “0”. That is, by arranging the gate 28 at the uppermost stream of the right game area, almost all right-hit game balls can pass through the gate 28 regardless of the presence or absence of opening of other winning ports. Further, since the game balls that have passed through the gate 28 flow down the right game area to the downstream side as they are, the presence of the gate 28 does not hinder the ball from entering another winning port.

  When a right-handed game is performed in the high base state (low-precision high-base state, high-precision high-base state), it is determined whether the game ball first passes through the gate 28 and the second starting port 21 is opened. Is done. In the high base state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time (1 second) and the probability of hitting the normal symbol is set to a high probability (239/240) which is almost a hit, so that the game ball is gated. Immediately after passing (after one second), the movable member 23 operates to open the second starting port 21. In other words, when a game ball passes through the gate 28 and a normal symbol hit / fail judgment is executed, and the normal symbol fluctuates and is displayed, the game ball passing through the gate reaches the second starting port 21 before reaching the entrance of the second starting port 21. 2 The starting port 21 is in an open state. In addition, since the opening time of the second starting port 21 is also opened once in 6.0 seconds, as long as the right-handed game is continued, the second starting port 21 is closed during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1 second. Then, the cycle of opening once for 6.0 seconds, closing during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1 second, and then opening once for 6.0 seconds is repeated (1 second closed → 6). 2.0 seconds open → 1 second closed → about 6.0 seconds open → ...).

  Therefore, when a right-handed game is performed in the high base state, the second starting port 21 is almost opened, and the game balls flowing down the right game area 3B are almost (about 80 to 90%) in the second starting port 21. I will enter the ball. When a game ball enters the second starting port 21, a second special symbol hit / fail judgment is executed. In the second special symbol success / failure determination, in the high-accuracy high base state, a big hit occurs with a probability of 1/63, a small hit occurs with a probability of 30/63, and a miss occurs with a probability of 32/63.

  First, when the result of the second special symbol right / wrong determination is off, most (approximately 80 to 90%) of the game balls flowing down the right game area 3B are in the open state after passing through the gate 28. And the other game balls flow downstream from the game ball passage branched before the second start port 21, without flowing down to the second start port 21. 26, or flows into the out port 34. Thereby, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is continuously executed. Since one prize ball is ejected by entering one ball into the second starting port 21, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is executed with almost no reduction in the number of balls held, and the next big hit is aimed at. It becomes possible. In addition, one prize ball is also discharged by entering one ball into the third starting port 26.

  Next, when the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination is a big hit, the first big winning port 30 on the upstream side of the second starting port 21 is opened in a mode according to the big hit type shown in FIG. . In addition, the second special winning opening 35 provided on the downstream side of the second starting opening 21 is not opened in the big hit game. Thereby, when the big hit game is started, the game ball flowing down by the right-handed game smoothly flows through the first big winning port without being interrupted by another winning port such as the second starting port 21. Enter 30. Here, when the second starting port 21 is arranged upstream of the first big winning port 30, the state shifts to the low base state during the big hit game. Because it is designed to be frequently opened, the game ball flowing down the right game area during the big hit game enters the second starting port 21 first and does not enter the second starting port 21. A situation occurs in which only game balls enter the second special winning opening 30.

  Moreover, since there is only one prize ball based on the ball entering the second starting port 21, the execution time of the big hit game is merely prolonged, and the player has no merit. Rather, the game becomes redundant, the game does not proceed smoothly, and there is a possibility that the interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, by arranging the first special winning opening 30 upstream of the second starting opening 21 as in the present embodiment, such a situation can be prevented, and the big hit game can smoothly proceed. Become. Since the first big winning opening 30 is not opened except during the big hit game, the first big winning opening 30 may prevent the ball from entering the second starting opening 21 except during the big hit game. Absent.

  Next, when the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination is a small hit, the second big winning port 35 on the downstream side of the second starting port 21 is opened in the opening / closing mode for the small hit shown in FIG. Become. Specifically, the opening operation of 0.3 seconds is performed six times (the closing time between the opening operations is 0.1 second). However, as described above, in the high base state, the second start port 21 is in the open state for most of the period. Therefore, of the game balls flowing down to the second starting port 21, about 99% (almost all) of the game balls enter the second starting port 21 disposed upstream of the second big winning opening 35. Therefore, in the high base state, a small hit occurs, and even if a small hit game in which the second large winning opening 35 is opened is executed, the downstream second winning opening is performed by the second starting port 21 on the upstream side. The ball entry into the mouth 35 is hindered, and it is difficult to enter the ball into the second special winning opening 35. Although the number is small (although it is unlikely), even in the high base state, when the second starting port 21 is in the closed state, the game balls that have passed through the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 are When the second large winning opening 35 is reached, the game ball can enter the second large winning opening 35 if the second large winning opening 35 is open.

  Next, the highly accurate low base state will be described. The high-accuracy low-base state is a low-base state, but it is advantageous for the player to advance the game by right-handing because the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is short. When a right-handed game is performed in the high-accuracy low-base state, a game ball first passes through the gate 28, and a determination is made as to whether or not the second starting port 21 is in an open state (normal symbol determination). In the low-base state (high-accuracy low-base state), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to be longer (3 seconds) than in the high-base state, and the probability per symbol is usually about half that of the high-base state ( 120/240), after the game ball passes through the gate, after a short time (after 3 seconds), if a hit occurs, the movable member 23 operates to open the second starting port 21. Becomes Since the probability of a hit is about 1/2, a hit and a miss occur approximately halfway.

  That is, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the normal symbol hit / fail judgment is executed, and the normal symbol fluctuates and is displayed, after the game ball passing through the gate passes through the entrance of the second starting port 21, The starting port 21 is in an open state. In addition, since the opening time of the second starting port 21 is also set to three times opening of 0.9 seconds (the closing time between the opening times is 0.1 second), the second starting port 21 is kept open as long as the right-handed game is continued. During the normal symbol fluctuation time of 3 seconds, it closes, when it hits, it is opened three times for 0.9 seconds thereafter, and when it comes off, the normal symbol fluctuation time of 3 seconds again. In the example in which the hit and the miss occur alternately, the second starting port 21 closes during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 3 seconds, then opens three times for 0.9 seconds, and performs the normal symbol for 3 seconds. It closes during the fluctuation time, it comes off, and it closes during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 3 seconds, and it repeats the cycle of (close 3 seconds → open about 2.7 seconds → close 3 seconds → close 3 seconds → close about 3 seconds 2.7 seconds open → 3 seconds closed → 3 seconds closed → approximately 2.7 seconds open → ...).

  Therefore, when a right-handed game is performed in the high-accuracy low-base state, a period during which the second start port 21 is in the open state is generated at about 30%, and a period during which the second start port 21 is closed is generated at about 70%. . Accordingly, the high-accuracy low-base state is different from the high-base state in which the period during which the second starting port 21 is open is about 90% and the period during which the second start port 21 is closed is about 10%. It is highly likely that the game ball flowing down to the entrance of the mouth 21 will pass through the upper surface of the movable member 23 and reach the entrance of the second special winning opening 35 without entering the second starting port 21. . The possibility that the result of the second special symbol pass / fail judgment is a small hit is the same regardless of whether it is in the high base state (low-precision high base state, high-precision high base state) or the high-precision low base state. Absent. That is, the small hit probability does not change regardless of the gaming state (small hit probability: 300/630). In addition, the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment performed in the left-handed game does not have a small hit, but has the small hit only in the result of the second special symbol hit / not-determined executed in the right-hit game. ing.

  As described above, in the high-accuracy low-base state, about 70% of the game balls flowing down the right game area (flowing down to the second starting port 21) enter the second starting port 21. Without flowing, it flows down to the second big winning opening 35 provided downstream of the second starting opening 21. Thereby, when the result of the second special symbol hit determination is a small hit, the second big winning opening 35 downstream of the second starting port 21 is opened in the opening / closing mode for the small hit shown in FIG. State. Specifically, the opening operation of 0.3 seconds is performed six times (the closing time between the opening operations is 0.1 second, and the total opening time is 1.8 seconds). The game ball that has passed through the gate 28 passes through the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 of the first special winning opening 30 and flows down to the second starting opening 21. If the ball starts in the second starting port 21 and the second starting port 21 is in the closed state, it passes through the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 and flows down to the second big winning port 35, and a small hit game As a result, the ball enters the second large winning opening 35 in the open state.

  The prize balls based on the ball entering the second large winning opening 35 are set to 10 prize balls for one entering ball, so that the ball is entered into the second large winning opening 35 during the small hit game. This makes it possible to increase the number of holding balls during the highly accurate low base state. In addition, the high-accuracy low-base state is continued until at least the next big hit occurs by the special symbol hit / fail determination (only the second special symbol hit / fail determination is performed as long as the right-handed game is continued). Is longer, the player can increase the number of balls held. In the present embodiment, an average of about 20 prize balls (two entering balls) can be obtained by one small hitting game. By generating this small hitting game a plurality of times (many times) until the next big hit occurs, it becomes possible to increase a large number of game balls (for example, 200 by 10 times). In addition, by this, as a total acquired ball of the “ren-so period” in which the right-handed game is continued, the acquired ball of the small hit game can be added in addition to the acquired ball of the big hit game, and a larger amount of the game ball can be acquired. This also makes it possible to enhance the entertainment interest of the game.

  Further, the gate 28, the first big winning port 30 for the big hit (only for the big hit), and the second big winning port 35 arranged downstream (the most downstream of these) from the second starting port 21 are for the small hit ( It is said to be a special winning jackpot for small hits. In addition, by arranging the second big winning opening 35 which is a big winning opening for small hits downstream of the second starting opening 21, the opening operation (opening / closing control) of the second starting opening 21 allows the second big winning opening 35 to be opened. The number (ratio) of game balls reaching the winning opening 35 can be controlled. Specifically, when the small hitting game is executed by the opening / closing control of the second starting port 21 (the time to be in the open state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol hit / fail judgment), the high base state ( The high-accuracy low-base state has a higher possibility of a game ball entering the second large winning opening 35 than the low-accuracy high-base state and the high-accuracy high-base state. Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, by forming a flow path that does not reach the second winning opening 35 unless it passes through the second starting port 21 (without entering the ball), (2) The effect of the opening / closing control of the starting port 21 is made more effective.

  In addition, even in the case of the same right-handed game, the game ball is inserted into the second starting port 21 and the held ball is almost maintained (including a slight increase or a slight decrease) (or the holding ball decrease speed is suppressed). A state where the player plays a game with the expectation that the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit (an advantageous big hit) (high base state). A state in which the player plays a ball in the second special winning opening 35 at the time of a hit and increases the number of balls in possession while expecting the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment to be a big hit (advantageous big hit) (high accuracy low Base state), and diversify the game. This also makes it possible to enhance the entertainment interest of the game. It should be noted that a highly accurate low base state in which the number of balls can be increased is more advantageous for the player than a high base state.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 6, when the gaming state after the big hit game is set to the high-accuracy high base state, the special symbol changes a predetermined number of times (50 or 100) in the high-accuracy high base state. If the jackpot has not been hit until the display is completed, the gaming state is changed to the high-accuracy low-basis state. In addition, when the gaming state after the end of the big hit game is set to the high base state, it is difficult to recognize whether the high base state is the low-precision high base state or the high-precision high base state in the effect symbol display unit or the like. A game effect in a simple display mode. Thereby, even if the gaming state after the end of the big hit game is not the high-accuracy low-base state but the high-basis state, after that, the state changes to the high-accuracy low-base state after a predetermined number of changes. It is possible to play games with expectation. In addition, this makes it possible to maintain the entertainment interest for a long time.

  In the present embodiment, the type of the big hit that shifts from the high-accuracy high base state to the high-accuracy low base state includes “2R fifth big hit” and “2R sixth big hit”. "2R fifth big hit" shifts from the high-accuracy high base state to the high-accuracy low base state after 50 special symbol fluctuation displays have elapsed, and "2R sixth big hit" has 100 special symbol fluctuation displays. After passing, the state shifts from the high-accuracy high-base state to the high-accuracy low-base state. Also, as the high-accuracy low base state, there are “2R seventh big hit” and “2R eighth big hit”. The "2R 7th big hit" shifts from the low-probability high-base state to the low-probability low-base state (normal state) after 50 special symbol fluctuation displays have elapsed, and the "2R 8th big hit" is 100 special specials. After the fluctuation display of the symbol has elapsed, the state shifts from the low-probability high-base state to the low-probability low-base state (normal state). In the present embodiment, the jackpot game and the high after the jackpot game according to the four jackpot types of “2R fifth jackpot”, “2R sixth jackpot”, “2R seventh jackpot”, and “2R eighth jackpot” By executing the common effect in the base state, it is difficult for the player to recognize which game state the player is in. That is, a non-notification state in which the game state is not notified is set.

  In the present embodiment, the number of times of occurrence of the “2R fifth big hit”, “2R sixth big hit”, “2R seventh big hit”, and “2R eighth big hit” in the non-notifying state is 50 times. If the high base state (non-notification state) continues even after elapse of, the transition to the high-accuracy low base state after 100 times has a higher possibility than when the high base state ends in 50 times Shall do. Thereby, the player expects to shift to the high-accuracy low-base state after the lapse of 50 times, and continues the high-base state without shifting to the high-accuracy low-base state after the lapse of 50 times ( Even if the non-notification state continues, it is possible to further increase the expectation for the high-accuracy low-base state. This makes it possible to maintain the entertainment interest for a long time.

  It should be noted that, instead of such a mode, even if the transition is made after the lapse of 50 times or when the transition is made after the lapse of 100 times, the possibility of transition to the high-accuracy low-base state is set to the same value. Alternatively, conversely, when shifting 50 times, the possibility of shifting to the high-accuracy low-base state may be higher than when shifting 100 times. As a result, when the high base state continues even after elapse of 50 times, the expectation for shifting to the high-accuracy low base state is reduced. Further, if another large hit type is provided, and the high base state continues even after the first predetermined number of special symbols have been changed and displayed, after the second predetermined number is greater than the first predetermined number ( The transition to the high-probability low-base state may be determined (if the jackpot is not hit by then). Conversely, if the high base state continues even after the first predetermined number of special symbols have been changed and displayed, the second predetermined number of times greater than the first predetermined number of times (if a big hit has been reached by that time). If not, it may be determined not to shift to the high-accuracy low-base state. Further, when a predetermined condition (such as a random number lottery) is established in the middle of the non-reporting state of the high base state, a character or a character whose game state is easily recognizable is displayed to the player (a fixed effect is executed), thereby playing the game. The state may be reported.

  In addition, in the high-accuracy low base state, when the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit and when the result is out, the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment in the high base state is as described above. This is the same as when a big hit occurs or when a big hit occurs.

  In addition, the start gate 29 is provided at the uppermost stream in the right game area 3B by being also used as the gate 28. In this way, in the case of the jackpot waiting state, the game ball is passed through the start gate 29 at an arbitrary timing without being prevented from passing through the start gate 29 by the second starting port 21 or the like, and the big hit game is started. It is possible to do. The start gate 29 and the gate 28 may be provided separately. In this case, the start gate 29 may be upstream or downstream of the gate 28, but the first big winning opening 30 and the second The opening 21 and the second winning opening 35 need to be provided upstream.

  Further, when a right-handed game is to be performed, the firing direction indicator 47 is controlled to be turned on in a predetermined manner, thereby notifying that the shot should be fired to the right game area. In addition, when the left hitting game is to be performed, the firing direction indicator 47 is controlled to be turned on (display controlled) in a predetermined manner, thereby notifying that the shot should be fired to the left game area. Specifically, the launch direction indicator 47 is configured by two LEDs “yz”, and indicates the launch direction by lighting the LEDs according to the game state. For example, in the low base state, it is possible to notify that the LED should be fired to the left game area as a display mode in which both LEDs are turned off, such as “y □ z □” (for example, □: turned off, Δ: turned on). it can. Further, in the high base state, it is possible to inform that the right game area should be fired as a display mode in which both LEDs are turned on, such as “y ■ z ■” (for example, □: turned off, Δ: turned on). it can.

  Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game state when the identification information (special symbol, effect symbol) is fluctuated is displayed as “low-accuracy low-base state”, “high-accuracy low-base state”, “ It is possible to control to either the low-accuracy high-base state or the high-accuracy high-base state. Of these, the low-accuracy low-base state is also called the "normal gaming state", and the high-accuracy low-base state is Also referred to as "specific gaming state."

[Main control main processing]
Next, the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 (control processing by the main control unit) will be described based on FIGS. Note that counters, flags, statuses, buffers, and the like that appear in the description of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the RAM of the main control board 80. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 reads out and executes the main control main processing program shown in FIG. 10 from the ROM of the main control board 80. . As shown in FIG. 10, in the main control main processing, first, an initial setting is performed (S101). In the initial setting, for example, setting of a stack, setting of a constant, setting of an interrupt time, setting of a CPU of the main control board 80, setting of SIO, PIO, CTC (controller for interrupt time), and setting of various flags, status and counters are performed. Perform reset, etc. The initial value of the flag is “0”, that is, “OFF”, the initial value of the status is “1”, and the initial value of the counter is “0”. The initialization (S101) is performed only once after the power is turned on, and is not performed thereafter. In the examples and drawings, the ordinary design is "Public", the special design is "Special design", the first special design is "Special design 1" or "First special design", and the second special design is "Special design". 2 "and" second special map ".

  Subsequent to the initial setting (S101), interrupts are prohibited (S102), and normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing (S103) is executed. In the ordinary symbol / special symbol main random number updating process (S103), an update is performed by adding 1 to the values of the various random number counters shown in FIG. When the value of each random number counter reaches the upper limit value, it returns to “0” and is added again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than “0” or may be changed randomly. The updated random number counter value is sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the main control board 80.

  When the normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating process (S103) ends, an interrupt is permitted (S104). While the interruption is permitted, the execution of the interruption processing (S105) is enabled. This interrupt processing (S105) is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the CPU of the main control board 80 at a period of, for example, 4 msec. After the interruption process (S105) is completed, before the next interruption process (S105) is started, the updating process of the various counter values by the regular symbol / special symbol main random number updating process (S103) is repeated. Be executed. When an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU in the interrupt disabled state, the interrupt processing (S105) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled (S104).

[Interrupt processing]
Next, the interrupt processing (S105) will be described with reference to FIG. In the interrupt processing (S105), first, output processing (S201) is executed. In the output process (S201), a command (control signal) set in an output buffer provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 in each process described below is output to the sub control board 90, the payout control board 110, and the like. I do. The command or the like output here includes information on the game state, the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment, the symbol as the big hit type, the fluctuation pattern, and the like. The command is composed of, for example, 2-byte information. The upper one byte is information on the type of command, and the lower one byte is information on the content of the command.

  In the input processing (S202) performed after the output processing (S201), various sensors (first starting port sensor 20a, second starting port sensor 21a, first winning opening sensor) mainly attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1 are used. 30a, the second special winning opening sensor 35a, the general entrance detecting sensor 27a, etc. (see FIG. 5) are read and stored in the output buffer of the RAM as prize ball information. Further, a detection signal from a lower plate full switch for detecting the fullness of the extra ball receiving tray 62 (also referred to as “lower plate”) is also taken in and stored in the output buffer of the RAM 84 as lower plate full data.

  Next, a normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating process (S203) is executed. The ordinary symbol / special symbol main random number updating process (S203) is the same process as the ordinary symbol / special symbol main random number updating process (S103) performed in the main control main process of FIG. That is, the update processing of the various random number counter values (including the normal symbol random number counter value) shown in FIG. (The period until the next interrupt processing (S105) is started). Thereby, the acquired values of various random numbers are given randomness.

  Following the normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating process (S203), a starting port sensor detection process (S204), a starting ball entry process (S205), a general symbol operation process (S206), and a special figure 1 operation process (S207) described later. ), The special figure 2 operation processing (S208), the reserved ball count processing (S209), and the power-off monitoring processing (S210). After that, various other processes (S211) are executed, and the interrupt process (S105) ends. Until an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU of the main control board 80 (main control unit) next, the processes of S102 to S104 of the main control main process are repeatedly executed (see FIG. 10), and the interrupt pulse is input. Then (after about 4 msec), the interrupt processing (S105) is executed again. In the output processing (S201) of the interrupt processing (S105) executed again, the command or the like set in the output buffer of the RAM in the previous interrupt processing (S105) is output.

[Start port sensor detection processing]
Next, the starting port sensor detection processing (S204) will be described with reference to FIG. In the starting port sensor detection process (S204), first, it is determined whether a game ball has passed through the gate 28, that is, whether a game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 28a (S301). If it is determined that the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (YES in S301), then, the number of ordinary symbol reserved balls (the number of ordinary symbol reserved, specifically, Value) is 4 or more (S302). On the other hand, if it is determined in S301 that the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (NO in S301), the process proceeds to S305.

  If it is determined in S302 that the number of ordinary symbol reserved balls is 4 or more (YES in S302), the process proceeds to S305. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of ordinary symbol retaining balls is not 4 or more (NO in S302), “1” is added to the stored ordinary symbol retaining ball number (S303), and the ordinary symbol random number acquisition process (S304) is performed. Then, the process proceeds to S305. In the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304), the value (label-TRND-H, FIG. 7 (B)) of the ordinary symbol random number counter stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM is acquired. Then, the acquired random number value (acquisition information, general figure acquisition information) is stored in an address space according to the current number of ordinary symbol retaining balls in the general figure retaining storage unit provided in the RAM of the main control board 80.

  In S305, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the first starting port 20, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the first starting port sensor 20a (S305). If it is determined in S305 that the game ball has not entered the first starting port 20 (NO in S305), the process proceeds to S309. On the other hand, if it is determined in S305 that a game ball has entered the first starting port 20 (YES in S305), the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (the number of first special figure reserved, specifically, the main control unit 80 It is determined whether or not the number of counters for counting the number of first special figure reservations provided in the RAM has reached four (the upper limit number) (S306). If it is determined in S306 that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls has reached four (YES in S306), the flow proceeds to S309. In S306, when it is determined that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is less than 4 (NO in S306), 1 is added to the stored number of special figure 1 reserved balls (S307), and a special figure 1 related random number is obtained. The process is performed (S308), and the process proceeds to S309.

  In the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the special symbol success / failure determination random number counter (label-TRND-A) stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM, the big hit type determination random number The value of the counter (label-TRND-AS) and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-T1) are acquired (the value of the random number shown in FIG. 7A), and the acquired random number values (acquisition information, The figure acquisition information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of reserved special figure 1 reserved balls in the first special figure reserved storage unit 85a.

  In S309, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the second starting port 21, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the second starting port sensor 21a (S309). If it is determined in S309 that the game ball has not entered the second starting port 21 (NO in S309), the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in S309 that a game ball has entered the second starting port 21 (YES in S309), then the number of special figure 2 reserved balls (the number of second special figure reserved, specifically the main control It is determined whether or not the number of counters for counting the number of second special map reservations provided in the RAM of the unit 80 has reached four (upper limit) (S310). Then, when it is determined in S310 that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls has reached four (YES in S310), the processing is terminated. If it is determined in S310 that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is less than 4 (NO in S310), “1” is added to the stored number of special figure 2 reserved balls (S311), and the special figure 2 relationship is established. A random number acquisition process is performed (S312), and the process ends.

  In the special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing (S312), similarly to the special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing (S308), the value of the special symbol hit / fail judgment counter stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM. (Label-TRND-A), the value of the jackpot type determination random number counter (Label-TRND-AS), and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (Label-TRND-T1) are acquired (FIG. 7A). The random number value) and the obtained random number value are stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of special figure 2 reserved balls in the second special figure reserved storage unit 85b.

[Starting ball handling process]
Next, the starting ball entry process (S205) will be described with reference to FIG. The game control microcomputer 81 performs a starting ball entry process (S205) following the starting port sensor detection process (S204). As shown in FIG. 13, in the start ball entry process (S205), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 reserved ball count has increased by "1" (S315). Then, when it is determined that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls has increased by “1” (YES in S315), the process proceeds to S316. This corresponds to the case where “1” is added to the number of reserved special figure 2 balls in S307 in the starting opening sensor detection processing (S204) based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second starting opening. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls has not increased (NO in S315), the process proceeds to S319.

  In S316, the latest acquired random number value (acquisition information) acquired in the special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing (S308) in the immediately preceding starting port sensor detection processing (S204) and stored in the second special figure holding storage unit is read (S316). S316). Next, the obtained random number value related to the read second special symbol is determined (S317). In S317, the value of the special symbol hit / fail judgment random number counter (special symbol hit / fail judgment random number value) of the read acquired random numbers is a big hit according to the current gaming state (low probability state or high probability state). It is determined whether or not it is out of place (prior determination). If the result of the determination is a big hit, the type of the big hit is further determined (prior judgment). The determination (advance determination) in S317 is a preliminary determination (a so-called “holding pre-reading”) in which a hit / fail determination for the special figure 2 hold (a determination of a big hit) is performed prior to a hit / fail determination in a later-described special figure 2 hit / fail determination processing. )).

  It should be noted that the pre-judgment as to whether or not a big hit is made in a big hit determination table (see FIG. 8A), that is, in a high probability state, a big hit determination table for a high probability state, or in a normal state (low probability state). For example, it is possible to determine whether or not it matches the big hit determination value based on the big hit determination table for the normal state. Further, as another pre-determination mode, a variation pattern information determination table for a normal state (for a low probability state) and a variation pattern information determination table for a high probability state (for a high probability state) can be used to determine variation pattern information. And a fluctuation pattern information determination table. In the preliminary determination, predetermined variation pattern information is selected based on the obtained random number value (such as the value of a special symbol success / failure determination random number counter) and a variation pattern information determination table corresponding to a game state. It is possible to Then, based on the selected variation pattern information, it is possible to identify whether or not a big hit, a big hit type, a game effect with a high hit reliability is executed, and the like.

  Next, in S318, game information (advance determination information) related to the result of the determination in S317, specifically, information (big hit information) indicating whether the random number value for special symbol hit determination matches the big hit determination value, Information (big hit type information) indicating the value of the big hit type determining random number counter (big hit type determining random value), and information (small hitting information) indicating whether the random number value for special symbol hit determination matches the small hit determining value. ), Command data including information indicating the value of the variation pattern random number counter (variation pattern random number value) and the like are generated as a special figure 2 starting ball entry command, and the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S318). It should be noted that a part or all of the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number read in S316 may be directly transmitted to the sub-control board as the special figure 2 start entering command, or the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number may be transmitted. May not be transmitted as it is, but may transmit game information (for example, the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern information or the like) acquired based on the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number.

  Also, by analyzing the special figure 2 starting ball entry command transmitted from the main control unit 80 by the sub-control unit 90, it is determined whether the information is related to the big hit, the big hit type, and the small hit information. The sub-control unit 90 can identify whether or not there is, for example. In addition, in this embodiment, in addition to this, by analyzing the special figure 2 start entering ball command, whether the obtained special figure 2 acquisition random number becomes a big hit when determined in the high probability state, It is possible to specify whether or not a big hit will occur if the judgment is made in the probability state. Accordingly, the sub-control unit 90 stores the received special figure 2 start ball entry command as a hold (effect hold information), pre-determines the effect hold information at a specific timing, and determines whether or not it is successful in a low probability state. It is possible to determine whether or not the effect hold information determined to be a big hit is stored.

  From the viewpoint of fraud prevention, the special symbol success / failure determination random number value among the acquired random number values read in S316 is not transmitted to the sub-control unit as it is, and the value of the other big hit type determination random number counter (big hit value) is not transmitted. Command data including information indicating the type determination random number value), information indicating the value of the variation pattern random number counter (variation pattern random number value), and information indicating the result of the preliminary determination is generated as a special figure 2 start ball entry command. Can be set.

  Next, in S319, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved special figure 1 spheres has increased by "1", similarly to the processing relating to the special figure 2 described above (S319). Then, when it is determined that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls has increased by “1” (YES in S319), the process proceeds to S321. This corresponds to a case where “1” is added to the number of reserved special figure 1 balls in S311 in the starting opening sensor detection processing (S204) based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first starting opening. On the other hand, if it is determined in S319 that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls has not increased (NO in S319), the process ends. The processing of S321 to S323 is the same as the processing of S316 to S318 described above for the special figure 1. That is, the latest acquired random number value (acquisition information) acquired in the special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing (S312) in the starting port sensor detection processing (S204) and stored in the first special figure holding storage unit is read (S321). Preliminary determination is performed on the read acquired random number value (S322). Then, command data including the game information according to the preliminary determination is generated as a special figure 1 start ball entry command, and the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S323). Note that the preliminary determination (read ahead) of S322 is performed prior to the hit / fail judgment in the special figure 1 hit / fail judgment processing described later.

[Public figure operation processing]
The game control microcomputer 81 performs a general-purpose operation process (S206) shown in FIG. 14 subsequent to the start ball entry process (S205). In the general-purpose operation process (S206), the process relating to the normal symbol display 42 and the variable winning device 22 is divided into four stages, and “normal-purpose operation status 1, 2, 3, 4” is assigned to each of these stages. . If the “general symbol operation status” is “1” (YES in S401), a normal symbol standby process (S402) is performed, and if the “general symbol operation status” is “2” (S401). , NO in S403), the normal symbol change processing (S404) is performed, and when the "general symbol operation status" is "3" (NO in both S401 and S403, YES in S405), the normal symbol is determined. The process (S406) is performed, and when the “normal drawing operation status” is “4” (all of S401, S403, and S405 are NO), the normal electric accessory processing (S407) is performed. The normal operation status is "1" in the initial setting.

[Normal symbol standby processing]
Next, the normal symbol standby process (S402) will be described with reference to FIG. In the ordinary symbol standby process (S402), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of the ordinary symbol is "0" (S501). Finish. On the other hand, if it is determined in S501 that it is not “0” (NO in S501), a normal symbol hit / fail determination process described later is performed (S502), and then a normal symbol variation pattern selection process is performed (S503). In the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selection process, if the gaming state is the high base state (state B), the normal symbol fluctuation time is 1 second with reference to the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selection table shown in FIG. Select a symbol variation pattern. On the other hand, if the gaming state is the low base state (states A and C), the normal symbol variation pattern in which the ordinary symbol variation time is 3 seconds is selected. After the normal symbol variation pattern selection process (S503), a later-described ordinary symbol random number shift process is performed (S504), and then an ordinary symbol variation start process is performed (S505), and the process ends. In the ordinary symbol variation start process (S505), the variation display of the ordinary symbol is started with the ordinary symbol variation pattern selected in S503, and the ordinary operation status is set to "2". In the normal symbol change start process, a normal symbol change start command is set to notify the sub-control board 90 of the start of the normal symbol change.

[Normal symbol hit / fail judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 16, a description will be given of the normal symbol hit / fail judgment processing (S502). In the normal symbol hit / fail judgment processing (S502), first, the value (label-TRND-H) of the normal symbol hit / non-judgment random number counter stored in the ordinary symbol hold storage unit is read (S601). Next, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON, that is, whether or not the gaming state is the high base state (low-precision high-base state or high-precision high-base state) (S602). If it is determined in S602 that the state B flag is ON, that is, it is determined that the state is the high base state (YES in S602), the table for state B (the hit determination) in the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not a hit has been made by the high-probability general-purpose approval / disapproval determination based on the value “0” to “238” (S604), and the process proceeds to S605. That is, it is determined whether or not the read value (label-TRND-H) of the read random number counter for determining whether the symbol is correct matches any of the hit determination values.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S602 that the state B flag is not ON, that is, it is determined that the state is the low base state (NO in S602), the state A (state C) in the ordinary symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not a hit has been made by a low-probability general-purpose pass / fail judgment based on the table for hitting (the hit judgment value is “0” to “119”) (S603), and the process proceeds to S605. Then, in S605, it is determined whether or not the result of the general figure right / wrong determination (S603, S604) is a hit (normal figure hit) (S605), and when it is determined that it is out (NO in S605), a stop display is performed. A normal symbol (a symbol deviating from the ordinary symbol) is determined (S606), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in S605 that the hit is a hit (normal symbol hit) (YES in S605), a hit normal symbol (symbol hit symbol) to be stopped and displayed is determined (S607), and the hit flag is turned ON (S608). ), Finish the process.

[Regular pattern random number shift processing]
Next, the normal symbol random number shifting process (S504) will be described with reference to FIG. In the ordinary symbol random number shift process (S504), the number of ordinary symbol reserved balls is decremented by one (S701). Next, the storage location of each of the general-purpose reservations in the general-purpose reservation storage unit is shifted by one to the side read from the current position (S702). Then, the address space, which is the storage location of the highest-order pending storage in the general-purpose reserve storage unit, is emptied (“0”), that is, the RAM area corresponding to the fourth general-purpose reserve storage is cleared to 0 (S703). ), Finish the process. In this way, the general drawing reservation is digested in the reservation order.

[Processing during normal symbol fluctuation]
Next, the normal symbol change processing (S404) will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 18, in the normal symbol change processing (S404), first, it is determined whether or not the change time of the normal symbol has elapsed (S801), and if it is determined that the change time has not elapsed (NO in S801), the processing is performed. Finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the elapsed time has elapsed (YES in S801), a normal symbol variation stop command is set (S802), the ordinary symbol operation status is set to "3" (S803), and then the variation display of the ordinary symbol is performed. Other processing such as stopping at a display result (a hit normal symbol or a lost normal symbol) according to the determination result of the random number for determining a normal symbol hit / fail determination is performed (S804), and the process ends.

[Normal symbol confirmation processing]
Next, the normal symbol determination process (S406) will be described with reference to FIG. In the ordinary symbol determination process (S406), first, it is determined whether or not the ordinary symbol hit flag is ON (S901). If it is determined that the ordinary figure flag is not ON (NO in S901), the ordinary figure operation status is set to "1" (S905), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ordinary figure hit flag is ON (YES in S901), then, it is determined whether the state B flag is ON, that is, whether the state is the high base state (S902). If it is determined in S902 that the state B flag is ON (YES in S902), an opening pattern for state B (for a high base state) is set as an opening pattern for the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21). (S903), and proceeds to S904. The opening pattern for the state B (for the high base state) is an opening pattern in which the opening for 1.8 seconds is repeated three times as described above. Therefore, "3" is set to the second starting port opening counter for counting the number of times the second starting port 21 is opened.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the state B flag is not ON (NO in S902), the opening of the state A and the state C (for the low base state) is performed as an opening pattern of the variable winning device 22 (the second starting port 21). The pattern is set (S906), and the routine goes to S904. The release patterns for the state A and the state C (for the low base state) are release patterns in which release for 0.9 seconds is performed three times as described above. Therefore, "3" is set to the second starting port opening counter. In S904, the ordinary operation status is set to "4" (S904), and this processing ends.

[Normal electric accessory processing]
Next, the ordinary electric accessory processing (S407) will be described with reference to FIG. In the ordinary electric accessory processing (S407), first, it is determined whether or not the per-figure end flag is ON (S1001). The ordinary figure hit end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the second starting port 21 has ended in the auxiliary game executed as a hit. If it is determined that the ordinary flag end flag is not ON (NO in S1001), it is determined whether or not the second starting port 21 is being opened (S1002). If it is determined in S1002 that the second start port is not being opened (NO in S1002), then it is determined whether it is time to open the second start port 21 (S1003). If it is determined (NO in S1003), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1003 that it is time to open the second startup port (YES in S1003), control for opening the second startup port is executed (S1004), and the process ends. When it is determined in S1002 that the second starting port 21 is being opened (YES in S1002), it is determined whether or not it is time to close the second starting port 21 (that is, after the second starting port 21 is opened, It is determined whether or not a predetermined opening time has elapsed (S1005). If it is determined that it is not time to close the second startup port (NO in S1005), the process ends. If it is determined in S1005 that it is time to close the second startup port (YES in S1005), a process of closing the second startup port 21 (closed) is performed (S1006), and the value of the second startup port open counter is set. Is decremented by 1 (S1007), and the process proceeds to S1008.

  In S1008, it is determined whether or not the value of the second opening counter is “0” (S1008). If it is determined in S1008 that the value of the release counter is not “0” (NO in S1008), the process is directly terminated to open the second starting port 21 again. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1008 that the value of the release counter is “0” (YES in S1008), a general-purpose hit end process for ending the auxiliary game is performed (S1009), and a general-purpose hit end flag is set ( S1010), end the processing. Note that the second starting port opening counter becomes "0" when the opening of the second starting port 21 (opening operation of the movable member 23) is performed three times during the state B (high base state), and the state A Also, in the state C (low base state), when the opening of the second starting port 21 is performed three times, the state becomes “0”. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1001 that the end flag per ordinary drawing is ON (YES in S1001), the opening operation of the second starting port 21 set in S903 or S906 has been completed. Then, the general figure end flag is turned off (S1011), the general figure flag is turned off (S1012), the general figure operation status is set to "1" (S1013), and the process ends. As a result, in the next interruption process, the ordinary symbol standby process (S402) is executed again as the ordinary symbol operation process (FIG. 14).

[Special figure 1 operation processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special figure 1 operation process (S207) after the general map operation process (S206). This special figure 1 operation processing will be described with reference to FIGS. In the special figure 1 operation process (S207), as shown in FIG. 21, the process related to the special symbol display unit 41 and the special winning device (the first special winning device 31 and the second special winning device 36) is divided into five stages. “Special figure 1 operation status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5” is assigned to each of these stages. When the "special figure 1 operation status" is "1" (YES in S1101), a special symbol 1 standby process (S1102) is performed, and when the "special figure 1 operation status" is "2". (NO in S1101, YES in S1103) performs special symbol 1 change processing (S1104), and when the "special figure 1 operation status" is "3" (NO in both S1101 and S1103, YES in S1105) ), The special symbol 1 decision processing (S1106) is performed, and when the "special figure 1 operation status" is "4" (NO in S1101, S1103, S1105, YES in S1107), the special electric as a big hit game If the “special figure 1 operation status” is “5” (all of S1101, S1103, S1105, and S1107 are NO), the process ends. Incidentally, the special figure 1 operation status is “1” in the initial setting. Also, since the small hit is not set as the result of the first special symbol hit determination, the special electric auditors character processing 2 is not executed in the special figure 1 operation process, but the small hit is set as the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination. May be. In this case, when the “special figure 1 operation status” is “5”, the special electric accessory processing 2 as the small hitting game is executed.

[Special pattern 1 standby processing]
Next, the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of the first starting port 20 (that is, the number of reserved special ball 1) is “0” (S1201). When it is determined in S1201 that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is “0”, that is, that there is no storage of the random number counter value acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 20 (YES in S1201), Then, it is determined whether or not the special map 2 is playing (S1207). Then, in S1207, when it is determined that the special map 2 is playing a game (YES in S1207), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1207 that the special map 2 is not playing (NO in S1207), it is in the process of setting the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as the standby screen (during execution of the customer waiting demonstration screen). It is determined whether or not it is (S1208), and if it is determined that it is on the standby screen (YES in S1208), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1208 that the standby screen is not being displayed (NO in S1208), a standby screen setting process for displaying the standby screen is executed (S1209), and the process ends.

  Also, in S1201, when it is determined that the special figure 1 pending ball count is not “0”, that is, there is one or more storage of the random number counter value obtained based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 (S1201) NO), a special figure 1 hit / fail determination process (S1203), a special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1204), a special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205), and a special figure 1 variation start process (S1206) are performed in this order. Here, "the special figure 2 (the second special symbol) is not playing" means that the special figure 2 is not in the variable display (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of the special figure 2 reserved balls is "0". Means that. Of course, this means that neither the big hit game nor the small hit game according to the special map 2 is executed.

[Special figure 1 hit / fail judgment processing]
Next, the special figure 1 success / failure determination process (S1203) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure 1 win / fail determination processing (S1203), first, the determination value is stored in the lowest area of the first special figure hold storage unit 85a of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first special figure hold first). The value (label-TRND-A) of the random number counter for special symbol hit determination (the oldest memory) which has been stored (the oldest memory) is read (S1601). Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 big hit variation flag is ON, that is, whether or not the second special symbol is performing the variation display related to the big hit (S1602). If it is determined in S1602 that the special figure 2 big hit variation flag is ON (YES in S1602), the process proceeds to S1607.

  That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, when one of the special symbols is performing the variable display relating to the big hit, the other special symbol is not determined to be a big hit in the hit / fail determination, and the small hit or the small hit is determined. Any one of them is missed (that is, it is not determined to be a big hit). Since the first special symbol hit determination result does not have a small hit, if the second special symbol is performing the variable display related to the big hit, the result of the first special symbol hit determination executed during that time is: All come off. In S1602, when it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit change flag is not ON, that is, the second special symbol does not execute the change display related to the big hit (NO in S1602), then, it is determined whether or not the probability change flag is ON, It is determined whether the state is the high probability state (S1603). In S1603, when the probability change flag is not ON, that is, when it is determined that the state is the low probability state (NO in S1603), the big hit determination for the normal state (for the low probability state) in the big hit determination table (FIG. 8A). The determination is made based on the table (the jackpot determination values are “3” and “397”) (S1604). On the other hand, if it is determined that the probable change flag is ON (YES in S1603), a hit determination is made based on the jackpot determination table for the high probability state in the jackpot determination table (FIG. 8A) (S1605). In the jackpot determination table for the high probability state, the jackpot determination values are “3”, “53”, “113”, “173”, “227”, “281”, “337”, “397”, “449”. , "503".

  In S1606, it is determined whether or not the result of the big hit determination (S1604, S1605) is "big hit" (S1606). AS) is read out, the big hit type is determined based on the big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 8B (S1608), and the big hit symbol is determined based on the value of the big hit type determining random number (S1609). The big hit variation flag in FIG. 1 is turned on (S1610), and the process is terminated. In addition, in the case of the hit determination of the first special symbol, the jackpot type is determined using the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol, and in the case of the hit determination of the second special symbol, the hit determination is performed for the second special symbol. The big hit type is determined using the big hit type determination table. If it is determined that the first special symbol (special figure 1) is a big hit, one of 4R first big hit and 4R second big hit is executed. If it is determined that the second special symbol (special figure 2) is a big hit, a 15R third big hit, a 4R fourth big hit, a 2R fifth big hit, a 2R sixth big hit, a 2R seventh big hit, a 2R seventh big hit, 2R Either of the eighth jackpots is executed (FIG. 8B). On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the big hit determination (S1604, S1605) is not “big hit” (NO in S1606), the process proceeds to S1607. In S1607, a lost symbol is determined (S1607), and the process ends.

  Here, in the first embodiment, as the big hit change flag, a first big hit change flag indicating that the first special symbol is performing a change display related to the big hit (a change display in which the big hit symbol is stopped). And a second big hit change flag indicating that the second special symbol is performing a change display related to the big hit (a change display in which the big hit symbol is stopped). The flag corresponding to the big hit variation flag storage means provided in the RAM is set. In addition, as the small hit change flag, a second small hit change flag indicating that the second special symbol is performing a change display related to the small hit (a change display in which the small hit symbol is stopped) is executed. The flag corresponding to the small hit variation flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set. When the big hit change flag is set for one special symbol (that is, when the change related to the big hit is being displayed), in the other special symbol determination, the process of determining whether or not the big hit is a big hit is performed. Not performed. That is, control is not performed such that both special symbols execute the variable display related to the big hit in parallel. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which an extremely large amount of game profit is given to the player in an extremely short time, and it is possible to appropriately suppress gambling.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection processing]
In the special symbol 1 standby process (FIG. 22), a special symbol 1 variation pattern selection process is performed (S1204) after the special symbol 1 hit / fail determination process (S1203). As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, in the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1204), first, it is determined whether the game state is the state A (whether the game state is the low-probability low base state) (S1701). If it is determined in S1701 that the state is A (YES in S1701), it is then determined whether the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is ON (S1702), and that the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is ON. If it is determined (YES in S1702), the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) is referred to with reference to the state A big hit table (the part corresponding to the state A and the big hit in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). (S1703). If the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined. In the first embodiment, any one of the fluctuation patterns P1 to P3 having different fluctuation time lengths is selected by the state A big hit table.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is not ON (NO in S1702), it is then determined whether the number of reserved balls (reserved number) is 1 or 2 (S1705). If it is determined in S1705 that the number of reservations is either 1 or 2 (YES in S1705), the state A first deviation number departure table (the state A and deviation and departure number of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9) The variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the portions corresponding to 1 and 2. Also, in S1705, when it is determined that the number of holds is neither 1 nor 2, that is, the number of holds is either 3 or 4 (NO in S1705), the state A second out-of-number-of-hold table (FIG. 9, a variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) by referring to the variation pattern table shown in FIG.

  Thereby, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is “3” or “4”, the fluctuation time is shorter than when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is “1” or “2”. The possibility that the fluctuation pattern is selected is high. In the first embodiment, the fluctuation patterns P8 to P11 are selected. As a result, the function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of retained balls works, and the average fluctuation time is shortened.

  When it is determined in S1701 that the gaming state is not the state A (low-probability low-base state) (NO in S1701), then, whether the gaming state is the state B (low-probability high-base state, high-probability high-base state) Is determined (S1708). In S1708, when it is determined that the state is state B (S1708), then, it is determined whether the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is ON (S1709), and it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is ON ( YES in S1709), with reference to the state B jackpot table (the part corresponding to state B and the jackpot in the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9), the variation is performed based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1). A pattern is selected (S1710). If it is determined in S1709 that the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is OFF (NO in S1709), the state B deviation table (the part corresponding to the state B and deviation in the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9) is referred to. Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1711).

  Also, in S1708, when it is determined that the gaming state is not the state B (low-precision high-base state, high-precision high-base state), that is, the gaming state is the state C (high-accuracy low-base state) (NO in S1708). Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is ON (S1712), and if it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is ON (YES in S1712), the state C big hit table (FIG. 9) A variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the variation pattern table shown in the state C and the portion corresponding to the big hit (S1710). If it is determined in S1712 that the special figure 1 big hit change flag is OFF (NO in S1712), the state C departure table (the part corresponding to state C and departure in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9) is referred to. Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1714).

  Note that, in the state B and the state C, since the game is a game in which the right-handed game is performed mainly with the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, if the game is performed according to the game instruction (right-handed or left-handed), the first game is performed. Variation display of special symbols is rarely executed. Therefore, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the state B and the state C is simple (the number of types is small and the fluctuation time is also short). In the state B, in the case of a big hit, the variation pattern is P15, and in the case of a miss, the variation pattern is P16. Further, in the state C, the case of the big hit is set to the change pattern P23, and the case of the big hit is set to the change pattern P24.

  After the selection of the variation pattern as described above, the other processing shown in FIG. 24 is executed (S1704), and the processing ends. In the other processing (S1704), a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set variation pattern designation command is included in a variation start command described later, and sent to the sub-control board 90 by output processing (S201).

[Special figure 1 random number shift processing]
Next, the special figure 1 random number shift processing (S1205) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205), first, the special figure 1 reserved ball count is decremented by 1 (S1801). Next, the storage location of the various counter values in the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a is set to one lower position (for example, when the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a is composed of an address space corresponding to the addresses “0000” to “0003”). , Address “0000” side) (S1802). Then, "0" is set in the highest address space of the first special figure holding storage unit 85a, that is, (when the upper limit number is stored), the RAM corresponding to the fourth special figure holding fourth The area is cleared to 0 (S1803), and this processing ends. After executing the special figure 1 random number shift processing (S1205), the special figure 1 change start processing (S1206) of FIG. 22 is executed. In the special figure 1 change start process (S1206), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "2", the change start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the change display of the first special symbol is started.

[Processing during special symbol 1 fluctuation]
Next, the special symbol 1 changing process (S1104) will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 27, in the special symbol 1 change processing (S1104), first, the change time of the special figure 1 (the change time determined according to the change pattern selected in S1204 of FIG. 22, see FIG. 9) has elapsed. It is determined whether or not (S1901). If it is determined in S1901 that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 has not elapsed (NO in S1901), the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing is performed (S1914), and the processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1901 that the fluctuation time of the special map 1 has elapsed (YES in S1901), the flow shifts to S1903. In S1903, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command is set (S1903), and the flow shifts to the process of S1904.

  Next, in S1904, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON (S1905). If it is determined in S1904 that the state B flag is ON (YES in S1904), the value of the state B counter (state B fluctuation counter) that counts the number of times the special symbol has been changed during state B (high base state) Is subtracted by 1 (S1905), and it is determined whether the value of the state B counter is "0" (S1906). If it is determined in S1906 that the value of the state B counter is "0" (YES in S1906), the state B flag is turned off (S1907), and the process proceeds to S1908. By turning off the state B flag, the gaming state shifts from the high base state to the low base state. Specifically, if the state is the low-accuracy high-base state, the state transitions to the low-accuracy low-base state (normal state), and if the state is the high-accuracy high-base state, the state transitions to the high-accuracy low-base state (advantageous state).

  In S1908, the special figure 1 operation status is set to "3" (S1908), and the change display of the special symbol is stopped by the result according to the determination result of the special symbol success / failure determination random number and the big hit type determination random number. (S1909), and the process ends.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing]
As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the special figure 1 change interruption process (S1902) is executed when the big hit game or the small hit game according to the special figure 2 is executed during the change display of the special figure 1, This is a process of temporarily suspending the measurement of the fluctuation time of the special symbol 1 and restarting the suspended measurement when the big hit game or the small hit game ends. Thus, during the execution of the big hit game or the small hit game relating to one special symbol, the hit / fail determination processing and the variable display relating to the other special symbol are not executed.

  The special figure 1 change interruption processing (S1902) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure 1 change interruption processing (S1902), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 interruption flag is ON (S2901), and if it is determined that the special figure 1 interruption flag is not ON (NO in S2901), It is determined whether or not the big hit flag in FIG. 2 is ON, that is, whether or not the big hit game according to FIG. 2 is being executed (S2902). If it is determined in S2902 that the special figure 2 big hit flag is not ON (NO in S2902), then, it is determined whether the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON, that is, the small hit game according to the special figure 2 is being executed. It is determined whether or not (S2909). In S2909, when it is determined that the special figure 2 small hit flag is not ON, that is, neither the big hit game nor the small hit game according to the special figure 2 is executed (NO in S2909), the processing is ended. Then, the variable display of the special figure 1 is continued. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2902 that the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON (YES in S2902), and if it is determined in S2909 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON (YES in S2909), the special figure 1 The suspension flag is turned ON (S2903), the measurement of the special figure 1 fluctuation time is suspended (S2904), and the process is terminated. Thus, the variable display of the special figure 1 can be temporarily interrupted.

  Also, in S2901, if the special figure 1 interruption flag is ON, that is, if it is determined that the variable display of the first special symbol is already interrupted (YES in S2901), it is determined whether the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON. Is determined (S2905). If it is determined in S2905 that the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON (YES in S2905), it is determined that the big hit game according to the special figure 2 is still being executed, and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2905 that the special figure 2 big hit flag is not ON (NO in S2905), then it is determined whether the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON (S2906). When it is determined in S2906 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON (YES in S2906), it is determined that the small hit game according to the special figure 2 is still being executed, and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2906 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is not ON (NO in S2906), it is determined that the big hit game or the small hit game according to the special figure 2 has been completed, and the special figure 1 interruption flag is set to OFF. (S2907), the measurement of the special figure 1 fluctuation time is restarted (S2908), and the process is terminated. As a result, the suspended display of the first special symbol (measurement of the variation time) can be resumed.

  Here, in the first embodiment, as the interruption flag, a special figure 1 interruption flag (also referred to as a “first interruption flag”) indicating that the variable display of the first special symbol is being interrupted, and a second special symbol A special figure 2 interrupt flag (also referred to as a “second interrupt flag”) indicating that the variable display is interrupted, and a flag corresponding to the interrupt flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80. Is set (stored).

[Special symbol 1 confirmation process]
Next, the special symbol 1 determination process (S1106) will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 29, in the special symbol 1 determination processing (S1106), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is ON (S2001). When it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit change flag is ON (YES in S2001), the special figure 1 big hit change flag indicating that the big change display of the first special symbol is being displayed is turned off (S2002), and the first The special figure 1 big hit flag indicating the execution of the big hit game related to the special symbol is turned ON (S2003), and the processing shifts to S2004. In this way, in the special figure 1, it is possible to indicate that the change display relating to the big hit is ended (the big hit is fixed) and the game shifts to the big hit game.

  In S2004, the value of the round counter that counts the number of rounds executed during the big hit game (in the mode of opening once per round, one round is from opening to closing of the special winning opening) is set to “4”. (S2004) In order to start the big hit game, a big hit opening command is set (S2005), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "4" (S2006), and the process is terminated. In addition, a stop command is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 at the stop timing of the special symbol to be variably displayed. By receiving the stop command, the sub-control board 90 can grasp that the special symbol change display has ended. In addition, this will be in a jackpot waiting state. Also, if it is determined in S2001 that the special figure 1 big hit change flag is not ON (NO in S2001), neither the big hit game nor the small hit game is started, that is, the special figure 1 operation status Is set to "1" (S2007), and the process ends.

  Here, in the first embodiment, as the big hit flag, the special figure 1 big hit flag (“the first big hit”, which indicates that the result of the hit / fail determination regarding the first special symbol is a big hit and the big hit game related to the big hit is being executed. And a special figure 2 big hit flag (also called a "second big hit flag") indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment regarding the second special symbol is a big hit and the big hit game related to the big hit is being executed. When a big hit game is executed, a big hit flag corresponding to a big hit flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set (stored). Also, as a small hit flag, a special figure 2 small hit flag (also referred to as a "small hit flag"), which indicates that the result of the hit / fail determination of the second special symbol is a small hit and the small hit game related to the small hit is being executed. When a small hit game is executed, a small hit flag corresponding to a small hit flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set (stored).

  Here, the round display 45 is composed of three LEDs, a 2R lamp, a 4R lamp, and a 15R lamp, and the corresponding lamp is lit at the timing when the big hit symbol is determined and displayed. Specifically, when the 4R first big hit occurs, a display mode such as “2R △ 4R ▲ 15R △” (for example, ：: turned on, Δ: turned off) is used. Next, the special figure 2 operation processing (S211) will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 39. In the special figure 2 operation processing (S211), the special figure 1 operation processing (S211) shown in FIGS. Since the processing is performed in the same flow as in S206) and the like, the description will be simplified below.

[Special figure 2 operation processing]
As shown in FIG. 30, the special figure 2 operation processing (S208) performs processing in the same flow as the special figure 1 operation processing (S207) shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 2 operation processing (S208) following the special figure 1 operation processing (S207). In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be changed and displayed in parallel by the special figure 1 operation processing and the special figure 2 operation processing. That is, the first special figure reservation is consumed and the second special figure reservation is consumed (“variation display of the first special symbol and variation display of the second special symbol”, “first special symbol hit / fail judgment and second special symbol”). And ") can be executed in parallel. Further, in the first embodiment, the determination as to whether or not the ball is in the second starting opening (the second special symbol determination) is based on the determination as to whether or not the ball is in the first opening (the first special symbol determining). It is more likely to be a big hit (greater amount of profit that can be obtained) for the player than the determination) (FIG. 8B).

  As shown in FIG. 30, similarly to the special figure 1 operation processing (S207), the processing relating to the special symbol display unit 41 and the special winning device (the first special winning device 31 and the second special winning device 36) is performed in five stages. Each of these stages is assigned a “special figure 2 operation status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5”. When the “special figure 2 operation status” is “1” (YES in S1151), a special symbol 2 standby process (S1152) is performed, and when the “special figure 2 operation status” is “2”. (NO in S1151, YES in S1153), performs special symbol 2 fluctuation processing (S1154), and when the "special figure 2 operation status" is "3" (NO in both S1151 and S1153, YES in S1155) ), The special symbol 2 finalizing process (S1156) is performed, and when the "special symbol 2 operation status" is "4" (NO in S1151, S1153, and S1155, YES in S1157), the special electric as a big hit game If the “Special figure 2 operation status” is “5” (all of S1151, S1153, S1155, and S1157 are NO), special electric auditors processing as a small hit game is performed. Step 2 (S1109) is performed. The special figure 2 operation status is "1" in the initial setting. Since there is a small hit in the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment, the special figure 2 operation processing has a special electric auditors processing 2 (S1109) which is not included in the special figure 1 operation processing.

  Here, the special electric auditors process 1 (S1108) is a process common to the special figure 1 operation process (S206) and the special figure 2 operation process (S211), and the special electric auditors process 2 (S1109) Only the special figure 2 operation processing (S211) is performed. This means that the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment can execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in parallel. This is because the game cannot be executed in parallel with the jackpot game related to the special symbol (only one of them can be executed). In the present embodiment, the result of the first special symbol hit determination does not have a small hit. However, as another aspect, the result of the first special symbol hit determination may have a small hit. In this case, similarly to the big hit game, the small hit game related to the first special symbol and the small hit game related to the second special symbol cannot be executed in parallel (only one of them can be executed).

[Special symbol 2 standby processing]
The special symbol 2 standby processing (S1152) shown in FIG. 31 is performed in the same flow as the special symbol 1 standby processing (S1102) shown in FIG.

[Special figure 2 hit / fail judgment processing]
The special figure 2 hit / fail determination processing (S1253) shown in FIG. 32 is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 hit / fail determination processing (S1203) shown in FIG. However, since this processing is processing relating to the special symbol 2, in S1301, the lowermost area of the second special figure holding storage unit 85b of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first second special figure holding) is stored. The stored special symbol success / failure determination random number counter value (label-TRND-A) is read. Also, since the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment has a small hit, if it is determined that the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is not a big hit (S1304), then in S1305, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is made. It is determined whether the result of (1) is a small hit (S1305). If it is determined in S1305 that it is a small hit (YES in S1305), a small hit symbol is determined (S1306), the special figure 2 small hit change flag is turned on (S1307), and the process is terminated. Other processing is the same as the special figure 1 hit / fail determination processing (S1203).

[Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection processing]
As shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, in the special figure 2 variation pattern selection processing (S1254), the processing (S1401 to S1420) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 variation pattern selection processing (S1204) shown in FIGS. )I do. Therefore, a detailed description of this process is omitted. However, since this process is a process relating to the second special symbol, referring to the column corresponding to the second special symbol in the variation pattern table shown in FIG. To select the fluctuation pattern. In addition, since the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination includes a small hit, if it is determined that the small hit change flag is ON, a change pattern is selected from the small hit table according to the game state.

  Further, in the state B and the state C, the game is performed mainly by the fluctuation display of the second special symbol (the second special symbol hit / fail judgment). Therefore, in the state B and the state C, there are more types of variation patterns (variation times) than the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and a variation pattern of a relatively long time can be selected. On the other hand, in the state A, the game is played mainly on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (first special symbol hit / fail judgment). Therefore, in the state A, the variation pattern of the first special symbol has more types of variation patterns (variation times) than the variation pattern of the second special symbol, and the variation pattern of a relatively long time can be selected. Therefore, in the state A, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is simplified (the number of types is small and the time is short).

  In the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1254), after the variation pattern is selected, other processes (S1404) are performed, and this process is completed. In other processes (S1404), a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set variation pattern designation command is included in a variation start command described later, and sent to the sub-control board 90 by output processing (S201).

[Special figure 2 random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 35, in the special figure 2 random number shift processing (S1255), first, the special figure 2 reserved ball count is decremented by 1 (S1501). Next, the storage locations of the various counter values in the second special figure holding storage unit 85b are shifted down by one (S1502). Then, "0" is set in the highest address space of the second special figure hold storage unit 85b, that is, (if the upper limit number is stored), the RAM corresponding to the fourth special figure hold fourth The area is cleared to 0 (S1503), and this processing ends. After executing the special figure 2 random number shift processing (S1255), the special figure 2 change start processing (S1256) of FIG. 31 is executed. In the special figure 2 change start processing (S1256), the special figure 2 operation status is set to "2", and the special figure 2 change start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the change display of the second special symbol is started. I do.

[Processing during special symbol 2 fluctuation]
The special symbol 2 changing process (S1154) shown in FIG. 36 performs the process (S1951 to S1959) in the same flow as the special symbol 1 changing process (S1104) shown in FIG. Therefore, a detailed description of this process is omitted.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation interruption processing]
The special figure 2 fluctuation interruption processing (S1952) shown in FIG. 37 performs processing (S2951 to S2959) in the same flow as the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing (S1902) shown in FIG. Therefore, a detailed description of this process is omitted.

[Special symbol 2 confirmation process]
The special symbol 2 determination processing (S1156) shown in FIG. 38 performs processing (S2051 to S2067) in the same flow as the special symbol 1 determination processing (S1106) shown in FIG. Therefore, a detailed description of this process is omitted. However, since the special symbol 2 finalization process (S1156) is a process related to the special symbol 2, the special symbol 1 finalization process (S1106) includes a big hit type (round counter setting process) and a special symbol 2 small hit variation flag. The processing when it is determined to be ON is different, as shown in FIG.

[Special electric accessory processing 1 (big hit game)]
Next, the special electric accessory processing 1 (S1108) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special electric auditors process 1 (S1108), a big hit game start process described later is first executed (S2101), and the process proceeds to S2102. In S2102, it is determined whether or not the big hit start flag is ON (S2102), and if it is determined that the big hit start flag is not ON (NO in S2102), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2102 that the big hit start flag is ON (YES in S2102), then it is determined whether the big hit end flag is ON (S2105). Here, the big hit start flag is a flag that is turned on when a player fires a game ball into the right game area 3B at an arbitrary timing and passes the game ball to the start gate 29 in a big hit standby state. . After the special symbol is determined and stopped with the big hit symbol and turned into a big hit, by passing the game ball to the start gate, the big hit start flag is turned on, and the big hit game proceeds (round game starts). Here, when the game ball is not passed through the start gate 29 after the big hit, the gaming machine is maintained in the big hit standby state capable of executing the big hit. During this time, the player can leave the seat and take a break such as a toilet, a drink, a telephone, or the like. Then, after the break, the game ball is fired at an arbitrary timing of the player and the game ball is passed through the start gate 29, so that the big hit game can be advanced. The big hit end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the big winning device (the first big winning device 31) in the big hit game has all been completed (the big hit game has been finished).

  If it is determined in S2103 that the jackpot end flag is not ON (NO in S2103), then it is determined whether or not the special winning opening (first special winning opening 30) is being opened (S2104), and it is determined that the opening is not being performed. In this case (NO in S2104), it is time to open the special winning opening (first winning opening 30) (round start time), that is, whether it is time to pass the start gate 29 and start the first round. Alternatively, it is determined whether the time of the interval between rounds has elapsed and it is time to start the next round (next opening) (S2105). If it is determined in S2105 that it is not the round start time (NO in S2105), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2105 that it is the round start time (YES in S2105), a round start command is set (S2106), a special winning opening opening process is performed (S2107), and the process ends. Thereby, the first big winning opening 30 is opened according to the opening pattern (see FIG. 6) according to the type of the big hit.

  If it is determined in S2104 that the special winning opening (the first special winning opening 30) is being opened (YES in S2104), the number of entering the special winning opening in the round is the prescribed maximum entering number (this implementation). In the first example, it is determined whether or not the number has reached (10 pieces per round) (S2111). If it is determined that the prescribed number of winning balls (10) has not been reached (NO in S2111), then it is determined whether it is time to close the special winning opening (first special winning opening 30), that is, the special winning opening. It is determined whether or not a predetermined opening time (see FIG. 6) has elapsed since the opening of the server (S2112). If it is determined in S2112 that the opening time of the special winning opening has not elapsed (NO in S2112), the process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S2111 that the prescribed number of balls has been reached (10) (YES in S2111), or when the opening time of the special winning opening has elapsed (YES in S2112), That is, when it is determined that one of the two round end conditions is satisfied, a process of closing the special winning opening (the first special winning opening 30) is performed (S2113). Next, the value of the round counter is decremented by one (S2114), and it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter is “0” (S2115). If it is determined in S2115 that the value of the round counter is not “0” (NO in S2115), the process ends to start the next round.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S2115 that the value of the round counter is “0” (YES in S2115), a jackpot ending command is set as a jackpot ending process for ending the jackpot game (S2116), and the jackpot ending period Is started (S2117), the big hit end flag is turned on (S2118), and the process is ended. If it is determined in S2105 that the big hit end flag is ON (YES in S2103), since the last round has been completed, it is next determined whether or not the big hit ending period has elapsed (S2119). If it is determined in S2119 that the predetermined ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2119), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2119 that the ending period has elapsed (YES in S2119), the big hit end flag is turned off (S2120), a game state setting process described later is performed (S2121), and the big hit flag is turned off (S2122). Then, the big hit start flag is turned off (S2123), the special figure operation status setting processing 1 described later is performed (S2124), and the processing ends.

[Big hit game start processing]
Next, the big hit game start processing (S2101) will be described with reference to FIG. In the big hit game start processing (S2101), first, it is determined whether or not the big hit start flag is ON (S2151), and it is determined that the big hit start flag is not ON, that is, it has not passed through the start gate 29 in the big hit standby state. In this case (NO in S2151), it is then determined whether or not the probable variable flag is ON (S2152). If it is determined that the probable variable flag is ON (YES in S2152), the probable variable flag is turned OFF (S2102), and Move on to processing. In S2154, it is determined whether the state B flag is ON (S2103). If it is determined that the state B flag is ON (YES in 2154), the state B flag is turned OFF (S2104), and the process proceeds to S2156. . That is, during the execution of the big hit game, the probability change flag and the state B flag are turned off before the start of the big hit game (round game) in order to control the state to the low probability state and the low base state.

  If it is determined in S2152 that the probable change flag is not ON (NO in S2152), the process proceeds to S2154 without turning off the probable change flag. If it is determined in step S2154 that the state B flag is not ON (NO in step S2154), the process proceeds to step S2156 without turning off the state B flag. In S2156, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the start gate (S2156). If it is determined that the game ball has passed through the start gate (YES in S2156), the big hit game is started (to start the round game). The big hit start flag is turned on (S2157), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2156 that the vehicle has not passed the start gate (NO in S2156), the process ends. Thereby, the gaming machine is continued in the jackpot waiting state. If it is determined in S2151 that the big hit start flag is ON, that is, if it is determined that the big hit game has already been started (S2151), the process ends. Thereby, the player can start (progress) the big hit game at an arbitrary timing.

[Game state setting process]
Next, the game state setting process (S2121) will be described with reference to FIG. In the game state setting process (S2121), first, it is determined whether or not the big hit game ended this time is related to a probable big hit (S2201). In the present embodiment, as described above, five types of 4R first big hit, 15R third big hit, 4R fourth big hit, 2R fifth big hit, and 2R sixth big hit are set as the probable variable big hits. Is determined to correspond to any of these five types. Then, when it is determined that the game has ended this time is the probable big hit (YES in S2201), the probable change flag is turned on (S2202), and then it is determined whether the finished big hit game is the 2R fifth big hit (S2203). . If it is determined in S2203 that the big hit game that has been completed is the 2R fifth big hit (YES in S2203), the state B flag is turned on (S2204), and the state B counter is set to "50" (S2205). Finish. As a result, the high base state of up to 50 times is set after the big hit game ends, and the high-precision high base state is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S2203 that the finished big hit game is not the 2R fifth big hit (NO in S2203), then it is determined whether or not the finished big hit game is the 2R sixth big hit (S2209). In S2209, when it is determined that the big hit game that has ended is the 2R sixth big hit (YES in S2209), the state B flag is turned on (S2210), and the state B counter is set to "100" (S2211). Finish. Thereby, the high base state of up to 100 times is set after the big hit game ends, and the high-precision high base state is set. In S2209, when it is determined that the big hit game that has been completed is not the 2R sixth big hit, that is, any of the 4R first big hit, 15R third big hit, and 4R fourth big hit (NO in S2209), the state B flag is turned off. Then, the process ends. As a result, the game state after the end of the big hit game becomes the high-accuracy low base state.

  In S2201, when it is determined that the end is not a probability variable jackpot, that is, a low probability jackpot (low probability jackpot, normal jackpot) (NO in S2201), then, is the jackpot game ended 2R seventh jackpot? Is determined (S2206). In S2206, when it is determined that the big hit game ended is the 2R seventh big hit (YES in S2206), the state B flag is turned on (S2207), the state B counter is set to "100" (S2208), and the processing is performed. Finish. Thereby, the high base state of up to 100 times is set after the big hit game ends, and the low-precision high base state is set. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2206 that the big hit game that has ended is not the 2R seventh big hit, that is, the 4R second big hit or the 2R eighth big hit (NO in S2206), the state B flag is turned on (S2204), "50" is set to the B counter (S2205), and the process is terminated. Thereby, the high base state of up to 50 times is set after the big hit game ends, and the low-precision high base state is set.

[Special figure operation status setting processing 1]
Next, the special figure operation status setting processing 1 (S2122) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure operation status setting processing 1 (S2122), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 big hit flag is ON (S3001), and the special figure 1 big hit flag is ON, that is, the big hit game generated this time is a special symbol. If it is determined that the flag is related to No. 1 (YES in S3001), the special figure 1 big hit flag is turned off (S3002), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "1" (S3003), and the process is terminated. Thus, in the next interruption process, the special symbol 1 standby process is executed again as the special symbol 1 operation process. On the other hand, in S3001, when the special figure 1 big hit flag is not ON, that is, the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON, that is, when it is determined that the big hit game generated this time is related to the special symbol 2 (NO in S3001) ), The special figure 2 big hit flag is turned off (S3004), the special figure 2 operation status is set to "1" (S3005), and the process is terminated. Thereby, in the next interruption process, the special symbol 2 standby process is executed again as the special symbol 2 operation process.

[Special electric accessory processing 2 (small hit game)]
Next, the special electric accessory processing 2 (S1109) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special electric accessory processing 2 (S1109), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit end flag is ON (S2301). The small hit end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the big winning device (second big winning device 36) has all been completed in the small hit game. If it is determined that the small hit end flag is not ON (NO in S2301), it is determined whether or not the special winning opening (second special winning opening 35) is being opened (S2302). When it is determined in S2302 that the special winning opening is not being opened (NO in S2302), it is determined whether it is time to open the special winning opening (the second special winning opening 35), that is, the opening time for the small hit has elapsed. Then, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the first opening operation, or whether it is time to start the next opening operation after the interval time between a plurality of times of opening has elapsed (S2303). . Regarding the small hitting game, the small hitting game (opening operation) is started after a predetermined time has elapsed after the small hit symbol is determined and stopped, regardless of the passing of the start gate. In other words, the player can arbitrarily determine the start time of the big hit game by the start gate, but cannot arbitrarily determine the start time of the small hit game.

  If it is determined in S2303 that it is not time to open the special winning opening (NO in S2303), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2303 that it is time to open the special winning opening (YES in S2303), the opening processing of the second special winning opening 35 is performed according to the small hit opening pattern (see FIG. 6) (S2304). Finish. If it is determined in S2302 that the special winning opening (the second special winning opening 35) is being opened (YES in S2302), the number of balls entering the special winning opening during the six opening operations, that is, six times It is determined whether or not the number of all the game balls that have entered in the opening operation has reached the prescribed maximum number of entered balls (10 in the first embodiment) (S2306). When it is determined in S2306 that the number of entered balls has not reached the predetermined number (10) (NO in S2306), it is determined whether it is time to close the special winning opening, that is, a predetermined time after opening the special winning opening. It is determined whether the opening time (see FIG. 6) has elapsed (S2307). Then, in S2307, when it is determined that the opening time of the special winning opening has not elapsed (NO in S2307), the process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of balls entered into the special winning opening during the six opening operations has reached the prescribed number of balls (10) (YES in S2306), the special winning opening (second large winning) The mouth 35) is closed (S2314), and the flow proceeds to the small hit end processing of S2311. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2307 that the opening time of the special winning opening has elapsed (YES in S2307), the special winning opening (the second special winning opening 35) is closed (S2308), and the value of the small hit opening counter is reset. It is decremented by 1 (S2309), and it is determined whether or not the value of the small hit release counter is "0" (S2310). If it is determined in S2310 that the value of the small hit release counter is not “0” (NO in S2310), the process ends as it is to start the next release operation.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S2310 that the value of the small hit release counter is “0” (YES in S2310), the flow shifts to small hit end processing in S2311. In S2311, as a small hit ending process for ending the small hit game, a small hit ending command is set (S2311), the small hit ending period is started (S2312), and a small hit end flag is set (S2313), Finish the process. The small hit opening counter becomes "0" when the big winning opening is opened six times.

  When it is determined in S2301 that the small hit end flag is ON (YES in S2301), since six opening operations have been completed (or a specified number of game balls have been entered), It is determined whether or not the ending time of the small hit has elapsed (S2315), and if it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2315), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2315 that the ending time has elapsed (YES in S2315), the small hit end flag is turned off (S2316), the special figure operation status setting process 2 is performed (S2317), and the process ends. By generating a small hit game in the high-accuracy low-base state, it is possible to aim for the next big hit while increasing the number of balls held, thereby enhancing the entertainment of the game. Note that, at the start of the small hitting game, the probability change flag and the state B flag are not switched from ON to OFF or from OFF to ON. When the small hitting game is finished, the game state setting process is not performed. That is, in the present pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming state (probability state, base state) is not changed before and after the execution of the small hitting game.

[Special figure operation status setting processing 2]
Next, the special figure operation status setting processing 2 (S2317) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure operation status setting processing 2 (S2317), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 small hit flag is ON (S3101), and the special figure 1 small hit flag is ON, that is, the small hit game generated this time. Is determined to be related to special symbol 1 (YES in S3101), the special figure 1 small hit flag is turned off (S3102), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "1" (S3103), and the process is terminated. Finish. Thereby, in the next interruption process, the special symbol 1 standby process is executed again as the special symbol 1 operation process. On the other hand, if the special figure 1 small hit flag is not ON, that is, the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON, that is, if it is determined that the small hit game generated this time is related to the special symbol 2 (NO in S3101) ), The special figure 2 small hit flag is turned off (S3104), the special figure 2 operation status is set to "1" (S3105), and the process is terminated. Thereby, in the next interruption process, the special symbol 2 standby process is executed again as the special symbol 2 operation process.

[Reserved ball count processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a reserved ball count process (S209) following the special figure 2 operation process (S208). As shown in FIG. 45, in the reserved ball count processing (S209), first, the special figure 1 reserved ball count, the special figure 2 reserved ball count, and the normal symbol reserved ball count stored in the RAM of the main control board 80 are read (FIG. 45). S2501). Next, the data of the number of reserved balls (a reserved ball number command for transmitting the reserved ball number information to the sub-control board 90) is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S2502), and the process is terminated.

[Power-off monitoring process]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a power-off monitoring process (S210) following the pending ball count process (S209). As shown in FIG. 48, in the power-off monitoring process (S210), first, it is determined whether or not a power-off signal has been input (S2601). If it is determined that there is no input (NO in S2601), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2601 that there is an input of a power-off signal (YES in S2601), the current state of the gaming machine (whether the game is stable, whether the game is hit, or the number of pending balls, The data relating to the number of remaining fluctuations is stored in the RAM (S2602), the power-off flag is turned on (S2603), and thereafter the loop processing (infinite loop) is performed without returning to the interrupt processing (FIG. 11).

  As described above in detail, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment has the above-described characteristic configuration, thereby achieving a unique effect that is not provided by the conventional pachinko gaming machine, or by comparing with the conventional pachinko gaming machine. Has a remarkable effect. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, a big hit occurs in the special symbol determination (the first special symbol (also referred to as “first identification information”) or the second special symbol (also referred to as “second identification information”). Is based on a big hit symbol (which is also stopped and displayed in a “specific display mode”), a high-probability state occurs (a privilege is given), and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the high-probability state ( Benefits) are terminated.

  The process of providing the high probability state (privilege) (game state setting process (S2121)) can also be referred to as “privilege providing means”. The first special symbol and the effect symbol 8 are linked (synchronized), and the second special symbol and the effect symbol 8 are linked (synchronous), and the variable display and the stop display are performed, and the same result is determined. , "The special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol" can be replaced with "the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with the hit symbol (specific display mode)". .

[Sub-control main processing]
Next, an operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 (control processing by the sub-control unit 90) will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that counters, flags, statuses, buffers, timers, and the like that appear in the description of the operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (sub-control unit). When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 reads out and executes the sub-control main processing program shown in FIG. 47 from the ROM of the sub-control board 90. As shown in the figure, in the sub-control main process, first, a CPU initialization process is performed (S4001). In the CPU initialization processing (S4001), stack setting, constant setting, CPU 92 setting, setting of SIO, PIO, CTC (controller for interrupt time) and the like, resetting of various flags, statuses, and counters are performed.

  Subsequently, in S4002, it is determined whether the power-off signal is ON and the contents of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are normal (S4002). If the determination result is NO (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, if the determination result is YES (YES in S4002), the process proceeds to S4004 without initializing the RAM of the sub-control board 90. That is, if the power-off signal is not ON, or if the contents of the RAM are not normal even if the power-off signal is ON (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized. If the power-off signal is turned on but the contents of the RAM are normally maintained (YES in S4002), the RAM is not initialized. When the RAM is initialized, various flags, statuses, and counter values are reset. Note that S4001 to S4003 are executed only once (when the power is turned on) after the power is turned on, and are not executed thereafter. In the first embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs the same process as the power-off monitoring process (S209) by the game control microcomputer 81 shown in FIG. When turned on, the data relating to the effect control at that time is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90. In other words, the data relating to the effect control at the time of power failure such as a power failure is backed up. For this reason, at the time of power-on (when power is restored) after power is restored after a power failure such as a power failure, unless the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003), the production control microcomputer 91 performs production control. Returns to the state before the power failure occurred.

  In S4004, the interrupt is prohibited. Next, a random number seed update process is executed (S4005). In the random number seed update processing (S4005), the values of various effect determination random number counters are updated. The updated random number counter value is sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90. The random number for effect determination includes a random number for variable effect determination that determines the mode (variable effect pattern) of the effect symbol game effect to be executed, a random number for announcement effect determination that determines the announcement effect, and an effect symbol determination for determining the effect symbol. There are random numbers. The method of updating the random numbers can be the same as the method of updating the random numbers performed by the main control board 80 described above. When updating the random numbers, the random number values may be added by two instead of by one. The effect determination random number is acquired at a predetermined timing. As the timing, for example, when a control signal (starting ball input command) notifying that there is a starting ball is transmitted from the main control board 80, or when a control signal (notifying the start of fluctuation from the main control board 80) (A change start command) is transmitted, or a change effect pattern described later is determined. The storage location of the obtained effect determination random number is a predetermined random number counter value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90.

  When the random number seed update process (S4005) ends, a command transmission process is executed (S4006). In the command transmission process, various commands (control signals) stored in an output buffer (also referred to as “sub output buffer”) in the RAM of the sub control board 90 are transmitted to the image control board 100, the sound control board 106, and the lamp control board. The command is transmitted to the control board that is the corresponding command transmission destination among the boards 107. Each control board (each control unit) that has received the command performs various effects using various effect devices (image display device, speaker 67, panel lamp 5, frame lamp 66, movable decorative member 14, etc.) in accordance with the received command. (Effect design game effects, special game effects related to hit games, etc.) are executed. The effect control microcomputer 91 subsequently permits an interrupt (S4007). Thereafter, S4004 to S4007 are looped. While interrupts are enabled, reception interrupt processing (S4008), 2 ms timer interrupt processing (S4009), and 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4010) can be executed. By executing these control processes, display control such as effect symbols executed on each display screen of the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 is performed. It is also possible to perform lighting control of various lamps, operation control of a movable decorative member, audio output control from a speaker, and the like.

[Reception interrupt processing]
Next, the reception interrupt processing (S4008) will be described with reference to FIG. In the reception interrupt processing (S4008), first, it is determined whether or not the strobe signal (STB signal) is ON, that is, whether or not the strobe signal sent from the main control board 80 is input to the external INT input unit of the effect control microcomputer 91. A determination is made (S4101). If it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is not ON (NO in S4101), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is ON (YES in S4101), various commands transmitted from the main control board 80 are stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (S4102), and the process is terminated. . This reception interruption processing (S4008) is processing executed prior to other interruption processing (S4009, S4010).

[2ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 2 ms timer interrupt processing (S4009) will be described with reference to FIG. The 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) is a process executed every time an interrupt pulse having a cycle of 2 msec is input to the sub-control board 90. In the 2 ms timer interrupt processing (S4009), first, input processing for creating switch data (edge data and level data) based on the detection signals from the effect button detection switches 63c and 63d is performed (S4201). Next, a lamp data output process (S4202) for outputting lamp data for causing the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 to emit light, and driving data for driving the movable decorative member 14 (electric drive source) are output. Drive data output processing (S4203). The ramp data and the drive data are created by a 10 ms timer interrupt process described later. Then, a watchdog timer process for resetting the watchdog timer is performed (S4204).

[10ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4010) will be described with reference to FIG. The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) is a process executed each time an interrupt pulse having a period of 10 msec is input to the sub-control board 90. In the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010), first, a received command analysis process (S4302) described later is performed. Next, a switch status acquisition process is performed to store the switch data created in the 2 ms timer interrupt process as switch data for the 10 ms timer interrupt process in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (S4303), and the switch stored in the switch status acquisition process is executed. A switch process for setting the display contents and the like of the display screen 7a based on the data is performed (S4304). After that, other processes such as creating lamp data (data for controlling lighting of the panel lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66) and updating the effect determination random number are executed (S4305).

[Receive command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis processing (S4302) will be described with reference to FIG. In the received command analysis process (S4302), first, it is determined whether or not a start ball entry command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4401), and if it is determined that a start ball input command has not been received (NO in S4401). Then, the process shifts to the process of S4403, and when it is determined that the start entry command has been received (YES in S4401), the effect holding information storage process (S4402) is performed, and the process shifts to the process of S4403. The effect pending information storage processing (S4402) is a process for storing various information (preliminary judgment result, random hit determination) included in the start ball entry command (special figure 1 start ball input command or special figure 2 start ball input command) received in S4401. The game information such as a numerical value, a fluctuation pattern random number value, etc.) is determined according to the type of the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) and the number of special figure reserved balls at the time of transmitting / receiving the start entering command (command generation). Are stored in a predetermined effect suspension information storage area of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 in a shift memory format. For example, if the received start ball entry command is a special figure 1 start ball entry command corresponding to the reserved ball number “4” of the special figure 1, the pre-judgment result or hit type included in the special figure 1 start ball entry command Is stored as special figure 1 effect suspension information in an area corresponding to the number of reservations 4 in the special figure 1 effect suspension information storage area. The effect holding information thus stored is used for executing various effects such as a variable effect, a notice effect, and an effect mode, which will be described later. The storage contents (effect hold information) of the effect hold information storage area in the sub control board 90 are stored in the special figure hold storage section (first special figure hold storage section, second special figure) in the main control board (main control section) 80 described above. This is the same as the storage content (acquisition information) of the hold storage unit). For this reason, the effect suspension information storage area of the sub-control board 90 can also be referred to as “acquired information storage means”.

  Next, in S4403, it is determined whether or not a fluctuation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4403). If it is determined that a fluctuation start command has been received (YES in S4403), a fluctuation effect start process (to be described later) ( (S4404), the process proceeds to S4405, and if it is determined that the variation start command has not been received (NO in S4403), the process proceeds to S4405 without performing the variation effect start process. In S4405, it is determined whether or not a fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4405). If it is determined that the fluctuation stop command has been received (YES in S4405), the effect symbol is stopped and displayed to perform the fluctuation effect. A variable effect ending process for ending is performed (S4406). In the variable effect ending process (S4406), the variable effect ending command for stopping and displaying the effect symbol 8 and ending the variable effect is set in the sub output buffer. When the set variable effect end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 displays the effect symbol 8 that has been changed and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Stop display is performed, and the variable effect (effect symbol game effect) is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4405 that the fluctuation stop command has not been received (NO in S4405), the process shifts to S4407 without performing the fluctuation effect ending process. In addition, the fluctuation effect refers to various effects performed in accordance with the fluctuation display of the special symbol.

  Subsequently, in S4407, it is determined whether or not a hit game related command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4407). Here, the hit game related command is a command transmitted from the main control board 80 when executing a hit game (big hit game, small hit game), and specifically, the start of the big hit game (the occurrence of a big hit) ), A round start command transmitted at the start of the round, a round end command transmitted at the end of the round, an ending command transmitted at the end of the big hit game, a first winning port in the round game The first large winning opening ball entry command transmitted based on the ball entering the 30 and the second large winning opening ball entering command transmitted based on the ball entering the second large winning opening in the small hitting game, etc. are applicable. . In S4407, it is determined whether any of these jackpot game-related commands has been received, and if not received (NO in S4407), the process proceeds to S4409, and if received (YES in S4407). Then, processing related to execution of an effect (big hit game effect, small hit game effect) according to the type of the received command is performed (S4408).

  For example, if the received command is an opening command, an opening effect command that specifies an opening effect according to the type of jackpot specified based on the command is set in the sub output buffer. A round effect command specifying a round effect according to the round specified based on the command is set in the sub output buffer, and if the ending command, an ending effect specifying an ending effect according to the type of jackpot specified based on the command Set the production command in the sub output buffer. If the received command is a special winning opening ball entry command (a first special winning opening ball entering command or a second special winning opening ball entering command), a special winning opening (first large winning opening) specified based on the command is received. A ball entry effect command designating a ball entry effect corresponding to the entry into the mouth 30 and the second special winning opening 35) is set in the sub output buffer. When the various effect commands related to the set hit game are transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 adjusts the opening effect and the round in accordance with the progress of the hit game. An effect, a ball entry effect, and the like are executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Finally, the process of S4409 is performed, and this process ends. In S4409, as other processing, processing based on other received commands (for example, a normal symbol change start command or a normal symbol change stop command) except for the above-mentioned various commands is performed (S4409).

[Variation effect start processing]
Next, the variable effect start processing (S4402) executed in the received command analysis processing (S4302) will be described with reference to FIG. In the variable effect start processing (S4402), first, an effect determination random number process (S4501) for acquiring various effect determination random numbers such as a variable effect determination random number, a preview effect determination random number, and a design symbol determination random number is performed. In the present embodiment, the process of S4501 is performed at the timing when the change start command is received from the main control unit 80, and a predetermined value (acquisition information) is obtained from each random number. Based on the obtained value (acquisition information), the mode of the effect symbol game effect (variable effect) to be executed, the mode of the notice effect (including the presence or absence of the notice effect), the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed, and the like are determined.

  Next, in S4502, the received fluctuation start command is analyzed (S4502). The variation start command includes a variation pattern designation command (information for designating a variation pattern) for designating the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection processing of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The fluctuation pattern designation command includes the fluctuation pattern information (P1 to P33) shown in FIG. 9, the game state information for specifying the current game state, and the first special symbol hit / fail judgment or the second special symbol hit / fail judgment. A result, symbol information for designating a jackpot type, and the like are included (see FIG. 8). In addition, since the variation pattern specification command includes a command corresponding to the first special symbol and a command corresponding to the second special symbol, by analyzing the variation pattern specification command, the effect design game effect to be started this time. It is possible to determine whether the (display of the variation of the effect symbol) is related to the special figure 1 or the special figure 2. Note that the fluctuation pattern information, the game state information, the symbol information, and the like can be used in processes other than the fluctuation effect start process executed thereafter.

  Next, in S4503, the effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the current mode status (S4503). The mode status is for determining the effect mode to be executed. The mode status is one of values from “1” to “5”, and each value is assigned to the effect modes A to E. Specifically, the mode status “1” corresponds to the effect mode A, the mode status “2” corresponds to the effect mode B, the mode status “3” corresponds to the effect mode C, and the mode status “4”. The mode status corresponds to the effect mode D, and the mode status “5” corresponds to the effect mode E. The current production mode can be specified by referring to the current mode status.

  Here, the effect mode is a mode of the effect mainly based on the image display device 7. If the effect mode is different, a part or all of the effect mode of the game effect such as a notice effect or a reach effect is different. . Specifically, the image displayed on the image display device 7 varies depending on the effect mode, such as a different aspect of the effect symbol 8 (for example, a design design, a number design, etc.), a different character, an item, and a different background image. It is different. In addition, it is also possible to perform the stage design game production in a mode corresponding to the production mode, and when a plurality of game productions (notification production, reach production, etc.) are provided, different game productions can be executed depending on the production mode. It can be. In this embodiment, the effect modes A and B are executed when the low-accuracy low-base state is controlled, the effect modes C and D are executed when the high-accuracy low-base state is controlled, and the effect mode E Is executed when the vehicle is controlled to the low-probability-high base state and when the vehicle is controlled to the high-probability-high base state. Therefore, when the effect mode is any one of A to D, the player checks the effect mode to determine whether the current playing state is the low-probability low-base state or the high-probability low-base state. It becomes possible. On the other hand, when the production mode is E, even if the player checks the production mode, it is difficult to know whether the current playing state is the low-probability high base state or the high-probability high base state. is there. In that sense, effect mode E can be said to be a game state non-notification mode.

  Next, in S4504, this is performed using the image display device 7, the panel lamp 5, the movable decorative member 14, and the like, and is a pattern of a variable effect (variable effect pattern, effect design) controlled mainly by the sub-control unit 90. A variable effect pattern determination table (not shown) and a notice effect determination table for determining a game effect are set (S4504). Specifically, based on the mode status (current production mode) referred to in S4503 and the variation pattern designation command received from the main control unit 80, a variable production pattern determination table and a preview production determination table to be used are set. . That is, a plurality of variable effect pattern determination tables and a plurality of announcement effect determination tables are provided, and a predetermined variation effect pattern determination table and a notice effect determination table are set based on the game state (effect mode) and the like. I do. For example, when the fluctuation pattern information specified by the received fluctuation pattern specification command is “P1 (fluctuation pattern P1)” (see FIG. 9), a fluctuation effect pattern determination table is used as a fluctuation effect pattern determination table when a big hit corresponding to the current effect mode is performed. A fluctuation effect pattern determination table and a notice effect determination table are set. The variable effect pattern determination table is mainly for determining the execution mode of the effect symbol game effect (the change mode of the effect symbol, etc.), and includes a plurality of variable effect pattern determination tables (mode statuses) corresponding to the effect modes (mode status). (Not shown) is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90 in advance. In S4504, a table corresponding to the mode status (current effect mode) referred to in S4503 is selected and set from among these variable effect pattern determination tables.

  Next, in S4505, based on the fluctuation effect determination random number acquired in S4501 and the fluctuation effect pattern determination table set in S4504, a fluctuation effect pattern suitable for the specified fluctuation pattern is selected and set ( S4505). As the fluctuating effect pattern, a fluctuating mode of the effect symbol 8 displayed in the effect symbol display area 7b (execution mode of the effect symbol game effect) is set. Thereby, in the effect design game effect, when a reach effect is performed (reach effect effect game effect) or when a character effect is performed using a specific character (character effect symbol game effect), the reach effect or character When the effect is not executed (reach-less effect symbol game effect) or the like is determined. Note that the reach effect is, for example, as a display mode of the effect symbol 8 when the result of the special symbol hit determination indicates a big hit, all three effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are the same (Zoro eyes). In the case where a certain mode (big hit mode, specific mode) is provided, two of the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped display (temporary stop display) in a symbol (same effect symbol) constituting the big hit mode. ), And whether or not the remaining one effect symbol is stopped and displayed in a symbol (three identical effect symbols) that completes the jackpot mode in a state where the remaining one continues to fluctuate (scroll display). Refers to a production that indicates At this time, a game effect is executed using a predetermined character in accordance with the fluctuation display of the effect symbol, and whether or not the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in a big hit manner is determined whether the predetermined character achieves a predetermined purpose. It is also possible to show in the production of. Such game effects (reach effects and character effects described later) can also be referred to as story effects (specific game effects) and purpose effects (specific game effects). As a result, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation of the big hit and to enhance the entertainment of the game.

  In S4505, based on the effect symbol determination random number acquired in S4501 and a stop symbol determination table (not shown), an effect symbol 8 to be stopped and displayed (also referred to as a “stop effect symbol”) is determined and set. The effect symbol 8 which is stopped and displayed as a result of the effect symbol game effect is a result of the special symbol right / wrong judgment, which is out of reach. One of the effect symbols is different from the other effect symbols, and at least one of the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R such as "635" is in the absence of the reach when the effect symbol is out of reach. It is said that the directing pattern is different

  In S4506, a notice effect to be executed in accordance with the variable effect pattern (effect symbol game effect) is determined. In addition, it is also called an effect symbol game effect including the notice effect to be executed. In this announcement effect, the effect (beforehand, before the effect symbol is stopped and displayed (fixed stop display) (during display of the variation of the effect symbol)) indicating the possibility that the result of the effect symbol game effect being executed is stopped and displayed in a big hit manner. Information production). In S4506, based on the random number for announcement effect determination acquired in S4501 and the announcement effect determination table set in S4504, a designated variation pattern and an announcement effect suitable for the determined variation effect pattern are selected and set. (S4506).

  Then, in S4507, based on the variable effect pattern and the notice effect set in S4505 and S4506, a variable effect start command for starting an effect symbol game effect is set in an output buffer in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 ( S4507), the variable effect start process ends. When the variable effect start command set in S4507 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 changes the variable effect pattern specified based on the variable effect start command, that is, S4505. The predetermined image data corresponding to the fluctuation effect pattern set in the step (1) is read from the ROM of the image control board 100, and the fluctuation effect and the like based on the read image data are executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, a fluctuation display (blinking display) using two LEDs on the effect display 102 is also executed.

[Outline of staging design game effects]
Next, the outline of the effect symbol game effect (fluctuation effect) of the present embodiment will be described. As described above, when a variable effect start command for starting an effect symbol game effect or the like based on the variable effect pattern or the like set in S4505 is transmitted from the sub-control board 90 to the image control board 100, the image display device 7 Is displayed on the display screen 7a. An effect symbol game effect (variable effect) is configured as a series of effects from the start to the end (stop) of the variable display of the effect symbol 8.

  The fluctuation display of the effect design 8 is, in principle, scrolled vertically (in ascending order) in the order of “1” → “2” → “3” ... → “7” → “8” → “9” (in ascending order) ( Vertical scrolling) is performed, and when it reaches “9”, it returns to “1” again and repeats vertical scrolling. The manner in which the effect symbols 8 are displayed in a variable manner is determined by the variable effect patterns stored in the above-described variable effect pattern determination table. For this reason, as for the mode of the variable display, in addition to the vertical scroll, for example, there are various scroll displays such as a horizontal scroll display (horizontal scroll) and a switching display in which symbols (numbers) are sequentially switched on the spot without scrolling. The mode can be provided as a variation effect pattern. It is also possible to provide a mode in which the symbols “1” to “9” are displayed in a descending order. Further, it is also possible to set the mode of the variable display depending on the effect mode and the game state.

  Further, the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed according to the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, and the fluctuation display is stopped as the fluctuation time elapses. There are a plurality of stop modes (stop patterns) as modes. Specifically, as the main stop modes, (1) the stop order (also referred to as “stop order”) of each of the effect symbols 8L (left symbol), 8C (middle symbol), and 8R (right symbol) is changed to “left symbol”. (2) the stop order of each symbol is “left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol” (“the middle symbol → right symbol”). (3) a stop mode (also referred to as a "third stop mode") in which all the stop timings (stop timings) of the respective symbols are substantially the same (also referred to as "simultaneous stop"). And (4) a stop mode (also referred to as a “fourth stop mode”) in which the stop timing of the left symbol and the right symbol is substantially the same and the middle symbol stops thereafter. These stop modes (stop patterns) are included in the execution mode of the effect symbol game effect, and in which stop mode the variable display is stopped is determined by the variable effect pattern selected (set) in S4505. Has become something. That is, in the present embodiment, the selection and determination (setting) of the variation effect pattern also serves as the selection and determination (setting) of the stop mode (stop pattern). However, the selection and determination (setting) of the variation effect pattern and the selection and determination (setting) of the stop mode (stop pattern) can be processed separately. The first stop symbol in the stop order is also referred to as a "first stop symbol", the second stop symbol in the stop order is also referred to as a "second stop symbol", and the stop symbol is a third stop symbol. This is also called “third stop symbol” or “final stop symbol”.

  Of the first to fourth stop modes, the first stop mode (left symbol → middle symbol → right symbol) is mainly in the effect mode C (state C) and the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is “small”. This is a stop mode that can be executed at the time of stopping the variable display when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is performed based on “hit”.

  In the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol), the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is “missing” or “big hit” mainly in (1) effect modes A and B (state A). (2) In the effect mode E (state B), the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is “missing” or “big hit”. In the case where the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed in a variation mode with reach (also referred to as “reach variation”) or a variation mode without reach (also referred to as “normal variation”) based on In the case of D (state C), when the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed by the reach fluctuation or the normal fluctuation based on the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment being “out” or “big hit”, In the stop mode that can be executed when the variable display is stopped That.

  The third stop mode (all symbols simultaneous stop) is mainly (1) in the effect mode A, B (state A), under the situation where the function of shortening change according to the number of special figure reserved balls works (at the start of change) Special figure 1 The number of reserved balls is "3" or "4") and the result of the first special symbol right / wrong judgment is "out", and based on this, the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed with normal fluctuation (2) In the effect mode E (state B), the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed in the normal fluctuation based on the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment being “out” or “small hit”. In the case, (3) in the effect modes C and D (state C), when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed in the normal variation based on the result of the second special symbol correctness determination being “out”, And (4) in the effect mode D (state C), the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment When variations in performance symbols 8 displayed based on a Koatari "is performed, a viable stop mode during the variation display stops.

  In the fourth stop mode (simultaneous stop of left and right symbols → middle symbol), mainly in the effect mode D (state C), the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is “missing” or “big hit”. This is a stop mode that can be executed when the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed based on the reach fluctuation based on the reach fluctuation.

  As described above, a plurality of stop modes when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped are provided in accordance with the mode of the variable display based on the effect of the effect mode (game state) and the result of the special symbol determination, and the result (stop display mode). Thus, it is possible to make the stop mode different depending on the situation of the game and to make it various. Also, for the player, it is possible to estimate the display mode (stop display mode) of the effect symbol 8 to be displayed (derived display) after paying attention to the stop mode when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 stops. It becomes possible, and through the stop mode, it becomes possible to estimate the type of special game that can be executed, whether or not the special game is executed, the possibility, and the like. This allows the player to pay attention to the stop mode at the time when the variable display stops, thereby increasing the sense of expectation for the subsequent special game.

  In addition to the first to fourth stop modes, for example, the stop order of the three symbols constituting the effect symbol 8 is “right symbol → left symbol → middle symbol” (fifth stop mode). ), And various stop modes such as a stop mode (sixth stop mode) in which the left symbol and the middle symbol stop almost at the same time and then the right symbol stops thereafter can be provided. The conditions under which the mode is executed are not limited to the present embodiment, but can be variously determined.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the symbols “1” to “9” constituting the effect symbol 8 are colored so as to be classified by color, and the type of the symbol (symbol type) is determined by the color. As shown in FIG. 53, this symbol type corresponds to a gaming state (effect mode). Specifically, in the state A (effect modes A and B), among the odd symbols, “7” is a red symbol (hereinafter also referred to as “red symbol”), and the other odd symbols are “1” and “3”. , “5” and “9” are green symbols (hereinafter also referred to as “green symbols”), and even symbols “2”, “4”, “6” and “8” are blue symbols (hereinafter “blue symbols”). Pattern). On the other hand, in states B and C (effect modes C, D and E), among the odd symbols, “3”, “5”, and “7” are red symbols, and the other odd symbols are “1” and “9”. Is a green symbol, and even symbols "2", "4", "6", and "8" are blue symbols.

  It should be noted that the correspondence between the symbols and the colors according to the present embodiment shown in FIG. 53 is merely an example, and other correspondences can be adopted, and the types of colors are not limited to the present embodiment. , Other colors can be used. Further, in the present embodiment, the symbol type (red symbol, green symbol, blue symbol) is determined by the color, but it is also possible to determine the symbol type by elements other than the color. For example, the type of character in the case where a character is attached to the effect design, and the number design in the case of having an effect design (character design) representing a predetermined character in addition to the effect design (number design) representing a number. The design type may be determined by the character design, or the design type may be simply determined by the odd design and the even design.

  The variable display of the effect symbol 8 is performed, and the symbol combination (stop display mode) of the effect symbol 8 (8L, 8C, 8R) displayed (derived display) when the variable display is stopped according to the above-described stop mode, The result of the variable display is notified. In the present embodiment, as a basic symbol combination (stop display mode), “completely disjointed eyes” (“124” and the like) in which all three rendering symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are different symbols (numerals), and rendering symbols 8L (left symbol) and effect symbol 8R (right symbol) are the same symbol (number) and the remaining effect symbol 8C (middle symbol) is a different symbol (numerical symbol) from the others. ) Is a non-specified mode (non-specified mode) that does not trigger the execution of the hit game. On the other hand, a “Zoro-eye” (“777” or the like) in which all three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same is defined as a jackpot mode (specific mode) that triggers execution of a jackpot game of 4R or more (see FIG. 6). I have.

  On the premise of such a basic symbol combination, in the present embodiment, the “reach variation” among the variations is also used as a 2R jackpot mode which is a trigger for executing the 2R jackpot game (see FIG. 6). . This is because the number of prize balls that can be acquired by the player (the number of acquired prize balls) in the 2R jackpot game is smaller than that in the 4R or larger jackpot game (4R jackpot game, 15R jackpot game), and the state C (high) A special game serving as a trigger for setting a state B (high base state) in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball (increase in possession of balls) in a small hit game as compared to the low base state), that is, for the player. This is because it is a special game in which the degree of advantage (amount of profit) is relatively low. In addition, the “perfect variation” among the variations is also used as a small hit mode which is a trigger for executing the small hit game (second special symbol) in the state B (high base state). This is because, as described above, in the state B, the second starting port 21 is in the open state for most of the period, and therefore, the small winning big prize winning port (the second starting port) located downstream of the second starting port 21. This is because it is difficult to enter the large winning opening 35), and it is extremely unlikely that a small hit profit can be obtained (infinitely close to zero) (substantially equivalent to a loss). Further, among the variations, a “specific variation” to be described later is a small hit mode which is a trigger for executing a small hit game (small hit of the second special symbol) in the state C (high-accuracy low-base state). Here, the small hitting mode (specific breakup) is also referred to as a “first display mode”, and the big hitting mode (zorrow) is also referred to as a “second display mode”. Among the eyes, the reach-disordered eye is also referred to as a “third display mode”, and the complete disassembly among the departures (completely disparate or reach-disordered) is also referred to as a “fourth display mode”.

  Since the state A (low-probability low-base state) is a game state based on performing a left-handed game, the first special symbol hit / fail judgment (variation display of the first special symbol) is mainly performed. In this case, it is rare that the second special symbol hit / fail judgment (the change display of the second special symbol) is performed during the change display of the first special symbol. If performed, the variable display of the effect symbol 8 corresponding to this is not performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, but only the variable display (and stop display) by the performance display 102 is performed. I have. Similarly, since the state B (high base state) and the state C (high accuracy low base state) are game states based on right-handed game, it is mainly determined whether or not the second special symbol is correct (second special pattern). This is because it is rare that the first special symbol hit / fail judgment (the first special symbol change display) is performed during the second special symbol change display. When the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is performed below, the corresponding variation display of the effect symbol 8 is not performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, but the variation display ( And stop display) only. However, if a special symbol hit / fail judgment that is contrary to the current game state (left-handed game, right-handed game) is made and a “big hit” judgment result is obtained (for example, the first special symbol hit / no-go judgment is made in state C) When a big hit is performed), one or more of the image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 display an effect indicating the occurrence of the big hit. Do. Thereby, while the effect display (variable effect) of the effect symbol 8 corresponding to the current game state (variable display of the main special symbol) is mainly performed on the display screen 7a, the effect symbol is displayed in parallel with the variable display of the main special symbol. It is possible to inform the player that the result of the change display of the special symbol to be played is a big hit. Further, by suggesting the occurrence of the big hit, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player stops the game without noticing the occurrence of the big hit and misses the opportunity of obtaining the profit.

[Game production in state A]
Next, a description will be given of a game effect performed when the game state is controlled to the state A (low-probability low base state). The game effect performed in the state A is an effect symbol game effect (variable effect) mainly performed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol based on the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination. As described above, in the state A, “A” or “B” is set as the effect mode. For this reason, the effect symbol game effect in the state A is performed in a state where a background image or the like (not shown) corresponding to the effect mode A or B is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the present embodiment, the setting and shifting of the effect mode in the state A are automatically performed according to a predetermined mode control condition under the control of the sub-control unit 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91). . For this reason, the setting of the effect mode in the state A cannot involve the player.

  In the state A, the effect symbols 8 are “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8”, which are blue symbols, and “1”, “3”, “5”, which are green symbols. A symbol “9” and a symbol “7” including a red symbol are displayed (see FIG. 53). The display of each of these symbols is performed by the image control microcomputer 101 reading out the image data (symbol data) of the corresponding symbol from the ROM of the image control board 100 and displaying it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 54, when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is started (see FIG. 54 (a)) based on the effect mode and the symbol type, the variable display is basically in the second stop mode. (Left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) (see FIG. 54 (b) → (c) → (d), (e) → (f)). When the function is activated (see S1707 in FIGS. 9 and 24), the operation is stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop) (see FIG. 54 (g)). Here, when the left symbol (staging symbol 8L) and the right symbol (staging symbol 8R) stop at the same symbol, the reach is established (see FIG. 54 (f)), and thereafter, the middle symbol (staging symbol 8C) changes and displays. Until the stop, a reach effect is executed on an image display device or the like. In the reach effect, an effect mainly showing whether the middle symbol (final stop symbol) stops at the same symbol as the symbol stopped earlier (whether the big hit mode is displayed or not) is developed. This reach establishment and reach effect are the same in the states B and C.

  In this way, when the effect design 8 is displayed in a variable manner, when the effect design 8 is displayed in a staggered pattern (a complete staggered pattern or a reach staggered pattern) as a result of the fluctuation display, the result is “out of range”. On the other hand, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a big hit mode (double eyes) as a result of the variable display, the big hit game can be executed, and when the big hit game is started, the display contents on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are displayed. Is switched to the jackpot game effect for the 4R jackpot according to the first special symbol. And when the big hit game is related to the "4R first big hit", the game state after the big hit game ends is state C (high-precision low base state), and is related to the "4R second big hit". In the case of, the game state after the end of the big hit game is state B (low-precision high base state) (see FIG. 6).

[State B game play]
Next, a description will be given of a game effect performed when the game state is controlled to the state B (the low-probability base state or the high-probability base state). Note that the high-accuracy high-base state is set after the end of the big-hit game based on the occurrence of “2R fifth big hit” or “2R sixth big hit” in state C (high-accuracy low base state).

  The game effect performed in the state B is an effect symbol game effect (variable effect) mainly performed in synchronization with the change display of the second special symbol based on the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination. As described above, in the state B, “E” is set as the effect mode. Therefore, the effect symbol game effect in the state B is performed in a state where a background image or the like (not shown) corresponding to the effect mode E is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the present embodiment, the setting of the effect mode E corresponding to the state B is automatically performed in accordance with the transition to the state B under the control of the sub-control unit 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91). Therefore, the player cannot participate in the setting of the effect mode E.

  In the state B, the effect symbols 8 are "2", "4", "6", "8", which are blue symbols, "1", "9", which are green symbols, and red. The symbols "3", "5", and "7" are displayed (see FIG. 53). The display of each of these symbols is performed by the image control microcomputer 101 reading out the image data (symbol data) of the corresponding symbol from the ROM of the image control board 100 and displaying it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Be executed. In this embodiment, the state (design) of the effect symbol 8 is different between the state A and the state B.

  As shown in FIG. 55, when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is started based on the effect mode and the symbol type (see FIG. 55 (a)), the variable display is basically in the third stop mode. (Simultaneous stop) (see FIG. 55 (b)). In the state B, the second special symbol time-saving function and the high-base generating function operate, so that the variation without the reach and the variation of the small hit can be digested in a short time as much as possible so that the game can proceed smoothly. That's why. When the variable display stops in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop), it becomes clear to the player that there is no possibility of executing the special game (big hit game) immediately after the stop, so that the player's expectation can be reduced. There is no fan of them. On the other hand, when there is an out-of-reach fluctuation or a jackpot fluctuation (ie, “reach fluctuation”) with a reach, or “reach-influenced off-period fluctuation” (a kind of fluctuation mode without reach) that is actually a fluctuation that pretends to be a reach fluctuation. In this case, the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped in the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) (FIG. 55 (c) → (d), (c) → (e) → ( f)).

  In this way, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a variable manner, if the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a disengaged manner (a staggered pattern) as a result of the variable display, "missing" is displayed. On the other hand, when the effect design 8 is displayed in the big hit mode (double eyes) as a result of the variable display, the big hit game can be executed, and when the big hit game is started, the display content on the display screen 7a is switched to the big hit game effect. Instead, a round effect or the like is performed according to the progress of the big hit game. In the state B, the big hit game when the design symbol 8 is displayed in the big jackpot mode is “15R third big hit” or “4R fourth big hit”. A jackpot game effect for three big hits or a big hit game effect for 4R fourth big hit is performed. Then, the game state after the end of the big hit game is state C (highly accurate low base state) (see FIG. 6).

  In addition, when the effect design 8 is displayed in a 2R jackpot mode (reach variation) as a result of the fluctuation display, the display content on the display screen 7a is switched to the jackpot game effect for the 2R jackpot with the start of the jackpot game. Be replaced. Then, when the started big hit game is related to “2R fifth big hit” or “2R sixth big hit”, the game state after the end of the big hit game is a high-accuracy high base state (state B), If the big hit game is related to “2R seventh big hit” or “2R eighth big hit”, the game state after the end of the big hit game is a low-probability high base state (state B) (see FIG. 6). ).

  Furthermore, when the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is a small hit in the state B, and the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed based on this, the variation display is performed in the normal variation and stopped in the third stop mode. You. Then, as a result of the variable display, the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a completely disjointed pattern (out of alignment) (see FIG. 55B). When the small hit is made in the state B, the small hit game is executed. However, even if the small hit game is started, the display content on the display screen 7a remains the effect symbol game effect (here, the effect symbol). No. 8 is displayed with complete disjointed eyes), and the effect during the small hit game (small hit game effect) is not particularly performed. This is because, as described above, the small hit in the state B is substantially equal to the deviation. Then, the gaming state after the end of the small hitting game remains in the state B as long as the timing does not overlap with the transition timing of the gaming state based on the number of times the special symbol changes.

  In addition, in the low-probability high base state which is the state B, when the special symbol (mainly the second special symbol) is displayed for a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times in this embodiment) without a big hit. At the end (stop) of the predetermined number of fluctuation display (out-of-range fluctuation), the gaming state shifts to state A (low-probability low-base state), and the effect mode shifts from "E" to "A" or "B". I do. In addition, when the special symbol (mainly the second special symbol) is displayed for a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times in this embodiment) without generating a big hit in the high-accuracy high base state which is the state B, The game state shifts to state C (high-accuracy low-base state) at the end (stop) of the predetermined number of change display (out-of-change), and the effect mode shifts from "E" to "C" or "D". .

[Game production in state C]
Next, a description will be given of a game effect performed when the game state is controlled to state C (high-accuracy low-base state). The game effect performed in the state C mainly includes an effect design game effect (variable effect) performed in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol based on the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination, and a small hit occurrence. (Small hit game production). The state C is an advantageous game state (specific game state) in which small hits frequently occur until the next big hit occurs, so that many prize balls can be obtained by the small hits between the big hits. For this reason, in state C, a special effect in which the effect symbol game effect and the small hit game effect are linked is performed. Details on this point will be described later.

  Further, as described above, in the state C, “C” or “D” is set as the effect mode. Therefore, the game effect in the state C is performed in a state where the background image or the like corresponding to the effect mode C or D is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The setting of the effect mode in the state C is performed under the control of the sub-control unit 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91) in the same manner as in the state A and the state B described above. The player can operate the first effect button 63a to select an effect mode, and the effect mode C or D is set based on the selection result. In the state C, as in the state B, the effect symbols 8 are “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8”, which are blue symbols, and “1”, “9”, which are green symbols. ”And the symbols“ 3 ”,“ 5 ”, and“ 7 ”, which are red symbols, are displayed (see FIG. 53). In this embodiment, the state (design) of the effect symbol 8 is the same between the state B and the state C.

  Here, between the “effect mode C” and the “effect mode D” in the state C, the contents of the game effects (effect specifications) developed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are significantly different. . Therefore, in the following, the game effects in each effect mode will be described separately for the effect mode C and the effect mode D.

[Direction mode C]
As shown in FIG. 56A, in the effect mode C, an effect symbol 8 is displayed near the center of the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7, and behind the effect symbol 8, as a background image corresponding to the effect mode C. A predetermined character is displayed. The characters displayed here include an ally character (first character) and an enemy character (second character), and are displayed so that both characters face each other. These characters are displayed even when the symbol display is not changed. Each of the ally character and the enemy character has a plurality of types of characters. One of the ally character (also referred to as an “ally character”) and one of the enemy characters (also referred to as an “enemy character”) are in the effect mode C. Displayed when setting. As the effect by the character (character effect), for example, the effect display is performed in such a manner that a friendly character attacks an enemy character, or a friendly character is attacked by an enemy character. The effect by such a character (character effect) is performed as a variable effect based on the variable effect pattern (when performed in accordance with the variable display of the identification information), and when the result of the variable display is a small hit, the small hit game is performed. There is a case where it is performed as a small hit game effect when it is performed (a case where it is performed along with a special game after the end of the fluctuation display).

  A right-handed instruction image M for instructing right-handed operation is displayed in the upper right part of the display screen 7a, and the number of acquired prize balls (acquired profit) is displayed in the lower right part (first display part) of the display screen 7a. The displayed winning ball count image C1 is displayed. The prize ball count image C1 of this embodiment includes an image (numerical image) capable of displaying five-digit numbers of “00000” to “99999” and a character image of “pt”. The prize ball count image C1 mainly shows the number of prize balls (acquired prize balls) obtained by the player through a big hit game, a small hit game, or the like, and the game state after the big hit game is state B or state When it becomes C, it indicates the number of acquired prize balls during the period (so-called acquired prize balls during the extended holiday period) until the game state returns to state A (except during the jackpot game). . In state C (high-accuracy low-base state), a small hit occurs frequently (the execution frequency of the small hit game increases). The prize ball count image C1 is displayed in order to produce the effect. That is, as the small hitting game effect, an effect display (entering ball effect) using the prize ball count image C1 is performed. The details of the effect accompanying the occurrence of the small hit will be described later.

  The basic flow of the variable display (fluctuation effect) of the effect symbol 8 in the effect mode C having such a screen configuration will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 57, for the sake of convenience of explanation, some display contents such as effect holding (holding design), right-handed instruction image M, background, and the like are omitted. As shown in FIG. 57, when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is started (see FIG. 57 (a)), the variable display is basically stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop) (FIG. 57). 57 (b)). This is because, in the state C, the second special symbol time reduction function is activated, so that the variation without the reach can be digested in a short time as much as possible so that the game can proceed smoothly. When the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop), it becomes clear to the player that there is no possibility of executing a special game (big hit game, small hit game) immediately after the stop. . For this reason, when the variable display is stopped in the third stop mode, an effect (pumping effect) for increasing the expectation of the player is not performed. On the other hand, when the reach fluctuation (out-of-range or big hit) or out-of-reach fluctuation is performed, the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped in the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) (FIG. 57 ( c) → (d), (c) → (e) → (f)). Further, when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed based on the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination being “small hit”, the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is in the first stop mode (left symbol → middle symbol → The right symbol is stopped (see FIG. 57 (g) → (h) → (i)).

  In this way, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a variable manner, if the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a disengaged manner (a staggered pattern) as a result of the variable display, "missing" is displayed. On the other hand, when the effect design 8 is displayed in the big hit mode (double eyes) as a result of the variable display, the big hit game can be executed, and when the big hit game is started, the display content on the display screen 7a is switched to the big hit game effect. Instead, a round effect or the like is performed according to the progress of the big hit game. The big hit game when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the big hit mode in the state C in the state C is related to “15R third big hit” or “4R fourth big hit”. In this case, for the 15R third big hit Big hit game effect or big hit game effect for 4R 4th big hit is performed. Then, the game state after the end of the big hit game is state C (highly accurate low base state) (see FIG. 6).

  In addition, when the effect design 8 is displayed in a 2R jackpot mode (reach variation) as a result of the fluctuation display, the display content on the display screen 7a is switched to the jackpot game effect for the 2R jackpot with the start of the jackpot game. Be replaced. As the big hit game effect in this case, the end of the state C, that is, the effect display indicating the end of the advantageous state where small hits frequently occur is performed from the start to the end of the 2R big hit game. Then, when the started big hit game is related to “2R fifth big hit” or “2R sixth big hit”, the game state after the end of the big hit game is a high-accuracy high base state (state B), If the big hit game is related to “2R seventh big hit” or “2R eighth big hit”, the game state after the end of the big hit game is a low-probability high base state (state B) (see FIG. 6). ).

  Further, in the effect mode C (state C), when the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is a small hit, and the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 8 based thereon is performed, the fluctuation display is performed by the normal fluctuation and the first fluctuation is performed. It is stopped in the stop mode (left symbol → middle symbol → right symbol). Then, as a result of the variable display, the effect symbol 8 is displayed with a specific variation (small hitting mode) (see FIG. 57 (i)). Here, in the present embodiment, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are all red symbols, and two adjacent symbols are the same among the three symbols, and the other symbol is different (“335”, “355”). , "557", etc.) are set as the specific irregularities (small hitting mode). Although a symbol combination that constitutes a specific jumbled eye (small hitting mode) does not reach the reach, it constitutes a combination in which two adjacent symbols have the same symbol (number). Is also referred to as a “reach sequence”.

  Of the symbols ("3", "5", "7") constituting the specific disjointed eyes (first display mode), the symbols "3" and "5" constitute the specific disjointed eyes in state A. Although it is a green symbol (first symbol type) that cannot be performed, in state C, it is a red symbol (second symbol type) that can form a specific jiggle (see FIG. 53). That is, the symbols “3” and “5” are symbols whose symbol type changes depending on the gaming state. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the design type (color type in this example) of the effect symbol, and to attract interest in the game.

  In this embodiment, in the state A, a part of the effect symbols (“1”, “3”, “5”, “9”), which are green symbols, and in the state C, a specific variation (first The display pattern is a red pattern that can be configured. For example, a part of the effect pattern (“2”, “4”, “6”, “8”) which is a blue pattern in the state A is a red pattern. And the effect symbols ("2", "4", "6", "8") which are blue symbols in the state A and the effect symbols ("1", "3", "5") which are green symbols , "9") (for example, "4" and "5") can also be made red. Further, as the symbol type, a symbol type dedicated to the state C which does not exist in the state A may be provided, and a specific jiggle (first display mode) may be constituted by the symbols belonging to the exclusive symbol type. For example, a gold symbol (gold symbol) can be provided as a symbol type dedicated to the state C, and a part of the effect symbol that is a green symbol in the state A can be a gold symbol in the state C. As a result, it is possible to make the pattern types that can constitute a particular disjointed eye stand out more, and to easily attract the player's attention. Alternatively, in the present embodiment, the symbols “3” and “5” that are green symbols (first symbol type) in state A are red symbols (second symbol type) in state C. In this case, In the state A, the symbol “7” which was a red symbol (second symbol type) from the beginning may be configured as a gold symbol in the state C. In this case, the symbols “3” and “5”, which are red symbols (second symbol type), are symbols that can form a specific Barracuda, and the symbol “7” that is a gold symbol (third symbol type) May be a 15R jackpot mode (the “7” zoro pattern) corresponding to the 15R third jackpot among the jackpots. As a result, the symbol type (red symbol) that can constitute a specific varnish eye (small hit mode) and the symbol type (gold symbol) that constitutes a specific zoro eye (15R big hit mode) are clearly distinguished from each other. It is possible to easily show the correspondence between the type and the symbol type.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the derivation display (stop of the fluctuation display) of the small hit mode (reach arrangement of red symbols) in the effect mode C, the first stop mode (left symbol → In the order of stopping the middle symbol → the right symbol), the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped. For this reason, not only the small hitting mode (reach arrangement of the red symbol) but also the stop mode of the variable display which triggers the display of the small hitting mode attracts the player's attention. Further, in the effect mode C, at the time of derivation display of the small hit mode (stop of the fluctuation display), an effect display that emphasizes the display of the small hit mode (reach arrangement of red symbols) is performed. Specifically, one line image extending in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction) along the stop order of the first stop mode through the center of each symbol (red symbol) constituting the small hit mode, and the periphery of each symbol And an effect image E (effect effect image) composed of an image (decorative image) for decorating the image. Thereby, the display of the small hit mode (the execution of the small hit game) can be emphasized when the variable display is stopped in the first stop mode, and when the variable display is stopped in the first stop mode. It is possible to enhance the production effect of Note that the mode of the effect image E is not limited to the present embodiment, and various other modes can be adopted.

  In addition, when a game ball enters the second big winning opening 35 in the small hitting game executed in response to the display of the small hitting mode, the winning prize ball indicated by the prize ball count image C1 is entered for each ball. The number (numerical image) is added and displayed (updated). In the present embodiment, the prize balls based on the ball entry into the second special winning opening 35 are 10 prize balls for one ball entry. Therefore, the acquired prize shown by the prize ball count image C1. The number of balls is added in units of ten. Further, when the small hit game is executed in response to the display of the small hit mode, the ally character (first character) and the enemy character (first character) displayed as the background image on the display screen 7a with the execution of the small hit game. The effect display (character effect) by the second character) is performed. Specifically, an effect display (also referred to as a "first effect") in which one of the ally characters and the enemy character (for example, the ally character) attacks or tackles the other (for example, the enemy character) And The character effect in this case (also referred to as “character effect display”) does not include a later-described battle effect depicting a confrontation scene between both characters. The execution period of the small hit game is determined according to the opening time of the small winning port (second big winning port 35) for the small hit, and the opening time of the second big winning port 35 in the small hit game is 1. Because it is 8 seconds, it is difficult to secure the execution time of the battle effect in this time. By performing the character production in accordance with the small hit game with a short execution time in this manner, it becomes easy to make the character production and a character production performed as a fluctuation production described later as a relevant production, and from the fluctuation display. In the small hit game, it is possible to obtain an effect (character effect) with a sense of unity by the ally character and the enemy character. Here, the addition display of the winning ball count image C1 due to the small hit is based on the second big winning opening ball entry command transmitted from the main control unit 80 based on the detection of the game ball by the second big winning opening sensor 35a. This is performed based on the reception of the control unit 90, and the character effect display accompanying the small hit is performed based on the sub control unit 90 receiving the small hit opening command (S2066) transmitted from the main control unit 80. Since these effects are performed, each of these effects corresponds to a small hit game effect (S4407, S4408). The effect of adding and displaying the number of acquired prize balls (acquired profit amount) indicated by the prize ball count image C1 is also referred to as “first profit effect”.

  As described above, in the effect mode C (state C), the stop of the effect symbol 8 in the first stop mode and the display of the small hit mode (reach arrangement of red symbols) frequently occur, and accordingly, the small hit game is performed. Since the addition display of the prize ball count image C1 and the character effect display can be executed at a high frequency, the coordination between the effect symbol game effect (variable effect) and the small hit game effect strongly influences the occurrence of the small hit to the player. It is possible to impress. As a result, it is possible to increase a sense of expectation for winning a prize ball (increase in possession of balls) due to frequent small hits, and to enhance the entertainment interest in the effect mode C (state C). In addition, the character effect display accompanying the small hit is performed based on the sub control unit 90 receiving the second large winning opening ball entry command from the main control unit 80, similarly to the addition display of the prize ball count image C1. It may be configured as follows. In this case, if the game ball does not enter the second special winning opening 35 in the small hitting game, the character effect is not performed, so that the entering ball when the game ball enters the second special winning opening 35 It is possible to give a strong impression to the player, and it is easy to determine whether or not the game ball has entered the second special winning opening 35 in the small hit game.

  Next, a description will be given of the content of the effect display (effect mode) in the case where the reach fluctuation (out of swing or big hit) or the reach-influenced out-of-reach fluctuation is performed in the effect mode C. As described above, in the effect mode C, in the state where the ally character (the first character) and the enemy character (the second character) are displayed as the background on the display screen 7a, the effect symbol game effect (the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 8, etc.). ) Is performed (see FIG. 56A). In addition, in the case where the reach fluctuation (off or big hit) is performed and the case where the reach fluctuates, the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped in the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → medium symbol). (See FIG. 57 (c) → (d), (c) → (e) → (f)). In such a situation, when the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 8 is started based on the fluctuation effect pattern of the reach fluctuation or the reach swaying fluctuation, the left symbol (the effect symbol 8L) is first stopped according to the second stop mode. However, when the left symbol (the first stop symbol) stops, an effect display depicting a scene in which either the ally character or the enemy character displayed in the background attacks the opponent is performed. (1st production) is performed. The first effect in this case is an effect (character effect) by a character (friend character, enemy character) performed before the right symbol (effect symbol 8R, second stop symbol) stops. The first production is roughly classified into a pattern in which an ally character attacks the enemy character (also referred to as a “first production pattern A”) and a pattern in which the enemy character attacks the ally character (“ There are two patterns, which are also referred to as "first effect pattern B"). Further, for each pattern, there are a plurality of patterns that determine the content (type) of the attack to be performed and the success or failure of the attack. By providing such a plurality of types of patterns, the information on the present fluctuation display (the fluctuation) is suggested by the contents of the effect when the first effect is performed (big hit reliability, contents of the effect that can be executed later, etc.). (Notice). Note that the first effect is an effect that ends when one of the ally character and the enemy character attacks the other, and does not include a battle effect described later.

  For example, when the pattern of the first effect (also referred to as a “first effect pattern”) is the first effect pattern A (a pattern in which a friend character attacks), at least the 2R jackpot mode is not displayed as a result of the change display. That is, it is indicated that the big hit which is the end trigger of the state C which is the advantageous state in which the small hit frequently occurs does not occur. In this case, in the fluctuation, the right symbol (the second stop symbol) and the middle symbol (the third stop symbol) are stopped without the reach being established, and the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a completely disjointed pattern (out of alignment). Or (reach fluctuating fluctuation), reach is established and developed into reach production, but finally the middle design stops at a design different from the left and right design, and the production design 8 is displayed with a reach pattern (outer form) The effect design 8 is displayed in the form of a zigzag (big hit mode) after the (reach out-of-reach change) or reach effect (big hit change). On the other hand, when the first effect pattern is the first effect pattern B (a pattern in which an enemy character attacks), the 2R big hit mode which is the end trigger of the state C is displayed as a result of the change display. Suggests a possibility. In this case, in the fluctuation, the right symbol (the second stop symbol) and the middle symbol (the third stop symbol) are stopped without the reach being established, and the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a completely disjointed pattern (out of alignment). Or (reach fluttering deviation fluctuation), although reach was established and developed into reach production, finally the middle design stopped at a design different from the left and right design, and the production design 8 was in the reach pattern (outside or 2R big hit) It is displayed (reach deviation fluctuation or 2R big hit fluctuation), or the effect design 8 is displayed in a zigzag manner (big hit mode) through reach effect (big hit fluctuation). In this manner, the first effect performed by stopping the left symbol (first stop symbol) allows the subsequent development of the fluctuation (whether or not reach is established, whether or not the development is advantageous for the player, and the like). It is possible to suggest. Then, the first effect pattern A suggests that the subsequent development is more likely to be advantageous to the player than the first effect pattern B. Such a first effect pattern is included in the variable effect pattern, and the first effect is executed in any of a plurality of types of patterns according to the variable effect pattern set (selected) in S4505 described above. It is decided what to do.

  After the left symbol (the production symbol 8L, the first stop symbol) is stopped in this way (after the execution of the first production), the right symbol (the production symbol 8R, the second stop symbol) stops according to the second stop mode. If the right symbol to be stopped becomes a symbol (number) different from the left symbol, the reach is not established. Then, the middle symbol (staging symbol 8C, the third stop symbol) stops and the variable display ends, and the staging symbol 8 is displayed. It is displayed in a complete disjointed pattern (out of form). In this case, the fluctuation is a fluctuation that fluctuates the reach (see FIG. 57 (c) → (e) → (f)).

  On the other hand, if the right symbol that stops following the left symbol becomes the same symbol (number) as the left symbol, the reach is established. At this point, the fluctuation is a reach fluctuation (see FIG. 57 (c) → (d)). When the reach is established, a predetermined reach effect (also referred to as a “second effect”) is performed on the display screen 7a. The second effect is an effect by a character (friend character, enemy character) performed after the reach is established (after the execution of the first effect) and the middle symbol (the effect symbol 8C, the third stop symbol) is still changing. In this embodiment, this is performed as a battle effect depicting a confrontation scene between an ally character and an enemy character that has been displayed as a background. The second production (battle production) can be roughly classified into a pattern in which an ally character wins a battle (a battle) (also referred to as a “second production pattern A”) and a pattern in which an ally character loses a battle (a battle). (Also referred to as a “second production pattern B”) and a pattern (also referred to as a “second production pattern C”) that ends the battle without victory or defeat (also referred to as a “second production pattern C”). There are a plurality of patterns that determine the type of character, which one of the ally character and the enemy character attacks first (the type of the character that strikes first), the content of the attack, success or failure, and the like. By providing such a plurality of types of patterns, it is possible to suggest information (such as a jackpot reliability) on the present fluctuation display (the fluctuation) based on the content of the performance when the second performance (battle performance) is performed. I have.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 64A, among the patterns of the second effect (also referred to as “second effect pattern”), the second effect pattern A (the ally victory pattern) is such that the ally character makes a first strike. There is a pattern where the player wins as it is, or a pattern where the enemy character strikes first and the ally character finally wins. In the second effect pattern B (friend defeat pattern), there is a pattern in which an enemy character makes a first strike and a friend character is defeated. Further, the second production pattern C (winning / losing undecided pattern) includes a pattern in which an ally character performs a preemptive attack but an enemy character evades the attack, and a pattern in which an enemy character performs a preemptive attack and an ally character withstands the attack. There is. The second production (battle production) based on these second production patterns starts with the first strike of an ally character or an enemy character, and the production contents (battle production) until the subsequent confrontation result (battle result) becomes clear. Scenes) are predetermined in accordance with each pattern. Such a second effect pattern is included in the variable effect pattern. According to the variable effect pattern set (selected) in S4505, the second effect (battle) is selected from any of a plurality of patterns. Or directing).

  In the present embodiment, the reach variation in the effect mode C is performed as a jackpot variation based on the fact that the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit). When the effect design 8 is displayed in a double-eye pattern (big hit mode) as a result of the display, before the big hit mode is displayed (before the derivation display), the second effect (battle) based on the second effect pattern A (friend win pattern) Direction) is performed. In this case, the big hit game of 15R or 4R is performed after the change display is stopped (after the big hit mode is displayed), and after the big hit game, the gaming state becomes the state C (high-accuracy low base state) again. Therefore, after the big hit game, the player can again play the game in the advantageous state (state C) where small hits frequently occur. As described above, since the game in the state C can be continued after the big hit game, the second effect pattern A is a pattern in which the friend character wins.

  Also, when the reach fluctuation in the effect mode C is performed as a deviation fluctuation (reach deviation fluctuation) based on the result of the second special symbol right / wrong judgment being a deviation, that is, the effect symbol 8 is displayed as a fluctuation display as a result of the fluctuation display. When displayed in the eyes (missing state), a second effect (battle effect) based on the second effect pattern C (winning / losing undecided pattern) is performed before displaying the outlier mode (before derivation display). In this case, the game in the state C is continued after the change display is stopped (after the display of the off state). Since the game in the state C continues as described above, the second effect pattern C is a pattern in which the battle (battle) ends without a win or loss.

  Further, the reach variation in the effect mode C is performed as a 2R jackpot variation based on the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment being a 2R jackpot (any of the 2R fifth to eighth jackpots), that is, the variation When the effect design 8 is displayed as a reach variation (2R big hit mode) as a result of the display, before the display of the 2R big hit mode (before derivation display), the second effect based on the second effect pattern B (friend defeat pattern). (Battle production) is performed. In this case, after the fluctuation display is stopped (after the display of the 2R big hit mode), the big hit game of 2R is performed, and the game state becomes the state B (high base state) after the big hit game. For this reason, the player ends the game in the advantageous state (state C) where small hits frequently occur, triggered by the occurrence of the 2R big hit. As described above, since the gaming state shifts from the state C to the state B via the 2R jackpot, the second effect pattern B is a pattern in which the ally character is defeated.

  Here, among the second effect patterns A to C, the patterns including the contents in which the ally character makes the first strike are the second effect pattern A (the ally winning pattern) and the second effect pattern C (the winning / losing undetermined pattern). Therefore (see FIG. 64 (a)), for the player, the battle effect (second effect) is started after the reach is established on the display screen 7a, and the confrontation (battle) in the battle effect is the first character of the ally character. If it starts from an attack, it can be inferred at that time that there is at least no possibility of a 2R jackpot, that is, a possibility of ending state C. On the other hand, since the patterns including the content of the enemy character performing the first strike correspond to all of the second effect patterns A to C (see FIG. 64 (a)), the player can reach the display screen 7a on the display screen 7a. If the battle production (second production) is started after the formation, and the confrontation (battle) in that battle production starts with the enemy character's first strike, the possibility of a 2R jackpot at that point (possible termination of state C) Gender) cannot be ruled out. Then, when the ally character is defeated and the battle effect ends after the enemy character's first strike, the pattern of the battle effect (second effect) is the second effect pattern B, and the fluctuation is 2R hit. That is, the game in the state C is ended. On the other hand, if the ally character finally wins after the enemy character's first strike and the battle effect ends, the pattern of the battle effect (second effect) is the second effect pattern A, The fluctuation is a 15R or 4R big hit fluctuation, and when the ally character evades the preemptive attack of the enemy character and the battle effect ends, the pattern of the battle effect (second effect) is the second effect pattern C Therefore, the fluctuation is a deviation fluctuation, and in each of these cases, the game in the state C can be continuously executed. As described above, in the reach fluctuation in the effect mode C, by performing the second effect (battle effect) based on the second effect patterns A to C, the advantageous state (state C) where small hits frequently occur continues (win, undecided). ) Or end (defeat), it is possible to obtain an effect that stirs up the player's expectations and anxiety. As a result, it is possible to attract the player's interest to the fluctuating production (character production) from the first production to the second production (battle production), and it is possible to enhance the gaming interest in the production mode C (state C). Becomes

[Direction mode D]
As shown in FIG. 56B, in the effect mode D, the effect symbol 8 has a smaller size (reduced size) in the upper right of the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 as compared to other effect modes such as the effect mode C. A main image X imitating a fighter is displayed substantially at the center of the display screen 7a. In the effect mode D adopting such a screen configuration, the effect display mainly showing a state in which the fighter plane flies is developed on the display screen 7a while normally displaying the change of the effect symbol 8 at the upper right of the screen. Has become something. Then, when the reach is changed, the effect design 8 is largely displayed substantially at the center of the screen as in the effect mode C described above, and after reaching, a predetermined reach effect (e.g., an advanced effect) is displayed on substantially the entire display screen. It is executable by using. In the present embodiment, the main image X imitating a fighter is displayed as the main effect image in the effect mode D, but an image with a motif other than this may be displayed as the main effect image. It is possible. In the effect mode D, as in the effect mode C, a right-handed instruction image M and an award ball count image C1 are displayed.

  The basic flow of the variable display (fluctuation effect) of the effect symbol 8 in the effect mode D having such a screen configuration will be described with reference to FIG. Note that also in FIG. 58, for the sake of convenience of explanation, some display contents such as effect holding (holding symbol) are omitted. First, in the effect mode D, usually, a moving image depicting a scene in which the main image X flies is displayed. This moving image is displayed even when the symbol is not displayed in a variable manner. When the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 8 is started (see FIG. 58 (a)), the fluctuation display is basically performed in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop) in the case of a normal fluctuation (off or small hit). The operation is stopped (see FIG. 58B). The stop in the third stop mode is for the same purpose as in the effect mode C described above. In the effect mode D, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a variable manner at the upper right of the display screen 7a, the mode of the variable display is a switching display in which the symbols (numbers) are sequentially switched on the spot without scrolling. . On the other hand, when the reach fluctuation (out of place or big hit) or the out-of-reach fluctuation is performed, the main image X is not displayed, and the effect design 8 which has been displayed small (reduced display) in the upper right of the screen until then is displayed. A large display is displayed substantially at the center of the screen 7a, and the variable display is performed by vertical scrolling (see FIG. 58 (c)). Thereafter, the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped in the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) or the fourth stop mode (simultaneous stop of left / right symbol → middle symbol) (FIG. 58 (c) → (D) → (e), (c) → (e), (d) → (f) → (g)). When the variable display is stopped in the fourth stop mode (simultaneous stop of left and right symbols → middle symbol), after the main image X is not displayed, the effect symbol 8 is largely displayed substantially at the center of the display screen 7a. At the same time, the left symbol and the right symbol may be stopped almost simultaneously, and the middle symbol may be changed (scrolled).

  In this way, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a variable manner, if the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a disengaged manner (a staggered pattern) as a result of the variable display, "missing" is displayed. On the other hand, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the big hit mode (Zoro eye) as a result of the fluctuation display, the 4R or 15R big hit game can be executed, and when the display symbol 8 is displayed in the 2R big hit mode (Reach hit), the 2R big hit game can be executed. Becomes The effects during the big hit game and the game state after the big hit game are the same as in the case of the effect mode C, and thus detailed description is omitted here.

  Also, in the effect mode D (state C), the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is a small hit, and when the change display (small hit change) of the effect symbol 8 is performed based on the result, the change display is displayed on the upper right of the screen. And is stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop) (see FIG. 58B). At this time, the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a specific pattern (small hitting mode) as a result of the variable display (see FIG. 58 (b)). Here, in the effect mode C, the fluctuation display accompanying the small hit is stopped in the first stop mode that cannot appear in the other effect modes, and the effect image E (effect effect image) is displayed at the time of the stop. In this case, the appearance of the effect symbol 8 is mainly displayed to emphasize the occurrence of the small hit. On the other hand, in the effect mode D, the effect design 8 is displayed at the upper right corner of the display screen 7a with a specific pattern (small hit mode), so that the occurrence of the small hit in the stop display mode of the effect pattern 8 is not obvious. In this case, the effect is performed in an inconspicuous manner. At this time, an effect image different from the effect symbol 8 can be displayed, and the display of the effect image may suggest (notice) to the player that a small hit has occurred. It is assumed.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 59A, a plurality of target images Y can be displayed substantially at the center of the display screen 7a with the start of the small hit change. The target image Y is displayed according to the number of game balls that can enter the second big winning opening 35 in one small hitting game. In the present embodiment, the target image Y is approximately 2 per small hitting game. Since three to three game balls are designed to be able to enter the second special winning opening 35 (gauge configuration), three target images Y are displayed in response to this. The display of the target image Y is based on the variable effect pattern in the effect mode D (effect symbol game effect). When the hit variation effect pattern is selected (set), the target image Y is displayed when the variation effect is executed. By displaying the target image Y in this manner, the player can infer that the result of the variable display is a small hit. Therefore, the target image Y can also be said to be a notice effect image for notifying occurrence of a small hit. Note that the display of the target image Y may not be included in the variable effect pattern but may be included in the preview effect pattern set in S4506 described above.

  Then, when the small hit variation (the variation display of the effect symbol 8) is stopped and the small hit mode (such as "355") is displayed, the small hit game is started, and the second big prize to be opened by the small hit game is started. When a game ball enters the mouth 35, an effect display (also referred to as a "destructive effect") indicating a state in which the target image Y is destroyed for each incoming ball is performed (see FIG. 59 (b)). The destruction effect is performed based on the sub control unit 90 receiving the second large winning opening ball entry command transmitted from the main control unit 80 based on the detection of the game ball by the second large winning opening sensor 35a. And corresponds to the small hit game production (S4407, S4408). In the present embodiment, the destruction effect is such that the target image Y is destroyed by a missile attack from the fighter (the main image X). Further, similarly to the effect mode C, the addition display of the prize ball count image C1 based on the ball entering the second special winning opening 35 is also performed.

  The effect from the start of the small hit change to the small hit game is a basic effect accompanying the occurrence of the small hit in the effect mode D. An effect based on the effect hold information stored in S4402, that is, a so-called “hold prefetch effect” is performed. The reserved prefetch effect relating to the small hit (also referred to as “small hit prefetch effect”) is realized by the small hit prefetch effect process (S5000) shown in FIG. That is, the sub-control unit 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91) performs the small hit prefetching effect process (S5000) shown in FIG. Specifically, when setting (S4505) the variable effect pattern in the variable effect start process (S4402), the small hit prefetching effect process (S5000) shown in FIG. 60 is performed.

  In the small hit prefetch effect processing (S5000), first, it is determined whether or not the specific period flag is OFF (S5001). Although the details will be described later, the specific period flag is a flag that can be set to ON in S5006 described later when a predetermined specific period start condition is satisfied during the game in the effect mode D (state C). During the period, special productions will be held for small hits. If it is determined in S5001 that the specific period flag is ON (NO in S5001), this processing ends without performing the processing of S5002 and thereafter. On the other hand, when it is determined that the specific period flag is OFF (not during the specific period) (YES in S5001), the second special symbol is stored as the currently stored second special symbol (second special symbol holding), and the second special symbol is determined. It is determined whether or not a hold that results in a small hit (also referred to as “small hit hold”) is stored (S5002). This determination is made with reference to the production suspension information (preliminary determination result and the like) stored in S4402, that is, the storage contents of the production suspension information storage area (acquisition information storage means) of the sub-control board 90. Then, it is determined whether or not there is a small hit holding, including the second special figure holding corresponding to the changing display of the effect symbol 8 to be started (also referred to as “the relevant change”) (S5002). The small hit holding is also referred to as “specific acquisition information”.

  If it is determined in S5002 that the small hit hold (specific acquisition information) is not stored (NO in S5002), the process is terminated without performing the processing of S5003 and thereafter, and the small hit hold (specific acquisition information) is stored. If it is determined that the change has been made (YES in S5002), it is determined whether or not the small hit occurs continuously three or more times as a result of the change display including the change (the change display to be started from now on) (S5003). That is, it is determined whether or not three or more small hit holdings are continuously stored, including the second special figure holding corresponding to the fluctuation (S5003). This determination can also be made with reference to the effect hold information (storage contents of the effect hold information storage area) stored in S4402 described above.

  If it is determined in S5003 that three or more small hits are not stored consecutively (NO in S5003), this processing ends without performing the processing of S5004 and thereafter. In this case, the small hit prefetch effect (small hit continuous announcement) based on the small hit prefetch effect process (S5000) is not started. However, if the change is a small hit change corresponding to the small hit hold, as described above, the change effect pattern including the display of the target image Y is set as the change effect pattern related to the change, In the variation (small hit variation), a variation effect involving the display of a plurality (three in this example) of target images Y is performed (see FIG. 59 (a)). In other words, there are cases where three target images Y are displayed as an effect indicating the occurrence of a small hit due to the change (the change notice).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S5003 that three or more small hits are continuously stored (YES in S5003), it is determined whether or not to start a specific period (S5004). Here, the specific period refers to a period during which a special effect is performed as an effect relating to a small hit. In this embodiment, when it is determined that the small hit game is performed three or more times in succession, that is, it is determined that the small hit is derived as a result of each of the three or more continuous fluctuation displays. (YES in S5003), the specific period can be started (executable). The sub-control unit 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91) performs a start time lottery (a kind of random number lottery for effect determination) to determine whether or not to start the specific time period. (S5004: YES), the process of S5005 to S5007 for starting the specific period is performed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, if two conditions of (1) that three or more small hits are continuously stored and (2) winning in the start lottery of the specific period are satisfied, the specific period Is started. That is, these two conditions (1) and (2) are the start conditions of the specific period.

  When it is determined in S5004 that the specific period starts (YES in S5004), the specific period counter is set (S5005), the specific period flag is turned on (S5006), and the small hit prefetching effect pattern A is set (S5007). . On the other hand, when it is determined that the specific period is not to be started (NO in S5004), the small hit prefetch effect pattern B is set without setting the specific period counter or the like (S5008). Here, the specific period counter is a counter for determining the end of the specific period, and in S5005, a value corresponding to the number of small hit holdings determined in S5003 is set. In this embodiment, “3” or “4” is set (S5005). After the specific period counter is set in S5005, the value of the specific period counter is decremented by 1 each time the fluctuation display (small hit fluctuation) stops (ends). The specific period flag is a flag indicating that a specific period is currently in progress, and is mainly used at the start of a variable effect (S4404, S5001, etc.) or the occurrence of a second special figure hold (special figure 2 start ball-in command reception). ) Is referred to when storing the effect suspension information based on the above (S4402). After being turned on in S5006, the specific period flag is turned off when the value of the specific period counter becomes zero.

  In the present embodiment, when three or more small hits are continuously stored (YES in S5003) and the specific period is not started (NO in S5004), the small hit prefetch effect pattern B is set. However, it may be configured such that it is determined whether or not to set the small hit prefetch effect pattern B, and the effect pattern B is set in the case of an affirmative determination. This makes it possible to provide a case where the small hit prefetch effect is executed and a case where the small hit prefetch effect is not executed when three or more small hit reservations are continuously stored, so that the effect can be diversified. Become.

  When the small hit prefetch effect pattern (A or B) is set in S5007 or S5008, a variable effect start command for starting the small hit prefetch effect based on the set effect pattern together with the effect symbol game effect is sent to the image control board 100. Then, the small hit prefetch effect is started on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 together with the effect symbol game effect. At this time, when the specific period is started and the effect based on the small hit prefetching effect pattern A is performed, as shown in FIG. The main image X (see FIG. 56 (b)) is not displayed, and the character “Get continuous GET !!” is displayed on the display screen 7a (see FIG. 61 (a)).

  Thereafter, along with the display of the first small hit mode (“355” or the like) due to the stop of the variable display, the specific period display area T () displaying the prize ball count image C2 indicating the number of acquired prize balls during the specific period. The second display section) appears on the left side of the display screen 7a (see FIG. 61B). The prize ball count image C2 displayed in the specific period display area T includes an image (numerical image) capable of displaying three-digit numbers of “000” to “999” and a character image of “pt”. Then, every time one game ball enters the second big winning opening 35 in the small hitting game executed in response to the display of the small hitting mode, the number of prize balls paid out for one of the entering balls. The prize ball number image S indicating (10 in this embodiment) is displayed on the right side of the specific period display area T (see FIG. 61 (c)), and the prize ball number indicated by the prize ball number image S is: It is displayed in addition to the prize ball count image C2 (acquired prize ball number) in the specific period display area T (see FIG. 61 (d)). Also, during the specific period, when a game ball enters not only the second winning hole 35 but also the third starting opening 26, the prize ball paid out for each entry (each entry). The award ball number image S indicating the number (one in this embodiment) is displayed on the display screen 7a (see FIG. 61 (c)), and the award ball number indicated by the award ball number image S is the award ball count image. It is displayed in addition to C2 (the number of acquired prize balls) (see FIG. 61 (d)). Accordingly, during the specific period, the display of the prize ball number image S and the addition display of the prize ball count image C2 are easily performed, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the entering ball effect. The effect of adding and displaying the number of acquired prize balls (acquired profit amount) indicated by the prize ball count image C2 is also referred to as “second profit effect”.

  The display of the prize ball number image S and the addition display of the prize ball count image C2 are performed by the main control unit 80 based on the detection of a game ball by the third starting port sensor 26a or the second winning port sensor 35a. This is performed based on the reception of the ball command (special figure 2 start ball entry command, second big winning port ball entry command) by the sub-control unit 90 (S4407, S4408). Since the ball entering the third starting port 26 can occur not only during the small hitting game, the display of the prize ball number image S based on the ball entering the third starting port 26 and the addition of the prize ball count image C2 are performed. The display can also be executed as an effect during the variable display between the previous small hit game and the subsequent small hit game, for example. During the specific period, addition display of the winning ball count image C1 displayed in the lower right part of the screen (first display unit) is not performed. This indicates the number of acquired prize balls during a specific period (during the small hit casino period) in which the small hit game is continuously performed three or more times, in distinction from the number of acquired prize balls obtained by the small hit game when not in the specific period. That's why.

  The display of the prize ball number image S and the addition display of the prize ball count image C2 as described above correspond to all of the small hit holdings stored at the start of the specific period (in this embodiment, three or four small hit holdings). ) Is performed until the small hit variation and the small hit game are completed. Then, when the small hit fluctuation and the small hit game corresponding to all the small hit holdings are completed, the specific period ends, and based on the end, the specific period display area T which has been displayed is erased from the screen. At the same time, the prize ball count image C2 is enlarged and displayed on the screen (see FIG. 61 (e)), and the acquired prize ball number indicated by the prize ball count image C2 is displayed at the lower right of the screen (first display unit). Is performed (added) to the number of acquired prize balls indicated by the prize ball count image C1 displayed in (1) (see FIG. 61 (e) → (f)). According to the effect based on the small hit look-ahead effect pattern A, the effect effect (first profit effect, second profit effect) is produced by changing the display mode of the acquired prize balls (acquired profit amount). The effect can be enhanced. It should be noted that the effect display mode based on the small hit prefetch effect pattern A displayed on the display screen 7a (display position, size, shape, etc. of the character image, the specific period display area T, the prize ball number image S, etc.) is shown in FIG. However, for example, the specific period display area T is displayed in a landscape orientation near the upper left on the display screen 7a, and the prize ball number image S is displayed below the specific period display area T. For example, various display modes can be adopted.

  On the other hand, if the specific period is not started (NO in S5004) and an effect (predetermined effect) based on the small hit prefetching effect pattern B is performed, with the start of the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 8 (small hit fluctuation), A plurality of the target images Y (see FIG. 59A) are displayed on the display screen 7a. The target image Y displayed in this case is the second big winning opening with the number of small hit games corresponding to the number of small hit holdings (three or four) stored at the time when the variable display is started. 35 is displayed according to the number of game balls that can enter. As described above, in the present embodiment, since three target images Y are displayed for one small hit game (see FIG. 59A), an effect based on the small hit prefetch effect pattern B (predetermined effect). Then, nine or twelve target images Y are displayed. In other words, the number of target images Y to be displayed (the effect mode of the predetermined effect) differs depending on the stored number of small hit holdings. Due to the display of the target symbol Y, the result of the variable display performed continuously a plurality of times (three or four times in this example) including the variable display becomes a small hit (specific display result). Continuous occurrence of hits) can be suggested to the player. Thereafter, while the small hit game is performed by the number of times corresponding to the number of small hit reservations at the start of the effect based on the small hit prefetching effect pattern B, every time a game ball enters the second big winning opening 35, A destructive effect of the target image Y (see FIG. 59 (b)) is performed.

  The effect (predetermined effect) based on the small hit prefetch effect pattern B is not limited to the display of the target image Y or the destructive effect of the target image Y as in the present embodiment. For example, an image such as a number or a level meter that directly indicates the number of stored small hits is displayed on the display screen, and the display mode of the number or the level meter is used to enter the second large winning opening 35. A predetermined character image is displayed during the effect of updating based on the small hit change based on the small hit holding, and the display mode of the character image (such as the movement of the character) is changed to the second special winning opening 35. Various effects, such as effects that change based on the entry of a ball, can be set as predetermined effects. It is also possible to provide a plurality of types of effect patterns (effect patterns of a predetermined effect) corresponding to the small hit prefetch effect pattern B, and to select and set any one of them. In this way, it is possible to diversify the small hit prefetch effect.

  As described above, in the effect mode D (state C), while the effect display using the main image X is mainly performed (see FIG. 56B), small hits frequently occur, and the ball enters the second big winning opening 35. (First profit effect, second profit effect) can also be executed at a high frequency, so that it is possible to attract the interest of the player to the effect related to the small hit and to improve the game entertainment. In particular, in a situation where there are a plurality of small hit holdings ("3" or more in the present embodiment), when the specific period is started and the specific period display area T is displayed as a kind of the small hit prefetching effect, the The display of the prize ball number image S and the addition display of the prize ball count image C2 (the second profit effect) are performed until all the small hit holdings are exhausted and the specific period ends. It is possible to secure the opportunity to execute the addition display of the prize ball count image C2 and increase the certainty of the display. Then, after the end of the specific period, the acquired prize ball number (the acquired prize ball number during the specific period) indicated by the prize ball count image C2 is the prize originally displayed on the lower right of the screen (first display unit). It is added (added) to the number of obtained prize balls in the ball count image C1. Further, in a situation where a plurality of small hits are held (in this embodiment, “3” or more), even if the specific period is not started, a plurality of target images Y are displayed on the display screen 7a as a kind of the small hit prefetch effect. (A small hit look-ahead effect pattern B, a predetermined effect), and the effect mode (the number of target images Y displayed in the present embodiment) differs depending on the number of stored small hits. As a result, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect (small hit look-ahead effect, first profit effect, second profit effect, and the like) executed in accordance with the small hit, and to enhance the entertainment interest in the effect mode D (state C). Become.

  Next, a description will be given of the content of the effect display (effect mode) in the case where the reach variation (missing or big hit) and the reach-inducing variation occur in the effect mode D. As described above, in the effect mode D, the main image X is displayed substantially at the center of the display screen 7a, and the effect symbol 8 is reduced and displayed at the upper right of the display screen 7a. (Variation display, etc.) are performed (see FIGS. 56 (b) and 58 (a)). In addition, in the case where the reach fluctuation (out of place or big hit) is performed and in the case where the reach out of place change is performed, the main image X is not displayed after the start of the fluctuation display of the effect design 8, and until then, the main image X is displayed in the upper right of the screen. The displayed effect symbol 8 is largely displayed substantially at the center of the screen and is displayed in a fluctuating manner by vertical scrolling. Thereafter, the fluctuating display of the effect symbol 8 is switched to the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) or fourth symbol. It stops in the stop mode (simultaneous stop of left and right symbols → middle symbol) (see FIG. 58 (c) and subsequent figures). At this time, if the left symbol and the right symbol stop at the same symbol (number) (see FIG. 58 (e)), reach is established, and thereafter, a predetermined value is displayed before the result of the variable display is displayed (derived display). Reach production is performed. The reach effect is performed based on the variable effect pattern set in S4505 described above, and the content of the reach effect differs depending on the type of the variable effect pattern.

  Here, the reach effect (also referred to as “third effect”) executed in the effect mode D is similar to the second effect executed as the reach effect in the above-described effect mode C, in which the friend character and the enemy character are connected. This is a battle effect (showdown effect) depicting a confrontation scene, and includes a plurality of third effect patterns having different patterns of the content of the battle effect. That is, as shown in FIG. 64B, the third effect (battle effect) in the effect mode D is roughly classified into a pattern in which the ally character wins (also referred to as a “third effect pattern A”) and a ally character. There are three patterns: a pattern in which the character is defeated (also referred to as a “third effect pattern B”) and a pattern in which the battle ends without a win or loss (also referred to as a “third effect pattern C”). Then, for each of these three patterns, there are a plurality of patterns that define the type of the enemy character, the type of the character performing the first strike, the success or failure of the attack, and the like. The third effect pattern A (friend win pattern) is also referred to as a “first change effect pattern”, and the third effect pattern B (friend defeat pattern) is also referred to as a “second change effect pattern”. The effect pattern C (winning / losing undecided pattern) is also referred to as “third variable effect pattern”. In addition, the third effect (battle effect) pattern includes a strong attack pattern (for example, a type of a weapon used in an attack, a type of a technique, etc.) of each of the ally character and the enemy character. And a pattern with a weak attack power (also called a “weak pattern”). In the present embodiment, among the patterns in which the ally character attacks the enemy character, the strong pattern (also referred to as the “strong ally pattern”) can be won by the ally character compared to the weak pattern (also referred to as the “friendly ally pattern”). It is shown that it is high. Also, among the patterns in which an enemy character attacks an ally character, a strong pattern (also referred to as an “enemy strong pattern”) is more likely to win the enemy character than a weak pattern (also referred to as an “enemy weak pattern”). It is intended to indicate that. With these strong patterns and weak patterns, it is possible to suggest the development and results of the battle effect to the player.

  In addition, when the reach fluctuation or the reach-lifting fluctuation is performed in the effect mode D, an image for giving a notice (suggestion) of the content of a subsequent game that may be executed through the reach effect in the change (also referred to as a “notice image”). (See FIG. 65). The display of the preview image is a kind of the preview effect (notification effect pattern) set in the above-described S4506 according to the fluctuating effect pattern in the effect mode D set in the above-described S4505. When a notice effect (notice effect pattern for effect mode D) by displaying the notice image is selected (set) on the basis of the effect determination table (not shown), a predetermined value is set when executing the variable display (variable effect). Is displayed. There are various timings for starting the display of the preview image, such as when the variable display is started, when the reach is established, and after the reach is established, and this timing is also set according to the mode of the advance announcement effect (announcement effect pattern). However, the display start timing of the preview image due to the fluctuation of the reach deviation is determined from the start of the fluctuation display to the time when the reach is not established (reach is not established) (for example, until the second stop symbol stops). . The reason is that reach cannot be established with fluctuations in reach. In the present embodiment, the display start timing of the preview image in the case of the fluctuation in reach reach is set to the start of the fluctuation display. The display of the preview image allows the player to infer the development of the game that can be executed after the change. The display of the preview image may not be based on the preview effect pattern but may be included in the variable effect pattern set in S4505 described above. In addition, the notice image can be referred to as “information about the game after the end of the fluctuation display”, and the effect of displaying the notice image is also referred to as “information display effect”.

  In this embodiment, when a preview image is displayed, as shown in FIG. 65A, a lower portion of the display screen 7a is a preview image display area U, and the preview image is displayed in the area. In FIG. 65 (a), the left symbol (effect symbol 8L) and the right symbol (effect symbol 8R) that are stopped due to the establishment of the reach are displayed small in the left and right upper portions of the display screen 7a, respectively. The state (reach state) performed is shown. As a preview image that can be displayed in the preview image display area U, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), a first preview image that gives a preview (suggestion) of the occurrence (execution) of a big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit). 501 (first information), a second notice image 502 (second information) for informing (suggesting) the continuation of the production mode D (state C), and a notice (suggestion) for transition to the production mode E (state B). And a third notice image 503 (third information). Then, at the start of the display of the preview image (start of the information display effect), at least two types of the preview images can be displayed in the preview image display area U. By displaying such a preview image, it is possible for the player to make an alternative guess regarding a later game development, so that it is possible to attract the player's interest to the content (type) of the displayed preview image. Become. Also, since the contents suggested by the first to third notice images are based on the game in the effect mode D (state C), the display of the notice image enables the effect mode D (state C). ) Will be announced (suggested) with respect to the game development based on the game described in (1), and it is possible to enhance the gaming interest in the effect mode D (state C). Note that the mode (display position, size, shape, and the like) of the preview image display area U is not limited to the example illustrated in FIG. 65. For example, the landscape preview image display area U illustrated in FIG. Or a vertically long preview image display area U is provided on the left or right portion of the display screen 7a, and first to third preview images are vertically (up and down) in the preview image display area U. It is possible to adopt various modes such as displaying the images side by side.

  The first preview image 501 is configured to include the characters “big hit”, the second preview image 502 is configured to include the characters “continuation”, and the third preview image 503 is configured to include the characters of “mode E”. Is done. In this embodiment, when displaying a preview image, two types of preview images are displayed. As a display pattern (combination of a preview image), that is, a preview effect pattern, a “first preview image 501” illustrated in FIG. And a second notice image 502 ”and a second display pattern that displays the“ second notice image 502 and the third notice image 503 ”shown in FIG. 65 (d). . In addition, a display pattern for displaying the “first notice image 501 and the third notice image 503” may be provided. Further, in this embodiment, three kinds of notice images are provided. More kinds of notice images may be provided, such as providing notice images according to the type of the big hit. In this case as well, at least two types of preview images may be displayed in the preview image display area U, and the display pattern of the preview image (notification effect pattern) can be arbitrarily determined.

  Which of the first preview image 501, the second preview image 502, and the third preview image 503 is to be displayed depends on the type of the preview effect (notification effect pattern) set in S4506 described above. For example, in the case where the fluctuation in reach reach is performed (reach fluctuation fluctuation effect presentation pattern), the first preview image 501 and the second preliminary image 502 (first display pattern) or the second preliminary image 502 and The third notice image 503 (second display pattern) is displayed in the notice image display area U (upper part of the display screen 7a), and this display is caused by the stop of the left symbol (staging symbol 8L) and the right symbol (staging symbol 8R). The process is performed until the reach is not established. Then, after the start of the display of the preview image (after the start of the information display effect), if the reach is not established, the preview image that has been displayed up to that point is deleted from the screen. In this case, the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 8 ends (stops) without the reach effect being performed thereafter.

  Here, the determination (selection) of the display pattern when displaying the preview image is performed by setting the display pattern determination table shown in FIG. This is performed based on a display pattern determining random number that takes a value in the range of 99. The feasibility of each display pattern is determined according to the selectivity of each of the first display pattern and the second display pattern determined by the display pattern determination table. As shown in FIG. 66, in the reach deviation fluctuation, both the display of the preview image by the first display pattern and the display of the preview image by the second display pattern can be executed. The latter has a higher feasibility than the latter (selection rate of the first display pattern is “30%” and selection rate of the second display pattern is “70%”).

  On the other hand, when the reach variation is performed (reach variation production pattern), the variation is a jackpot variation based on the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination being a big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit). In other words, when the effect design 8 is displayed in a zigzag (big hit manner) as a result of the variable display (big hit variation effect pattern), the third effect is displayed before the big hit manner is displayed (before the derived display). A third effect (variable effect based on the first variable effect pattern) based on the pattern A (friend win pattern) is performed. In addition, after the fluctuation display is stopped (after the big hit mode is displayed), the big hit game is performed, and thereafter, the game in the state C can be continued. Therefore, the third effect pattern A (the first fluctuation effect pattern) This is a pattern in which allied characters win. Then, in the fluctuation (big hit fluctuation), for example, at the predetermined time during the fluctuation before the third effect (battle effect) starts, such as at the start of the fluctuation or when a reach is established, the display of the preview image (information display effect) Is started. The display of the preview image in this case can be executed based on the first display pattern or the second display pattern. When the display of the first advance notice image 501 and the second advance notice image 502 is started based on the first display pattern (see FIG. 65 (c)), the player determines at least as a result of the change (battle effect). It can be assumed that there is no possibility that a 2R jackpot will occur, that is, there is no possibility that the game in the state C will end (the possibility of the subsequent game development being disadvantageous). On the other hand, when the display of the second notice image 502 and the third notice image 503 is started based on the second display pattern (see FIG. 65 (d)), at that time, the player has a 2R big hit. It is impossible to exclude the possibility (the possibility that later game development will be disadvantageous).

  Here, in the present embodiment, the display of the preview image in the case where the third effect (the battle effect to win the ally) based on the third effect pattern A due to the big hit change is displayed by the first display pattern more than the second display pattern. The possibility of execution with the display pattern is increased (see FIG. 66). For this reason, the display of the preview image in the first display pattern is higher than the display of the preview image in the second display pattern in that the degree of expectation of the teammate victory in the battle effect, that is, the effect design 8 is displayed in a big hit mode and the big hit. It can be said that the expectation (big hit reliability) that the game (15R big hit game or 4R big hit game) is executed is high. In the case where the battle effect based on the third effect pattern A is executed based on the “strong friendship pattern” with the big hit change, the possibility of executing the preview image using the first display pattern is increased. (See FIG. 66).

  When the third effect based on the third effect pattern A is a “strong friendship pattern” and the display of the preview image is the first display pattern, a predetermined time after the start of the display of the preview image (for example, a friend character and an enemy character) It is assumed that the first preview image 501 (big hit) may be displayed larger in the preview image display area U than at the beginning of the display at a predetermined time before the end of the battle, such as at the start of the battle of the character or during the battle. (See FIG. 65 (e)). The enlarged display of the preview image is based on the preview effect pattern set in S4506 described above. When the preview effect pattern including the enlarged display of the preview image is selected (set), the enlarged display of the preview image is displayed. Done. Further, with the enlarged display of the first preview image 501, the second preview image 502 (continuation) is displayed in a smaller size than at the beginning of the display or is deleted (deleted in this embodiment). That is, the display mode of the preview image being displayed in the preview image display area U changes. Thereby, the third effect (battle effect) to be executed is based on the strong ally pattern, and a big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit) may occur as a result of the change (battle effect). It is possible to suggest to the player that the score is high, and to enhance the player's sense of expectation and security. When the first notice image 501 is displayed in an enlarged manner and the second notice image 502 is deleted, it is possible to use the display to notify the big hit decision (big hit decision notification). In addition, after the first notice image 501 is enlarged and the second notice image 502 is reduced and displayed, the notice image display area is displayed such that the first notice image 501 is further enlarged or the second notice image 502 is deleted. The display mode of the preview image displayed on U may be changed stepwise. Further, as a change in the display mode of the preview image, for example, the character of “big hit” in the first preview image 501 may be changed to “super-big hit” indicating a 15R big hit, or the character of “big hit” and its background color may be changed. For example, the characters, colors, shapes, and the like constituting the preview image may be changed. Further, the change of the characters and the like and the change of the display size (enlarged display, reduced display, etc.) of the present embodiment may be configured to be executable.

  On the other hand, when the third effect based on the third effect pattern A is executed based on a pattern other than the “strong ally pattern”, that is, “the weak ally pattern”, “the strong enemy pattern” or “the weak enemy pattern” In any of these three patterns, the first preview image 501 is not enlarged and displayed, and the display mode of the preview image does not change. The display of the preview image in the preview image display area U is performed until the third effect (battle effect) or the end of the variable display. It should be noted that even when the third effect based on the third effect pattern A is other than the “strong team pattern”, the first preview image 501 can be enlarged and displayed. In this case, the “strong team pattern” It is only necessary to reduce the possibility of performing the enlarged display (change of the display mode) as compared with. This makes it easier to understand the relationship between the battle effect pattern (strong pattern, weak pattern) and the enlarged display (display mode change) of the preview image.

  Also, when reach fluctuation is performed (reach fluctuation effect pattern), and the fluctuation is performed as a deviation fluctuation (reach deviation fluctuation) based on the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment, ie, In the case where the effect symbol 8 is displayed with the reach variation (out-of-reach mode) as a result of the fluctuation display (reach out-of-reach fluctuation effect pattern), before the display of the out-of-way mode (before derivation display), the third effect pattern C (win / loss is not obtained) A third effect (a fluctuating effect based on the third fluctuating effect pattern) based on the settlement pattern) is performed. Since the game in the state C is continued after the fluctuation display is stopped (after the display of the departure mode), the third effect pattern C (third fluctuation effect pattern) is confronted without a win or loss (battle). It is a pattern to finish. Then, in the fluctuation (out-of-reach fluctuation), the first advance notice image 501 and the first notice image 501 are displayed at a predetermined time during the fluctuation before the third effect (battle effect) starts, such as at the start of the fluctuation or at the time of reaching a reach. The display of the second notice image 502 (first display pattern) or the display of the second notice image 502 and the third notice image 503 (second display pattern) is started. At this time, when the preview image is displayed using the first display pattern, the player has no possibility of generating at least a 2R jackpot (the possibility of ending the state C) as a result of the fluctuation (battle effect). It can be inferred. On the other hand, when the preview image is displayed by the second display pattern, the player is unlikely to generate at least a big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit) as a result of the fluctuation (battle effect). You can guess. In the present embodiment, the display of the preview image in the case where the third effect based on the third effect pattern C (the battle effect of undecided winning or losing) is executed due to the out-of-reach fluctuation, the first display pattern and the second display The selectivity of each pattern is set to 50% so that the feasibility is the same for each pattern (see FIG. 66).

  Here, the display of the preview image in the first display pattern (big hit or continuation) is also a display indicating that the game in the state C can be executed thereafter, and thus the game in the state C ends. It does not give the player the anxiety of getting lost. On the other hand, the display of the preview image in the second display pattern (continuation or staging mode E) cannot exclude the possibility that the 2R jackpot occurs, and the game in the state C cannot be continued. Since it also includes sex, such anxiety is given to the player. The display of the preview image in the first display pattern or the second display pattern in the out-of-reach fluctuation is performed at a predetermined time after the start of the display (for example, during a confrontation between an ally character and an enemy character or at the end of the confrontation). Only the second notice image 502 (continuation) is displayed, and the other notice images (the first notice image 501 or the third notice image 503) are deleted (change in the display mode of the notice image). As a result, the player recognizes that the game in the state C is continued without a big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit) being generated as a result of the fluctuation (battle effect). Can be. Thus, the display of the preview image in which only the second preview image 502 (continuation) is finally left in the preview image display area U is performed until the end of the variable display.

  It should be noted that, in the out-of-reach fluctuation, the big hit mode is not displayed (the big hit occurs) as a result of the fluctuation display. The enlarged display 501 is not performed. Further, in the out-of-reach fluctuation, after the display of the preview image in the first display pattern or the second display pattern is started, the enlarged display of the second preview image 502 may be executed. The second advance notice image 502 is an advance notice image that gives advance notice (suggestion) of continuation of the state C in which small hits frequently occur. Since the continuation possibility of the state C is notified (suggested) in advance, it is possible to alleviate the player's anxiety that the game in the state C ends.

  In the case where reach fluctuation is performed (reach fluctuation effect pattern), the fluctuation is based on the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination being a 2R big hit (2R fifth to eighth big hit). When the change is performed as a 2R jackpot change, that is, when the effect design 8 is displayed as a reach variation eye (2R jackpot change effect pattern) as a result of the change display (2R jackpot change effect pattern), before the display of the 2R jackpot change mode (before derivation display) ), A third effect (a variable effect based on the second variable effect pattern) based on the third effect pattern B (a friendly defeat pattern) is performed. After the fluctuation display is stopped (after the 2R big hit mode is displayed), the big hit game of 2R is performed, the game state after the big hit game becomes state B (high base state), and the game in state C is continued. Therefore, the third effect pattern B (second variable effect pattern) is a pattern in which the ally character is defeated. Then, in the fluctuation (2R big hit fluctuation), for example, at the start of the fluctuation or when a reach is established, the second notice image 502 and the second notice image are displayed at a predetermined time during the fluctuation before the third effect (battle effect) starts. Display of the third notice image 503 (second display pattern) is started. By displaying the second notice image 502 and the third notice image 503, the player estimates that there is a possibility of a 2R jackpot (possibility of ending state C) as a result of the change (battle effect). be able to. In the present embodiment, the display of the preview image in the case where the third effect (the battle effect of ally defeating) based on the third effect pattern B is executed with the 2R big hit variation is not executed in the first display pattern. This is executed only with the second display pattern (see FIG. 66). This is because the game in the state C is terminated by the occurrence of the 2R big hit despite the display of the preview image by the first display pattern (the preview effect suggesting a relatively advantageous game development) (relative game). This is because the game development is disadvantageous for the player). By doing so, the display of the preview image and the third effect (battle effect) are coordinated, and when displaying the notice image (information display effect) and the third effect (battle effect), the player feels discomfort and distrust. It is possible not to give a feeling.

  Thereafter, the display of the preview image in the second display pattern in the fluctuation (2R big hit fluctuation) is performed at a predetermined time after the start of the display (for example, during a confrontation between the ally character and the enemy character or at the end of the confrontation). Only the third notice image 503 (effect mode E) is displayed, and the second notice image 502 (continuation) is deleted (change of the notice image display mode). Thereby, the player recognizes that two big hits (any of the 2R fifth to eighth big hits) have occurred as a result of the fluctuation (battle effect), and the game in the state C has ended. it can. Thus, the display of the preview image in which only the third preview image 503 (effect mode E) finally remains in the preview image display area U is performed until the end of the variable display.

  As described above, in the effect mode D, when the reach fluctuation or the out-of-reach fluctuation is performed, the contents (game development) of the game that can be executed after the fluctuation are announced (imposed) based on the fluctuation effect pattern related to the fluctuation. The preview image to be displayed is displayed on the display screen 7a (the preview image display area U). This notice image includes a first notice image 501 (first information) that gives notice (suggestion) of the occurrence of a big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit) which triggers the setting of the state C (high-accuracy low base state). And a second advance notice image 502 (second information) for announcing (suggesting) the continuation of the state C, and announcing (suggesting) that the game state shifts to the state B (the end of the game in the state C) triggered by the 2R jackpot. ) (Third information), and the display patterns of these notice images include a first display pattern composed of a combination of the first notice image 501 and the second notice image 502, and a second notice image. There is a second display pattern composed of a combination of 502 and a third notice image 503. The display of the preview image based on the first display pattern or the second display pattern is performed in the third effect from the start of the fluctuation before the reach uncertainty is determined in the reach-influenced fluctuation and from the start of the fluctuation in the reach fluctuation. By starting at a predetermined time before the result of the (battle effect) is clarified (before the end of the battle effect or the change), state C (advantageous state in which small hits frequently occur) continues due to the change (victory) Thus, it is possible to obtain a staging effect that stirs up the player's expectations and anxiety, such as whether to end (undecided) or end (defeat). Further, when the reach fluctuation is a big hit fluctuation, depending on the mode of the third effect (battle effect) (such as a strong ally pattern or a weakly ally pattern) in the fluctuation, the third effect is executed after the display of the preview image is started. At a predetermined time in the middle (during the battle effect), the display mode of the preview image displayed at that time can be changed. Such a change in the display mode attracts the player's interest to the preview image being displayed, and indicates at an early stage before the end of the change that the later game development is likely to be advantageous to the player, It is possible to enhance the player's sense of expectation and security.

[Mode selection period]
Next, a mode selection period for selecting the effect mode in the state C will be described. As described above, when the gaming state is controlled to the state C (high-accuracy low-base state), one of the effect modes C and D is set, and the effect mode to be set is selected. Is performed based on the operation of the first effect button 63a by the player. The selection of the effect mode can be executed at a predetermined time when a big hit occurs which triggers the setting of the state C (high-accuracy low-base state). In the present pachinko gaming machine 1, “4R first big hit”, “15R third big hit” and “4R fourth big hit” are the big hits that trigger the setting of the state C (high-accuracy low base state) (see FIG. 6). ), The effect modes C and D can be selected at a predetermined time when these big hits occur.

  In the present embodiment, at a predetermined time after the start of the big hit game, a mode selection period in which the effect mode after the end of the big hit game can be selected from the two effect modes C and D is generated. The occurrence timing (occurrence timing) of this mode selection period differs between “4R first big hit” and “4R fourth big hit” and “15R third big hit”. Note that the sub-control unit 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91) performs control processing related to effect mode selection, such as generation of a mode selection period and selection of an effect mode based on operation of the first effect button 63a during the mode selection period. It is executed under control, and specifically, is executed by the hit game effect process (S4408) of the received command analysis process (S4302).

  First, when a big hit symbol (specific display result) is displayed in state A (left-handed game) and "4R first big hit" occurs, that is, when "4R first big hit" occurs as an initial hit, Mode selection when the big hit symbol (specific display result) is displayed in B or C (right-handed game) and “4R fourth big hit” occurs, that is, when “4R fourth big hit” occurs as a connected suite The period occurs in the ending period after all rounds of the 4R jackpot game have been completed. Here, as described above, when the last round of the jackpot game ends (when the value of the round counter becomes “0”), the main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) sets the jackpot ending command and (S2116), the big hit ending period starts (S2117). When the sub-control unit 90 receives the ending command, the sub-control unit can recognize the start of the ending period. The ending command is, for example, “4R ending command” for “4R first big hit” and “4R fourth big hit”, and “15R ending command” for “15R third big hit”. It is provided according to the type of big hit. The ending period is executed until a predetermined ending time elapses. In the present embodiment, the ending time for the 4R jackpot game is set to “15 seconds”, and the ending time for the 15R jackpot game is set to “5 seconds”. Seconds ". Note that the ending time shown in the present embodiment is an example, and can be arbitrarily determined in consideration of the specifications of the gaming machine, the playability, and the like.

  Upon receiving the ending command, the sub-control unit 90 transmits an ending effect command corresponding to the received ending command to the image control board 100 (image control unit). In response, an ending effect is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the ending effect is triggered by the 4R ending command, as shown in FIG. 62, a mode selection screen 700 is displayed on the entire display screen 7a as the ending effect. The mode selection screen mainly includes an image 701 (hereinafter, also referred to as “mode C selection image”) indicating “effect mode C” and an image 702 (hereinafter, also referred to as “mode D selection image”) indicating “effect mode D”. Are arranged side by side on the right and left, and an image 703 (hereinafter also referred to as a “button image”) imitating the first effect button 63a is arranged between the left and right sides. By displaying such a mode selection screen 700, the player is notified that the mode selection period is being performed.

  When the player operates the first effect button 63a while the mode selection screen 700 is displayed, an image 701 (mode C selection image) and an image 702 (mode D selection image) to be selected alternately for each operation. The highlighted image (that is, the effect mode) is represented as being selected (see FIGS. 62A and 62B). In the present embodiment, the mode selection image (effect mode) being selected is displayed (emphasized) in a form surrounded by a thick frame, and the unselected mode selection image (effect mode) is displayed darker (dark display). I have. Therefore, the player operates the first effect button 63a so that the mode selection image corresponding to the desired effect mode is highlighted, and selects the effect mode of the subsequent state C (high-accuracy low-base state). can do.

  In this embodiment, the mode selection period after the end of 4R is set to 10 seconds from the start of the ending period. Then, at the timing when 12 seconds have elapsed from the start of the mode selection period (start of the ending period), a countdown display indicating the remaining period until the end of the mode selection period is started above the button image (FIG. 62 (c)). reference). The countdown display is performed in such a manner that the numeral image 704 is displayed by subtracting 1 from “3” → “2” → “1” at a time. By this countdown display, the player is notified that the mode selection period is about to end (notification before the end of the selection period). When the number image 704 becomes “1” in the countdown display, the countdown display ends shortly thereafter, thereby ending the mode selection period. At this time, the highlighted mode selection image (enclosed in a bold frame) is displayed as the selected effect mode (selection result). Thereafter, an effect display (not shown) indicating the transition to the state C is executed on the display screen 7a until the ending period ends. The effect mode (C or D) selected in this way is set as an effect mode of the state C to be executed (started) thereafter, and thereafter, in the state C, the effect mode (C or D) set (selected). Under the effect symbol game effect is executed.

  On the other hand, when the big hit symbol (specific display result) is displayed in the state B or C (right-handed game) and the “15R third big hit” occurs, that is, the “15R third big hit” occurs as a series of hits In this case, the mode selection period occurs in a predetermined round game during the 15R jackpot game. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the mode selection period is from the start of 14R to the middle of 15R among 1R to 15R. Here, as described above, with the start of the round game, the main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) sets a round start command (S2106), and the sub control unit 90 receives the round start. , The sub control unit can recognize the start of the round game. The round start command is provided according to the number of rounds to be started (executed), for example, “1R start command”, “2R start command”... “15R start command”.

  When the sub-control unit 90 receives a “13R start command” designating the start of the round game immediately before the 14R (predetermined round game) that is the start round of the mode selection period, that is, the start of the 13R, Is transmitted to the image control board 100 (image control unit). In response, a 13R round effect is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the 13R round effect, as shown in FIG. 63A, the 13R round effect screen 800 is displayed on the entire display screen 7a, and a part of the round effect screen 800 (the upper left of the screen in this embodiment). A notification screen 810 indicating that the mode can be selected from the next round (14R) is displayed. By displaying the notification screen 810, the player is notified that the mode selection period starts from the next round (14R in the present embodiment) (notification before the start of the selection period, first notification means). In this way, after the effect that the selection of the effect mode can be selected (the mode selection period is started) is notified in advance, the effect mode of the effect mode in a new mode such as the occurrence (start) of the effect mode selection period is reached. Selection is possible. This makes it possible to attract the player's interest to the effect mode selection.

  The round effect screen 800 also displays a predetermined round effect image (not shown), an image indicating the current number of rounds, a prize ball count image C1, and the like. The prize ball count image C1 displayed here is added and displayed for each ball entered based on the ball entry into the first large winning opening 30 during reception of the big hit game (reception of the first large winning opening ball entry command). It is displayed continuously even in the state C after the big hit game is over, and then enters the second big winning opening 35 in the small hit game or the first big game in the big hit game. The addition display is also performed when the ball enters the winning opening 30. Therefore, the prize ball count image C1 displays the total number of obtained prize balls during the extended period from the initial hit.

  Next, upon receiving the “14R start command” designating the start of 14R, which is the start round of the mode selection period, the sub-control unit 90 transmits a corresponding round effect command to the image control board 100 (image control unit). I do. In response to this, a 14R round effect is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the 14R round effect, as shown in FIG. 63B, the 14R round effect screen 800 is displayed on the entire display screen 7a, and a part of the round effect screen 800 (the upper left of the screen in this embodiment). A mode selection screen 900 is displayed. The mode selection screen 900 has the same screen configuration as that of the mode selection screen 700 (see FIG. 62) in the mode selection period that occurs during the ending period of the 4R jackpot game described above. I have. With the display of the mode selection screen 900, the player is notified that the mode is being selected (notification during the selection period, second notification means). The effect mode selection on the mode selection screen 900 (upside-down switching of the mode selection image) is the same as the effect mode selection on the mode selection screen 700 described above with reference to FIGS. 62 (a) and 62 (b). Therefore, a detailed description of the effect mode selection in the 14R will be omitted. Note that the screen configuration (display content) of the mode selection screen 900 may be different from part or all of the mode selection screen 700 displayed during the mode selection period during the ending period, and the mode may be displayed on the entire display screen 7a. The selection screen 900 may be displayed.

  Next, upon receiving a “15R start command” designating the start of the 15R following the start round (14R) of the mode selection period, the sub-control unit 90 transmits a corresponding round effect command to the image control board 100 (image control unit). ). In response to this, a 15R round effect is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the 15R round effect, as shown in FIG. 63 (c), the 15R round effect screen 800 is displayed on the entire display screen 7a, and a part of the round effect screen 800 (the upper left of the screen in this embodiment). A mode selection screen 900 is displayed. At this time, on the mode selection screen 900, a countdown display starts at the start of 15R. This countdown display is the same as the countdown display on the mode selection screen 700 during the ending period described above (see FIG. 62 (c)), and the numerical image changes from “3” to “2” as the 15R progresses. It decreases to "1" (see FIG. 63 (d)). By this countdown display, the player is notified that the mode selection period is about to end (notification before the end of the selection period, third notification means). Then, the countdown display ends in the middle of 15R (when about 3 seconds have elapsed from the start of 15R), and the mode selection period ends.

  Thereafter, until the end of 15R, the mode selection screen 900 is displayed on the display screen 7a together with the round effect screen 800, and the selected effect mode (selection result) is displayed on the mode selection screen 900. The selected production mode (C or D) is set as the production mode of the state C to be executed (started) thereafter, and thereafter, in the state C, the set (selected) production mode (C or D) Under the effect design game effect is executed.

  As described above, when a big hit that triggers the setting of the state C (high-accuracy low-base state) occurs, the effect mode of the state C is changed to the “effect mode C” at a predetermined time after the big hit game related to the big hit is started. ”Or“ effect mode D ”occurs. Regarding the generation timing (start timing) of this mode selection period, a 4R first big hit occurs in state A (left-handed game) and a 15R third big hit occurs in state B or C (right-handed game). The time of occurrence differs depending on the case. That is, the timing of the mode selection period differs between the initial hit in state A, which is a gaming state in which a left-handed game is played, and the continuous hit in state B or C, which is a gaming state in which a right-handed game is played. It has become something. In other words, the type of the jackpot game to be executed (type of jackpot), that is, the 4R jackpot game (4R first jackpot, 4R fourth jackpot) or the 15R jackpot game (15R third jackpot) , The occurrence time of the mode selection period differs. For this reason, depending on the game state when the big hit occurs (whether it is the first hit or the consecutive play) or the type of the big hit game to be executed, the timing at which the effect mode selection becomes possible is changed, It is possible to change the mode.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, when the 4R jackpot game is executed, a mode selection period occurs during the ending period after all round games are completed, and the mode selection screen 700 is displayed (see FIG. 62). On the other hand, when the 15R jackpot game is executed, a mode selection period occurs (starts) from 14R to 15R (final R) during the jackpot game, but in 13R before (before start) the mode selection period occurs. Then, a notification screen 810 for notifying that the mode selection period starts from the next round is displayed (notification before the start of the selection period, see FIG. 63 (a)), and in 14R, the mode selection period occurs and the mode selection screen 900 is displayed. This is displayed (notification during the selection period, see FIG. 63 (b)), and a countdown display is executed at 15R (notification before the end of the selection period, see FIGS. 63 (c), (d)). As described above, in the 4R jackpot game, the player is given an opportunity to select the effect mode after all round games have been completed, and in the 15R jackpot game, the player has the opportunity to select the effect mode before all round games have ended. Given to. This makes it possible to prevent the effect mode selection from becoming monotonous, and to give the player a different impression regarding the effect mode selection.

  Also, the ending period of the 4R jackpot with a relatively small number of rounds is made longer than the ending period of the 15R jackpot with a relatively large number of rounds, and the mode selection period is generated using the ending period in the 4R jackpot. ing. For this reason, it is possible to eliminate as much as possible a negative image for the player that the number of rounds (the number of acquired prize balls) is small and the execution period of the jackpot game is short as compared with the 15R jackpot, and it is possible to suppress a decline in the game interest. Become.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the 15R big hit game is executed, the player is prompted to select an effect mode after the big hit game over a plurality of round games (13R to 15R in this embodiment). I have. For this reason, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the effect mode selection. In addition, the mode selection period is from the start of 14R (predetermined round game) to the middle of 15R (next round game), and from the start to the end of the mode selection period, the notification (selection period) Notification before the start, notification during the selection period, and notification before the end of the selection period) are performed. This makes it possible to prevent the player from losing the opportunity to select the effect mode without noticing the occurrence of the mode selection period.

[Arrangement of Image Display Device]
Next, an arrangement of the image display device provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment includes the three image display devices (display means) of the first image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72. Of the three image display devices, the first image display device 7 has a display screen 7a (display surface) facing an opening provided substantially in the center of the game board 2 (game area 3). It is provided on the back side (see FIG. 3). On the other hand, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are provided on the front left and right of the front frame 51, respectively (see FIG. 1).

  Here, as shown in FIG. 1, the front surface (game board surface) of the game board 2 is attached to the vertically long rectangular front frame 51 with the front frame 51 closed (closed state) in front of the game machine (front side). ) Is provided with a viewing window 51a (viewing portion) that can be viewed from above. The viewing window 51 a is made of a transparent glass plate, and has a vertically long, substantially elliptical shape that occupies most of the area above the hit ball supply tray 61. Through this viewing window 51a (glass plate), the player can play the game area 3 formed on the surface of the game board 2 or the display screen 7a (display content) of the first image display device 7 arranged on the back side of the game board 2. ) Etc. can be visually recognized. Further, as described above, the front frame 51 is pivotally supported so as to be openable and closable (rotatable) by the frame hinges 56 provided at the upper and lower corners at one end (the left side in this embodiment). I have.

  In the present embodiment, the second image display device 71 is provided on the front surface of such a front frame 51 and on the upper side of one end (left side) where the front frame 51 is pivotally supported. A third image display device 72 is provided above the other end (right side) facing the end (left side) (see FIG. 1). Each of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 is composed of a liquid crystal display device that is smaller than the first image display device 7 (see FIG. 3), and has a quadrangular display that is almost a square. It has screens 71a and 72a. In addition, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 maintain the front frame 51 while the respective display screens 71a, 72a maintain a substantially straight state (posture) in the vertical direction (vertical direction) when viewed from the front. Is configured to be inclined toward the side of the viewing window 51a (inside the front frame 51). As shown in FIG. 1, the degree of inclination of the display screens 71 a and 72 a is such that the angle between the display screen 71 a and the window surface of the viewing window 51 a (or the display screen 7 a of the first image display device 7) is an obtuse angle. The angle is set to a predetermined angle (for example, 130 degrees to 150 degrees), so that the player who plays the pachinko gaming machine 1 can visually recognize the display screens 71a and 72a from the front (front side) of the gaming machine. ing. As described above, since the display screens 71a and 72a are inclined toward the viewing window 51a (inside the front frame 51), the game area 3 and the first image display device 7 are displayed via the viewing window 51a. For a player who plays a game while visually checking the display screen 7a (display content), the player can visually recognize the display screens 71a and 72a (display content) of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 with a small movement of the line of sight. Becomes possible. The display contents of the first image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 will be described later.

  Note that the first image display device 7 provided on the back side of the game board 2 (inside the game area 3) is also referred to as “board side display means” or “first display means”, and has a front frame 51 (of the game area 3). The second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 provided on the (outside) are also referred to as “frame side display means” and “second display means”, and the second image display device 71 is referred to as “first frame”. The third image display device 72 is also referred to as a "second frame side display means" or a "right display means".

  As shown in FIG. 1, the second image display device 71 (first frame-side display means) of the frame-side display means is provided on the upper front surface on one side (left side) of the front frame 51. A hinge 75 for the second image display device rotatably supports the front frame 51. On the other hand, the third image display device 72 (second frame side display means) is not rotatably supported like the second image display device 71, but is on the other side end side (right side) of the front frame 51. ) Is fixed to the upper front part. As described above, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are configured (arranged) such that the display screens 71a and 72a are inclined toward the viewing window 51a (inside the front frame 51), respectively. However, since the second image display device 71 is rotatable in the horizontal direction about the axis of the hinge 75 for the second image display device, the second image display device 71 is inclined (the initial state, the first state). State) and a state (tilted state, second state) further inclined toward the viewing window 51a from that state. That is, the angle formed between the display screen 71a of the second image display device 71 and the window surface of the viewing window 51a (or the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7) is a predetermined first angle (for example, 130 to 150 degrees). And an inclined state (a second state) in which the angle formed by the initial state is a predetermined second angle (for example, 80 to 100 degrees) smaller than the first angle. It has become. On the other hand, since the third image display device 72 is fixed to the front frame 51, the angle between the display screen 72a and the window surface of the viewing window 51a (or the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7) is a predetermined angle. The angle is fixed (for example, 130 degrees to 150 degrees).

  The second image display device 71 is configured to be rotatable so as to be able to take the initial state (first state) and the inclined state (second state) for the following reasons. In other words, in the island facility where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the gaming hall, it is possible to rent (ball rental) gaming balls based on value information recorded on a recording medium (game value storage medium) such as a prepaid card. Is provided, and the card unit 135 is connected to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control board 110) (see FIG. 5). The card unit 135 connected to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is usually adjacent to the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. That is, the card unit 135 is located at one end (left side) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 where the front frame 51 and the main frame 52 are pivotally supported. For this reason. When the front frame 51 is opened or both the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are opened, the front frame 51 is connected to the axis of the frame hinges 56 on one side (left side) of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Is rotated horizontally toward the card unit 135 side (left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1). At this time, when the frame-side effect means such as the frame-side display means and the frame-side movable role is provided on one side end (the front side on the left side of the front frame 51) on which the front frame 51 and the like are pivotally supported, There is a possibility that the frame side effect means may come into contact with the card unit 135 to prevent opening of the front frame 51 and the like (rotation to the card unit 135 side). In this regard, if the second image display device 71 can be tilted (rotated) toward the viewing window 51a, which is the side facing the card unit 135, as in the present embodiment, the front frame 51 When the second image display device 71 is tilted toward the viewing window 51a (when tilted) when the second image display device 71 is opened, the presence of the second image display device 71 hinders the opening of the front frame 51 and the like. Can be avoided, and the front frame 51 and the like can be opened without any trouble.

  Further, in a state where both the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are closed, that is, in a state where the present pachinko gaming machine 1 can be played, the operation unit of the card unit 135 is operated to record on the card (recording medium). When receiving the payout of the held ball based on the held ball information or removing the card (recording medium) from the card unit 135, it is assumed that the operation position or the card removal position is near the second image display device 71. In addition, by tilting the second image display device 71 toward the viewing window 51a (in a tilted state), the operation, removal, and the like can be performed smoothly. In view of the opening of the front frame 51 and the like, the operation on the card unit 135, and the like, the second image display device 71 is rotatable. Thereby, the second image display device 71 (first frame side display means, left display means) is provided as one frame side display means on one end side (left side of the front frame 51) where the front frame 51 is pivotally supported. It is possible to adopt such a novel arrangement mode, and it is possible to make the appearance of the gaming machine feel a novelty that has never been seen before. In particular, as in the present embodiment, not only the one side end (the left side of the front frame 51) on which the front frame 51 is pivotally supported, but also the other side (the front frame 51) facing the one side end. By providing the third image display device 72 (second frame side display means, right display means) as the frame side display means also on the right side), the front frame 51 constituting the front (front) of the gaming machine is novel. And the novelty in the appearance of the gaming machine becomes even more remarkable. Such novelty in appearance is effective in stimulating a player's willingness to play.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a mechanism (maintenance means) for maintaining the second image display device 71 capable of taking the initial state and the inclined state in the initial state. Specifically, as means for maintaining the second image display device 71 in the initial state, a torsion coil spring (not shown) for urging the second image display device 71 to one side (left end) of the front frame 51 Are provided near the second image display device hinge 75. The second image display device 71 is kept in an initial state by the urging force of a torsion coil spring (urging means). Therefore, in order to bring the second image display device 71 into the inclined state, for example, the back side (the surface opposite to the display screen 71a) of the second image display device 71 is pushed by hand, and a torsion coil spring (biasing means) is used. Is applied to the second image display device 71, the second image display device 71 can be tilted (rotated) toward the viewing window 51a. Further, when the front frame 51 and the like are opened and the back surface of the second image display device 71 contacts the card unit 135, the force applied to the back surface of the second image display device 71 by the contact causes the second image display device 71 to It tilts (rotates) toward the viewing window 51a. On the other hand, when the force for tilting (rotating) the second image display device 71 toward the viewing window 51a (force against the urging force of the torsion coil spring) is released, the second image display device 71 turns the torsion coil spring (attached). To the initial state by the urging force of the urging means). Thereby, under the situation where the front frame 51 is in the closed state, the second image display device 71 can be kept in the initial state, and the display screen 71a (display content) of the second image display device 71 can be viewed well. Property can be ensured. Also, the second image display device 71 tilted toward the viewing window 51a automatically returns to the initial state when the tilting force is released, so that the second image display device 71 can be displayed without performing any special operation or treatment. The device 71 can be reliably set in the initial state.

[Display contents of image display device]
Next, display contents of three image display devices provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. In the image display devices (the first image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72) of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the effect design game effect (fluctuating effect), the notice effect (indicative effect), Various effect displays such as big hit game effects and demonstration effects can be executed (effect display executing means). Hereinafter, the display contents of the image display device will be described, focusing on the effect symbol game effect (variable effect) and the notice effect (suggested effect) when the gaming state is controlled to state A (low-probability low-base state). .

[Display contents of staging pattern game effects]
First, the display contents of the image display device when an effect symbol game effect is executed in state A will be described. The effect display related to the effect symbol game effect is mainly executed on the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a) (see FIG. 54). In state A, as described above, since “A” or “B” is set as the effect mode, the background image corresponding to the effect mode A or B is displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7. The effect design 8 is displayed on the display screen 7a under the background display. Then, depending on the variable effect pattern or the notice effect pattern set at the start of the change display of the effect symbol 8, the effect display related to the reach effect, the notice effect, or the like is added to the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a). It may be executed also in the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) or the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a). In other words, the effect display is mainly performed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7, and the effect display is assisted on the display screen 71a of the second image display device 71 or the display screen 72a of the third image display device 72. There is. For this reason, the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a) is also called “main display device” or “main liquid crystal”, and the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) and the third image display device 72 ( The display screen 72a) is also called a “sub-display device” or a “sub-liquid crystal”.

  In the present embodiment, a variation mode (normal variation) without reach and a variation mode with reach (reach variation) are provided as the variation mode (fluctuation rendering pattern) of the effect symbol 8. A normal reach production and a super reach production (also referred to as “SP reach”) are provided. For this reason, when the reach fluctuation is executed, any of the reach effects is set in the above-described S4505 based on the fluctuation pattern designation command and the fluctuation effect pattern determination table. When the super reach effect is executed, the possibility of a big hit (big hit reliability) is set to be higher than when the normal reach effect is executed.

  When the sub-control unit 90 receives the change start command from the main control unit 80 under the specifications of such a change effect (S4403), the first image display is performed based on the change effect pattern set in response thereto. The variable display of the effect symbol 8 is started on the display screen 7a of the device 7 (variable display start means). The fluctuation display is a normal fluctuation without reach, a reach fluctuation due to a normal reach effect (also referred to as “normal reach fluctuation”), and a reach fluctuation due to a super reach effect (also referred to as “SP reach fluctuation”). In the case of the SP reach fluctuation excluding the SP reach fluctuation, the fluctuation display and the effect display such as the reach related to the fluctuation are displayed on the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a) from the start to the end as shown in FIG. ), And is not performed on the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) and the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a). However, as will be described later, a notice effect (suggested effect, suggestive display) relating to the variable display and a subsequent variable display (variable display based on suspension of a special figure) is made by the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) and the third image display. It may be performed on one or both of the image display device 72 (display screen 72a). FIG. 67 shows an example of normal fluctuation without reach. Further, the effect display related to the reach effect (normal reach fluctuation, SP reach fluctuation) is also referred to as “specific display”.

  Here, a predetermined background image (predetermined display) is usually displayed on each of the display screens 71a, 72a of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 (predetermined display execution means). This background image is different from the background image (not shown) displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7 on which the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed, etc., and is common to the effect modes A and B. It is an image, and is a unique (dedicated) background image (predetermined display) when an effect display related to a fluctuating effect or a notice effect is not performed on the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72. For this reason, the background image displayed on the display screen 7a (main liquid crystal) is also referred to as “main background” or “main background”, and the background image displayed on the display screens 71a and 72a is referred to as “sub background”. Or "sub background". In FIG. 67 and the like, background images (sub-backgrounds, sub-backgrounds) displayed on the display screens 71a and 72a are shaded.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 67, when the sub-background is displayed on each of the display screens 71a and 72a of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72, the display screen 71a (left The display means) displays a change number image 710 (predetermined display) indicating the number of symbol changes. The change number image 710 indicates the number of times (variation number) of execution of the change display of the special symbol (and the effect symbol) performed until the next big hit occurs, and the change display of the special symbol is performed once. Each time (in this embodiment, every time the fluctuation display is ended), the fluctuation frequency indicated by the fluctuation frequency image 710 is incremented by one and displayed. The display of the number-of-variations image 710 is performed under the control of the sub-control unit 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91) based on the fluctuation stop command from the main control unit 80 (predetermined display execution means). On the other hand, an effect mode image 720 (predetermined display) indicating the current effect mode is displayed on the display screen 72a (right display means) on which the sub background is displayed. The effect mode image 720 indicates the effect mode name (for example, ○ mode corresponding to effect mode A, △△ mode corresponding to effect mode B, etc.) indicating the type of effect mode currently set in state A. The display is performed based on a mode status set under the control of the sub-control unit 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91) (predetermined display execution means).

  On the other hand, when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 to be executed is the specific SP reach variation among the SP reach variations, as the execution mode of the variation display (effect display) related to the specific SP reach variation, in the present embodiment, Broadly speaking, two modes are provided. More specifically, one of the modes is a reach state from the beginning of the fluctuation display relating to the specific SP reach fluctuation, and the reach effect (specific SP reach effect) relating to the fluctuation is displayed on the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a). ), The second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) and the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a). In another aspect, at the beginning of the variation display relating to the specific SP reach variation, the effect display relating to the variation is executed only on the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a). When developing to SP reach, in addition to the first image display device 7, the effect display related to the change is added to any of the second image display device 71 (display screen 71 a) and the third image display device 72 (display screen 72 a). This is a mode (also referred to as a “second mode”) in which the process is performed in one or both.

  In the present embodiment, the content (producing mode) of the specific SP reach production executed in the state A (production mode A or B) is a big hit if the ally character and the enemy character confront each other, and if the ally character wins, it becomes a big hit and defeat. The content is out of place. Such a specific SP reach production is also referred to as “specific production”. As the specific effect, a first specific effect (effect display based on the first mode) executed based on the first mode (three-screen display from the beginning) and a second specific mode (initial screen display based on the first mode) are executed. A second specific effect executed based on a two-screen display or a three-screen display later). Further, as the second specific effect (effect display based on the second aspect), a variable display (specific SP reach change) including the effect (specific SP reach effect) is initially executed (started) on the first image display device 7. "Second specific effect A" which is also executed later on the second image display device 71, and "second specific effect A" which is initially executed (started) on the first image display device 7 and later executed also on the third image display device 72. A "specific effect B" and a "second specific effect C" which is initially executed (started) on the first image display device 7 and thereafter executed on the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72. ing. For this reason, when the specific SP reach fluctuation is executed, any of the specific effects (the first specific effect, the second specific effect A to C) is executed by the change pattern designation command and the change in S4505. The specific effect is set based on the effect pattern determination table, and the set specific effect is executed (specific display executing means, effect display executing means).

  Next, the display contents of the image display device when the specific effect is executed will be described. First, when the first specific effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 68, a state where reach is established on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7 from the beginning of the variable display (effect display) (reach state). ), And an effect display indicating the start of the confrontation between the ally character and the enemy character is performed. At this time, the left symbol (staging symbol 8L) and the right symbol (staging symbol 8R) in the reach state are each displayed small in the upper left and right portions of the display screen 7a, and an effect display indicating the start of a confrontation in substantially the entire display screen 7a. (See the middle part of FIG. 68). Also, at this time, the display screen 71a of the second image display device 71 displays, instead of the sub background and the change count image 710, a sub character (“friend”) on the side of the ally character involved in the battle (battle) related to the specific effect. A sub character is also displayed on the display screen 72a of the third image display device 72, instead of the sub background and the effect mode image 720, on the enemy character side involved in the confrontation (battle) related to the specific effect. A character (also called “enemy sub-character”) is displayed (see the middle part of FIG. 68). Then, along with the progress of the change display, the confrontation scene of the ally character and the enemy character is displayed on the display screen 7a, and in the progressing process, “the ally sub character displayed on the display screen 71a supports the ally character” Effect display "," effect display in which the enemy sub-character displayed on the display screen 72a supports the enemy character ", and" the ally sub character displayed on the display screen 71a moves to the display screen 7a and joins the confrontation (the ally character side). Effect display "," effect display in which the enemy sub-character displayed on the display screen 72a moves to the display screen 7a and joins the confrontation (enemy character side) ", and the like.

  Then, in the first specific effect, as shown in FIG. 69, an effect display (ally victory scene) in which the ally character side (ally character, ally sub character) wins over the enemy character side (enemy character, enemy sub character). When this is done, the change is a big hit change, and the effect symbol 8 is displayed (stop-displayed) with a double-eye (big hit mode) (see FIG. 69 (a)). On the other hand, when an ally character side (friend character, ally sub character) loses to the enemy character side (enemy character, enemy sub character), an effect display (friend defeat scene) is performed, and the fluctuation is a deviation fluctuation (reach deviation fluctuation). In other words, the effect symbol 8 is displayed (stopped) with reach irregularities (disengagement mode) (see FIG. 69 (b)).

  Here, in the present embodiment, the effect display of the settlement scene (the ally victory scene or the ally defeat scene) indicating the end of the confrontation in the specific effect (the first specific effect, the second specific effect A to C) is mainly performed on the display screen 7a. (Main LCD). Then, in the case of the first specific effect and the second specific effect C to be described later, when the ally victory scene is displayed on the display screen 7a (main liquid crystal), as shown in FIG. 69 (a), the left display screen 71a , And the character "Ri" is displayed on the right display screen 72a, and the character "Win" is displayed on the two sub liquid crystal display screens. On the other hand, in the case of the first specific effect and the second specific effect C to be described later, when the ally defeat scene is displayed on the display screen 7a (main liquid crystal), as shown in FIG. 69 (b), the left display screen 71a The character "North" is displayed on the right display screen 72a, and the character "Lost" is displayed on the two sub-liquid crystal display screens.

  Further, when the second specific effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 70, the variable display (effect display) is started on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7, and thereafter, when the reach is established, the change display is performed. The left symbol (staging symbol 8L) and the right symbol (staging symbol 8R) stopped (temporarily stopped) due to the reaching of the reach are displayed small in the upper left and right portions of the display screen 7a, respectively. The effect display indicating the start of the enemy character's confrontation is performed, and subsequently, the effect display indicating the confrontation scene between the ally character and the enemy character is started. During this time, on the display screen 71a of the second image display device 71 and the display screen 72a of the third image display device 72, a sub-background or the like is displayed without performing any special effect display related to the variable display (described later). Unless a notice production is performed). Up to this point, the display contents are common to the second specific effects A to C.

  Then, when the second specific effect to be executed is the second specific effect A (display screen 7a → display screen 7a, 71a), as shown in FIG. 71, an effect display of a confrontation scene is started on the display screen 7a. Soon after, on the display screen 71a of the second image display device 71, the display area of the sub-background displayed on the display screen 71a gradually decreases, and the decreasing area includes the silhouette of the ally sub character. Appears (a friendly sub-character appearance effect). When the ally sub character is displayed on the entire display screen 71a through the ally sub character appearance effect, a confrontation scene between the ally character and the enemy character is displayed on the display screen 7a with the progress of the variable display. "Effect display in which the friendly sub-character displayed on the display screen 71a supports the friendly character" or "effect display in which the friendly sub-character displayed on the display screen 71a moves to the display screen 7a and participates in the confrontation (the friendly character side)" Etc. are performed. In the second specific effect A, when an effect display (friend victory scene) in which the ally character side (the ally character, the ally sub character) defeats the enemy character is performed, the change is a big hit change, and the effect design 8 Are displayed (stop-displayed) in a slotted manner (big hit mode) (see the display screen 7a in FIG. 69 (a)). On the other hand, when an effect display (friend defeat scene) in which the ally character side (the ally character, the ally sub character) loses to the enemy character is performed, the fluctuation is a deviation fluctuation (reach deviation fluctuation), and the effect symbol 8 Are displayed (stop display) with reach irregularities (disengagement mode) (see the display screen 7a in FIG. 69 (b)).

  Although the appearance of the friendly sub character has started on the display screen 71a, the appearance of the friendly sub character ends before the friendly sub character is displayed on the entire display screen 71a. It is also possible to provide a pattern that returns to the display of. In other words, it is also possible to provide an effect for appearance of a sub character of Gase. In this case, an SP reach effect in which a confrontation scene is displayed on the display screen 7a (main liquid crystal) without using the display screens 71a and 72a (sub liquid crystal).

  When the second specific effect to be executed is the second specific effect B (display screen 7a → display screen 7a, 72a), an effect display of a confrontation scene is started on the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. Soon after, on the display screen 72a of the third image display device 72, the display area of the sub-background displayed on the entire display screen 72a gradually decreases, and the decreasing area includes the silhouette of the enemy sub-character. Appears (enemy sub-character appearance effect). After the enemy sub-character appearance effect, the enemy sub-character is displayed on the entire display screen 72a. Thereafter, along with the progress of the variable display, the confrontation scene between the ally character and the enemy character is displayed on the display screen 7a, "Effect display in which the enemy sub-character displayed on the display screen 72a supports the enemy character", "Effect display in which the enemy sub-character displayed on the display screen 72a moves to the display screen 7a and joins the confrontation (enemy character side)", etc. Is performed. In such a second specific effect B, when an effect display (friend victory scene) in which the ally character defeats the enemy character side (enemy character, enemy sub character) is performed, the change is a big hit change, and the effect symbol 8 Are displayed (stop-displayed) in a slotted manner (big hit mode) (see the display screen 7a in FIG. 69 (a)). On the other hand, when an effect display (friend defeat scene) in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character side (enemy character, enemy sub character) is performed, the change is a change in deviation (reach deviation change), and the effect symbol 8 Are displayed (stop display) with reach irregularities (disengagement mode) (see the display screen 7a in FIG. 69 (b)).

  Although the enemy sub-character appearance effect has started on the display screen 72a, the enemy sub-character appearance effect ends before the enemy sub character appears on the entire display screen 72a, and the entire display area of the display screen 72a becomes a sub-background. It is also possible to provide a pattern that returns to the display of. In other words, it is also possible to provide an enemy sub-character appearance effect of gas. In this case, an SP reach effect in which a confrontation scene is displayed on the display screen 7a (main liquid crystal) without using the display screens 71a and 72a (sub liquid crystal).

  Further, when the second specific effect to be executed is the second specific effect C (display screen 7a → display screens 7a, 71a, 72a), as shown in FIG. 73, the effect display of the confrontation scene is displayed on the display screen 7a. Shortly after the start, on the display screens 71a and 72a of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72, the display area of the sub-background displayed on the entire display screen gradually decreases, The effect display (sub character appearance effect) in which the silhouette of the friendly sub character (display screen 71a) and the silhouette of the enemy sub character (display screen 72a) appear in the decreasing area. When the sub-characters are displayed on the entire display screen 72a after the appearance of the sub-characters, the display screen 7a displays the confrontation scene of the ally character and the enemy character with the progress of the variable display, and also displays the “display screen”. The effect display that the ally sub character displayed on the display screen 71a supports the ally character, the “effect display that the enemy sub character displayed on the display screen 72a supports the enemy character”, and the “display display that the ally sub character displayed on the display screen 71a displays the display screen 71a” 7A, an effect display in which the enemy sub-character displayed on the display screen 72a moves to the display screen 7a and joins the confrontation (the enemy character side), and the like. . In the second specific effect C, when an effect display (friend victory scene) in which the ally character side (the ally character and the ally sub character) wins over the enemy character side (the enemy character and the enemy sub character), the fluctuation is a big hit fluctuation. That is, the effect symbol 8 is displayed (stop-displayed) in a double-eye (big hit mode) (see the display screen 7a in FIG. 69 (a)). On the other hand, when an ally character side (friend character, ally sub character) loses to the enemy character side (enemy character, enemy sub character), an effect display (friend defeat scene) is performed, and the fluctuation is a deviation fluctuation (reach deviation fluctuation). This means that the effect symbol 8 is displayed (stop-displayed) with reach irregularities (out of alignment) (see the display screen 7a in FIG. 69 (b)).

  Although the sub-character appearance effect is started on the display screens 71a and 72a, the sub-character appearance effect in which the ally sub character and the enemy sub character are displayed on the entire display screen ends, and the display area of the display screens 71a and 72a is displayed. It is also possible to provide a pattern in which the whole returns to the display of the sub-background. In other words, it is also possible to provide a sub-character appearance effect of gasses. In this case, an SP reach effect in which a confrontation scene is displayed on the display screen 7a (main liquid crystal) without using the display screens 71a and 72a (sub liquid crystal).

  The big hit reliability of the second specific effects A to C is the highest in the big hit reliability of the second specific effect A (the friendly character, the friendly sub character VS enemy character) in view of the fact that the friendly character wins the big hit. In the following, the jackpot reliability is determined in the order of the second specific effect C (friend character, friendly sub character VS enemy character, enemy sub character) and the second specific effect B (friend character VS enemy character, enemy sub character). It is set to be low.

  As described above, the effect design game effect that can be executed in the state A is illustrated. However, the pachinko gaming machine 1 further includes various variable effects (variable effect patterns) having different display contents (effect modes). It is needless to say that this can also be executed by using one or more of the first image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72. In particular, the effect display (specific display) related to the reach effect is similar to the first specific effect and the second specific effect described above, in addition to the first image display device 7, the second image display device 71 and the third image display. By providing a mode in which the process is performed using one or both of the devices 72, it is possible to further enhance the effect.

  As described above, when an effect symbol game effect (variable effect) is executed in the state A, the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) and the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) are mainly used for the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a). An effect display can be executed by adding one or both of the three image display devices 72 (display screen 72a). For this reason, after the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is started on the first image display device 7, regarding the effect display related to the variation, in addition to the first image display device 7, the second image display device 71 and the third image are displayed. The player can be made to pay attention to the display device 72, and a wide range of display inside and outside the game area can be performed. As a result, it is possible to display an effect with an impact, and it is possible to increase the variation of the effect display and enhance interest.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation display based on the specific SP reach fluctuation is executed, that is, when the specific effects (the first specific effects and the second specific effects A to C) are executed, the fluctuation display is performed. There is also a mode (first mode) in which the effect display is executed on the three image display devices from the beginning of the display, and the effect display is executed on the first image display device 7 at the start of the variable display, and then the second image is displayed. There is also a mode (second mode) in which effect display is executed on one or both of the display device 71 and the third image display device 72. Thus, it is possible to prevent the execution mode of the effect display related to the variable display from being uniform, and to enhance the interest when the effect display related to the variable display is performed.

  Further, when the variable display including the second specific effect is executed, the variable display is first started on the first image display device 7, and thereafter, the effect display indicating the confrontation scene between the ally character and the enemy character is established. Is started on the display screen 7a, the display area of one or both of the sub-backgrounds of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 gradually decreases, and the reduced display area is displayed. The area changes to the display area of the sub-character appearance effect. That is, the effect that the display area of the effect display related to the fluctuation gradually expands from the first image display device 7 to one or both of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 is executed. It is possible. Thereby, it is possible to enhance interest in the case where the variable display including the second specific effect is executed.

[Displayed contents of notice effect]
Next, the display content of the image display device when the notice effect is executed in the state A (low-probability low-base state) will be described. As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the notice effect is provided based on the effect hold information (preliminary determination result and the like) stored in S4402 and the notice effect pattern set in S4506 (see FIG. 52). (Suggestion effect, suggestion display) can be executed (suggestion display execution means). In the present embodiment, in the state A (low-accuracy low-base state), as a notice effect that can be executed using the image display devices (the first image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72). , With multiple announcements. In the following, among the notice effects, five types from the first notice effect to the fifth notice effect will be described. Note that the announcement effect described below includes an announcement effect (the variation announcement) indicating that the display result of the currently-displayed variation display (the variation) may be a big hit (specific display result), There is an announcement effect (suspended look-ahead advance announcement) that suggests that the display result of the variable display executed based on the special map suspension may be a big hit (specific display result).

  First, the first announcement effect is performed on the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a), and the first effect suspension displayed in the first effect suspension display area 9c (first effect suspension display unit). This is a notice effect (also referred to as "effect hold notice") according to the display mode 9a. This first notice effect (effect reservation notice) is executed as a reservation pre-read notice. Since the state A is a low-probability and low-base state, the variable display of the first special symbol is usually mainly performed. Corresponding to this, in the state A, the suspension notice is executed based on the result of the preliminary determination (S322) of the acquired information (the first special figure suspension) acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 20. It has become possible. The control related to the execution of the first notice effect (effect hold notice) is performed by the sub-control unit 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91). By referring to the effect suspension information stored in S4402 by the microcomputer for use 91), it is possible to recognize on the sub-control side.

  As shown in FIG. 74 (a), in the present embodiment, the production effect suspension notice is given by the display color of the first production suspension 9a. For this reason, the display color of the first effect hold 9a is provided with a normal color corresponding to the case where the effect suspension notice is not performed and a notice color corresponding to the case where the effect suspension notice is performed. I have. The normal color is one type of “white”, and the notice colors are three types of “blue”, “green”, and “red”. The sub-control unit 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91) determines whether or not to execute the effect suspension notice when the game ball enters the first starting port 20 (the occurrence of the first special figure suspension). When the result of the determination to execute is obtained, an effect suspension notice is executed. As a condition for effecting the production suspension notice, for example, at least one first special figure reservation is stored (special figure 1 reserved ball number ≧ 1), and the first special figure reservation stored at that time is stored. It is possible to determine that a predetermined execution lottery is performed when the production suspension notice is not given, and that the lottery is won. Note that the execution condition of the production hold notice is not limited to this. For example, the condition is that two or more first special figure reservations are stored. The suspension notice may be made executable.

  In the case of performing the effect hold notice, the sub-control unit 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91) executes the display color (notice color) of the first effect hold 9a, that is, the execution pattern of the effect hold notice (the first notice effect pattern). ). This determination is made based on an effect-holding-advancement-notification determining table shown in FIG. 74 (b), which is a kind of the notification-effecting-advancement determining table, and an effect-holding-advancement-notifying determination random number taking a value in the range of 0 to 99. The sub-control unit 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91) selects the first special figure reservation which is the target of the production suspension notice based on the result of the preliminary determination (the production reservation information), and the first special figure reservation is “missing”. Any one of “hold 1”, “missing hold 2”, “missing hold 3”, and “big hit hold” is specified, and the display color (first notice effect pattern) of the first effect holding 9a corresponding thereto is specified. Then, it is determined (selected) with reference to the production suspension notice determination table. Here, “off-hold 1” is the first special-figure hold on which normal fluctuation (off) is performed, “off-hold 2” is the first special-figure hold on which normal reach fluctuation (off) is performed, and “off-hold” “3” is the first special map reservation in which SP reach fluctuation (out) is performed, and “big hit reservation” is the first special map reservation in which the big hit fluctuation is performed. In the present embodiment, the big hit reliability is set to be the highest when the display color of the first effect holding 9a is "red", and the big hit reliability is set to "green" and "blue" in the following order. Is set to be low (see FIG. 74 (b)). It should be noted that the production suspension notice can be made by, for example, a difference in the shape (design) or size of the production suspension other than the production suspension color. Further, each element such as color, shape, size, etc. It is also possible to carry out by a combination of. The execution timing of the production suspension notice may be various timings, such as when a game ball enters the first starting port 20 (when the first special figure suspension occurs) or during the fluctuation display of the production design 8 on the display screen 7a. It is possible to

  The second announcement effect is performed on the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a), and is an announcement effect (also referred to as a “number display announcement”) based on the display mode of the fluctuation count image 710 displayed on the display screen 71a. ). As described above, when the effect display such as the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is performed on the first image display device 7 and the sub-background is displayed on the display screen 71a of the second image display device 71, the display screen 71a is displayed. , A change count image 710 is displayed (see FIG. 67 and the like). The second notice effect (the notice of the number of changes display) utilizes the image 710 of the number of changes (display of the number of changes), and relates to the variable display of the effect symbol 8 being executed on the first image display device 7. Is executed as the change notice indicating that the possibility that the display result of (1) is a big hit (the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the big hit mode) is higher than usual.

  The control related to the execution of the second announcement effect (the number display announcement) is performed by the sub-control unit 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91). When the variation display (the variation effect) of the effect symbol 8 is started, the second image is displayed. When the sub-background is displayed on the display device 71, it is determined whether or not to execute the frequency display notice by referring to the validity / non-permission determination result and the variation mode (variation effect pattern) related to the start variation display (variation effect pattern). Execution lottery). When the number display notice is executed, the second display effect pattern (number display notice pattern) is set as the notice effect related to the change display (S4506), and the change display of the effect symbol 8 on the display screen 7a is performed. At the same time, it is possible to execute a frequency display notice on the display screen 71a. The frequency display notice is set so that the feasibility is higher when the fluctuation display that triggers execution is SP reach fluctuation (out) or big hit fluctuation than in normal fluctuation (out). ing. In the present embodiment, the display color of the change count image 710 is normally set to “white”, and the display count is notified in advance by changing the display color to “red”. Note that the mode of the frequency display notice is not limited to the change of the display color of the fluctuation frequency image 710, but may be, for example, a change of the size, the method (arithmetic numerals, Chinese numerals, etc.), the position, or the like of the frequency display.

  The third announcement effect is executed on the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a) and the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a). May be executed. As shown in FIG. 75, the third announcement effect is an announcement effect using a fireworks display as a motif (also referred to as a “fireworks announcement”). Accordingly, fireworks are launched from the display screen 7a toward the display screen 71b, and the background of the display screen 71b becomes the background of the starry sky. And the color of the fireworks indicates the reliability of the big hit. In the present embodiment, four colors of “white”, “blue”, “green” and “red” are provided as the colors of the fireworks. Among them, “red” has the highest jackpot reliability, and hereinafter “green”, The setting is such that the big hit reliability decreases in the order of “blue” and “white”.

  The control related to the execution of the third announcement effect (fireworks announcement) is performed by the sub-control unit 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91). The fireworks notice can be executed in the same manner as in (2). That is, at the time of starting the variable display of the effect symbol 8, the type of the first special figure hold (the effect of fireworks notice execution) with reference to the first special figure hold (effect hold information) stored at that time is referred to. For example, the above-mentioned off-holds 1 to 3 and jackpot hold are specified, and the fireworks color is determined (selected) as the third notice effect pattern (fireworks notice pattern) in accordance with the specified type, and the display is performed. The fireworks notice can be executed on the display screen 7a and the display screen 71a together with the variation display of the effect symbol 8 on the screen 7a. In this case, the fireworks notice is executed each time the variable display is started until the notice target hold which has been the trigger of the fireworks notice (suspended pre-read notice) is exhausted.

  In addition, when the fireworks notice is executed as the change notice, when the change display (change effect) of the effect symbol 8 is started, the right / wrong determination result, the change mode (change effect pattern), and the like related to the start change display are referred to. Then, by determining (selecting) the color of the fireworks as the third notice effect pattern (fireworks notice pattern) (S4506), the display of the effect pattern 8 on the display screen 7a and the display screen 7a and the display screen 71a are displayed. It is possible to perform fireworks notice. The determination (selection) of the third announcement effect pattern (fireworks announcement pattern) can be performed, for example, by referring to the fireworks announcement determination table (not shown) as described in the above-mentioned effect suspension announcement. .

  The fourth notice effect is executed on the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a), and may be executed as the change notice or the prefetch notice. As shown in FIG. 76, this fourth announcement effect is an announcement effect (also referred to as “chance zone announcement”) in which characters and background of “chance zone” are displayed on the display screen 72a. When executing the zone notice), the process is started with the start of the variable display of the effect symbol 8 on the display screen 7a. In the present embodiment, the effect mode (notification effect pattern) of the fourth notification effect (chance zone notification) is one type (character display of the chance zone). However, it is of course possible to provide a plurality of modes such as the above-described first notice effect (effect reservation notice) and third notice effect (fireworks notice).

  The control related to the execution of the fourth announcement effect (chance zone announcement) is performed by the sub-control unit 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91). On the condition that two or more first special figure reservations are stored at the time of starting, it is possible to execute a chance zone notice on the display screen 72a together with the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 8 on the display screen 7a. Has become. In this case, the chance zone notice is continuously executed until the notice target hold, which has triggered the execution of the chance zone notice (hold ahead notice), is exhausted. For example, when three first special figure reservations are stored, and a chance zone notice is executed for the third first special figure reservation, an effect design based on the third first special figure reservation Until the variable display of No. 8 is executed, the character of “chance zone” is continuously displayed on the display screen 72a. Further, when the chance zone notice is executed as the change notice, when the change display (change effect) of the effect symbol 8 is started, the fourth notice effect pattern (chance zone notice pattern) is given as the notice effect relating to the change display. By setting (S4506), it is possible to execute a chance zone notice on the display screen 72a together with the variable display of the effect symbol 8 on the display screen 7a. In both the case where the chance zone notice is executed as the reservation pre-reading notice and the case where it is executed as the change notice, the first special figure suspension or the change display which is the execution trigger is more than the case where the normal change (out). The feasibility is set higher in the case of SP reach fluctuation (out of range) or big hit fluctuation.

  The fifth notice effect is performed using all of the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a), the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a), and the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a). This is executed as a notice of the change associated with the jackpot change. In other words, it is the announcement performance of the jackpot confirmation. In the present embodiment, as the mode of the variation display of the effect symbol 8 performed as the big hit variation (variable effect pattern), three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are shortly after the start of the variation display of the effect symbol 8. The fifth notice effect is an effect (“full-rotation notice”) that gives an advance notice (suggestion) of the execution (occurrence) of the full-rotation effect.

  The control related to the execution of the fifth announcement effect (full rotation announcement) is performed by the sub-control unit 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91). In the case of the big hit variation and the effect mode including the full rotation effect, the full rotation notification can be executed by setting the fifth notice effect pattern (full rotation notice pattern) (S4506). In the present embodiment, the full-rotation effect is regarded as a so-called “premier effect”, so that the possibility of executing the full-rotation notice and the full-rotation effect is extremely low.

  As shown in FIG. 77, the fifth announcement effect (full rotation announcement) of the present embodiment is displayed as “all” on the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) with the start of the variable display of the effect symbol 8. The characters “turn” are displayed on the first image display device 7 (display screen 7 a) and the character “turn” is displayed on the third image display device 72 (display screen 72 a). Displaying "full rotation" on a screen 7a (main liquid crystal) and three display screens 71a and 72a (sub liquid crystal) located on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a and outside the game area 3. It has become. After a while from the execution of the full rotation notice (the display of the character “full rotation”), the effect design of the same number is displayed one digit at a time on each of the three display screens. Mode) is displayed. That is, in front view, a left symbol (effect symbol 8L) is displayed on the left display screen 71a (left sub-liquid crystal), a middle symbol (effect symbol 8C) is displayed on the center display screen 7a (main liquid crystal), and a right display screen 72a (right sub-pixel). The right symbol (effect symbol 8R) is displayed on the liquid crystal) with the same number. This corresponds to the start of the full rotation effect. Thereafter, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the three display screens are slowly scrolled downward from the upper side of each screen in a state where they are aligned with the double eyes (from "111" to "999" in ascending order). At low speed.) After the scroll display (full rotation), any combination of “111” to “999” is stopped and displayed on each of the three display screens, and then the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are finally displayed. Is displayed (fixed display) on the display screen 7a in a big hit manner.

  The above-described first to fifth announcement effects may be executed independently, or a plurality of announcement effects may be executed at the same time, provided that the image display devices used to execute the announcement effects do not overlap. Sometimes. As a mode of executing a plurality of announcement effects at the same time, for example, a second announcement effect (display of the number of times) is displayed on the second image display device 71 while a first announcement effect (effect suspension announcement) is executed on the first image display device 7. Or a fourth notice effect (chance zone notice) on the third image display device while executing the third notice effect (fireworks notice) on the first image display device 7 and the second image display device 71. There is a mode to execute.

  As described above, the announcement effect (suggested effect, suggestion display) that can be executed in the state A has been illustrated. These can also be executed using one or more of the first image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72. In addition to the state A (production mode A, B) as well as the announcement performance that can be executed in the state B (production mode E) and the state C (production mode C, D), the first image display device 7, It can be executed using one or more of the two-image display device 71 and the third image display device 72. Further, a part or all of the first to fifth notice effects described above may be configured to be executable in state B (effect mode E) or state C (effect modes C and D).

  As described above, when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is started on the first image display device 7 (the display screen 7a), when the notice effect (the suggestive effect, the suggestive display) related to the variable display is executed, the first image is displayed. Not only the display device 7, but also the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) and the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a), in addition to which a notice effect can be executed. This allows the player to pay attention to the notice effect by the first image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the first image display device 7 (display screen 7 a) located substantially at the center of the game board 2 (inside the game area 3) and the left side of the front frame 51 (outside the game area 3) One or more image displays of the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) positioned and the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a) positioned on the right side (outside the game area 3) of the front frame 51. Since the notice effect can be executed by the device, a wide range display inside and outside the game area 3 is possible. As a result, a noticeable effect with an impact can be provided, and variations in the noticeable effect can be increased to enhance interest. In particular, in the full rotation notice (fifth notice production) for notifying the execution of the full rotation effect, the characters "full rotation" are displayed on the three display screens 7a, 71a, 72a of the first to third image display devices. After that, the effect pattern of the same number is displayed one digit at a time on each of the three display screens 7a, 71a, 72a, and the full rotation effect is performed while maintaining the zoro eyes, among "111" to "999". Is stopped and displayed on the three display screens 7a, 71a, 72a, and then the effect symbols 8 (8L, 8C, 8R) are finally stopped (fixed display) on the display screen 7a in a big hit manner. You. Thereby, regarding the stop display (display of the stop effect design) of the effect design 8 mainly performed on the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a), the stop effect design is displayed by increasing the variation of the display of the stop effect design. It is possible to enhance the interest in the event.

  In executing the first to fifth preview effects by the first to third image display devices, a plurality of preview effects are performed at the same time (with the same fluctuation display) on condition that the image display devices to be used do not overlap. It is possible to execute. In this case, since the notice effects in different modes are executed in the respective image display devices, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the notice effects that are executed in a complex manner. This makes it possible to effectively increase the player's expectation.

[Other display contents]
As described above, the effect symbol game effect (fluctuation effect) and the notice effect are usually executed in the first image display device 7 corresponding to the main liquid crystal. One or both of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 corresponding to liquid crystal are used. Then, when such a specific fluctuating effect or a notice effect is not executed, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 display the sub background, the number-of-variations image 710, and the effect mode image 720. (See FIG. 67 and the like). In this embodiment, in addition to such variation time count image 710 and effect mode image 720, it is possible to display various information to the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72.

  For example, on the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a), it is possible to display information related to the setting of a gaming machine during a game or waiting for a customer (waiting). Examples of the information regarding the setting of the gaming machine include, for example, the volume of the sound effect (effect sound) output from the speaker 67, the brightness (brightness) of the display screens 7a, 71a, and 72a, and the appearance rate of a predetermined fluctuation effect and a notice effect. There is information about the production environment. In this embodiment, on the left side of the upper surface of the hit ball supply tray 61 (upper plate) (to the left of the first effect button 63a), separately from the first effect button 63a, operating means such as an operation lever that can be operated by a player ( (Not shown) is provided, and when the operating means is operated while waiting for a customer (waiting) or during a game, the information regarding the above-described effect environment is displayed on the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a). It is something to be done. The player can operate the operation means to set the effect environment based on the displayed information according to his / her preference. It is to be noted that the operation means provided on the left side of the upper surface of the hit ball supply tray 61 (upper plate) is operated during the game by operating the firing handle 60 provided on the lower right of the front of the gaming machine with the right hand. This is because it is considered that the player's right hand is occupied and the left hand is vacant since the game ball is fired. In this way, by setting the setting relating to the effect environment using the operation means or the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) located on the left side of the center of the gaming machine, during the game (when the Even during (operating), it is possible to perform the operation related to the setting without any trouble, thereby improving the convenience.

  In addition, for example, in the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a), information on specifications such as the jackpot probability and the probability change rate (probability change entry rate) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed while waiting for the customer (waiting). It is possible. By displaying the information on the specifications on the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a) provided on the front frame 51 in this manner, for example, for a person who selects a gaming machine (model) to play a game in a gaming hall, Even if the image display device (main liquid crystal) provided on the back side of the game board (inside the game area) of the gaming machine in the waiting state (standby state) is not looked into from the front (front) of the gaming machine, the front of the gaming machine can be viewed. At a glance, the specs can be checked at a glance at the display screen of the image display device protruding to the side (outside the game area). This makes it easy to select a model to be played in the gaming hall. It should be noted that information on the specifications may be displayed on the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a).

  As described above, when the effect display related to the specific variable effect and the notice effect is not executed on the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72, the sub-background and It is possible to perform other display (predetermined display) such as the number-of-variations image 710, the effect mode image 720, the information on the setting of the gaming machine, the information on the specifications, etc., which does not hinder the effect performed on the first image display device 7. Has become. Thereby, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 can be effectively used.

[Specific reach direction]
Next, a specific reach effect (Thunder reach) 149, which is one mode of the reach effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 and 79. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment is similar to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment in the specifications and control aspects such as the probability of determining whether or not the pachinko gaming machine is the same, and a description thereof will be omitted. In the specific reach effect 149, a specific effect design ("7" in the present embodiment) is always performed during execution of the reach effect (either from the beginning of the reach effect execution or during the reach effect execution). Is performed. Therefore, when the special reach effect 149 is executed and a big hit is achieved, the big hit symbol of the specific effect symbol is stopped and displayed. The big hit (big hit type) when the specific effect symbol is stopped and displayed as the big hit symbol is a big hit (specific big hit) which is advantageous for the player. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the specific jackpot is a jackpot (first identification result) in which the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game is a low probability high base state. Therefore, when the specific reach effect (thunder reach) 149 occurs, the player can increase the sense of expectation for the occurrence of an advantageous big hit, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a plurality of reach effects (game effects) having different execution modes (effect modes) including a specific reach effect (thunder reach) 149 as reach effects (game effects). ing. Also, depending on the reach effect (game effect) to be performed, the possibility that the effect symbol (special symbol) is stopped and displayed in a big hit mode (the result of the effect symbol change display becomes a big hit), that is, the big hit reliability differs It is said.

  FIG. 78 (a) shows a scene in which the variable display of the effect symbol 8 has been started. FIG. 78 (b) shows that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are stopped and displayed at the same effect symbol (“7”) during the execution of the variation display of the effect symbol 8 as in FIG. 78 (a). The scene which reached the reach mode is shown. The effect symbol “7” is also referred to as a first specific symbol 146 (specific symbol). When a big hit occurs in the first specific symbol 146 (“777”), a big hit that is more advantageous to the player is executed than when a big hit occurs in the second specific symbol 147 (non-specific symbol) (for example, “444”). Is done. In addition, when a big hit occurs in the first specific symbol 146, the big hit becomes a big hit (first specified result) which is advantageous for a player who reliably generates the high-accuracy low base state after the big hit game ends. On the other hand, when a big hit occurs in the second specific symbol 147, the big hit becomes an unfavorable big hit (a second specifying result) that may not generate the high-accuracy low base state after the big hit game ends.

  FIG. 78C shows “Thunder reach (specific reach effect, specific game effect) in which character A appears as a reach effect (game effect) during the execution of the variation display of effect symbol 8 as in FIG. 78B. Is performed. As shown in FIG. 78 (c), a reach type display section 141 (game effect type display section) indicating the type (name) of the reach effect to be executed is displayed at the upper center portion of the display screen 7a, and the "Thunder reach" is displayed. Is displayed. In addition, a character A performing a predetermined action during the sander reach is displayed substantially at the center of the display screen 7a. Further, an effect symbol (first specific symbol 146) of “7”, which is a reach symbol (reach effect symbol), is displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a. The reach symbol (first specific symbol 146) has a smaller size when displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a than when displayed near the center of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 78 (b). Is displayed with.

  FIG. 78 (d) shows an execution mode of the sander reach (specific reach effect) during the execution of the same variation display of the effect symbol 8 as in FIG. 78 (c). More specifically, the character A144 throws the lightning design 145 at the medium effect design 8L that is variably displayed, and stabs the predetermined medium effect design 8L with the lightning design 145. Then, when the lightning design 145 stabs in the same middle design symbol ("7") as the reach design (first specific design 146), it becomes a big hit, and the middle design design different from the reach design (first specific design 146) is obtained. If pierced, it will come off. In FIG. 78 (d), a scene in which the thunder pattern 145 is stuck on the same middle-effect design (“7”) as the reach design (first specific design 146) (that is, a scene in which the determination of the big hit is notified to the player) is shown. Is shown.

  FIG. 78 (e) shows a scene in which all of the left-middle-right effect symbols are stopped at the first specific symbol 146 ("7") as a result of the sander reach (fixed stop display), and the big hit is fixed. FIG. 78 (f) shows that during the execution of the same variation display of the effect symbol 8 as in FIG. 78 (c), the thunder symbol 145 is stuck on a medium effect symbol (“6”) different from the reach symbol (first specific symbol 146). (I.e., a scene in which the player has been notified of the departure). In FIG. 78 (g), as a result of the sander reach, the left and right effect symbols are the first specific symbol 146 (“7”), and the middle effect symbol is stopped and displayed with the effect symbol (“6”) different from the reach symbol (fixed stop). Display), and shows the scene where the departure is confirmed. In this way, in the specific reach effect 149 (thunder reach), the effect symbol is always in the reach mode in the first specific symbol (specific symbol), and the reach effect is executed. When a big hit occurs in the specific reach effect 149 (thunder reach), a big hit always occurs in the first specific symbol (specific symbol), and a large hit that is relatively advantageous for the player is executed.

  Next, another execution mode of the specific reach effect 149 (Thunder reach) will be described with reference to FIG. 79. FIG. 79 (a) shows a scene where the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is started. FIG. 79 (b) shows that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are stopped and displayed at the same effect symbol (“6”) during the execution of the same variation display of the effect symbol 8 as in FIG. 79 (a) ( The intermediate effect symbol continues to fluctuate display), and shows a scene in a reach mode. The effect symbol “6” is also referred to as a second specific symbol 147 (specific symbol). When a big hit ("666") is obtained in the second specific symbol 147, a big hit with a lower (unfavorable) advantage for the player is likely to be executed than when a big hit is generated in the first specific symbol 147. Is high. Specifically, a jackpot with a low advantage for the player may be always executed, or a jackpot similar to the case where a jackpot with a low advantage is executed and the case where a jackpot is obtained in the first specific symbol is executed. May be done.

  FIG. 79 (c) shows a scene in which “Thunder reach (specific reach effect)” is executed as a reach effect (game effect) during the execution of the variation display of the effect symbol 8 as in FIG. 79 (b). I have. As described above, in the present embodiment, the “thunder reach (specific reach effect)” refers to the case where the effect symbol 8 is in the reach mode with the first specific symbol 146 and the case where the effect symbol 8 is in the reach mode with the second specific symbol 147. , Are all executable reach effects (game effects). However, in the case of “Thunder reach (specific reach production)”, if the effect design is always in the first specific design (specific design) in the reach mode and “Thunder reach (specific reach production)” is a big hit, A big hit is achieved with one specific symbol (specific symbol), and a big hit that is relatively advantageous for the player is executed.

  FIGS. 79 (d) to 79 (f) show that the reach symbol (“6”) is changed from the second specific symbol 147 (“6”) during the execution of the variable display of the effect symbol 8 as in FIG. 79 (c). A scene in which a symbol change effect 148 (change effect) changing to one specific symbol 146 ("7") is shown. FIG. 79D shows left and right reach symbols (“6”) displayed at the first position 142 (first display area) at the upper left and right of the display screen 7a. A scene in which the screen moves to a second position 143 (second display area) below the center of the screen 7a is shown. By displaying the reach symbol in an enlarged manner and moving it to a position closer to the center of the display screen, it is possible to reliably notify (visually recognize) the occurrence of the symbol change effect 148 (change effect itself) to the player. Become.

  FIGS. 79 (e) and (f) show an execution mode (effect mode) in which the second specific symbol 147 (“6”) changes to the first specific symbol 146 (“7”) in the symbol change effect 148. I have. FIG. 79 (g) shows a scene in which the changed reach symbol ("7") is displayed in the symbol change effect 148 while being enlarged and displayed at the second position 143. Thereby, the player is reliably notified that the reach symbol in “Thunder reach (specific reach effect)” has changed from the second specific symbol 147 (“6”) to the first specific symbol 146 (“7”). It is possible to do. Thereby, the player enhances the entertainment interest of the game. In FIG. 79 (h), the symbol change effect 148 is ended, the reach symbol (“7”) after the change is moved from the second position 143 to the first position and displayed (return to the original position), and reach is performed. This shows a scene in which the symbol is reduced (returned to the original size).

  Thereafter, the reach symbol is set to “7” of the first specific symbol 146, and “Thunder reach (specific reach effect)” is started. Note that the execution modes after FIG. 79 (h) are the same as those in FIG. 78 (d) to (g) described above, and a description thereof will be omitted. Further, during the execution of “Thunder reach (specific reach effect)”, there may be a time when the left and right effect symbols are displayed only on the second display screen 71a and the third display screen 72a. That is, in the specific reach effect, the time when all the left and right middle effect symbols are displayed on the display screen 7a, the left effect symbol is displayed on the second display screen 71a outside the game area, and the right effect symbol is displayed on the third screen outside the game area. And a time to be displayed on the display screen 72a. By displaying a part or all of the effect design on the second display screen 71a and the third display screen 72a outside the display area, the character effect can be made more prominent on the display screen 7a, and the player can reach a specific reach effect. Can be noticed.

  In the second embodiment, the specific reach effect 149 is a game effect that can be executed in a specific game state among a plurality of game states. Specifically, the specific reach effect is a game effect that can be executed in a low-accuracy low-base state (a normal effect mode described later), and other game states (low-accuracy high-base state, high-accuracy low-base state, high-accuracy high-state). In the base state), the specific reach effect is not executed. In other words, the specific reach effect in which the character A appears is a game effect that can be executed only in the normal effect mode, and is a super effect mode (first super effect mode, second super effect mode), a first count effect mode, a second effect mode. It is not executed in the count production mode. Thereby, it is possible to make the game effects executable in each game state (depending on the effect mode being executed) different, thereby preventing the game from getting tired.

[Preliminary production]
Next, with reference to FIG. 80 and FIG. 81, a description will be given of the announcement effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the result of the variable display of the effect symbol (special symbol) can be a big hit (stop display at the big hit symbol) with the variable display of the effect symbol (special symbol). A notice effect indicating the gender (big hit game execution possibility) is executed. In the second embodiment, there are four types of notice effects (fourth notice effect, fifth notice effect, sixth notice effect, and seventh notice effect) shown in FIG. Along with the display, it is displayed on the display screen 7a at a predetermined timing. In addition, these preview effects differ in the jackpot game execution possibility (also referred to as “big hit reliability”) indicated by the preview effects. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 80, the fourth advancement effect <the fifth advancement effect <the sixth advancement effect <the seventh advancement effect is set, and the big hit reliability of the fourth advancement effect is the lowest. The big hit reliability of the 7 announcements is set to be the highest.

  Accordingly, when the fourth or fifth notice effect is executed in conjunction with the change display of the effect symbol, the degree of expectation to be a big hit is low, and it is difficult to enhance the game entertainment, but the sixth notice effect is performed. In the case where the seventh announcement effect is executed, the degree of expectation to be a big hit is relatively high, so that it is possible to enhance the gaming interest. Therefore, the player plays the game while expecting that the sixth or seventh announcement effect is executed as the announcement effect during the fluctuation display of the effect symbol.

  Specifically, the fourth announcement effect 151 has an effect mode in which the big hit reliability is set to 2% and the character B152 imitating a boy appears at a predetermined timing. The fifth notice effect 153 is an effect mode in which the big hit reliability is set to 4% and the character C154 imitating a fish appears at a predetermined timing. In the sixth announcement effect 155, the jackpot reliability is set to 33%, and a character D156 imitating a silhouette of a human running at a predetermined timing and a character E157 imitating a southern island appear. In the sixth notice effect 155 (first game effect), the jackpot reliability is set to 33%, and the fourth notice effect 151 (second game effect) and the fifth notice effect 153 (second game effect) are provided. In comparison, it is said that the announcement is likely to be a big hit.

  Further, among a plurality of characters (characters D and E) appearing in the sixth announcement effect 151, the character D (specific character) represents the specific character in a silhouette mode, and a game profit (prize ball) acquisition effect described later. Is also a character that appears. This character D (specific character) commonly appears in a situation (when a game effect is executed) or in a situation that is advantageous to the player, which is relatively likely to be advantageous to the player. Further, the character D (specific character) is set so as to appear in common in a plurality of scenes. However, the same character data may be shared and used, or data to be used differs depending on the appearance scene. May be characters having the same shape (appearance from the player) or similar characters having the same shape but different sizes. If a character having the same shape (including a similar shape) is included, another character (decoration) may be added to another portion. Also, the colors may be different. It suffices that the characters appearing in a plurality of scenes are similar to the extent that the player can recognize that they are similar characters (all of which are silhouettes of a running human).

  In the seventh announcement effect 158, the jackpot reliability is set to 45%, and a plurality of (many) bird-like characters F159 appear. The seventh announcement effect 158 has a jackpot reliability set to 45%, and is an announcement effect in which the possibility of a big hit is considerably higher than the fourth announcement effect 151 and the fifth announcement effect 153.

  In addition, with reference to FIG. 81, a description will be given of an execution mode of the fourth announcement effect 151 to the seventh announcement effect 158. FIG. 70A shows a scene in which the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is started. FIGS. 81 (b) to 81 (e) show different variable displays. After the scene of FIG. 81 (a) passes through one of FIGS. 81 (b) to 81 (e), FIG. ). In addition, since the jackpot reliability differs depending on the notice effect, the result of the reach mode shown in FIG. 81 (f) may be a big hit depending on which notice effect has passed and then the scene of FIG. Sex (expectation) is different.

  FIG. 81 (b) shows a scene in which the character B152 of the fourth announcement effect 151 is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the scene of FIG. 81 (a) in the same fluctuation display as in FIG. 81 (a). FIG. 81 (c) shows a scene in which the character C154 of the fifth announcement effect 153 is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the scene of FIG. 81 (a) in the same fluctuation display as in FIG. 81 (a). FIG. 81D shows a scene in which the character D156 and the character E157 of the sixth announcement effect 155 are displayed after a lapse of a predetermined time from the scene of FIG. 81A in the same fluctuation display as that of FIG. 81A. I have. FIG. 81 (e) shows a scene where the character F159 of the seventh announcement effect 158 is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the scene of FIG. 81 (a) in the same fluctuation display as that of FIG. 81 (a).

[Gaming profit acquisition direction]
Next, with reference to FIG. 82 and FIG. 83, a description will be given of the game profit acquisition effect of the second embodiment. The game profit acquisition effect is an effect indicating how much game profit has been acquired in the specific state when the game state is in the specific state. The specific state (specific period) is a so-called extended state (extended period), and in the low-probability low-base state (state A), the gaming state becomes the low-probability low-base state again from the time of the big hit. (Excluding the jackpot game state). This is an effect indicating the amount of game profit obtained in this specific state.

  FIG. 82 (a) shows a big hit (4R first big hit) in the low-probability low-base state, and a big hit game (4R first big hit game) related to the big hit is being executed, and is displayed on the round display unit 161. As shown, the execution scene of the fourth round of the round game, which is the final round ((F) indicates the final round), is shown. That is, it is a big hit that occurs in the low-probability low-base state (normal state), and is a so-called initial hit. Then, the specific state starts from this big hit (big hit game). At the lower center of the display screen 7a, an acquired profit display section 166 indicating the amount of game profit (the number of prize balls) acquired in the big hit game is provided. (Award ball) has been paid out (acquired). Since the big hit shown in FIG. 82 (a) is the first big hit game in the specific state, the obtained game profit displayed on the obtained profit display section 166 is different from the total obtained game profit in the specific state (specific period). Become. Therefore, the acquired profit display unit 166 shown in FIG. 82A is also referred to as a total acquired profit display unit 164.

  At the approximate center of the display screen 7a during the big hit game, a big hit game effect 163 in which an ally character and an enemy character battle each other is displayed. Then, in FIG. 82 (a), an effect in which the ally character defeats the enemy character is displayed, so that the game state after the end of the big hit game is shifted to a relatively advantageous game state for the player. It is shown. Note that, in the case of the jackpot game effect, when an effect in which the ally character defeats the enemy character is displayed, the game state after the end of the jackpot game is changed to a game state (highly accurate low base state) which is relatively advantageous to the player. When the effect that the enemy character defeats the ally character is displayed, the game state after the end of the big hit game is changed to a game state relatively disadvantageous to the player (a low-probability high base state). In the case of transition to the high-probability and high-basis state (2R fifth big hit), an effect is displayed in which the enemy character defeats an ally character. When the number of variable display of the effect symbol (special symbol) reaches a predetermined number of times (50 or 100 times) after the end of the big hit game, it is notified that it is in an advantageous state.

  FIG. 82 (b) shows an ending period after the end of the last round (4 rounds) of the big hit game (4R first big hit game) shown in FIG. 82 (a). The display screen 7a indicates that the big hit game has ended, that the game state after the big hit game has ended transitions to the state C (high-accuracy low base state) that is advantageous to the player, and that the earned game profit in the big hit game is “00600 pt”. It was shown that it was. FIG. 82 (c) shows a scene in which a transition has been made to the state C from FIG. In FIG. 82 (c), the specific state (the extended state) continued from FIG. 82 (a) continues, and the total acquired profit display section 164 shown at the lower center of the display screen 7a displays “T: 00650pt”. The display indicates that the above-mentioned jackpot game and the subsequent total acquired game profit in the state C are “650 pt”. In this embodiment, it is possible to increase the acquired game profit not only during the big hit game but also in the state C. Note that a launch direction display section 162 is provided in the upper right portion of the display screen 7a, and the launch direction of the game ball is notified to the player. In addition, the effect for the state C is displayed in a predetermined display mode substantially in the center of the display screen 7a.

  FIG. 82 (d) shows that, after performing the variation display of the effect symbol (special symbol) a predetermined number of times from FIG. “777”) indicates a scene where the stop display is performed. FIG. 82 (e) shows a scene in which the big hit game (15R third big hit game) relating to the big hit shown in FIG. 82 (d) is being executed and the second round game is being executed. At the upper center of the display screen 7a, a total earned profit display section 164 indicating the total earned game profit in a specific state (specific period) is provided. An acquired profit display section 166 showing the current acquired game profit in the third big hit game) is provided. At a substantially central portion of the display screen 7a, a jackpot game effect 163 in which an ally character and an enemy character are fighting is displayed.

  FIG. 82 (f) shows a scene where the round game has progressed to the 15th round which is the final round in the same big hit game as in FIG. 82 (e). The display of the acquired profit display section 166 has increased to "02050 pt", and the display of the total acquired profit display section 164 has also increased to "02750 pt". In addition, since the effect in which the ally character defeats the enemy character is displayed as the jackpot game effect of the final round, the game state after the end of the jackpot game is a game state (state C, high accuracy) that is relatively advantageous to the player. The transition to the low base state) is shown to the player.

  FIG. 83 (g) shows an ending period after the end of the last round (15 rounds) of the big hit game (15R third big hit game) shown in FIG. 82 (f). The display screen 7a indicates that the big hit game has ended, that the game state after the big hit game has ended transitions to a state C (high-accuracy, low-base state) advantageous to the player, and that the big hit game (15R third big hit game) It is shown that the acquired game profit was “02200 pt” and the total acquired game profit in the specific state was “02900 pt”. FIG. 83 (h) shows a scene in which a transition has been made from the state shown in FIG. In FIG. 83 (h), the specific state (rensou state) continuing from FIG. 82 (a) continues, and “T: 03500pt” is displayed in the total earned profit display section 164 shown in the lower center of the display screen 7a. The display shows that the plurality of jackpot games described above and the total acquired game profit in the state C executed during that are “03500 pt”.

  FIG. 83 (i) shows a state in which a predetermined number of effect symbols (special symbols) have been changed and displayed from FIG. 83 (h). This shows a situation where the result of the fluctuation display is a big hit and the big hit symbol (“777”) is stopped and displayed. Note that, also in FIG. 83 (i), the specific state (a connected state) continuing from FIG. 82 (a) continues. FIG. 83 (j) shows the execution scene of the twelfth round game in which the big hit game (15R third big hit game) relating to the big hit shown in FIG. 83 (i) is being executed. The display of the acquired profit display section 166 is “01850 pt”, and the display of the total acquired profit display section 164 is increased to “09950 pt”.

  FIG. 83 (k) shows the same twelfth round in the same jackpot game as FIG. 83 (j), and shows a scene where a predetermined time has elapsed from FIG. 83 (j). As shown in FIG. 83 (k), a situation is shown in which the acquired game profit in the jackpot game being executed is “01900 pt”, and the total acquired game profit in the specific state is “10000 pt”. In the present pachinko gaming machine 1, the fact that the total acquired game profit is “10000 pt” is a measure that the specific state continues for a long time and a large amount of game profit (prize balls) can be obtained. That is, the situation is advantageous for the player. Therefore, in order to show the advantageous situation to the player, a specific profit display section 167 is provided substantially at the center of the display screen 7a.

  A specific profit display unit 167 is provided in accordance with the obtained profit displayed on the total obtained profit display unit 164 being “10000 pt”, and the amount of the total obtained game profit exceeds the specific amount in the specific profit display unit 167. (10000 ptOVER) indicating that the specified amount has been reached. In addition, in the specific profit display section 167, a character D156 (specific character) is displayed together with the display of "10000 ptOVER". As a result, the fact that the player continues to be in the specific state (the extended state) and that a large amount of gaming profit has been obtained, that is, that “10000 pt” has been obtained as the obtained profit, is a situation advantageous to the player. Can be easily recognized.

  As described above, the character D156 (specific character) is a character used as a notice effect with relatively high hit reliability, and its display mode also imitates a running human silhouette similar to the notice effect. Because of the display mode, the player can easily recognize that the character is the same. As described above, by using the same character as the character (specific character) used in the game performance with a high jackpot reliability, the current game situation, that is, the situation in which the game profit of “10000 ptOVER” is acquired, is changed for the player. It is possible to easily grasp that the situation is advantageous. Further, all the characters appearing in the sixth announcement effect 155 may be used, but in this embodiment, only the character D is used as the common character. That is, it is sufficient that at least some characters are common in both scenes.

  Further, in order to allow the player to surely recognize the display mode of the specific profit display unit 167 (“10000 ptOVER” and the specific character), the specific time (“4s” in the present embodiment) starts when the total acquired game profit reaches 10,000 pt. ) Display continuously. In the meantime, even if the display of the total acquired profit display section 164 exceeds “T: 10000 pt”, the display mode of the specific profit display section 167 is maintained at “10000 ptOVER” (the display of the specific character is also continued in the same manner). Do). Further, in order to allow the player to surely recognize the display mode of the specific profit display section 167, the profit amount (“10000 pt”) displayed on the specific profit display section 167 is changed to the profit amount (“10000 pt”) displayed on the total acquisition profit display section 164. It is displayed in a size larger than “10000 pt”). Further, the profit amount (“10000 pt”) displayed on the specific profit display unit 167 is displayed in a larger size than the profit amount (“01900 pt”) displayed on the acquired profit display unit 166.

  In addition, the specific amount (“10000” pt) serving as a trigger for displaying the specific profit display unit 167 is set to an amount that cannot be obtained by one big hit game even if the big hit game can obtain the most game profit. . Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to increase the acquired game profit even in the state C, so that one big hit game and the state C continue for a long period of time (that is, a small hit game is generated many times). Although it is also possible to acquire a specific amount of game profit, usually, by generating a plurality of jackpot games, a specific amount of game profit is obtained. Therefore, it is impossible to obtain a specific amount of game profit only by the game profit obtained by one big hit game, but it is impossible to obtain a certain amount of game profit by generating a plurality of big hit games. It can be said that it is possible.

  In FIG. 83 (k), the case where the amount of the total acquired game profit exceeds the specific amount ("10000 pt") during the big hit game has been described. On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the total acquisition is performed not in the jackpot game but in a specific state other than the jackpot game (high-accuracy low-base state, high-accuracy high-base state, low-accuracy high-base state). The amount of gaming profit may exceed a specific amount ("10000 pt"). FIG. 83 (l) shows such a scene. When the gaming state after the end of the big hit game is in the state C, the amount of the total acquired game profit due to the occurrence of the small hit game is a specific amount ("10000 pt"). Shows a scene beyond. As shown in FIG. 83 (l), a total earned profit display section 164 is provided at the lower center of the display screen 7a, and “T: 10,000 pt” is displayed, and the total earned gaming profit becomes “10000 pt”. It is shown that.

  In response to this, similarly to FIG. 83 (k), a specific profit display section 167 is provided substantially at the center of the display screen 7a. Then, “10000 ptOVER” indicating that the amount of the total acquired game profit has exceeded the specific amount (it has become the specific amount) is displayed on the specific profit display unit 167. In addition, in the specific profit display section 167, a character D156 (specific character) is displayed together with the display of "10000 ptOVER". As a result, the fact that the player continues to be in the specific state (the extended state) and that a large amount of gaming profit has been obtained, that is, that “10000 pt” has been obtained as the obtained profit, is a situation advantageous to the player. Can be easily recognized. Also, when the total acquired game profit is “10000 pt” in the state C, the display mode of the specific profit display section 167 (“10000 ptOVER” and the specific character) is surely recognized by the player, similarly to during the big hit game. Therefore, the display is continued for a specific time (“4 s” in this embodiment) from the time when the total acquired game profit becomes 10,000 pt.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, in a plurality of advantageous situations, a common character is displayed to display a large hit reliability, a situation in which a large amount of gaming profits can be obtained, and the like. It is possible to increase the appearance frequency of a character (specific character) that appears in a situation that is advantageous to the player. Also, by causing the specific character to appear in a plurality of advantageous situations in this way, the player who has seen the specific character in one scene can see the specific character in the previous advantageous situation, When looking at a specific character, it is possible to intuitively recognize that the current situation may be an advantageous situation. As described above, in a gaming machine having a variety of game effects, by causing a specific character to appear in an appropriate scene, the contents (game hit reliability, advantageous degree, etc.) that the game effect means can be efficiently provided to the player. Can be notified (recognized). This makes it easier for the player to understand the gaming machine and enhance the interest in the game.

[Transition mode of production mode]
Next, with reference to FIG. 84, an effect mode (effect mode) executed in each gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described. Note that the type of the big hit and the type of the game state to be shifted to after the big hit is the same as in the first embodiment (see FIG. 6 and the like). The game state in the initial state after the power is turned on is the low-probability low-base state, and the effect mode is set to the “normal effect mode 181” shown in FIG. Means for setting a predetermined effect mode from a plurality of effect modes is also referred to as “effect mode setting means”. In the second embodiment, the “effect mode setting unit” is provided in the sub-control unit 90.

  During the execution of a game (special symbol hit / fail judgment, special symbol / effect symbol fluctuation display, etc.) in the normal effect mode (low-probability / low-base state), the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment (first special symbol hit / fail judgment) is a big hit. , The big hit special symbol (big hit effect design) is stopped and displayed, and the big hit game is executed. As described in the first embodiment, similarly, in the second embodiment, in the low-accuracy low-base state, a game ball is fired in the left game area and the first special symbol is fluctuated (first special symbol hit / fail judgment). In the high-accuracy high-base state, high-accuracy low-base state, and low-accuracy high-base state, a game ball is fired in the right game area to display a second special symbol (second special symbol). It is a game property mainly based on the symbol hit / fail judgment.

  Big hits as a result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment that can occur in the normal effect mode (low-probability low-base state) are the 4R first big hit and the 4R second big hit. The result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is a predetermined ratio when the 4R first big hit is made (for example, 50% of the 4R first big hit), and when the big hit is made or / and during the big hit game In addition, a “first bonus (4R first big hit game)” that informs (indicates) to the player that the effect mode (game state) after the big hit game is a super effect mode (high-precision low base state) is provided. Be executed. When the first bonus (first bonus effect) is executed, the player can easily recognize that the game state shifts to a game state advantageous to the player after the big hit game, so that the player can play the game with a sense of security. It becomes possible. That is, when the first bonus (first bonus effect) is executed according to the big hit game, the game always shifts to the super effect mode (high-accuracy low base state) after the big hit game ends. It should be noted that there are two types (a plurality of types) of the production mode in the super production mode shown in FIGS. 86 (b) and 86 (c).

  In addition, the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is a predetermined ratio when the 4R first big hit (the remaining ratio, for example, 50% when the 4R first big hit) and a 4R second big hit. If so, the “second bonus (4R first big hit game)” is executed. In the second bonus (second bonus effect), when the big hit is reached or / and during the big hit game, the effect mode (game state) after the big hit game is shifted to the count effect mode (low-probability high base state). An effect of notifying (indicating) to the player that the game is to be performed is performed. However, even when the second bonus is executed, if the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination is the 4R first big hit, the effect mode after the end of the big hit game is not the count effect mode. Then, the mode shifts to the super effect mode (high-accuracy low-base state). The effect mode of the count effect mode (first count effect mode) to which the process can shift from the first special symbol hit / fail determination is as shown in FIG. 86 (d).

  That is, when the second bonus (second bonus effect) is executed in conjunction with the big hit game, the effect mode after the end of the big hit game shifts to the super effect mode (high-accuracy low base state) ( There is a 4R first big hit) and a transition to the count effect mode (low-precision high base state) (4R second big hit). Also, when shifting from the second bonus to the super effect mode, during the big hit game or at the end of the big hit game, a promotion effect indicating that the mode is shifted to the super effect mode can be performed, and the entertainment interest can be enhanced. . Therefore, even when the second bonus effect is executed, the player can maintain a high level of entertainment interest for a long time without losing the expectation of an advantageous game state, expecting the occurrence of the promotion effect. Becomes

  In the super effect mode executed in the high-accuracy low-base state, a plurality of effect modes are provided as in the first embodiment. It can be selected using the effect button (see FIG. 86 (f)). As selectable effect modes, a first super effect mode 182 (first effect mode, specific effect mode) and a second super effect mode 183 are provided. During the execution of these super effect modes, the game state is set to the high-accuracy low-base state, and as described in the first embodiment, the game in which the amount of the acquired game profit can be increased by the small hit game It is a game state advantageous to the player. Further, the super effect mode (high-accuracy low-base state) continues until the next big hit (first bonus, third bonus, or fourth bonus) occurs.

  When the first count effect mode (count effect mode, second effect mode) executed in the low-probability high base state does not become a big hit until the change display of the special symbol (effect symbol) of a predetermined number (100 times) is completed. , The game state shifts to the normal effect mode. As a result, the gaming state shifts from the low-probability high-base state to the low-probability low-base state (a gaming state most disadvantageous to the player). As described above, in the super effect modes 182 and 183 (high-accuracy low-base state) and the first count effect mode (low-accuracy high-base state), the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is reduced to a time-saving state, and the game ball is placed in the right game area. Is fired, and the game characteristic is changed to the change display of the second special symbol (the second special symbol appropriateness determination).

  Then, in the super effect mode 182, 183 or the first count effect mode, if the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is a 15R third big hit, a "third bonus (15R third big hit game)" is executed. You. This third bonus is a bonus that is most advantageous to the player, in which the largest game profit that can be acquired and the game state after the end of the jackpot game are set to the super effect mode. Therefore, when the third bonus (third bonus effect) is executed, the player easily recognizes that the game state shifts to a game state (super effect mode, high-accuracy low base state) advantageous to the player after the big hit game. Therefore, it is possible to play a game with a sense of security. That is, when the third bonus (third bonus effect) is executed in association with the big hit game, the game always shifts to the super effect mode (high-accuracy low-base state) after the end of the big hit game.

  Further, in the super effect mode 182, 183 or the first count effect mode, if the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is 4R / fourth big hit, "1st bonus (4R fourth big hit game)" is executed. You. Since the 4R fourth big hit game and the 4R second big hit game are the same big hit game (the number of times of opening the special winning opening, the opening time, etc.), the first bonus effect in the same effect mode is executed. In addition, as described above, the first bonus effect allows the player to easily recognize that the game state shifts to a game state that is advantageous to the player after the big hit game, so that the player can play the game with a sense of security.

  In the super effect mode 182 or 183 or the first count effect mode, the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is 2R fifth big hit, 2R sixth big hit, 2R seventh big hit, or 2R eighth big hit. In this case, the “fourth bonus (2R fifth big hit game, 2R sixth big hit game, 2R seventh big hit game, or 2R eighth big hit game)” is executed. In the fourth bonus (fourth bonus effect), when the big hit is reached or / and during the big hit game, the effect mode (game state) after the big hit game is shifted to the count effect mode (low-probability high base state). An effect of notifying (indicating) to the player that the game is to be performed is performed. However, even if the fourth bonus is executed, if the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is 2R fifth big hit or 2R sixth big hit, the effect mode after the big hit game ends, Although the mode once shifts to the count effect mode (second count effect mode), when the fluctuation display of the special symbol (effect symbol) elapses a predetermined number of times (50 or 100 times) (unless a big hit occurs during that time), the effect is produced. The mode shifts to the super effect mode (high-accuracy low-base state). That is, the count effect mode (the second count effect mode) is executed in the high-accuracy high-base state, and thereafter, the gaming state shifts to the high-accuracy low-base state, and the effect mode shifts to the super-effect mode.

  On the other hand, when the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is 2R seventh big hit or 2R eighth big hit, the effect mode after the end of the big hit game is shifted to the count effect mode (second count effect mode). Then, when the change display of the special symbol (effect symbol) has passed a predetermined number of times (50 or 100 times) (unless a big hit occurs during that time), the effect mode shifts to the normal effect mode (low-precision low-base state). I do. That is, the count effect mode (the second count effect mode) is executed in the low-accuracy high-base state, and thereafter, the gaming state shifts to the low-accuracy low-base state, and the effect mode shifts to the normal effect mode. The effect mode of the count effect mode (second count effect mode) to which the process can shift from the second special symbol hit / fail determination is the mode shown in FIG. 86 (e).

  Also, in the super effect mode, if the fourth bonus (2R fifth big hit, 2R sixth big hit, 2R seventh big hit, or 2R eighth big hit) is made, the second count effect is always made after the big hit game. The fourth bonus is considered to be a disadvantageous jackpot compared to the first bonus and the second bonus because the mode shifts to the mode (the amount of the game profit that can be acquired is also small). Conversely, since the third bonus and the first bonus always shift to the super mode after the big hit game (the amount of the game profit that can be obtained is more, especially the third bonus is more), it is an advantageous big hit. .

  Here, the first count effect mode 184, which shifts based on the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination, shifts only to the normal effect mode based on a variable number of special symbols (effect symbols) displayed a predetermined number of times. On the other hand, the second count effect mode 185 that shifts based on the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination is a case in which the normal effect mode 181 shifts based on a variable number of special symbols (effect symbols) displayed a predetermined number of times. They are different from each other in that they have a transition to the super effect modes 182 and 183.

  On the other hand, as for the production mode of the first count production mode 184 and the second count production mode 185, the production mode display unit 171 displays “Count mode” which is a common production mode name, and the background character 172 is also displayed. A common character (cloud background) is displayed. The difference is that different images (display units) are provided in a partial area of the display screen 7a. Specifically, in the second count effect mode 185, a remaining number display unit indicating the remaining period of the count effect mode is provided at the upper right of the display screen 7a. The display mode of both effect modes is different in that the first count effect mode 184 is not provided with such a display unit. As described above, since the difference between the display modes of the two effect modes is slight, it is difficult for the player to distinguish the effect modes. Thereby, even when the player is in the first count effect mode 184, the player is expected to shift to the super mode to maintain a high gaming interest for a long time, or when the player shifts from the second count effect mode 185 to the super mode. In addition, it is possible to give a surprise to the player and enhance the entertainment interest of the game.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, the bonus effect and the effect mode shown in FIG. 84 are executed in accordance with the transition of the game state, the game effects are diversified and diversified, and the game is prevented from getting tired. It is possible to enhance game entertainment.

[Game production in each production mode]
Next, game effects (reach effects and character effects) executed in each effect mode will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 85, the normal effect mode 181 (third effect mode), the first super effect mode 182 (first effect mode, specific effect mode), the second super effect mode 183, the count effect mode (second effect mode, first count effect mode 184, the second count effect mode 185) effect is produced (display mode) has a different game effects. In the normal effect mode 181, four types (plural) of game effects (reach effects) can be executed, and the big hit reliability is set for each of these four types of game effects. The jackpot reliability indicates a possibility that, when a corresponding game effect (for example, Thunder Reach) is executed, an effect symbol (special symbol) that is variably displayed together with the game effect is stopped and displayed at the big hit symbol. That is, the possibility of a big hit (the first bonus or the second bonus) (the possibility of executing the big hit game) is shown.

  Further, in each game effect executed in the normal effect mode mainly based on the first special symbol hit / fail judgment, different characters can appear, and the character S in S reach, the character T in T reach, and the character A in Thunder reach ( In FIG. 78 (c), (d), etc.), the character Y appears in the full rotation reach. By looking at these appearing characters and effects, the player can easily grasp the jackpot reliability of the executed game effects. Of course, in these game effects, other characters that are common or different from the characters shown in FIG. 85 may be displayed (appear).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 85, different game effects can be executed in the first super effect mode 182, the second super effect mode 183, and the count effect modes 184, 185 mainly based on the second special symbol hit / fail judgment. Here, the reliability of the game effect in these effect modes is referred to as “advantageous jackpot reliability”. This is different from mere "big hit reliability", and is an advantageous big hit, that is, a possibility of becoming the third bonus or the first bonus that the super mode is continued (a possibility of becoming the 15R third big hit or the 4R fourth big hit). ). In the super effect mode, the game profit that can be acquired is small and the effect mode after the end of the jackpot game is shifted to the count effect mode. (Big hit), the "advantageous big hit reliability" indicates the possibility of an advantageous big hit excluding these disadvantageous big hits.

  Specifically, the character A confrontation reach 191 that can be executed in the first super effect mode 182 is a game effect of an effect mode in which the character X and the character A appear and confront each other. It is the lowest “1%” among the game effects that can be executed in the mode 182. That is, when the character A confrontation reach 191 is executed in the first super effect mode 182, the possibility that the result of the fluctuation display of the effect symbol becomes a big hit is very low. For this reason, when the character A confrontation reach 191 is executed, the player is not expected to hit a big hit, but is expected to be in a disadvantageous big hit. Do.

  In addition, the character G confrontation reach 192 is a game effect of an effect mode in which the character X and the character G appear and confront each other, and the advantage big hit reliability is set to “10%”. The character H confrontation reach 193 is a game effect of an effect mode in which the character X and the character H appear and confront each other, and the reliability of the big hit is set to “30%”. Further, the character I confrontation reach 194 is a game effect of an effect mode in which the character X and the character I appear and confront each other. Of "50%". The above-mentioned confrontation reach becomes an advantageous big hit if the ally character X defeats the enemy character A, G, H or I. In the case of losing, a disadvantageous jackpot occurs, and in the case of a draw, the result of the special symbol right / wrong determination is lost, and the gaming state is continued. Further, the first count effect mode 184 and the second count effect mode 185 execute a common game effect. This makes it more difficult to determine which of the count effect modes. In each effect mode, game effects (notification effect, look-ahead effect, reach effect, character effect) other than those specified in FIG. 85 may be provided.

[Effect mode of each effect mode]
FIG. 86 (a) is a diagram illustrating an effect mode in the normal effect mode 181. In the normal effect mode 181, a character imitating a mountain and a tree is displayed as the background character 172. In the normal effect mode, the effect mode display unit 171 for indicating the normal effect mode is not provided. Therefore, since there is no background character and the effect mode display unit 171, it is grasped that the normal effect mode is set. FIG. 86 (b) is a diagram illustrating an effect mode of the first super effect mode 182 when the player selects the first super effect mode 182 among the super effect modes. On the display screen 7a, a character imitating the sun is displayed as the background character 172, and by displaying the "first super mode" on the effect mode display unit 171, the effect mode to be executed is clearly indicated to the player. I have.

  FIG. 86 (c) is a diagram illustrating an effect mode of the second super effect mode 183 when the player selects the second super effect mode 183 among the super effect modes. On the display screen 7a, a character imitating the moon is displayed as the background character 172, and by displaying the "second super mode" on the effect mode display unit 171, the effect mode to be executed is clearly indicated to the player. I have. FIG. 86 (d) is a diagram illustrating an effect mode of the first count effect mode 184 when the effect mode is set to the first count effect mode 184. A character imitating a cloud is displayed on the display screen 7a as the background character 172, and the effect mode to be executed by the player is displayed by displaying the "count mode" on the effect mode display unit 171.

  FIG. 86 (e) is a diagram illustrating an effect mode of the second count effect mode 185 when the effect mode is set to the second count effect mode 185. On the display screen 7a, a character imitating the same cloud as in the first count effect mode 184 is displayed as the background character 172, and the same "count mode" as in the first count effect mode 184 is also displayed on the effect mode display unit 171. It is carried out. This indicates an effect mode to be executed for the player. In addition, at the upper right of the display screen 7a, a remaining number-of-times display section 173 is provided in the first count effect mode 184, and indicates the remaining period of the second count effect mode 185. The execution period of the first count effect mode 184 is a period in which the number of times of the special symbol change display is fixed at 100 times. There are a plurality of periods, one for 100 times and one for 100 times. For this reason, in the second count effect mode 185, such a display unit is provided in order to easily show the remaining period to the player or to increase the entertainment interest by performing an effect of increasing the remaining period. Such a difference in the display mode is a difference between the first count effect mode 184 and the second count effect mode 185, and other configurations, appearance characters, executable game effects, and the like are common.

  FIG. 86 (f) shows that when the effect mode is set to the super effect mode, the player can select any one of the effect modes from the first super effect mode 182 and the second super effect mode 183. The effect mode selection screen 186 is shown. An effect mode selection period is provided at a predetermined time during a big hit game before the effect mode is set to the super effect mode (similar to the first embodiment).

[Game production in specific production mode]
Next, referring to FIG. 87, of the plurality of effect modes of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, a game effect (reach effect, specific effect mode) in a specific effect mode (specifically, first super effect mode). The effect mode (executing mode) of the character effect will be described. When the game state is set to the high-accuracy low-base state, any one of a plurality of effect modes (first super effect mode, second super effect mode) is operated by the player's effect button operation (selection of the player). The production mode can be selected. As described above, these effect modes have different game effects depending on the effect mode to be executed. Therefore, the player can select an arbitrary effect mode or switch to a different effect mode according to his / her own preference, thereby preventing the player from getting tired of the game or enhancing the interest in the game. .

  As shown in FIGS. 85 and 87 and the like, in the first super effect mode 182, a game effect of a characteristic effect mode different from other effect modes is executed. Specifically, four types (plurality) of game effects (reach production) of character A confrontation reach, character G confrontation reach, character H confrontation reach, and character I confrontation reach (these are also simply referred to as “confrontation reach”) ) Is executable. In these game effects, an ally character (character X) and an enemy character (characters A, G, H, or I) confront each other, and the result of the confrontation results in a determination result advantageous to the player. Indicates whether or not. In other words, it indicates whether or not to execute a big hit game (first bonus or third bonus) that is advantageous to the player whose game state after the big hit game is set to the super effect mode, depending on the game effect to be executed.

  In each of the game effects, an option display unit 179 that indicates the result of the confrontation is provided above the display screen 7a, and the result of the confrontation is one of the results displayed on the option display unit 179. As options displayed on the option display unit 179, three types of [victory], [continue], and [defeat] are prepared, and when the result of the confrontation reach is [win] (the result display unit 178 displays [win]). Victory] is displayed), the jackpot becomes advantageous to the player, the third bonus or the first bonus (the jackpot game) is executed, and the effect mode after the end of the jackpot game is set to the super effect mode. Note that the game state in the super effect mode is a high-precision low-base state that is advantageous to the player.

  If the result of the confrontation reach is [continue] (when [continue] is displayed on the result display section 178), the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is out of order, and the jackpot game is not executed. After the end of the confrontation reach, the first super effect mode continues. Then, after that, in the first super effect mode, the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol) is continuously executed. When the result of the confrontation reach is "defeat" (when "defeat" is displayed on the result display section 178), a jackpot disadvantageous to the player is executed, the fourth bonus (jackpot game) is executed, and the jackpot game ends. The subsequent effect mode is set to the second count effect mode 185. As described above, the game state in the second count effect mode includes a low-accuracy high-base state and a high-accuracy low-base state.

  Further, a plurality of game effects that can be executed in the first super effect mode 185 are set, and among the plurality of game effects, the game effect in which the option of “defeat” can be displayed on the option display unit 179 is set as the enemy character. Only the character A confrontation reach 191 (first special game production) in which the character A appears is set. That is, in the situation where the game is being executed in the first super effect mode 185, the effect mode being executed shifts from the first super effect mode 185 to the second count effect mode 185 without passing through the character A confrontation reach 191. I will not. Therefore, in the first super effect mode 185 in the high-accuracy low-base state, in the case of the 2R seventh big hit and the 2R eighth big hit which are disadvantageous to the player, the character A confrontation reach 191 is always executed. The character A confrontation reach 191 is always executed even in the case of the 2R fifth big hit and the 2R sixth big hit that can be promoted from the second count effect mode to the super effect mode. That is, when the fourth bonus (see FIG. 84) is executed in the first super effect mode and the effect mode after the big hit game is shifted to the second count effect mode, the character A confrontation reach 191 is always executed.

  FIG. 87 (a) shows a scene in which a character A confrontation reach effect 191 (first special game effect) has been executed in accordance with a change display of a predetermined effect symbol in the first super effect mode 185. On the left part of the display screen 7a, a background character 172 imitating the sun indicating that the effect mode being executed is the first super effect mode 185 is displayed. Further, a character X174 of an ally character and a character A144 of an enemy character to be confronted in the confrontation reach are displayed in a substantially central portion of the display screen. In addition, at the upper left and right sides of the display screen, effect symbols in the reach mode are displayed (left and right effect symbols "2" constituting the reach mode are displayed). An option display section 179 is provided at the top of the display screen, and options that can be a result of the confrontation reach are displayed. As shown in FIG. 87A, in the character A confrontation reach effect, [continue] and [defeat] are displayed as options in the option display section.

  In the character A confrontation reach effect (first special game effect) of the second embodiment, “defeat” is always displayed as an option. Also, [Win] is not displayed as an option. Therefore, the character A confrontation reach production is a reach production showing a considerably disadvantageous situation for the player. Therefore, the player plays the game with expectation that [Continuation] is displayed on the result display section 178, that is, the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is out of order and the first super effect mode is continued. Although not shown in the drawing, in the second embodiment, although [Victory] is not displayed as an option, after [Defeat] is displayed as a confrontation result, a reversal effect is executed to provide an advantageous advantage to the player. There is also a production to make a big hit.

  As another aspect of the second embodiment, in the character A confrontation reach effect (first special game effect), there may be a case where the option of [Win] is not displayed or the [Defeat] is not displayed. Even if three options of [Win], [Continue], and [Defeat] are displayed, or only one option is displayed (in this case, the displayed option is used). Good.

  FIG. 87 (b) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from the scene of FIG. 87 (a), and shows a scene in which [Continue] is displayed on the result display section as the result of the character A confrontation reach effect. ing. In the center of the display screen, an off-reach effect design [232] is displayed to indicate that the off-reach effect was achieved as a result of the reach effect. In addition, a character of [Draw] indicating that the confrontation between the character X and the character A is a draw is displayed. This indicates that the first super effect mode does not end (the fourth bonus is executed and the process proceeds to the second count effect mode), and the first super effect mode continues thereafter. In other words, it indicates that the character A confrontation reach effect has been executed when the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is out.

  FIG. 87 (c) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from the scene of FIG. 87 (a), and shows a scene in which [Defeat] is displayed on the result display section as the result of the character A confrontation reach effect. ing. In addition, an off-reach effect design [212] is displayed at the center of the display screen, and indicates that the result of the reach effect did not result in an advantageous big hit advantageous to the player. In addition, as the effect symbol, the outreach effect symbol of [212] (the effect symbol which is not the same in three digits) is displayed, but the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit (2R fifth big hit, 2R sixth big hit, 2R 7th jackpot or 2R eighth jackpot). In the confrontation between the character X and the character A, an effect indicating that the character A has won (the character X has lost) is displayed. This indicates that the first super effect mode is ended (the fourth bonus is executed and the process shifts to the second count effect mode). That is, the character A confrontation reach effect executed when the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is a disadvantageous big hit that is relatively disadvantageous to the player (2R fifth big hit, 2R sixth big hit, 2R seventh big hit or 2R eighth big hit) It is shown that.

  As described above, when the character A confrontation reach effect is executed and [Defeat] is displayed on the result display section, in principle (in most cases), the fourth bonus is executed and the second count effect mode is set. Transition. However, in a rare case (with a very low possibility), there is a case where a reversal effect is executed after the defeat effect of FIG. In this case, the third bonus (or the first bonus) is executed, and then the mode shifts to the super effect mode. In the table shown in FIG. 85, the reason why the character A confrontation reach has an advantage big hit reliability of 1% instead of 0% is that it has such a rare case. Further, instead of such a mode, the reliability of the big hit in the case where the character A confrontation reach effect is executed may be set to 0%.

  FIG. 87 (d) shows a scene in which the character G confrontation reach effect 192 (second special game effect) has been executed in accordance with the change display of the predetermined effect symbol in the first super effect mode 185. On the left part of the display screen 7a, a background character 172 imitating the sun indicating that the effect mode being executed is the first super effect mode 185 is displayed. Also, a character X174 of an ally character and a character G192 of an enemy character to be confronted in the confrontation reach are displayed in a substantially central portion of the display screen. In addition, at the upper left and right sides of the display screen, effect symbols in the reach mode are displayed (left and right effect symbols "2" constituting the reach mode are displayed). An option display section 179 is provided at the top of the display screen, and options that can be a result of the confrontation reach are displayed. As shown in FIG. 87 (d), in the character G confrontation reach production (second special game production), unlike the character A confrontation reach production (first special game production), [victory] and [continuation] ] Is displayed and [Defeat] is not displayed.

  That is, in the character G confrontation reach effect (second special game effect) of the second embodiment, [defeat] is not displayed as an option. [Win] is always displayed as an option. Therefore, the character G confrontation reach effect is a reach effect indicating a considerably advantageous situation for the player (there is no disadvantageous hit as a result of the game effect). Therefore, the player expects that [Win] is displayed on the result display section 178, that is, the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment becomes an advantageous big hit, and that the first super effect mode is continued after the big hit game ends. And play the game. Further, even if [Continue] is displayed without displaying [Win], the first super effect mode is continued thereafter, so that the player can play the game with a sense of security. . Although not shown in the figure, a pattern that displays only [WIN] (one option) may be provided.

  FIG. 87 (e) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from the scene of FIG. 87 (d), and shows a scene where [Victory] is displayed on the result display section as a result of the character G confrontation reach effect. ing. In addition, a hit (advantageous big hit) reach effect design [222] is displayed in the center portion of the display screen, and it is shown that the result of the reach effect is a win (advantageous big hit). Further, an effect image indicating that the character X, which is an ally character, has won the character G, which is an enemy character, is displayed. As a result, the big hit is achieved, and the big hit game (the third bonus or the first bonus) is executed, and after the big hit game ends, the first super effect mode is set again. In other words, this indicates that the character G confrontation reach effect performed when the result of the special symbol hit determination is an advantageous big hit (15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit).

  Further, FIG. 87 (f) shows a scene after a lapse of a predetermined time from the scene of FIG. 87 (d). Is shown. In the center of the display screen, an off-reach effect design [232] is displayed to indicate that the off-reach effect was achieved as a result of the reach effect. Also, a character of [Draw] indicating that the confrontation between the character X and the character G was a draw is displayed. This indicates that the first super effect mode does not end (the fourth bonus is executed and the process proceeds to the second count effect mode), and the first super effect mode continues thereafter. In other words, it indicates that the character G confrontation reach effect is executed when the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is out of order.

  FIG. 87 (g) shows a scene in which the character H confrontation reach effect 193 (second special game effect) has been executed in accordance with the change display of the predetermined effect symbol in the first super effect mode 185. In addition, a character X174 of an ally character and a character H176 of an enemy character confronting each other in the confrontation reach are displayed in a substantially central portion of the display screen. Also, as shown in FIG. 87 (g), in the option display section 179, [Victory] and [Continue] are displayed as options, and [Defeat] is not displayed, as in the character G confrontation reach effect. .

  That is, in the character H confrontation reach production (second special game production) of the second embodiment, as in the case of the character G confrontation reach production, [defeat] is not displayed as an option. [Win] is always displayed as an option. Therefore, the character H confrontation reach effect (the second special game effect) is a reach effect indicating a considerably advantageous situation for the player (there is no disadvantageous hit as a result of the game effect). Although illustration is omitted, as shown in FIG. 87 (e) or FIG. 87 (f), if the result of the character H confrontation reach effect is “Win”, an advantageous big hit is executed and then the first supermarket is performed. The effect mode is set again, and when it becomes [continue], the first super effect mode is continued without executing the big hit game.

  FIG. 87 (h) shows a scene in which a character I confrontation reach effect 194 (second special game effect) has been executed in accordance with a change display of a predetermined effect symbol in the first super effect mode 185. Further, a character X174 of an ally character and a character I177 of an enemy character to be confronted in the confrontation reach are displayed substantially in the center of the display screen. Further, as shown in FIG. 87 (h), in the option display section 179, [Victory] and [Continue] are displayed as options, and [Defeat] is not displayed, as in the character G confrontation reach effect. .

  That is, in the character I confrontation reach effect (second special game effect) of the second embodiment, as in the case of the character G confrontation reach effect, [defeat] is not displayed as an option. [Win] is always displayed as an option. Accordingly, the character I confrontation reach effect (the second special game effect) is also a reach effect that indicates a situation that is considerably advantageous to the player (there is no disadvantageous hit as a result of the game effect). Although illustration is omitted, as shown in FIG. 87 (e) or FIG. 87 (f), when the result of the character I confrontation reach effect is [Win], an advantageous big hit is executed and then the first supermarket is performed. The effect mode is set again, and when it becomes [continue], the first super effect mode is continued without executing the big hit game.

  As described above, in the first super effect mode (the first effect mode or the specific effect mode), regardless of whether the character G confrontation reach effect, the character H confrontation reach effect, or the character I confrontation reach effect is performed, [Defeat] is not displayed as an option, and as a result, [Defeat] is not displayed on the result display section. That is, in the first super effect mode, only the character A confrontation reach effect has a possibility of being a disadvantageous jackpot disadvantageous to the player. Reach production, character H confrontation reach production, and character I confrontation reach production) do not have a possibility of causing a disadvantageous big hit against the player.

  Thus, when a game effect other than the character A confrontation reach effect (second special game effect) is executed, the possibility of a disadvantageous hit at that time is eliminated, and the player's sense of security is enhanced, and the character A confrontation is performed. When a game effect other than the reach effect (second special game effect) is executed, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for an advantageous big hit. As shown in FIG. 85, the character G confrontation reach effect, the character H confrontation reach effect, and the character I confrontation reach effect differ in the possibility of the advantageous jackpot reliability (advantageous jackpot reliability). Reaching the showdown has the most advantageous big hit reliability.

  In addition, even if the character A confrontation reach effect is executed, there is an option of [Continuation] that does not cause a disadvantage, and there is also a possibility that, although there is a slight possibility, an advantage will occur. Thereby, when the character A confrontation reach production (the first special game production) is executed, the tension to the disadvantageous big hit is raised to enhance the game entertainment, and the continuation of the first super effect mode and the expectation to the advantageous big hit are performed. It is possible to maintain a high level of entertainment interest for a long period of time by increasing the game quality.

  Further, in the first super effect mode, the value of the character A (specific character) in the first super effect mode is set low by setting the game effect in which the character A appears to be the most unfavorable game effect for the player. ing. On the other hand, as described above, the “specific reach production”, which is a game production that can be executed in the normal production mode and in which the character A common to the character A confrontation reach production appears, is also set to have a relatively high jackpot reliability. At the same time, it is set to a game effect in which a big hit always becomes an advantageous big hit (set in the high-accuracy low-base state and the super effect mode).

  That is, a specific reach effect (see FIG. 78 and FIG. 79, etc., a third special game effect) executed in the normal effect mode (third effect mode) and a character A confrontation reach effect executed in the first super effect mode (Refer to FIG. 87, etc., the first special game effect) is a game effect (reach effect) in which the character A appears, but the value of the game effect to the player (a result advantageous to the player). (The likelihood and the reliability of the big hit) are completely different. Thus, depending on the effect mode to be executed (normal effect mode, first super effect mode) or the game state (low-probability low-base state, high-probability low-base state), the value of the game effect in which the same character A appears (big hit reliability) , Advantageous jackpot reliability, and the possibility of having an advantageous result for the player). In addition, by this, depending on the effect mode and the game state, when the game effect (reach effect) in which the character A appears is performed, the player's sense of thrill (tension) is increased, and the game effect is diversified, and the game effect is diversified. Tiredness can be prevented.

  Further, by enabling the player to arbitrarily select an effect mode that can be executed in the super effect mode, if the effect mode such as the first super effect mode is not preferred, the second super effect mode is selected. You can play games. As a result, it is possible to provide a game effect according to the player's preference, and it is possible to enhance the entertainment interest of various players. In the first super effect mode, there is a possibility that a large hit occurs only when a specific game effect (character A confrontation reach) is executed, and a disadvantage occurs when another game effect is executed. By eliminating the possibility, an effect mode in which the most important game effect is executed is given the highest priority.

  On the other hand, in the second super effect mode, when any of a plurality of game effects (J-reach, K-reach, A-reach, and L-reach) is executed, there is a possibility that an advantageous big hit or a disadvantageous big hit may occur. And the possibility of winning an advantageous big hit varies depending on the game effect to be executed. Thereby, even if any of the plurality of game effects is executed, it is possible to watch the game effect with a certain degree of expectation to the advantageous big hit. Conversely, even if any of the plurality of game effects is executed, it is possible to watch the game effect with a certain degree of anxiety that causes a disadvantageous hit. This also makes it possible to enhance the player's thrill (tension) and enhance the interest in playing the game.

[Other execution modes of the game profit acquisition effect]
Next, with reference to FIG. 88 to FIG. 94, another execution mode of the game profit acquisition effect of the second embodiment will be described. As described above, the game profit acquisition effect is an effect indicating how much game profit has been obtained in the specific state when the game state is in the specific state. The specific state (specific period) is a so-called extended state (extended period), and in the low-probability low-base state (state A), the gaming state becomes the low-probability low-base state again from the time of the big hit. (Excluding the jackpot game state). This is an effect indicating the amount of game profit obtained in this specific state. Further, in another execution mode of the game profit acquisition effect described later, the total acquired game profit acquired in the specific state (specific period) and the unit period (the period including one big hit game) in the specific state (specific period) ), The first image display device 7 (second display device), the second image display device 71 (first display device), and / or the third image. Each is displayed on the display device 72 (first display device).

  That is, the acquired game profits for different periods are displayed on a plurality of display devices that are separately arranged, and the display devices to be displayed are different according to the game situation. It is preferable that one or more display devices separately arranged are provided at least inside and outside the game area. As a result, the player can easily and reliably grasp the game profit obtained in the desired period according to the game situation. In addition, "display according to a game situation" means displaying according to a game state such as a low-accuracy high base state, a high-accuracy high base state, a high-accuracy low base state, a normal effect mode, and a first super effect mode. , A second super effect mode, a first count effect mode, a second count effect mode, or the like. Note that the display screen 71a of the second image display device 71 and the display screen 72a of the third image display device 72 may display the effect symbol 8 depending on the game situation, such as when performing a reach effect. The display screen 71a is also referred to as a second effect symbol display unit, and the display screen 72a is also referred to as a third effect symbol display unit.

  FIG. 88 (a) shows a scene in which the effect symbol (first special symbol) is being changed and displayed in the low-probability low-base state (normal state). As shown in FIG. 88 (a), in the low-accuracy low-base state (normal state), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (first image display device, first effect display device) provided substantially at the center of the game area 3. In the (first display screen), an effect symbol display area 7b (effect symbol display section) for displaying an effect symbol 8 and an effect hold display area (an effect hold display area (first effect hold 9a or second effect hold 9b)) for displaying effect hold (first effect hold 9a). The first effect suspension display area 9c or the second effect suspension display area 9d) is provided. A display screen 71a (second display screen) of the second image display device 71 provided in an outer area (first outer area) (on the left side of FIG. 88) of the game area 3 has a power-on state or a power-on state. If the big hit game is executed after the power is turned on, the first change number display section 203 (the first bonus change number display section, the execution period display, which displays the change display number of the effect symbol from the end of the previous big hit game) Part) is provided.

  Here, it is shown that the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 78 times has been completed since the last big hit game end (currently, the 79th fluctuation display is being executed). The display screen 72a (third display screen) of the third image display device 72 provided in the outside area (the second outside area) of the game area 3 (on the right side of FIG. 88) shows an effect indicating the current effect mode. A mode display section 171 is provided. Then, the characters “normal mode” indicating that the current effect mode is the normal effect mode 181 are displayed.

  FIG. 88 (b) shows a scene in which the aforementioned “Thunder Reach (specific reach effect)” is executed as a reach effect (game effect) during the execution of the variation display of the effect symbol 8 as in FIG. 88 (a). Is shown. At this time (at the time of execution of the reach effect), the effect mode display unit 171, the first effect suspension display unit 9 c and the change display unit 9 e are deleted, and the first display screen, the second display screen, and the third display screen are displayed. A game effect (reach effect) is displayed using three display screens (substantially the entirety). However, as shown in FIG. 88 (b) and the like, such other display units (the effect mode display unit 171, the effect suspension display unit, the variable display unit, the total acquired profit display unit and the second acquired profit display described later). Section, etc.) are temporarily not displayed, the first change count display section 203 maintains the display without being erased. This makes it possible to clearly notify the player of the game period (game period from power-on) since the previous jackpot game, whatever the game situation.

  In addition, this allows the player to check how long he / she has played without going through the big hit game, thereby preventing an excessive investment in the game. Further, even in a situation where the player is not playing a game (during a demonstration image display or the like), the display of the first variation count display unit 203 is maintained without being erased. This allows other players to use the information as reference information when selecting a gaming machine. In addition, even when such game information is not displayed on the island facilities or the like, it is possible to clearly and reliably notify by always displaying the game information on the game machine.

  FIG. 88 (c) shows the result of the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 8 same as that of FIG. 88 (b), and the result of the reach effect shown in FIG. )) Is stopped. In addition, the bonus type display section 201 displays characters of “first bonus” notifying that the big hit type is a first bonus advantageous to the player. In the normal state (low-probability low-base state), it is executed in the first special symbol hit / fail judgment, so the big hit type advantageous to the player here is the 4R first big hit. The first bonus (big hit) advantageous to the player means that the effect mode (game state) after the end of the big hit game shifts to the super effect mode (high-accuracy low-base state). Also at this time, the display of the first change number display unit 203 is maintained without being erased.

  FIG. 89 (d) shows a scene (3R) during execution of the big hit game (4R first big hit game) based on the big hit shown in FIG. 88 (c). A special period (long-term period) is started based on executing the big hit game from the normal state. Then, during the special period, a total acquired profit display unit 164 (second profit information display unit) that displays game profits acquired during the special period, and a second acquired profit display unit 204 (first profit information display unit) ). The special period ends when the game state is set to the normal state (low-probability low-base state) again in a period excluding the big hit game. As shown in FIG. 89 (d), in the gaming state during the jackpot game, the upper center of the display screen 7a (first display screen) of the first image display device 7 provided in the game area is acquired in a special period. A total acquired profit display section 164 indicating the total number of game profits is provided (T: 3350 pt). This means that 350 game balls were paid out in the special period.

  Further, a second acquired profit display unit 204 is provided on the lower right of the display screen 7a to indicate the total number of game profits acquired in the big hit game being executed (350/600). This means that the maximum number of game balls (number of prize balls) to be paid out in the jackpot game is 600, and 350 game balls are currently paid out. During the big hit game in the first hit (the big hit that occurred in the normal state), the value displayed on the total earned profit display unit 164 and the value displayed on the second earned profit display unit 204 are the same value. Therefore, only one of them may be displayed, or both may be displayed as in the present embodiment. Also, in the present embodiment, only at the time of the first hit, the "maximum number of game balls (number of prize balls) to be paid out in the big hit game" is displayed, and thereafter, only the number of game balls actually paid out is displayed. Is displayed. The number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed is shown on the upper left of the display screen 7a (3R: third round).

  In addition, a launch direction display section 162 that indicates the launch direction (launch area) of the game ball is provided at the upper right of the display screen 7a. At a substantially central portion (other display area) of the display screen 7a, a jackpot game effect such as a predetermined character pattern or a background pattern is displayed. Further, on the second display screen 71a, the first change number display section 203 is displayed without being deleted. Thereby, even during the big hit game, it is necessary to display the value of the effect symbol (78 times) displayed on the first change frequency display unit 203 (78 times) from the previous big hit game to the current big hit game (special symbol hit / fail judgment). It can be easily confirmed that this has been done. In addition, on the other display area of the second display screen 71a and on the third display screen 72a, a big hit game effect such as a predetermined character picture or a background picture is displayed.

  FIG. 89 (e) shows a scene in which the effect symbols are displayed a predetermined number of times in the highly accurate low base state set after the big hit game shown in FIG. 89 (d) is completed. Specifically, from the display (14 times) of the first change number display section 203, it can be understood that after the big hit game shown in FIG. 89 (d) is completed, the change display of the effect symbol 14 times has been executed. Since the game state after the end of the big hit game shown in FIG. 89 (d) is set to the high-accuracy low-base state (since the low-accuracy low-base state is not set), the special period is continuing. Here, in the second embodiment, as described above, the first super production mode 182 and the second super production mode 183 are provided as the super production mode, and the player in the predetermined selection period is set. With the selection of, any of the effect modes can be selected. The selection period and the selection method of the effect mode in the high-accuracy low-base state are the same as those in the first embodiment, and the description is omitted. On the second display screen 71a, a second effect mode display unit 202 (selection mode display unit) that displays the effect mode selected by the player, and an effect mode display unit 171 (first effect) that displays the effect mode being executed. Mode display section).

  In the effect mode display section 171, the characters “super effect mode” indicating the super effect mode are displayed, and on the second effect mode display section 202, the first super effect mode is set as the effect mode of the super effect mode. Characters of “first SM” indicating that the selection has been made are displayed. Further, in the gaming state in the high-accuracy low base state (first super production mode), a total acquired profit display section 164 (showing the total number of game profits acquired in the special period (second period)) A second profit information display unit) is provided (T: 00720 pt). This means that 720 gaming balls were paid out during the special period. From the scene shown in FIG. 89 (d), 370 game balls are additionally paid out during the remaining period of the big hit game and during the period of 14 rotations in the first super effect mode.

  In addition, an effect for the first super effect mode, such as a character pattern imitating an airplane, is displayed substantially at the center of the display screen 7a. On the lower right of the display screen 7a, a second effect suspension display section 9d is provided. Further, a second acquired profit display unit 204 (first profit information display unit) is provided on the third display screen 72a. In the second acquired profit display unit 204, the game profit acquired in the big hit game shown in FIG. 89 (d) is displayed in the highly accurate and low base state after the big hit game shown in FIG. 89 (e) (the small hit game). The game profit obtained by adding the obtained game profit is displayed. That is, the second acquired profit display unit 204 displays the total amount of the game profit acquired in the period of one big hit game and the period from the big hit game until the next big hit game occurs. A period from the start of this one big hit game to the start of the next big hit game is also called a unit special period (first period), and the game profit obtained in this unit special period is calculated as a unit game profit (first profit information). ).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 89 (e), the second game profit display unit 204 displays the unit game profit and the type of the previous big hit (big hit game) (1B: first game). Bonus). In this way, it is possible to easily understand what kind of jackpot game and how much game profit has been obtained in the subsequent game state during the unit special period. Also, the change (increase) in the display (value) of the unit game profit is continued as long as the first super effect mode shown in FIG. 89 (e) is continued, and the game profit (prize ball) is given by the occurrence of the small hit game. When the payout is performed (paid), the value of the total earned profit display unit 164 on the display screen 7a and the value of the second earned profit display unit 204 on the third display screen 72a increase in conjunction (by the same number). .

  In the scene shown in FIG. 89 (e), since the special period is the first unit special period, the value of the total acquired profit display unit 164 matches the value of the second acquired profit display unit 204. . If the special period lasts for a long time and the unit special period occurs a plurality of times in response to the jackpot game occurring a plurality of times, these values will be different.

  FIG. 89 (f) shows that the first super effect mode (high-accuracy low-base state) shown in FIG. 89 (e) continues and the 29th effect symbol from the end of the previous big hit game (FIG. 89 (d)) ends. 14 shows a scene during execution of a fluctuation display. As shown in FIG. 89 (f), the reach effect has occurred in the 29th effect symbol change display. When a reach effect occurs in the first super effect mode (high-accuracy low-base state), the second effect mode display section 202, which has been displayed on the display screen 7a, the second display screen 71a, and the third display screen 72a, respectively, the effect mode The display unit 171, the total earned profit display unit 164, the second effect holding display unit 9d, the launch direction display unit 162, and the second earned profit display unit 204 form the display screen 7a, the second display screen 71a, and the third display screen 72a. To be hidden (deleted). Then, the reach effect is displayed on all the display screens of the display screen 7a, the second display screen 71a, and the third display screen 72a. In addition, even during the reach effect, the first change count display unit 203 is maintained without being deleted.

  FIG. 90 (g) shows the result of the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 8 same as that of FIG. 89 (f). The result of the reach effect shown in FIG. 89 (f) becomes a big hit, and the big hit effect symbol (“777 )) Is shown as stopped. In addition, the bonus type display section 201 displays the characters “third bonus” for notifying that the big hit type is a third bonus advantageous to the player. In the first super effect mode (high-accuracy low-base state), the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is executed, so the big hit type advantageous to the player here is the 15R third big hit. In addition, the 4R fourth big hit is also a big hit that is relatively advantageous to the player. The third bonus (big hit) that is advantageous to the player is a big hit game in which the game profit that can be acquired is the largest, and the effect mode (game state) after the end of the big hit game is changed to the super effect mode (high accuracy low). Base state). Also at this time, the display of the first change number display unit 203 is maintained without being erased.

  FIG. 90 (h) shows a scene (13R) during execution of the big hit game (15R third big hit game) based on the big hit shown in FIG. 90 (g). The special period started with the start of the big hit game shown in FIG. 89 (d) is being continued. As shown in FIG. 90 (h), in the gaming state during the jackpot game, a total acquired profit display section 164 indicating the total number of game profits acquired in the special period is provided at the upper center of the display screen 7a (T). : 02850 pt). This means that 2850 game balls were paid out during the special period. Specifically, between the game profit obtained in the previous big hit game shown in FIG. 89 (d) and 28 revolutions of the first super effect mode (highly accurate low base state) until the current big hit game is executed The game profit shown in the second profit display section 204 in FIG. 90 (h) is added to the game profit obtained by adding the game profit obtained in the small hit game to the value of the total profit display section 164 (T : 02850 pt).

  Further, a second acquired profit display unit 204 is provided at the lower right of the display screen 7a to indicate the total number of game profits acquired in the running big hit game (FIG. 90 (h)) (01950 pt). This means that 1950 game balls have been paid out in the ongoing big hit game. As shown in FIG. 90 (h) and the like, in the present embodiment, the total acquired profit display unit 164 and the second acquired profit display unit are displayed during the fluctuation display of the effect symbol such as the high-accuracy low base state and during the jackpot game. The display device for displaying 204 is different. Thereby, the profit display section is set at an appropriate position according to the game situation, and the player is notified of the game profit acquired in a desired period in a proper and accurate manner, so that the player can grasp the profit.

  In FIG. 90 (i), the effect mode (game state) after the end of the big hit game shown in FIG. 90 (h) is set to the super effect mode (high accuracy low base state), and the super effect mode (high accuracy low base state) is set. ) Shows a scene in which the effect symbol variation display is performed 22 times (a scene in which the 23rd effect symbol variation display is being executed). As shown in the second display screen 71 (a), the effect mode is set to the super effect mode, and the second super effect mode is set by the player's selection (second SM: second super effect mode). .

  In the scene shown in FIG. 90 (i), since the second unit special period is being executed as described above, the third display screen 72a is provided with a plurality of second acquisition profit display sections 204. I have. At the top of the third display screen 72a, the acquired game profit in the unit special period being executed is shown (3B, 2960 pt). Thereby, it is possible to grasp that the jackpot game generated in the current unit special period is the third bonus, and that 2960 game profits are currently provided in the current unit special period. Below (directly below) the acquired game profit in the last unit special period is shown (1B, 28, 885 pt). When the unit special period ends, a second change count display unit 205 (second bonus change count display unit, period information display unit) is added (added) to the second acquired profit display unit 204. By looking at the additional information, it is possible to grasp how long it took from the end of the big hit game to the occurrence of the next big hit game in the unit special period (whether the number of fluctuations of the Nankai was required). . In this way, the jackpot game generated in the last unit special period is the first bonus, and the number of times of display of the effect symbol during the jackpot game (the number of the special symbol hit / fail judgment) is 28 (period information). It can be understood that 885 gaming profits have been obtained in the last unit special period.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 90 (i), when a plurality of big hit games are generated in the special period, and a plurality of unit special periods are provided, a plurality of second acquired profit display sections are displayed on the third display screen 72a. 204 is displayed. In this case, the second acquired profit display unit 204 corresponding to the unit special period being executed (ongoing) is displayed so as to be more prominent than the second acquired profit display unit 204 corresponding to the unit special period that has already ended. Specifically, the currently executed one is displayed in a larger size than the finished one, or the running one is provided with decorations (addition of a picture, addition of a frame, etc.) which are not included in the finished one. , Can be displayed in bold.

In addition, a total earned profit display section 164 is provided at the bottom of the display screen 7a, and displays the amount of game profit obtained during the entire special period, that is, the period obtained by adding all unit special periods (T: 03845 pt). ). Specifically, the two second acquired profit display sections 204 on the third display screen 72a
Is added to the value (3845) displayed on the total earned profit display section 164. Further, the change (display) of the unit gaming profit displayed on the second acquired profit display unit 204 corresponding to the unit special period being executed continues as long as the super effect mode continues. Therefore, when a game profit (prize ball) is given by the occurrence of a small hit game, the unit special during the execution of the third display screen 72a is linked to the increase in the value of the total acquired profit display section 164 of the display screen 7a. The value of the (top) second earned profit display 204 corresponding to the time period is increased by the same number. It should be noted that the value of the second acquired profit display section 204 corresponding to the completed unit special period at the bottom does not change because it has already been determined.

  FIG. 91 (j) shows that the second super effect mode (high-accuracy low-base state) shown in FIG. 90 (i) continues, and the 45th effect symbol from the end of the previous big hit game (FIG. 90 (h)) ends. This shows a scene where the variable display has ended. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 91 (j), a reach effect occurs in the forty-fifth effect pattern change display, and the ally character is defeated by the enemy character in the confrontation effect in the reach effect, resulting in a big hit disadvantageous to the player It shows the scene that became. Although illustration is omitted, a jackpot game (fourth bonus) disadvantageous to the player is executed based on the jackpot, and the game state after the end of the jackpot game is a low-probability-high base state or a high-precision-high base. State, and the high-accuracy low-base state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, ends.

  Also, in the fourth bonus (2R fifth big hit game, 2R sixth big hit game, 2R seventh big hit game, or 2R eighth big hit game), a game profit can be obtained, but compared to other big hit games. And a small amount. Therefore, even during execution of the big hit game, the execution is displayed to the player more difficult to recognize than the other big hit games. In addition, for the unit special period including the jackpot game relating to the fourth bonus, the acquired profit is not displayed on the corresponding second acquired profit display unit 204. This makes it difficult for the player to notice the occurrence of the fourth bonus (2R fifth big hit game, 2R sixth big hit game, 2R seventh big hit game, or 2R eighth big hit game), and to reduce the gaming interest as much as possible. It is possible to prevent it. In addition, when a game profit is obtained in the jackpot game relating to the fourth bonus, the game profit is displayed only on the total gain display section 164 without being added to the second gain display section 204 (without display). Good. Further, the game profit obtained in the jackpot game relating to the fourth bonus may be added to the second gain display section 204 corresponding to the previous unit special period, assuming that the game profit has been obtained in the previous unit special period. In the present embodiment, when a gaming profit is acquired in the jackpot game related to the fourth bonus, neither the second acquired profit display section 204 nor the total acquired profit display section 164 is added and displayed.

  In the scene shown in FIG. 91 (k), a jackpot game disadvantageous to the player is executed based on the fact that the jackpot disadvantageous to the player shown in FIG. The scene where the count production mode was set is shown. As described above, the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is an unfavorable jackpot (2R fifth jackpot, 2R sixth jackpot, 2R seventh jackpot, or 2R eighth jackpot), and a count set after the end of the jackpot game The effect mode is a second count effect mode. In addition, the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is an unfavorable big hit (4R second big hit), and the count effect mode set after the end of the big hit game is the first count effect mode. As shown in FIG. 91 (k), in the second count effect mode 185, a remaining period display unit 206 is provided at the upper part of the display screen 7a. By displaying the number of remaining times of the symbol hit / fail determination, it is possible to play a game while grasping the remaining period of the second count effect mode.

  On the other hand, in the first count effect mode 184, the remaining period display unit 206 that displays the remaining period (the number of times) of the first count effect mode is displayed except for immediately before the end of the first count effect mode (for example, five times before the end). Not provided (FIGS. 94 (e) and (f)). This is a point that the display mode is partially different between the first count effect mode 184 and the second count effect mode 185. In a game situation in which the effect mode (game state) is set to the countdown mode (low-precision high-base state or high-precision high-base state), a total acquired profit display section 164 is provided at a lower portion of the display screen 7a. I have. The third display screen 72a is provided with three (plural) second acquisition profit display units 204. Since the count effect mode is currently in progress, the character “C mode” indicating the count mode is displayed on the second acquired profit display section 204 at the top. As described above, in the jackpot game in which the count mode is set and in the count mode (low-probability-high-base state or high-probability-high-base state), the amount of game profit that can be obtained is small. Do not display earned profits.

  Further, the second acquired profit display section 204 at the top of the third display screen 72a shows the unit special period currently in progress, and the second acquired profit display section 204 below the second acquired profit display section 204 shows the previously completed unit special period. , And the second acquired profit display section 204 therebelow indicates the unit special period two times before the unit period has already ended. In the present embodiment, a maximum of three second earned profit display units 204 can be displayed on the third display screen 72a, and when four or more big hit games (unit special periods) occur, the oldest ones become older. It shall be deleted. In addition, the number of the second acquired profit display units 204 that can be displayed on the third display screen 72a may be an arbitrary number of four or more.

  In FIG. 91 (l), the count effect mode (low-precision high-base state or high-precision high-base state) shown in FIG. 91 (k) continues, and the 40th time from the end of the previous big hit game (FIG. 91 (j)) The result of the fluctuation display of the effect symbol of FIG. FIG. 92 (m) shows a scene (10R) during execution of the big hit game (15R third big hit game) based on the big hit shown in FIG. 91 (l). The special period started with the start of the big hit game shown in FIG. 89 (d) is being continued. As shown in FIG. 92 (m), in the gaming state during the jackpot game, a total acquired profit display section 164 indicating the total number of game profits acquired in the special period is provided in the upper center of the display screen 7a (T). : 05385 pt). Further, a second acquired profit display unit 204 is provided at the lower right of the display screen 7a to indicate the total number of game profits acquired in the running big hit game (FIG. 92 (m)) (01450 pt).

  FIG. 92 (n) shows that the effect mode (game state) after the big hit game shown in FIG. 92 (m) is set to the super effect mode (high-accuracy low-base state), 4) shows a scene in which the effect symbol variation display is performed four times (a scene in which the fifth effect symbol variation display is being executed). As shown in the second display screen 71a, the first super effect mode is set by the player's selection (first SM).

  In the scene shown in FIG. 90 (n), since the fourth unit special period in the special period is being executed, the number of the second acquired profit display units 204 that can be displayed on the third display screen 72a is exceeded. I have. Therefore, the oldest second acquired profit display unit 204 is deleted, and the second acquired profit display unit 204 corresponding to the newly executing unit special period is provided at the top (3B, 2350 pt). Further, from the “C mode” displayed on the second acquired profit display section 204 therebelow, it is possible to grasp that the special period has been continued by pulling back (generating a big hit) during the count effect mode. According to the flow described above, the total acquired profit display unit 164 and the second acquired profit display unit 204 are displayed on a predetermined display screen according to the game situation.

  FIG. 93 (a) shows a scene in which the big hit has been stopped in the normal state (low-probability low-base state) and the big hit effect symbol ("666") has been stopped. The “second bonus” is displayed on the bonus type display section 201 of the display screen 7a. In the second bonus, an effect mode (game state) after the end of the big hit game is set to a super effect mode (high-accuracy low base state) in accordance with the result of the game effect (combat effect) executed during the big hit game. There is a case where it is set, and a case where it is set to the count effect mode (low-probability high base state). The count effect mode in this case is the first count effect mode 184.

  FIG. 93 (b) shows a big hit game (second bonus) executed based on the big hit shown in FIG. 93 (a). During the final round of the jackpot game or at the end of the final round, a victory effect in which the ally character defeats the enemy character is executed, and after the end of the jackpot game, the super effect mode (high-probability low base state) is set. Have been. FIG. 93 (c) shows that the first super effect mode (high accuracy low base state) is set after the big hit game shown in FIG. 93 (b) ends, and in the first super effect mode (high accuracy low base state), This shows a scene in which a predetermined number of times (14 times) of effect symbol fluctuation display (special symbol hit / fail judgment) has been executed.

  FIG. 94 (d) shows a big hit game (second bonus) executed based on the big hit shown in FIG. 93 (a). During the final round of the jackpot game or at the end of the final round, a defeat effect in which the enemy character defeats an ally character is executed, and after the end of the jackpot game is set to the count effect mode (low-probability high base state). Have been. In FIG. 94 (e), after the big hit game shown in FIG. 94 (d) ends, the count effect mode (low-precision high base state) is set. 2) shows a scene in which the effect symbol change display (special symbol hit / fail judgment) is executed. As described above, while the count effect mode shown in FIG. 94 (e) is the first count effect mode 184, the display is continued until the end of the first count effect mode 184 (a predetermined number of times within the remaining five times). The remaining period display section is not set on the screen 7a. This means that the execution period set in the first count effect mode is only one type, while the execution period set in the second count effect mode is 50 or 100 times. It depends.

  FIG. 94 (f) shows a scene in which the effect display of the effect symbols is displayed a predetermined number of times from the count effect mode shown in FIG. 94 (e), and the count effect mode is advanced. As shown in the first change number display section 203 of the second display screen 71a, the change display of the effect symbol 96 times since the end of the previous big hit game (special symbol hit / fail judgment) is being executed, and the count effect mode is being executed. When the remaining three variations of the effect symbol are displayed except for the variation display, the process ends. In this embodiment, when the remaining number of times becomes three, a remaining period display unit 206 is provided on the display screen 7a to indicate that the end time of the count effect mode is near, and the last three times, the last two times, and the last one Is displayed. This makes it possible to clearly notify the player of the end time of the count effect mode in advance.

  As described above, according to the game situation, the game profit amount acquired in different periods of the special period (condominium period) is displayed on each of the plurality of display devices separately arranged. It is possible to easily and reliably grasp the game profit acquired during (special period or unit special period). Also, by changing the display device to be displayed according to the game situation, it is possible to easily and reliably grasp the game profit.

[Other aspects]
In the present embodiment, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the effect symbol display unit are changed according to the game state to a special symbol set as a main player of the game in the game state (a first special symbol or a later-described special symbol). The variable display is synchronized with the variable display of the second special symbol). In other words, one effect symbol (three digits) is displayed on the effect symbol display unit, and is synchronized with one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol according to the game state, thereby synchronizing with the first special symbol. There is a case and a case of being synchronized with the second special symbol. By changing to such a mode, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol are displayed, the variation display of the first effect symbol is synchronized with the variation display of the first special symbol, and the second effect symbol is changed to the second special symbol. The variable display may be performed in synchronization with the variable display. Also, when displaying both the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol, the effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol (one special symbol) set as the subject of the game in the gaming state is displayed in a large size (subject). And the effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol (other special symbol) which is not the main player of the game may be displayed small. Specifically, the display area is 1/5 or less. Also, instead of displaying both the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol at all times, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol are both displayed in accordance with the game state and the game situation. One of the effect symbols and the second effect symbol (the main symbol) may be displayed.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the above-described gaming machine, a "variable entrance" which can be changed to a state where a game ball can enter and a state where a game ball cannot enter the ball, "Special game execution means" capable of executing a special game in which the variable entrance is in a state in which the variable entrance can be entered when the result of the first hit determination or the second hit determination is a hit. Further, the “second starting port” may be a variable starting port that is changeable between the first mode and the second mode in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than the first mode. In addition, a game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable start port is a predetermined frequency (first game state), and a game in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable start port is higher than the game state. And a state (second game state). Here, the “predetermined frequency” includes 0.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number of times of opening the first special winning opening or the second special winning opening in one round is one, but the number of times of opening the first special winning opening or the second special winning opening in one round is plural. The number of rounds may be different, or a round having a different number of times of opening may be provided. Further, in the present embodiment, the first special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation are control processing that can be simultaneously changed. However, the control processing that uses the second special figure reservation in preference to the first special figure reservation is performed. A so-called special figure 2 priority control processing, a control processing in which the first special figure reservation is used prior to the second special figure reservation, and a so-called special figure 1 priority control processing may be used. In addition, the priority is not set for the digestion of the first special figure reservation and the digestion of the second special figure reservation, and the first special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation are digested in order from the oldest stored one. Control processing, that is, control processing of so-called entry order (memory order) digestion may be used.

  A pachinko gaming machine of a type not provided with a probability setting means (without a high probability state), having a specific area inside, a state where a game ball can enter and a state where a game ball can enter. A large winning opening that can be changed to an impossible ball entry state is provided, and the winning port is set in a state where it is possible to enter the ball for a predetermined time when the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the ball entry into the starting port becomes a small hit. When a game ball enters the large winning opening in the ball possible state and the game ball passes through a specific area, the game becomes a big hit, a big hit game is executed, and the present invention is also applied to a pachinko gaming machine to which a predetermined privilege is given. This pachinko gaming machine is called a so-called one-type and two-type mixing machine. When the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the ball entering the starting port becomes a big hit, the big hit game is executed without passing through a specific area. In addition, as a privilege, a high base state in which the frequency of game balls entering the starting port is increased can be given. Further, it is possible to have a first starting port and a second starting port to generate a high base state that increases the frequency of entering the second starting port. The present invention can be applied to all these types of gaming machines.

  In the above-described embodiment, the large hit probability can be set to a low probability (first probability) or a high probability (second probability) by deactivating / activating the probability varying function. Is not limited to this. For example, three or more types of probabilities can be set, such as a medium probability (third probability) higher than a low probability (first probability) and lower than a high probability (second probability). Is also good. Furthermore, a first low probability and a first high probability (first probability condition), a second low probability and a second high probability (second probability condition), a third low probability and a third high probability (third probability condition), and the like. A plurality of types of probability conditions defining a relationship between a low probability and a high probability are provided, and any of the plurality of types of probability conditions can be arbitrarily set (selectable), for example, when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. Is also good.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, for the advance determination based on the starting ball entry, the latest acquired random number value (acquisition information) stored in the special figure holding storage unit is read, and the read acquired random number value (acquisition information) is determined. (Preliminary judgment) is to be performed (“Starting ball entry processing (S205)”; see FIG. 11 and FIG. 13), but the method of the preliminary judgment is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the special figure reservation storage unit, an area (acquisition information storage unit) for storing acquisition information to be subjected to the preliminary determination (that is, acquisition information acquired based on the starting ball entry) is provided by the main control unit and the sub control unit. May be provided in the RAM of the unit, and the acquisition information stored in the storage area (the storage unit for the preliminary determination) may be determined (prior determination). In this case, by storing the result of the preliminary determination in the RAM of the main control unit or the sub-control unit, it is possible to delete the acquired information used in the preliminary determination (the acquired information stored in another storage area). Alternatively, instead of making a preliminary determination on the acquired information stored in the special figure reservation storage unit, it is also possible to make a preliminary decision on the acquired information acquired based on the starting ball. That is, the determination may be made in advance before the acquired information is stored in the special figure suspension storage unit. In this case, it is not necessary to provide an area for storing the acquired information to be subjected to the preliminary determination separately from the special figure reserved storage unit, and it is also necessary to read out the acquired information stored in the special figure reserved storage unit for the preliminary decision. Absent.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the effect mode D (state C, specific game state), when a specific period is started in a situation where three or more small hits are continuously stored, during the specific period, The display of the number-of-prize-balls image S and the addition display of the prize-ball count image C2 (second profit effect) are performed based on the ball entering the small winning opening for small hits and the like. An effect is performed in which the acquired prize ball number indicated by the ball count image C2 is added (totaled) to the acquired prize ball number (total acquired prize ball number, total acquired prize ball number) of the prize ball count image C1. Had become. On the other hand, when a new second special map reservation (ball entry to the third starting port 26) occurs during the specific period, and the reservation is determined to be the small hit reservation by the preliminary determination (the reservation pre-reading). , The specific period currently being executed may be extended. For example, it is assumed that a specific period is started in a situation where four small hits are continuously stored, and two small hits are consumed after the start of the specific period. At this time, the special figure 2 reserved ball count is “2”. In this situation, if a new second special map reservation occurs and the number of special figure 2 reserved balls becomes “3” and the reservation is preliminarily determined to be a small hit reservation, a specific period counter (see S5005) Is incremented by “+1” (1 addition). Thereby, the newly generated (stored) small hit holding is consumed, and the specific period is extended until the small hit game related to the small hit holding is completed. Alternatively, after the specific period is started, two small hits are consumed and the number of special figure 2 reserved balls becomes "2". It is assumed that the second special figure reservation to be performed and the second special figure reservation corresponding to the special figure 2 reserved ball number “4” occur in succession. Then, the second special figure hold corresponding to the special figure 2 reserved ball number “3” is the off-hold and the second special figure hold corresponding to the special figure 2 reserved ball number “4” is the small hit reserve in advance. Assume that it is determined. In this case, by incrementing the specific period counter (see S5005) by “+2” (addition of 2), the small hit holding corresponding to the special figure 2 number of reserved balls “4” is consumed, and the small hit change and the small hit game are completed. Until you do so, the specific period can be extended. In this way, by extending the specific period after the start of the specific period, the period in which the display of the number-of-prize-ball images S and the additional display of the prize-ball count image C2 (the second profit effect) is performed. Since it extends, it is possible to further enhance the effect effect of the profit effect.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, two conditions of (1) that at least three small hits are continuously stored and (2) winning in the lottery at the start of the specific period are set as two conditions of the start of the specific period. Although the condition has been described, the start condition of the specific period is not limited to this. For example, a plurality (for example, two or more) of small hits that are not continuous are stored, or a predetermined number or more (for example, three or more) of small hits are stored regardless of whether they are continuous or not. May be used as the start condition of the specific period. In this case, the start condition of the specific period is relaxed as compared with the embodiment, and the specific period is more likely to be generated (started more easily). Further, the start condition of the specific period may be only (1) out of (1) and (2) described above.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, when a big hit that triggers the setting of the state C (high-accuracy low-base state) occurs, before the transition to the state C, the mode selection period for selecting the effect mode of the state C If the big hit is a 4R big hit (4R first big hit, 4R fourth big hit), a mode selection period occurs during the ending period of the big hit game, and the 15R big hit (15R No. In the case of three big hits, a mode selection period is assumed to occur in a predetermined round game (start of 14R to halfway of 15R in this embodiment). On the other hand, when the number of rounds of the big hit that triggers the setting of the state C is, for example, one of 10 rounds, and the game state when the 10R big hit occurs is the state A (left-handed game), the ending period If a mode selection period occurs during the state B or C (right-handed game), the mode selection period may be generated in a predetermined round game (for example, 9R start to 10R middle). In the latter case, notification that the mode selection period is to be started from the next round (a notification before the start of the selection period) may be performed in the round before the mode selection period occurs. In addition, the generation timing when the mode selection period is generated in the round game during the big hit game, that is, the round that is the mode selection period is not limited to the embodiment, and may be, for example, from 5R start to 6R end. , Or the last round only, or any other round. Furthermore, when the mode selection period is generated during the ending period of the jackpot, a notification that the mode selection period is to be started thereafter (a notification before the start of the selection period) is performed in the round effect of the last round before the start of the ending period. It may be.

  In the above-described embodiment, the effect mode selection (selection of effect mode C or D) in the mode selection period can be executed based on the operation of the effect button. On the other hand, in the effect mode selection in the mode selection period, any one of a plurality of effect modes determined in advance may be automatically selected by lottery on the sub-control side. In this case, for example, at the start of the mode selection period, a roulette image (one mode of the mode selection screen) showing a plurality of effect modes divided into roulette shapes is displayed on the display screen of the image display device, and An effect (roulette effect) in which one effect mode is determined (selected) by roulette lottery may be performed as an effect during the mode selection period (mode selection effect). Further, in the present embodiment, the effect modes in the state C are two types (the effect modes C and D).

  In addition, the effects (variation mode, stop mode, reach effect mode, etc.) relating to the variable display of the effect symbols shown in the above-described embodiment, and the effect executed in accordance with the small hit in the state C (the effect mode C, D). (A small hit look-ahead effect, a first profit effect, a second profit effect, and the like), a notice effect (display of a notice image) in the effect mode D, a notification screen and a mode selection screen relating to a mode selection period, and the like. Various effects are merely examples, and the effects according to the present invention are not limited to the examples.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, when displaying the preview image in the effect mode D, the preview image is displayed on the display screen 7a (the preview image display area U) of the image display device 7. On the other hand, the preview image may be displayed on another image display device included in the gaming machine, such as the display screen 71a of the second image display device 71 or the display screen 72a of the third image display device 72. . Further, in addition to the image display device including a liquid crystal display, other display means (effect display device) for effects such as a dot display and a drum display are provided. May be configured to be able to execute a preview effect corresponding to the display of the preview image.

  In the above-described embodiment, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are provided on the front surface of the front frame 51 (the pachinko gaming machine 1). Although the third image display device 72 is also rotatable, the third image display device 72 is also rotatable in the initial state (first state) and the tilted state (inward of the viewing window 51a (inside the front frame 51)). (Second state). In this way, there is no problem with the relationship with the hall equipment (CR unit, ball rental machine, other equipment between stands) or the gaming machine (opening the frame) adjacent to the right side of the gaming machine. Becomes possible.

  In the above-described embodiment, one image display device 7 (board-side display means) is provided as a main liquid crystal (main display device) on the game board side (inside the game area), and the game machine frame side (outside the game area). ) Is provided with two image display devices 71 and 72 (frame side display device) as sub liquid crystal (sub display device), but a sub liquid crystal (sub display device) may be provided on the game board 2 side. In this case, instead of the two sub liquid crystals (the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72) shown in the above-described embodiment, two sub liquid crystals are used as the board side display means as the main liquid crystal (the first image display device). Device 7) or one sub liquid crystal on the game board side instead of one of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 (left sub liquid crystal or right sub liquid crystal). Can be. Alternatively, it is also possible to provide one or two or more sub liquid crystals on the game board side while providing the two sub liquid crystals (the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72) shown in the above-described embodiment. is there. This also makes it possible to display various effects with a plurality of image displays.

  In the above-described embodiment, the display device (first image display device 7) provided on the game board side (inside the game area) and the display device (second image display device) provided on the game machine frame side (outside the game area) The display device 71 and the third image display device 72) are all image display devices including liquid crystal display devices (liquid crystal display devices). However, the type of display device is not limited to liquid crystal. It is also possible to use a dot display, a 7-segment display, or the like. Further, different types of display devices, including the main display device and the sub-display device, may be mixed. Specifically, for example, among the first to third image display devices shown in the above-described embodiment, the first image display device 7 is a drum display or a 7-segment display, and the second image display device 71 and the third image display device are not shown. The image display device 72 may be a liquid crystal display as in the embodiment. Alternatively, the first image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display as in the embodiment, and one or both of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 may be a dot display. Thus, a variety of effect displays can be provided by a plurality of display devices having different display methods, and it is possible to enhance game entertainment.

  In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the fluctuation display and the stop display of the effect symbols 8 are performed on the display screen 7a (main liquid crystal) located substantially at the center of the game board 2 (game area 3) in principle (see FIGS. 54 to 54). 58, 67 to 73, 74 (a), 75, and 76), when performing the full rotation effect, a left symbol (effect symbol 8L) is displayed on the left display screen 71a (left sub liquid crystal). A middle symbol (effect symbol 8C) is displayed on the center display screen 7a (main liquid crystal), and a right symbol (effect symbol 8R) is displayed on the right display screen 72a (right sub-liquid crystal) (see the middle part of FIG. 77). . In other words, the effect design (stop effect design) which is stopped and displayed after the variable display is displayed on the first image display device 7 in principle, and in the full rotation effect, the middle design of the stop effect design is displayed as the first image. The left symbol and the right symbol are displayed on the display device 7 (display screen 7a), and are displayed on the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) and the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a), respectively. On the other hand, even in a variable effect other than the full rotation effect, a part of the stop effect design may be displayed on the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72.

  For example, if the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped (temporarily stopped) on the screen after the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is started on the first image display device 7 and reach is established, the reach state is configured. The left symbol and the right symbol (part of the stop effect symbol) are displayed on the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72, respectively. In this state, after the reach effect display is performed on the first image display device 7, the middle symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) on the first image display device 7, and the second image display device 71 is displayed until then. The left symbol and the right symbol displayed on the third image display device 72 are moved to the first image display device 7 and displayed side by side with the middle symbol, and finally, three effect symbols (stop effect symbols) Is displayed. Also, for example, it indicates whether or not a stylized big hit is determined depending on the symbol type when the effect symbol 8 is displayed on the first image display device 7 in the big hit mode (double eyes) (for example, with a red symbol). If there is a probable jackpot, if it is a symbol other than a red symbol, a chance jackpot, etc.), and if a jackpot mode other than a probable jackpot is displayed, a so-called “re-lottery effect” is performed. The middle symbol is displayed on the first image display device 7 as in the rotation effect, the left symbol and the right symbol are displayed on the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72, respectively, and the three symbols are displayed. By performing scroll display in synchronization with the device, a re-lottery effect is performed. By providing an effect mode (fluctuation effect pattern) such as the reach effect or the re-lottery effect, the display variation of the effect symbol 8 (stop effect symbol) that is stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display increases, and the fluctuation effect is varied. It becomes possible to.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 (sub-display device) are liquid crystal display devices smaller than the first image display device 7 (main display device), The display screen had a substantially square shape (see FIG. 1). On the other hand, the size (screen size) of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 (sub-display device) may be larger than that shown in the embodiment. Specifically, the length of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 in the vertical direction (vertical direction) of the display screen is changed to the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7 (main display device). Is a vertically long rectangular image display device (liquid crystal display device) that is substantially the same as or longer than the vertical direction (vertical direction), and is provided on the front surface of the front frame 51 on the left and right sides of the viewing window 51a. You may. Also in this case, the image display device provided on the front left side of the front frame 51 is rotatably supported like the above-described embodiment. By providing such a vertically-long rectangular image display device as a sub-display device on the gaming machine frame side (front frame), a dynamic effect display that gives an impact to the player can be achieved. In particular, the vertical (vertical) length of the display screen of the sub-display device provided on the gaming machine frame side is set to the vertical direction (vertical direction) of the display screen of the image display device (main display device) provided on the gaming board side. ), The display length of which is approximately the same as or longer than that of the main display device, and which is arranged on the main display device in the left-right direction (horizontal direction). However, an effect display (wide display in the horizontal (left / right) direction) in which the display is extended (enlarged) to one or both of the sub-display devices located on the left and right thereof is possible.

  Specifically, for example, during the execution of the variable display (fluctuation effect) of the effect symbol on the first image display device 7 (main display device), the variation effect mode (variable effect pattern) during the execution is changed. In the case of the specific mode, the display area of the background image (background screen) displayed on the display screen of the main display device is gradually enlarged to the display screen of the image display device (sub-display device) on the frame side ( It is possible to perform an effect such as expanding the image or expanding (expanding) the entire display screen at a stretch. Alternatively, when the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed through the variable display on the main display device, the effect symbols are enlarged and displayed, and one of the left symbol and the right symbol among the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed. An effect is also possible in which all or all of the parts are displayed on the display screens of the left and right sub display devices, and the middle symbol is displayed on the display screen of the main display device.

  From the main display device (board side display device) located substantially at the center of the game board (inside the game area), display contents are displayed on the sub display devices (frame side display device) located on the left and right sides (outside the game area). In order to obtain the effect of the effect that the (display area) is enlarged (extended), the length of the display screen of the sub display device in the vertical direction (vertical direction) must be at least set in the vertical direction (vertical direction) of the display screen of the main display device. The length is preferably １ ／ or more of the length in the direction, and more preferably） or more.

[Others]
Hereinafter, inventions related to the embodiments (examples) disclosed in the present specification will be disclosed as reference inventions.

(Reference Invention 1)
Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that includes a display unit that performs variable display of identification information and that can execute a special game advantageous to a player based on a display result of the variable display being a specific display result. I have. In this type of gaming machine, the result of the variable display can be shown (notified) to the player by the display mode of the identification information displayed (derived display) when the variable display of the identification information is stopped. (See, for example, JP-A-2008-370).

  In the gaming machine provided with the above-described display means, the player proceeds with the game by paying attention to the identification information displayed on the display means. However, the player becomes tired of the game while the display of the change of the identification information is repeated many times, and it is difficult to maintain interest in the game. The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and a purpose thereof is to realize display of a new mode of interest to a player with respect to display of identification information, thereby improving amusement of a game. It is to plan.

A gaming machine according to a reference invention 1-1 for solving the above-mentioned problem,
A gaming machine that performs variable display of identification information based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and is capable of notifying a result of the variable display by a display mode of the identification information when the variable display is stopped,
A variable display unit capable of performing a variable display of the identification information;
The change display means,
When stopping the variable display of the identification information, the variable display is stopped in a predetermined stop mode,
It is characterized in that it is possible to change the stop mode when stopping the variable display depending on the display mode of the identification information displayed by stopping the variable display.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the variable display is performed by the variable display means, when the variable display is stopped, the variable display is stopped in a predetermined stop mode. Then, the stop mode can be made different depending on the display mode of the identification information to be displayed (derived display) when the variable display is stopped. For this reason, the player can guess the display mode of the subsequently displayed (derived display) identification information, paying attention to the stop mode when the variable information display is stopped. As a result, it is possible to attract the player's interest to the stop mode when the variable display is stopped, and to improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 1-2 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 1-1 described above.
The identification information is composed of a plurality of symbols,
At least the first stop mode in which the stop order of the plurality of symbols is a predetermined first stop order and the stop order of the plurality of symbols are the first stop mode in stopping the variable display of the identification information. A second stop mode that is a second stop order different from the stop order.
As a display mode of the identification information when the variable display is stopped, at least a first display mode which is a trigger for executing a predetermined special game and a second display which is a trigger for executing another special game different from the predetermined special game. And a third display mode that does not trigger the execution of the special game,
The change display means,
When the display mode of the identification information displayed by stopping the variable display is the first display mode, the variable display can be stopped in the first stop mode,
When the display mode of the identification information displayed by stopping the variable display is the second display mode or the third display mode, the variable display can be stopped in the second stop mode. It is.

  According to such a gaming machine, the identification information is composed of a plurality of symbols, and the identification information is variably displayed by the variably displayed symbols. In such a configuration, at least the stop order of the plurality of symbols is the first stop order as the stop mode when stopping the variable display of the identification information, that is, the stop mode when stopping the variable display of the plurality of symbols. A first stop mode, and a second stop mode that is a second stop sequence different from the first stop sequence (first stop mode), and identification information when the variable display is stopped. As a display mode of (a plurality of symbols), at least a first display mode which is a trigger for execution of a predetermined special game, a second display mode which is a trigger for execution of another special game different from the special game, and a special game. And a third display mode that does not trigger the execution of Then, when the display mode of the identification information (a plurality of symbols) to be displayed (derived display) by stopping the variable display is the first display mode, the variable display of the plurality of symbols is performed in the first stop order ( In the second display mode or the third display mode, the variable display of a plurality of symbols is stopped in the second stop order (second stop mode). Is possible. For this reason, the player can guess the type of the special game that can be executed, whether or not the special game can be executed, the possibility of the execution, and the like, through the stop mode when the change display of the identification information stops. Thereby, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the stop mode when the change display of the identification information is stopped, and to excite a sense of expectation for the subsequent special game.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 1-3 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 1-2 described above.
As a display mode of the identification information when the variable display is stopped, further, there is a fourth display mode that does not trigger execution of the special game,
As a stop mode when stopping the variable display of the identification information, a third stop mode in which the stop timings of the plurality of symbols are substantially the same,
The change display means,
When the display mode of the identification information displayed by stopping the variable display is the fourth display mode, the variable display can be stopped in the second stop mode or the third stop mode. is there.

  According to such a gaming machine, as a display mode of the identification information (a plurality of symbols) to be displayed (derived display) by stopping the change display of the identification information (a plurality of symbols), a special game is further executed. If the display mode of the identification information (a plurality of symbols) to be displayed (derived display) when the variable display is stopped is the fourth display mode, the fourth display mode that does not serve as a trigger is provided. In the second stop mode or the third stop mode in which the stop timings (stop timings) of a plurality of symbols are substantially the same, it is possible to stop the variable display of a plurality of symbols. For this reason, in the case where the display mode that does not trigger the execution of the special game is derived and displayed, the mode in which the variable display is stopped includes a mode in which it is possible to immediately recognize that there is no possibility of executing the special game (third mode). Becomes possible. This makes it possible to diversify the stop modes when the variable display of the identification information is stopped, and to prevent the player's expectation for the execution of the special game from being unnecessarily aroused.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 1-4 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 1-2 or Reference Invention 1-3 described above.
When the change display of the identification information is stopped in the first stop mode, a predetermined effect display is executed.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the variable display of the identification information is stopped in the first stop mode, that is, the display mode of the identification information displayed (derived display) by stopping the variable display is the first display mode. In this case, a predetermined effect display is executed in accordance with this. Therefore, the fact that the identification information is displayed (derived display) in the first display mode, that is, the execution of the special game triggered by the display of the first display mode is emphasized and indicated to the player. It becomes possible. Thereby, it is possible to enhance the effect of rendering when the variable display of the identification information is stopped in the first stop mode.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 1-5 is the gaming machine according to any one of Reference Invention 1-2 to Reference Invention 1-4 described above,
A state control unit capable of controlling a game state when the change display of the identification information is performed,
The gaming state has at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state,
The second game state is characterized in that the display mode of the identification information displayed by stopping the variable display is higher in the frequency of the first display mode than the first game mode. is there.

  According to such a gaming machine, at least the first gaming state and the second gaming state are provided as gaming states when the identification information is fluctuated and displayed, and the second gaming state is the first gaming state. In comparison with the above, the display mode of the identification information displayed when the variable display is stopped becomes the first display mode more frequently. That is, in the second game state, the execution frequency of the special game (predetermined special game) triggered by the execution of the display of the first display mode is higher than in the first display mode. For this reason, in the second game state, the frequency of the change display of the identification information stopping in the first stop mode increases. Thereby, in the second game state, the player is focused on whether or not the change display of the identification information is stopped in the first stop mode, and the expectation for the special game triggered by the display in the first display mode is raised. It becomes possible to instigate.

Gaming machine Reference Invention 1-6, in the gaming machine of the Reference Invention 1-5 described above,
The type of symbols constituting the identification information has at least a first symbol type and a second symbol type,
The first display mode is configured by a symbol of a second symbol type among the first symbol type and the second symbol type,
In the first gaming state, at least a part of the symbols included in the first symbol type is a second symbol type in the second gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, there are at least a first symbol type and a second symbol type as types of symbols constituting the identification information, and among the first symbol type and the second symbol type, The first display mode is configured by the symbols of the second symbol type, and at least a part of the symbols included in the first symbol type in the first gaming state is set to the second symbol type in the second gaming state. It has become something. For this reason, in the first gaming state, a symbol that cannot constitute the first display mode because it is a symbol of the first symbol type is changed to a symbol that can constitute the first display mode by entering the second gaming state. Will be done. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to not only the stop mode when the change display of the identification information is stopped but also the symbol type.

  According to the above-described Reference Invention 1, regarding the display of the identification information, it is possible to realize a display in a new mode that attracts the player's interest, and to improve the game entertainment.

(Reference Invention 2)
Conventionally, when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific display result, it is possible to enter a game ball into a variable entrance (for example, a special winning opening), and the game ball enters the variable entrance. There is known a gaming machine in which a predetermined game profit (for example, a prize ball) is given to a player based on the game profit. In this type of gaming machine, the amount of game profit provided in response to the entry of a game ball into the variable entrance, that is, the amount of game profit (acquired profit amount) to be obtained by the player is determined by a predetermined value. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-35664).

  However, the display of the acquired profit amount as described above is already adopted by many gaming machines, and is an effect lacking in freshness. The present invention 2 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to realize an effect of a new mode as an effect for displaying an acquired profit amount, and to improve the game entertainment. .

A gaming machine according to a reference invention 2-1 for solving the above-mentioned problem,
A variable entrance that can be changed between a state where the game ball cannot enter and a state where the ball can enter,
Profit granting means capable of granting a predetermined game profit based on entry into the variable entrance,
Profit effect execution means capable of executing a profit effect for displaying an obtained profit amount when a game profit is provided by the profit provision means,
State control means capable of controlling a game state,
The state control means can control the game state to a specific game state based on establishment of a control condition,
The profit effect execution means includes, at least, a first profit effect in which an acquired profit amount is added and displayed based on a ball entering the variable entrance in the specific game state, and the first profit effect in a specific period in the specific game state And a second profit effect in which the obtained profit amount is added and displayed based on the ball entering the variable ball entrance.

  According to such a gaming machine, when a game ball enters the variable entrance when being controlled to the specific game state, and a predetermined game profit is given to the player in response to the ball, At least two types of effects, a first profit effect and a second profit effect, can be executed as an effect (profit effect) for displaying the amount of the game profit to be given (acquired profit amount), of which the second profit effect is performed. Is executed during a specific period in the specific game state. As a result, it is possible to attract the player's interest to a profit effect executed based on the ball entry into the variable entrance in the specific game state, and to improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 described above.
The profit effect execution means may execute the first profit effect on a predetermined first display unit without executing the second profit effect in a period other than the specific period, and may execute the first profit effect in the specific period. The second profit effect can be executed on a predetermined second display unit without executing the effect,
After the end of the specific period, an effect of adding and displaying the acquired profit amount displayed on the second display unit by the second profit effect in the specific period to the acquired profit amount displayed on the first display unit. It is characterized by being executable.

  According to such a gaming machine, during the specific gaming state, in a period other than the specific period, the first profit effect is executed on the first display unit based on the ball entering the variable entrance, and in the specific period, The second profit effect is executed on the second display unit based on the ball entering the variable entrance. When the specific period ends, the first profit effect is performed on the obtained profit amount (the obtained profit amount displayed on the second display unit) added and displayed by the second profit effect executed in the specific period. An effect of adding and displaying (summing) the acquired profit amount displayed on the first display unit is executed. Thus, it is possible to change the display mode of the acquired profit amount during the specific game state to enhance the effect effect of the profit effect.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 2-3 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 2-1 or Reference Invention 2-2 described above,
Acquisition information storage means capable of storing acquisition information acquired based on establishment of an acquisition condition,
Identification information display means capable of executing a variable display of the identification information based on the acquired information;
A preliminary determination unit capable of performing a preliminary determination as to whether or not the acquired information is the specific acquired information before performing the variable display,
It is possible to enter the variable entrance based on the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result,
The specific acquisition information is acquisition information for deriving the specific display result as a display result of the variable display,
The specific period is a period that can be started when a predetermined number of specific acquisition information is stored in the acquisition information storage unit as a result of the preliminary determination in the specific game state. It is assumed that.

  According to such a gaming machine, the acquired information acquired based on the establishment of the acquisition condition can be stored, and the variable display of the identification information can be executed based on the acquired information. Prior to the execution of the variable display, it is possible to perform a preliminary determination as to whether or not the acquired information is the specific acquired information. As a result, a specific display result is derived, and as a result, it becomes possible to enter the variable entrance. The specific period in the specific game state is a period that can be started in a situation where a predetermined number of specific acquisition information is stored. In other words, it is a period that can be started in a situation in which it is determined that it is possible to enter the variable entrance with a predetermined number of specific acquisition information as an opportunity. Thereby, during the specific game state, it is possible to secure the execution opportunity of the second profit effect accompanying the start of the specific period, and to increase the effect effect of the profit effect.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 2-4 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 2-3 described above.
The specific period ends when it is possible to enter the variable entrance with the specific acquisition information stored in the acquisition information storage means as an opportunity at the start of the specific period. is there.

  According to such a gaming machine, the specific display result is derived through the execution of the variable display based on the specific acquisition information stored at the start of the specific period, and based on this, the ball enters the variable entrance. After the operation becomes possible, the specific period ends. Thus, it is possible to increase the certainty that the second profit effect is executed during the specific period.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 2-5 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 2-3 or 2-4 described above,
The advance determination means can execute the advance determination even during the specific period,
The specific period is extended based on that a new determination result indicating that the information is specific acquisition information is obtained by the preliminary determination during the specific period.

  According to such a gaming machine, the advance determination can be performed even during the specific period, and the advance determination is performed on the acquired information newly acquired during the specific period, and the acquired information is the specific acquired information. If the result of the determination is obtained, the specific period is extended. This extends the period in which the second profit effect is executed, so that it is possible to further enhance the effect effect of the profit effect.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 2-6 is the gaming machine according to any one of Reference Invention 2-3 to Reference Invention 2-5 described above,
In the specific game state, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect based on that a determination result indicating that the specific acquisition information is obtained by the preliminary determination,
When the predetermined effect is executed, the effect of the predetermined effect to be executed differs depending on the number of specific acquisition information stored at that time.

  According to such a gaming machine, in the specific gaming state, the predetermined effect can be executed based on the result of the preliminary determination that the obtained information is the specific obtained information, and the predetermined effect can be executed. The effect mode differs depending on the number of pieces of specific acquisition information stored when the predetermined effect is executed. Thereby, during the specific game state, it is possible to produce the effect effect by the profit effect and the predetermined effect, and as a result, it is possible to enhance the interest in the specific game state.

  According to the above-described Reference Invention 2, it is possible to realize a novel mode of effect as an effect for displaying the acquired profit amount, and to improve the game entertainment.

(Reference Invention 3)
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there have been widely known gaming machines that perform variable display of identification information and can execute a special game based on a display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There is a gaming machine of this type that is configured so that any one of a plurality of effect modes can be selected by a manual input operation (for example, see Patent Document 1). The timing at which the effect mode can be selected can be set at various times, for example, during the change display of the identification information, during the display of the standby screen (demo screen), during the special game (for example, during the big hit game). It is possible. In some configurations in which the effect mode can be selected during the special game, the effect mode after the special game is selected (see, for example, JP-A-2006-174956).

  However, in the conventional configuration in which the effect mode after the special game can be selected during the special game, the generation mode of the selectable time and the notification mode indicating the generation are uniform, and there is a problem of lack of freshness. there were. The present invention 3 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and its purpose is to select a staging mode after a special game in a new mode, and to improve the game entertainment. .

A gaming machine according to a reference invention 3-1 for solving the above-mentioned problem,
A variable entrance that can be changed between a state where the game ball cannot enter and a state where the ball can enter,
Special game execution means capable of executing a special game based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information becoming the specific display result,
The special game is constituted by a predetermined number of round games,
A gaming machine configured so that a ball can be entered into the variable entrance in the round game,
Having a plurality of effect modes as effect modes when the variable display of identification information is performed,
At a predetermined time after the start of the special game, a selection period generating means capable of generating a selection period in which the effect mode after the end of the special game can be selected from the plurality of effect modes,
When the selection period is generated in a predetermined round game during the special game, a first notification unit that performs notification before the start of the selection period in a round game before the predetermined round game is provided. Is what you do.

  According to such a gaming machine, at a predetermined time after the special game is started, it is possible to generate a selection period in which the effect mode after the end of the special game can be selected from a plurality of effect modes. If the selection period occurs in a predetermined round game during the special game, a notification before the start of the selection period is made in a round game before the predetermined round game. For this reason, it is informed in advance in the round game before that the effect mode selection is possible in the predetermined round game during the special game (the selection period occurs), and then the effect mode selection period is selected. It is possible to select an effect mode in a new mode, such as when an occurrence (start) occurs. Thereby, it becomes possible to attract the player's interest to the selection of the effect mode after the special game, and it is possible to further improve the interest in the game.

  Note that the selection of the effect mode in the selection period includes, for example, manual selection in which the player selects and inputs one of the effect modes using a predetermined input means provided in the gaming machine, or a plurality of effect modes. An automatic selection in which one is automatically selected is included.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 3-2 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 3-1 described above.
When the selection period is generated in a predetermined round game during the special game, a second notification unit for performing notification during the selection period in the predetermined round game,
When the predetermined round game is completed and the next round game is started, a third notification means for performing notification before the end of the selection period is provided,
The selection period ends during a round game in which the notification by the third notification unit is performed.

  According to such a gaming machine, when an effect mode selection period occurs in a predetermined round game, the notification during the selection period is performed in the predetermined round game, and then the predetermined round game ends and the next round game ends. Is started, in the round game (the next round game after the predetermined round game), notification before the end of the selection period is performed. The selection period ends during the round game in which the notification before the end of the selection period is made (during the round game following the predetermined round game). For this reason, when the effect mode selection period occurs in the predetermined round game, notification before the start of the selection period performed in the round game before the predetermined round game (notification by the first notification means) and the predetermined A special game is provided by a notification during the selection period performed in the round game (reporting by the second notification unit) and a notification before the end of the selection period performed by the next round game after the predetermined round game (reporting by the third notification unit). It is possible to prompt the player to select a later effect mode. As described above, by adopting a new notification mode such as prompting the player to select an effect mode after the special game over a plurality of round games, it is possible to attract the player's interest to the effect mode selection. . In addition, the selection period of the production mode is from the start of the predetermined round game to the middle of the next round game, and the above-described notification is performed from before the start of the selection period to the end thereof, so that the player can select the production mode. It is possible to prevent the opportunity of selecting the effect mode from being missed without noticing the occurrence of the period.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 or Reference Invention 3-2 described above.
A state control unit capable of controlling a game state when the change display of the identification information is performed,
The game state includes at least a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state,
The display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result in the first game state and the special game is executed, and the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result in the second game state. The generation time of the selection period is different from the case where the special game is executed.

  According to such a gaming machine, the special game is executed with the display result of the variable display being the specific display result in the first game state, and the second game which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. The generation time of the effect mode selection period is different between the case where the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result and the special game is executed in the state. Thereby, it is possible to select the effect mode in a new mode such that the subsequent effect mode selectable time differs depending on the game state when the specific display result is derived, and to prevent the effect mode selection from becoming monotonous. Becomes possible.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 3-4 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 3-3 described above.
If the said variable display of the display result in the first game mode is the special game is a particular display result is performed, together with the selection period after every round game constituting the special game is completed is generated Notification during the selection period is performed,
In the case where the display result of the variable display is a specific display result in the second game state and the special game is executed, the selection period occurs in a predetermined round game during the special game. Things.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result and the special game is executed in the first game state, all round games constituting the special game have been completed. Later, the effect mode selection period occurs, and the notification during the selection period is performed. On the other hand, when the special game is executed with the display result of the variable display being the specific display result in the second game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, the predetermined round game during the special game is performed. In this case, the effect mode selection period is generated. In this case, the above-described notification by the first notification unit (notification before the start of the selection period), notification by the second notification unit (notification during the selection period), and Notification by three notification means (notification before the end of the selection period) is performed. For this reason, when the specific display result is derived and the special game is executed in the first game state, the player is given an opportunity to select the effect mode after the end of all round games, and the second game state is set. In the case where the special display result is derived and the special game is executed, the player is given an opportunity to select an effect mode before all round games are completed. This makes it possible to make the mode of effect mode selection different depending on whether the gaming state when the specific display result is derived is the first gaming state or the second gaming state, and gives a different impression to the player. Can be given.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 3-5 is the gaming machine according to any one of Reference Invention 3-1 to Reference Invention 3-4 described above,
Having a plurality of special games as the special game,
The generation time of the selection period varies depending on the type of the special game to be executed.

  According to such a gaming machine, the generation time of the effect mode selection period differs depending on the type of the special game executed based on the display result of the variable display becoming the specific display result. This makes it possible to select an effect mode in a novel mode, such as making the effect mode selectable time different depending on the type of the special game to be executed, thereby preventing the effect mode selection from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 3-6 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 3-5 described above.
As the plurality of types of special games, at least a first special game and a second special game having a larger number of round games than the first special game,
When the first special game is executed, the selection period is generated after all round games constituting the first special game are completed, and the notification during the selection period is performed,
When the second special game is executed, the selection period occurs in a predetermined round game during the second special game.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the first special game in which the number of round games constituting the special game is relatively small is executed, all of the round games constituting the first special game have been completed. Later, a production mode selection period occurs, and notification during the selection period is performed. On the other hand, when the second special game in which the number of round games constituting the special game is relatively large is executed, a selection period of the effect mode occurs in the predetermined round game during the second special game. In this case, notification by the above-described first notification means (notification before the start of the selection period), notification by the second notification means (notification during the selection period), and notification by the third notification means (before the end of the selection period) Notification). For this reason, when the first special game (special game in which the number of round games is relatively small) is executed, the player is given an opportunity to select the effect mode after the completion of all round games, and the second special game is performed. When a game (a special game in which the number of round games is relatively large) is executed, the player is given an opportunity to select an effect mode by the end of all round games. This makes it possible to make the mode of effect mode selection different between when the first special game is executed and when the second special game is executed, and it is possible to give a different impression to the player. Become.

  According to the above-described Reference Invention 3, by selecting the effect mode after the special game in a new mode, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(Reference Invention 4)
Also, in Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-055811), the second starting port is a variable starting port. In the low base state, there is a game that aims at the first starting opening, and in the high base state, there is a game that aims at the second starting opening. Further, there has been a gaming machine that performs a so-called right-handed game in which the player hits the right area of the gaming area when the jackpot game or the high base state is reached. In such a gaming machine, in the low base state, the player plays a left-handed game, and once in the advantageous state, plays the game in the right-handed game until the advantageous state ends, thereby sharpening the game in the advantageous state. Met.

  However, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, various entrances are simply arranged in the right-handed area, and it is difficult to say that an efficient game can be advanced. In view of the above-mentioned circumstances, unlike conventional gaming machines, by arranging various entrances at predetermined positions in a predetermined game area, it is possible to diversify the game and increase game efficiency. In addition, a gaming machine that enhances amusement in games is provided.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 is:
A specific starting port where game balls can enter,
A variable starting port that can be changed to a first state and a second state in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than the first state;
A first variable entrance which can be changed to a state where a game ball can enter and a state where a game ball cannot enter;
A second variable entrance which can be changed to a state where a game ball can enter and a state where a game ball cannot enter the ball;
Specific identification information that is variably displayed based on the ball entering the specific starting port,
Identification information to be displayed variably based on the ball entering the variable starting port,
When the specific identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, a specific game execution unit that executes a specific game in which the variable start port is in the second state;
When the identification information is stopped and displayed in a special mode, a special game execution means for executing a special game in which the first variable entrance or the second variable entrance enters a ball-enterable state,
A specific starting port, a first variable entrance port, a variable starting port, and a second variable entrance port are arranged in this order from the upstream of the game area.

  According to such a gaming machine, the specific starting port, the first variable entrance, the variable starting entrance, and the second variable entrance are provided at predetermined locations in the game area, and these are provided upstream of the game area. Downstream from, a specific starting port, a first variable entrance, a variable starting port, and a second variable entrance are arranged in this order. This enables efficient progress of the game.

  Specifically, in order for the game to proceed smoothly, first, it is necessary to set the variable starting port related to execution of the special game to the second state (open state). Place it at the top of the ball opening. Thereby, the possibility that the variable starting port is first set to the second state (open state) is increased. In addition, by setting the gate type (gate 28) in which the game ball that has entered (passed) the specific starting port flows down the game area thereafter, the subsequent game proceeds smoothly. In addition, by disposing the first variable ball entry port downstream of the specific starting port, it is possible to quickly enter a ball when a special game is executed, and to obtain a large number of game balls in a short period of time. In addition, by providing the first variable ball entry port upstream of the variable start port, a game ball enters the variable start port in the second state during the special game, and the first variable ball entry port is provided to the first variable ball entry port. It is also possible to prevent a situation where entry of the ball is hindered.

  Also, by arranging the variable starting port downstream of the first variable entering port, the variable starting port in the second state can be placed in the second state unless the first variable entering port is in a state where the ball can enter in a special game. In this way, it is possible to allow the flowing game balls to enter the other entrances with priority. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which the variable starting port does not enter the ball even when the variable starting port is in the second state as much as possible. Further, by arranging the second variable entrance port downstream of the variable starting port, the game ball enters the second variable entrance port based on the change between the first state and the second state of the variable starting port. As the frequency changes, various game characteristics can be added. Thereby, it is possible to diversify the game while providing a smooth progress of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1.
As the above-mentioned special mode, it has a first special mode and a second special mode,
The first special game includes a first special game and a second special game,
When the identification information is stopped and displayed in the first special mode, the first special game is executed. When the identification information is stopped and displayed in the second special mode, the second special game is executed.
The first special game has more game profit that can be acquired than the second special game,
The first variable entrance is in a state where the ball can enter in the first special game, and the second variable entrance is in a state where the ball can enter in the second special game.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first special mode and the second special mode are provided as the stop display of the identification information for executing the special game. It has two special games. Then, the first special game is a special game having more game profits that can be acquired than the second special game, and in the first special game, the first variable entrance is in a ball-enterable state (open state), and the second special game is performed. Then, the second variable entrance is set to a state where the ball can enter.

  Specifically, first, in order to set the variable starting port to the second state (open state), the specific starting port related thereto is arranged at the uppermost stream among these entrance ports. Next, by arranging the first variable entrance port downstream of the specific starting port, the entry of the first special game with a large amount of game profit can be quickly performed, and a large number of game balls can be provided in a short period of time. Enable acquisition. Next, by arranging the variable starting port downstream of the first variable entrance port, the variable state of the second state can be changed except in the special game where the first variable entrance port is in a state where the ball can enter. It becomes possible to allow a game ball to flow down into the starting port, preferentially to another ball input port. In addition, the second variable entrance, which can enter the ball in the second special game with a small game profit, is arranged downstream of the variable starting port, so that various game properties can be added. Thereby, it is possible to diversify the game while providing a smooth progress of the game.

As the first special mode and the second special mode, for example, different stop symbols can be exemplified. In addition, as the first special game and the second special game, for example, special games having different execution modes (number of rounds, opening time, obtainable profit, and variable entrance to be opened) can be exemplified.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 4-3 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 4-2,
A first game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is a predetermined frequency; and a second game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is higher than the first game state. Equipped with a settable game state setting means,
In the second game condition, by ball entrance of game ball into the variable starting opening disposed upstream of the game area, to the second variable ball entrance port disposed on the downstream side of the variable start hole By making entry difficult,
The first game state has a higher possibility of entering a game ball into the second variable entrance when the second special game occurs, in the first game state than in the second game state. It is.

  According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to set a first gaming state in which the frequency of entering game balls into the variable starting port is low, and a second gaming state in which the frequency of entering balls is higher than the first gaming state. Since the variable start port arranged on the upstream side is in the second state (open state), it is difficult for game balls to enter the second variable entrance port arranged on the downstream side. Thereby, when the second variable entrance is in a state in which the second variable entrance can enter (open state) in the second special game, the second variable entrance is higher in the first game state than in the second game state. It is assumed that the frequency of game balls entering the game is high. This also makes it possible to vary the frequency of entry into the second variable entrance depending on the game state when the second special game is generated, diversify the game characteristics, and enhance the interest in the game.

Further, the gaming machine of the Reference Invention 4-4, in the gaming machine of the Reference Invention 4-3,
The game profit obtained by entering the second variable entrance is larger than the game income acquired by entering the variable starting opening.

  According to such a gaming machine, a game profit (for example, a prize ball given when one game ball is entered) obtained by entering the game ball is set to the second or more than the variable starting port. Increase the number of variable entrances. As described above, when the second special game occurs, in the first game state in which the variable starting port is less likely to be in the second state, the flowing game balls are likely to enter the second variable entrance on the downstream side. In the second game state in which the variable starting port is likely to be in the second state, the ball easily enters the upstream variable starting port. Thereby, the player expects the ball to enter the second variable entrance where the game profit that can be obtained is larger than the variable starting port, and expects the second special game to occur in the first game state. Enhance the entertainment of the game. Further, by this, it is possible to make the obtainable game profit different when the same second special game occurs in the first game state and the second game state, diversify the game characteristics, and enhance the game entertainment. Becomes

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 4-5 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 4-4.
The game state does not change based on the execution of the second special game.

  According to such a gaming machine, the game state is not changed by the execution of the second special game, that is, the game state before the execution of the second special game is the same as the game state after the execution of the second special game. Accordingly, if the second special game can be executed in the first game state, the first game state continues even after the execution of the second special game in the first game state. By generating a game, more game profit can be obtained.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 4-6 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 4-2 to Reference Invention 4-5,
The first special game is a big hit game, and the second special game is a small hit game.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first special game is a big hit game, and the second special game is a small hit game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-7 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 to Reference Invention 4-6,
A first starting port into which a game ball can enter;
First identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the first starting port,
The first identification information and the identification information can be variably displayed in parallel.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first identification information variably displayed based on the ball entering the first starting port and the identification information variably displayed based on the ball entering the variable starting port are concurrently displayed. (Simultaneously) variable display is possible. Thereby, in the simultaneous fluctuation gaming machine (simultaneous fluctuation machine) which can simultaneously (variably) display the first identification information and the identification information, it is possible to diversify the game while providing a smooth progress of the game. I do.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to diversify the gaming properties and to improve the gaming entertainment while enabling the smooth progress of the game.

(Reference Invention 5)
Further, in Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-055811), a plurality of game states are provided as game states, and the execution of the big hit game triggers the normal state to a probable change state or a time saving state that is advantageous to the player. It is a gaming machine to shift. In addition, in the advantageous state, if the next big hit game does not occur while the symbols are displayed for a predetermined number of times, the advantageous state is ended and the normal state is returned. Such gaming machines have exhibited a certain effect of preventing the game from becoming tired by shifting the gaming state.

  However, in the gaming machine of Patent Literature 1 and the conventional gaming machine, the transition state of the gaming state and the gaming state after the transition are uniform, and the gaming interest has not been enhanced. The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and provides a gaming machine that diversifies the gaming characteristics and enhances the gaming interest by giving the transition state of the gaming state a feature.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 includes:
A first starting port into which a game ball can enter;
A second starting port that can be changed to a first state and a second state in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than the first state;
A first variable entrance which can be changed to a state where a game ball can enter and a state where a game ball cannot enter;
A second variable entrance which can be changed to a state where a game ball can enter and a state where a game ball cannot enter the ball;
First identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the first starting port;
Second identification information variably displayed based on a ball entering the second starting port;
A first game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is a predetermined frequency; and a second game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is higher than the first game state. Configurable game state setting means,
When the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific result, a special game for executing the special game in which the first variable entrance or the second variable entrance is in a state where it can enter the ball. Game execution means,
Probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as a probability that a result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific result. A gaming machine,
As the specific result, a first specific result is provided,
When the first identification result is reached, the game state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second game state, and the fluctuation of the first identification information and the second identification information in the game state When the number of times of display reaches a specific number, the gaming state changes to the high probability and the first gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, there are provided a gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state and a second gaming state, and a probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability. Then, when the game state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second game state, in the high probability and the second game state, the number of times of the change display of the first identification information and the second identification information is changed. At the specific number of times, the gaming state changes from the high probability and second gaming state to the high probability and first gaming state. As a result, it is possible to diversify the playability and enhance the entertainment interest of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1.
As result of said identification, a second identification result,
When the second identification result is reached, the game state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second game state, and in the game state, a change between the first identification information and the second identification information is performed. When the number of times of display reaches the specific number of times, the game state is changed to the predetermined probability and the first game state,
The case where the game state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second game state, and the case where the game state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second game state. Executing a common effect makes it difficult for the player to recognize whether the gaming state is the predetermined probability and the second gaming state or the high probability and the second gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the game state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second game state, the first identification information and the second identification information are set at the predetermined probability and the second game state. When the number of times of the fluctuation display becomes a specific number, the gaming state changes from the predetermined probability and the second gaming state to the predetermined probability and the first gaming state. In addition, by performing a common effect (for example, the same background effect, the same character appears, the same mode, and the like) between the predetermined probability and the second gaming state and the high probability and the second gaming state, the player Makes it difficult to recognize whether the game state is the predetermined probability and the second game state or the high probability and the second game state. As a result, it is possible to diversify the playability and enhance the entertainment interest of the game. In addition, this allows the player to expect the gaming state to change to the second gaming state with a high probability when the specified number of times elapses during the execution of the common effect, and to enhance the gaming interest. .

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 5-3 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 5-1 or 5-2.
The high probability and the first gaming state have more game profits that can be acquired than the high probability and the second gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the gaming state having the higher probability and the first gaming state has a larger gaming profit that can be acquired than the gaming state having the higher probability and the second gaming state. Thereby, the player expects that the gaming state changes to the first gaming state with a high probability after a specific number of times, and enhances the entertainment of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 to Reference Invention 5-3,
The second starting port is provided upstream of the game area, and the second variable entrance is provided downstream of the second starting port,
In the high-probability and the second game condition, by ball entrance of game ball into the second start hole that is arranged upstream of the game area, the second than the second start hole is disposed downstream By making it difficult to enter the variable entrance, the possibility of entering a game ball into the second variable entrance when the second special game occurs is determined by the high probability and the second probability. The high probability and the first game state are set higher than the game state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the game area, and the second variable entrance port is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port. When the second starting port disposed on the upstream side is in the second state (open state), it is difficult for game balls to enter the second variable entrance port disposed on the downstream side. Thereby, when the second variable entrance becomes a ball-enterable state (open state) in the second special game, the high probability and the first game state are higher than the high probability and the second game state. It is assumed that the frequency of game balls entering the second variable entrance is high. This also makes it possible to vary the frequency of entry into the second variable entrance depending on the game state when the second special game is generated, diversify the game characteristics, and enhance the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 to Reference Invention 5-4,
The first special game includes a first special game and a second special game,
The first special game can change a game state after the end of the first special game,
The second special game does not change the game state after the end of the second special game,
The first variable entrance is in a state where the ball can enter in the first special game, and the second variable entrance is in a state where the ball can enter in the second special game.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first special game in which the first variable entrance is in a ball-enterable state can change the game state after the end of the first special game. The second special game in which the second variable entrance is in a ball-enterable state does not change the game state after the end of the second special game. That is, the game state before the execution of the second special game is the same as the game state after the execution of the second special game. Accordingly, when the game state is changed to the high probability and the first game state, the high probability and the first game state continue in the high probability and the first game state even after the execution of the second special game. By generating, it is possible to obtain more game profits.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to diversify the gaming properties and to improve the gaming interest.

(Reference Invention 6)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 is:
A first starting port into which a game ball can enter;
A second starting port that can be changed to a first state and a second state in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than the first state;
A first variable entrance which can be changed to a state where a game ball can enter and a state where a game ball cannot enter;
A second variable entrance which can be changed to a state where a game ball can enter and a state where a game ball cannot enter the ball;
First identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the first starting port;
Second identification information variably displayed based on a ball entering the second starting port;
A first game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is a predetermined frequency; and a second game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is higher than the first game state. Configurable game state setting means,
When the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific result, a special game for executing the special game in which the first variable entrance or the second variable entrance is in a state where it can enter the ball. Game execution means,
Probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as a probability that the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific result,
A launching device that launches a game ball at a predetermined launching intensity to a gaming area, and
The first starting port is provided in a first game area where game balls fired at a first firing intensity can enter,
The second starting port is provided in a second game area in which game balls fired at a second firing intensity different from the first firing intensity can enter,
As the specific result, a first specific result is provided,
When the first identification result is reached, the game state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second game state, and the fluctuation of the first identification information and the second identification information in the game state When the number of times of display reaches a specific number, the gaming state changes to the high probability and the first gaming state,
Does not have the first identification result as a result of the variable display of the first identification information based on the ball entering the first starting port,
The first identification result is obtained as a result of a change display of the second identification information based on a ball entering the second starting port.

  According to such a gaming machine, there are provided a gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state and a second gaming state, and a probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability. The first starting port is provided in a first game area where a ball can be entered at a first firing intensity, and the second starting port is provided in a second game area where a ball can be entered at a second firing intensity. . Then, when the first identification result is obtained, when the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second gaming state, the first identification information and the second identification information are set in the high probability and the second gaming state. When the number of times of the fluctuation display becomes a specific number, the gaming state changes from the high probability and second gaming state to the high probability and first gaming state. As a result, it is possible to diversify the playability and enhance the entertainment interest of the game. Further, the result of the variable display of the first identification information does not have the first specification result, but has the first specification result as the result of the variable display of the second identification information. Thereby, different game characteristics can be provided depending on whether a game ball is inserted into the first start port and a case where a game ball is input into the second start port, and the game characteristics are diversified and the game entertainment is enhanced. It is possible to increase.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-2 is a gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1.
As result of said identification, a second identification result,
When the second identification result is reached, the game state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second game state, and in the game state, a change between the first identification information and the second identification information is performed. When the number of times of display reaches the specific number of times, the game state is changed to the predetermined probability and the first game state,
The case where the game state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second game state, and the case where the game state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second game state. By executing a common effect, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the gaming state is the predetermined probability and the second gaming state or the high probability and the second gaming state,
The second identification result is provided as a result of the variable display of the second identification information based on a ball entering the second starting port.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second identification result is obtained as a result of the variable display of the second identification information. When the game state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second game state, in the predetermined probability and the second game state, the number of times of the change display of the first identification information and the second identification information is changed. When the specific number of times is reached, the gaming state changes from the predetermined probability and the second gaming state to the predetermined probability and the first gaming state. In addition, by performing a common effect (for example, the same background effect, the same character appears, the same mode, and the like) between the predetermined probability and the second gaming state and the high probability and the second gaming state, the player Makes it difficult to recognize whether the game state is the predetermined probability and the second game state or the high probability and the second game state. As a result, it is possible to diversify the playability and enhance the entertainment interest of the game. In addition, this allows the player to expect the gaming state to change to the first gaming state with a high probability and the first gaming state when the specific number of times elapses during the execution of the common effect, and to enhance the gaming interest. .

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 6-3 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 6-1 or 6-2.
A third identification result as the identification result;
When the third specified result is reached, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the first gaming state, and in the gaming state, the gaming state does not change until the next specified result is obtained. It is a,
As a result variable display of the first identification information based on the input spheres to the first start hole, it is characterized in that it has a third identification result.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second identification result is provided as a result of the variable display of the first identification information. When the game state after the end of the special game as the third specified result is set to the first game state with a high probability, the game state is maintained at the high probability and the first game state until the next specified result. Shall do. Accordingly, as a result of the variable display of the first identification information, there is no change from the high probability and the second game state to the high probability and the first game state based on the change display of a specific number of times, and the special game end. After that, a game state that guarantees the game state of the first game state with high probability until the next specific result is obtained. Further, thereby, in a game involving the variable display of the first identification information, it is possible to play the game with a sense of security, to diversify the game characteristics, and to enhance the interest in the game.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 6-4 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 6-1 to Reference Invention 6-3.
The high probability and the first gaming state have more game profits that can be acquired than the high probability and the second gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the gaming state having the higher probability and the first gaming state has a larger gaming profit that can be acquired than the gaming state having the higher probability and the second gaming state. Thereby, the player expects that the gaming state changes to the first gaming state with a high probability after a specific number of times, and enhances the entertainment of the game.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 6-5 is a gaming machine according to Reference Invention 6-1 to Reference Invention 6-4.
The second start hole provided on an upstream side of the second game region, the second variable inlet ball port is provided on the downstream side of the second start hole,
In the high-probability and the second game condition, by ball entrance of game ball into the second start hole that is arranged upstream of the game area, the second than the second start hole is disposed downstream By making it difficult to enter the variable entrance, the possibility of entering a game ball into the second variable entrance when the second special game occurs is determined by the high probability and the second probability. The high probability and the first game state are set higher than the game state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the second game area, and the second variable entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port. When the second starting port disposed on the upstream side is in the second state (open state), it is difficult for game balls to enter the second variable entrance port disposed on the downstream side. Thereby, when the second variable entrance becomes a ball-enterable state (open state) in the second special game, the high probability and the first game state are higher than the high probability and the second game state. It is assumed that the frequency of game balls entering the second variable entrance is high. This also makes it possible to vary the frequency of entry into the second variable entrance depending on the game state when the second special game is generated, diversify the game characteristics, and enhance the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 to Reference Invention 6-5,
The first special game includes a first special game and a second special game,
The first special game can change a game state after the end of the first special game,
The second special game does not change the game state after the end of the second special game,
The first variable entrance is in a state where the ball can enter in the first special game, and the second variable entrance is in a state where the ball can enter in the second special game.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first special game in which the first variable entrance is in a ball-enterable state can change the game state after the end of the first special game. The second special game in which the second variable entrance is in a ball-enterable state does not change the game state after the end of the second special game. That is, the game state before the execution of the second special game is the same as the game state after the execution of the second special game. Accordingly, when the game state is changed to the high probability and the first game state, the high probability and the first game state continue in the high probability and the first game state even after the execution of the second special game. By generating, it is possible to obtain more game profits.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention 6, it is possible to diversify the gaming properties and to improve the gaming interest.

(Reference Invention 7)
In addition, the gaming machine of the reference invention 7-1,
A first starting port into which a game ball can enter;
A second starting port that can be changed to a first state and a second state in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than the first state;
A first variable entrance which can be changed to a state where a game ball can enter and a state where a game ball cannot enter;
A second variable entrance which can be changed to a state where a game ball can enter and a state where a game ball cannot enter the ball;
First identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the first starting port;
Second identification information variably displayed based on a ball entering the second starting port;
A first game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is a predetermined frequency; and a second game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is higher than the first game state. Configurable game state setting means,
When the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific result, a special game for executing the special game in which the first variable entrance or the second variable entrance is in a state where it can enter the ball. Game execution means,
Probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as a probability that a result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific result. A gaming machine,
A first identification result and a fourth identification result as the identification result;
When the first identification result is obtained, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second gaming state, and the fluctuation of the first identification information and the second identification information in the gaming state. When the number of times of display reaches the first number, the gaming state changes to the high probability and the first gaming state,
When the fourth identification result is obtained, the game state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second game state, and the fluctuation of the first identification information and the second identification information in the game state When the number of times of display reaches the second number, the gaming state changes to the high probability and the first gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, there are provided a gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state and a second gaming state, and a probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability. Then, when the game state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second game state as the first identification result, the first identification information and the second identification information are set in the high probability and the second game state. When the number of times of the variable display becomes the first number, the gaming state changes from the high probability and second gaming state to the high probability and first gaming state. In addition, when the game state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second game state as a fourth identification result, the first identification information and the second identification information are set in the high probability and the second game state. When the number of times of the fluctuation display becomes the second number, the gaming state changes from the high probability and second gaming state to the high probability and first gaming state. As a result, it is possible to diversify the timing of changing the game state and maintain the interest in the game for a long time. In addition, this makes it possible to diversify the game characteristics and enhance the game entertainment.

  In the present aspect, when the number of times of the variable display of the first identification information and the second identification information reaches the first number or the second number, the gaming state has a high probability and the second gaming state has a high probability and a high probability. It changes to one game state. As another aspect, regardless of the number of times the variable display of the first identification information is performed, when the number of times of the variable display of the second identification information reaches the first number or the second number, the gaming state has a high probability and the second gaming state. May be changed to the first game state with high probability. Further, as another aspect, regardless of the number of times the variable display of the second identification information is performed, when the number of times of the variable display of the first identification information reaches the first number or the second number, the game state is set to a high probability and the second game. The state may be changed from the state to the first game state with high probability.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-2 is a gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1,
The identification result includes a second identification result and a fifth identification result,
When the second identification result is reached, the game state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second game state, and in the game state, a change between the first identification information and the second identification information is performed. When the number of times of display reaches the first number, the gaming state changes to the predetermined probability and the first gaming state,
When the fifth identification result is obtained, the game state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second game state, and in the game state, a change between the first identification information and the second identification information is performed. When the number of display is the second count, the game state is assumed to vary said predetermined probability and the first game condition,
The case where the game state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second game state, and the case where the game state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability and the second game state. Executing a common effect makes it difficult for the player to recognize whether the gaming state is the predetermined probability and the second gaming state or the high probability and the second gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second gaming state as the second identification result, the first probability is set at the predetermined probability and the second gaming state. When the number of times of change display of the identification information and the second identification information reaches the first number, the gaming state changes from the predetermined probability and the second gaming state to the predetermined probability and the first gaming state. Further, when the game state after the end of the special game is set to the predetermined probability and the second game state as the fifth identification result, the first identification information and the second identification information are set at the predetermined probability and the second game state. When the number of times of the fluctuation display becomes the second number, the gaming state changes from the predetermined probability and the second gaming state to the predetermined probability and the first gaming state. In addition, by performing a common effect (for example, the same background effect, the same character appears, the same mode, and the like) between the predetermined probability and the second gaming state and the high probability and the second gaming state, the player Makes it difficult to recognize whether the game state is the predetermined probability and the second game state or the high probability and the second game state. As a result, it is possible to diversify the timing of changing the game state and maintain the interest in the game for a long time. In addition, this makes it possible to diversify the game characteristics and enhance the game entertainment. Further, by this, during execution of the common effect, the player expects that the gaming state changes to the high probability and the first gaming state when the first number has elapsed and when the second number has elapsed, It is possible to enhance the entertainment interest of the game.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 7-3 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 7-2,
The second number is a number greater than the first number,
When the gaming state changes in the second number, it is more likely that the gaming state changes to the high probability and the first gaming state when the gaming state changes in the second number than in the case in which the gaming state changes in the first number. It is a feature.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second number is greater than the first number, and the gaming state is higher when the timing of change of the gaming state is the second number than when it is the first number. The probability and the possibility of changing to the first game state are high. Thereby, when reaching the first number, the player plays the game in expectation that the gaming state is maintained without change, and reaches the second number with the gaming state kept in the second gaming state. In this case, a game is played with a high probability and an increased sense of expectation to change to the first game state. Thus, in the second game state, there is a point for increasing the sense of expectation a plurality of times. In addition, this makes it possible to diversify the game characteristics and enhance the game entertainment.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 7-4 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 7-2,
The second number is a number greater than the first number,
When the gaming state changes at the first number, it is more likely that the gaming state changes to the high probability and the first gaming state than when the gaming state changes at the second number. It is a feature.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second number is set to a number larger than the first number, and the gaming state is higher when the timing of change of the gaming state is the first number than when it is the second number. It is highly probable and likely to change to the first gaming state. This allows the player to play a game with the expectation that the gaming state will change when the first number of times is reached, and is possible when the player reaches the second number of times while the gaming state remains in the second game state. Although the sex is lower than that of the first number, the game is played with a high probability and expecting to change to the first game state. Thus, in the second game state, there is a point for increasing the sense of expectation a plurality of times. In addition, this makes it possible to diversify the game characteristics and enhance the game entertainment.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-5 is a gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1 to Reference Invention 7-4,
The high probability and the first gaming state have more game profits that can be acquired than the high probability and the second gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the gaming state having the higher probability and the first gaming state has a larger gaming profit that can be acquired than the gaming state having the higher probability and the second gaming state. Thereby, the player expects that the gaming state changes to the first gaming state with a high probability after a specific number of times, and enhances the entertainment of the game.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 7-6 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 7-1 to Reference Invention 7-5,
The second starting port is provided upstream of the game area, and the second variable entrance is provided downstream of the second starting port,
In the high-probability and the second game condition, by ball entrance of game ball into the second start hole that is arranged upstream of the game area, the second than the second start hole is disposed downstream By making it difficult to enter the variable entrance, the possibility of entering a game ball into the second variable entrance when the second special game occurs is determined by the high probability and the second probability. The high probability and the first game state are set higher than the game state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the game area, and the second variable entrance port is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port. When the second starting port disposed on the upstream side is in the second state (open state), it is difficult for game balls to enter the second variable entrance port disposed on the downstream side. Thereby, when the second variable entrance becomes a ball-enterable state (open state) in the second special game, the high probability and the first game state are higher than the high probability and the second game state. It is assumed that the frequency of game balls entering the second variable entrance is high. This also makes it possible to vary the frequency of entry into the second variable entrance depending on the game state when the second special game is generated, diversify the game characteristics, and enhance the interest in the game.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 7-7 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 7-1 to Reference Invention 7-4.
The first special game includes a first special game and a second special game,
The first special game can change a game state after the end of the first special game,
The second special game does not change the game state after the end of the second special game,
The first variable entrance is in a state where the ball can enter in the first special game, and the second variable entrance is in a state where the ball can enter in the second special game.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first special game in which the first variable entrance is in a ball-enterable state can change the game state after the end of the first special game. The second special game in which the second variable entrance is in a ball-enterable state does not change the game state after the end of the second special game. That is, the game state before the execution of the second special game is the same as the game state after the execution of the second special game. Accordingly, when the game state is changed to the high probability and the first game state, the high probability and the first game state continue in the high probability and the first game state even after the execution of the second special game. By generating, it is possible to obtain more game profits.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention 7, it is possible to diversify the gaming properties and to improve the gaming interest.

(Reference Invention 8)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1 is:
A first starting port into which a game ball can enter;
A second starting port that can be changed to a first state and a second state in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than the first state;
A first variable entrance which can be changed to a state where a game ball can enter and a state where a game ball cannot enter;
A second variable entrance which can be changed to a state where a game ball can enter and a state where a game ball cannot enter the ball;
First identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the first starting port;
Second identification information variably displayed based on a ball entering the second starting port;
A first game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is a predetermined frequency; and a second game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is higher than the first game state. Configurable game state setting means,
When the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific result, a special game for executing the special game in which the first variable entrance or the second variable entrance is in a state where it can enter the ball. Game execution means,
Probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as a probability that the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific result,
A first condition state in which the time of variable display of the second identification information is determined based on a first condition, a second condition state in which the time of variable display of the second identification information is determined based on a second condition, A second identification information variation time determining means that can set
In the second condition state, the average time of the variable display time of the second identification information determined is shorter than the first condition state,
As the game state, the predetermined probability and the first game state and the first condition state; the predetermined probability and the second game state and the second condition state; and the high probability and the first game state and the first condition It has two condition states and the high probability, the second game state and the second condition state.

  According to such a gaming machine, a game state setting means capable of setting the first game state and the second game state, a probability setting means capable of setting the predetermined probability and the high probability, the first condition state and the second condition A second identification information variation time determining means capable of setting a second condition state in which the average time of the variation display time of the two identification information is shorter than the first condition state. The game state includes a predetermined probability and a first game state and a first condition state, a predetermined probability and a second game state and a second condition state, a high probability and a first game state and a second condition state, and a high probability. And a second game state and a second condition state. In the game state in which the first condition state is set, the variable display time of the second identification information is set to a relatively long time, and the second condition In the gaming state in which the state is set, the variable display time of the second identification information is set to a relatively short time. This makes it possible to diversify the gaming state, diversify the gaming properties, and enhance the gaming interest.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 8-2 is a gaming machine according to Reference Invention 8-1,
The case where the result of the variable display of the second identification information is the specific result is more likely to be advantageous to the player than the case where the result of the variable display of the first identification information is the specific result. It is characterized by the following.

  According to such a gaming machine, the case where the result of the variable display of the second identification information is the specific result is more likely to be more advantageous to the player than the first identification information. For example, it is possible to increase the game profit obtained by the special game executed as a specific result, increase the possibility of increasing, or increase the possibility of becoming an advantageous state after the end of the special game. is there. Accordingly, the player expects that the state in which the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in a large amount, that is, the second condition state in which the time of the variable display of the second identification information is relatively short is set. To play the game. Also, in such a second condition state, a plurality of game states are set, so that the game state can be diversified, the gambling properties can be diversified, and the gaming interest can be enhanced.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 8-3 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 8-1 or 8-2.
It has a third starting port where game balls can enter,
The second identification information is variably displayed based on a ball entering the third starting port.

  According to such a gaming machine, it is assumed that the gaming machine is provided with a third starting port in which the second identification information is variably displayed based on the entering of a game ball. As a result, the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner by entering one of the variable type second starting port and the third starting port, so that it is possible to enhance the interest in the game.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 8-4 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 8-1 or 8-2.
Equipped with a launching device that launches a game ball at a predetermined launching intensity to the game area,
The first starting port is provided in a first game area where game balls fired at a first firing intensity can enter,
The second start port, the first variable entrance port, and the second variable entrance port are a second game in which a game ball fired at the second firing intensity different from the first firing intensity can enter. Provided in the area,
When the game state is the predetermined probability, the first game state, and the first condition state, a game ball is fired in the first game area to perform a game by variably displaying the first identification information. ,
The gaming state is the predetermined probability and the second gaming state and the second condition state, the high probability and the first gaming state and the second condition state, or the high probability and the second gaming state and the second In the two-condition state, a game ball is fired in the second game area, whereby the second identification information is variably displayed and a game is played.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first starting port is provided in the first game area where the ball can be entered at the first firing intensity, and the second starting port, the first variable entry port, and the second variable entry port are , In the second game area where the ball can be entered at the second firing intensity. When the game state is the predetermined probability, the first game state, and the first condition state, the game is played by firing a game ball in the first game area and variably displaying the first identification information. When the gaming state is a predetermined probability and a second gaming state and a second condition state, a high probability and a first gaming state and a second condition state, or a high probability and a second gaming state and a second condition state, A game ball is fired in the second game area, and the second identification information is variably displayed to play a game. That is, in the first condition state, a game ball is fired in the first game area and the first identification information is variably displayed to play a game. In the second condition state, the game ball is placed in the second game area. It is assumed that the game is launched and the second identification information is variably displayed to play the game.

  This makes it possible to diversify the gaming state, diversify the gaming properties, and enhance the gaming interest. Further, when the variable display of the second identification information is more advantageous for the player, the player is expected to set a second condition state in which the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner, and Become. Also, in such a second condition state, a plurality of game states are set, so that the game state can be diversified, the gambling properties can be diversified, and the gaming interest can be enhanced.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 8-5 is a gaming machine according to Reference Invention 8-3,
Equipped with a launching device that launches a game ball at a predetermined launching intensity to the game area,
The first starting port is provided in a first game area where game balls fired at a first firing intensity can enter,
The second starting port, the third starting port, the first variable entrance port, and the second variable entrance port enter a game ball fired at a second firing intensity different from the first firing intensity. Provided in a possible second game area,
When the game state is the predetermined probability, the first game state, and the first condition state, a game ball is fired in the first game area to perform a game by variably displaying the first identification information. ,
The gaming state is the predetermined probability and the second gaming state and the second condition state, the high probability and the first gaming state and the second condition state, or the high probability and the second gaming state and the second In the two-condition state, a game ball is fired in the second game area, whereby the second identification information is variably displayed and a game is played.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first starting port is provided in the first game area where the ball can be entered at the first firing intensity, and the second starting port, the third starting port, the first variable ball entry port, and the second The variable ball entrance is provided in the second game area where the ball can be entered at the second firing intensity. When the game state is the predetermined probability, the first game state, and the first condition state, the game is played by firing a game ball in the first game area and variably displaying the first identification information. When the gaming state is a predetermined probability and a second gaming state and a second condition state, a high probability and a first gaming state and a second condition state, or a high probability and a second gaming state and a second condition state, A game ball is fired in the second game area, and the second identification information is variably displayed to play a game. That is, in the first condition state, a game ball is fired in the first game area and the first identification information is variably displayed to play a game. In the second condition state, the game ball is placed in the second game area. It is assumed that the game is launched and the second identification information is variably displayed to play the game.

  This makes it possible to diversify the gaming state, diversify the gaming properties, and enhance the gaming interest. Further, when the variable display of the second identification information is more advantageous for the player, the player is expected to set a second condition state in which the second identification information is displayed in a variable manner, and Become. Also, in such a second condition state, a plurality of game states are set, so that the game state can be diversified, the gambling properties can be diversified, and the gaming interest can be enhanced.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 8-6 is a gaming machine according to Reference Inventions 8-1 to 8-5.
The high probability, the first game state, and the second condition state have more game profits that can be acquired than the high probability, the second game state, and the second condition state. It is.

  According to such a gaming machine, the high probability and the first game state and the second condition state are higher in the obtainable gaming profit than the high probability and the second game state and the second condition state. I have. As a result, the player proceeds with the game with the expectation that the gaming state is set to the high probability, the first gaming state, and the second condition state, and enhances the gaming interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-7 is the gaming machine of Reference Inventions 8-1 to 8-6,
The second start hole provided on an upstream side of the second game region, the second variable inlet ball port is provided on the downstream side of the second start hole,
In the high probability, in the second gaming state, and in the second condition state, a game ball is made to enter the second starting port arranged on the upstream side of the second gaming area, and the second starting port is positioned higher than the second starting port. By making it difficult to enter the second variable entrance provided on the downstream side, the possibility of entering a game ball into the second variable entrance is increased with the high probability and the second game. The state and the second game state have a higher probability than the second condition state, and the first game state and the second condition state are higher.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the second game area, and the second variable entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port. When the second starting port disposed on the upstream side is in the second state (open state), it is difficult for game balls to enter the second variable entrance port disposed on the downstream side. With this, when the second variable entrance becomes the ball-enterable state (open state) in the second special game, the first game state and the second condition state have a higher probability and the second state have a higher probability. It is assumed that the frequency of game balls entering the second variable entrance is higher than in the gaming state and the second condition state. This also makes it possible to vary the frequency of entry into the second variable entrance depending on the game state when the second special game is generated, diversify the game characteristics, and enhance the interest in the game.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to diversify the gaming properties and to improve the gaming interest.

(Reference Invention 9)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-1 is:
A first starting port into which a game ball can enter;
A second starting port that can be changed to a first state and a second state in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than the first state;
A first variable entrance which can be changed to a state where a game ball can enter and a state where a game ball cannot enter;
A second variable entrance which can be changed to a state where a game ball can enter and a state where a game ball cannot enter the ball;
First identification information that is variably displayed based on a ball entering the first starting port;
Second identification information variably displayed based on a ball entering the second starting port;
A first game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is a predetermined frequency; and a second game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starting port is higher than the first game state. Configurable game state setting means,
When the result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific result, a special game for executing the special game in which the first variable entrance or the second variable entrance is in a state where it can enter the ball. Game execution means,
Probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as a probability that a result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific result. A gaming machine,
The game state includes the predetermined probability and the first game state, the predetermined probability and the second game state, the high probability and the first game state, and the high probability and the second game state. And
It said second variable ball entrance port is one game state, characterized in that the ball entrance frequency of the high probability and become the first game condition when the gaming ball is increased.

  According to such a gaming machine, there are provided a gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state and a second gaming state, and a probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability. The game state includes a predetermined probability and a first game state, a predetermined probability and a second game state, a high probability and a first game state, and a high probability and a second game state. It is assumed that the frequency of entering the second variable entrance increases with a high probability and in the first gaming state. Thereby, the player proceeds with the game with high probability and expecting the occurrence of the first game state. In addition, this makes it possible to diversify the gaming state, diversify the gaming properties, and enhance the gaming interest.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-2 is a gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-1,
Equipped with a launching device that launches a game ball at a predetermined launching intensity to the game area,
The first starting port is provided in a first game area where game balls fired at a first firing intensity can enter,
The second starting port, the first variable entrance, and the second variable entrance are second game areas in which game balls fired at a second firing intensity different from the first firing intensity can enter. Provided in
When the gaming state is the predetermined probability and the first gaming state, by playing a game ball in the first gaming area, the first identification information is variably displayed to play a game,
When the game state is the predetermined probability and the second game state, the high probability and the first game state, or the high probability and the second game state, a game ball is fired in the second game area. A gaming machine that performs a game by variably displaying the second identification information,
In a gaming state in which a game ball is fired in the second game area, the second identification information is variably displayed to play a game,
The frequency of game balls entering the second variable entrance is the predetermined probability and the second game state, and the high probability and the first game state are higher than the high probability and the second game state. Is higher.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first starting port is provided in the first game area where the ball can be entered at the first firing intensity, and the second starting port, the first variable entry port, and the second variable entry port are , In the second game area where the ball can be entered at the second firing intensity. Then, when the game state is the predetermined probability and the first game state, the game is played by firing a game ball in the first game area and variably displaying the first identification information. Further, when the gaming state is the predetermined probability and the second gaming state, the high probability and the first gaming state, or the high probability and the second gaming state, the game ball is fired in the second gaming area and the second identification information is transmitted. It is assumed that a game is played with the display being changed. In a gaming state in which a game ball is fired in the second gaming area to play a game, that is, a predetermined probability and a second gaming state, a high probability and a first gaming state, and a high probability and a second gaming state, A game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable entrance is the highest is defined as a first game state with a high probability.

  Thus, when the player enters a gaming state in which a game ball is fired in the second gaming area to play a game, the player proceeds with the game in expectation that the gaming state is a high probability and the first gaming state. This makes it possible to diversify the gaming state, diversify the gaming properties, and enhance the gaming interest.

Further, the gaming machine of the Reference Invention 9-3, the Reference Invention 9-1 or gaming machine Reference Invention 9-2,
The second start hole provided on an upstream side of the second game region, the second variable inlet ball port is provided on the downstream side of the second start hole,
In the high-probability and the second game condition, by ball entrance of game ball into the second start hole that is arranged upstream of the game area, the second than the second start hole is disposed downstream By making it difficult to enter the variable entrance, the possibility of entering a game ball into the second variable entrance when the second special game occurs is determined by the high probability and the second probability. The high probability and the first game state are set higher than the game state.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second starting port is provided on the upstream side of the second game area, and the second variable entrance is provided on the downstream side of the second starting port. When the second starting port disposed on the upstream side is in the second state (open state), it is difficult for game balls to enter the second variable entrance port disposed on the downstream side. Thereby, when the second variable entrance becomes a ball-enterable state (open state) in the second special game, the high probability and the first game state are higher than the high probability and the second game state. It is assumed that the frequency of game balls entering the second variable entrance is high. This also makes it possible to vary the frequency of entry into the second variable entrance depending on the game state when the second special game is generated, diversify the game characteristics, and enhance the interest in the game.

  According to the gaming machine of the ninth aspect of the present invention, it is possible to diversify the gaming properties and to improve the gaming interest.

(Reference Invention 10)
Conventionally, a gaming machine that performs variable display of identification information based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and when a display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result, a gaming machine that can execute a special game that can give a predetermined profit to a player is provided. Widely known. In this type of gaming machine, various effects for enhancing the player's expectation are performed during the fluctuation display of the identification information, thereby improving the gaming interest. Such effect, for example, information about the variation display of the identification information to be executed variable display and subsequent identification of currently executing (e.g., degree of expectation (reliability display result becomes specific display results), the display An effect of displaying (notifying) a variation (effect) mode until a result is derived is known (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2002-239122).

  However, the effect performed during the variable display of the identification information as described above has already been adopted in many gaming machines, and the effect mode is uniform. For this reason, it has become difficult to enhance the entertainment interest of the game. The present invention 10 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to realize an effect that can attract the interest of a player as an effect performed while the identification information is being changed and displayed. The aim is to improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 10-1 for solving the above-mentioned problem is as follows:
Variable display means capable of performing a variable display of identification information;
State control means capable of controlling a game state when the change display of the identification information is performed;
Special game execution means capable of executing a special game to which a predetermined game profit can be given based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information becoming the specific display result,
Information display effect execution means capable of executing an information display effect for displaying information about the game after the end of the change display during the change display of the identification information,
The information includes at least first information, second information, and third information,
The first information indicates that a special game is executed after the end of the variable display,
The second information indicates that the current game state is continued after the end of the variable display,
The third information indicates that the gaming state becomes a less favorable gaming state after the end of the variable display,
The information display effect execution means is capable of displaying at least two of the first to third information at the start of the information display effect.

  According to such a gaming machine, during the variable display of the identification information, when performing the information display effect to display information about the game after the end of the variable display, at the start of the information display effect, First information indicating that the special game is to be executed after the end, second information indicating that the current game state is to be continued after the end of the variable display, and It is also possible to display at least two pieces of information among the third information indicating that the game state is disadvantageous. For this reason, when the information display effect is started during the fluctuation display of the identification information, the player can make an alternative guess regarding the later game development based on the type (content) of the information displayed at that time. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to attract the player's interest to the information displayed at the start of the information display effect, and to improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 10-2 is a gaming machine according to Reference Invention 10-1 described above.
When starting the information display effect, the information display effect execution means may display the first information and the second information, or may display the second information and the third information. It is assumed that.

  According to such a gaming machine, there are a case where the first information and the second information are displayed and a case where the second information and the third information are displayed when the information display effect is started. Therefore, when the first information and the second information are displayed at the start of the information display effect, the player can assume that there is no possibility that the subsequent game development will be disadvantageous, and the second When the information and the third information are displayed, it is not possible to exclude the possibility that a later game development is disadvantageous. As a result, it is possible to obtain an effect that stirs up expectations and anxiety of the player.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 10-3 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 10-1 or Reference Invention 10-2 described above.
As the special game, at least a first special game and a second special game,
Examples gaming state, has at least a first game condition and the second game condition,
The second special game is a special game having more game profits that can be provided than the first special game,
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state,
The state control means controls a game state after the end of the first special game to the first game state, and controls a game state after the end of the second special game to the second game state. ,
The information display effect execution means can execute the information display effect in the second game state,
The first information indicates that the second special game is executed after the end of the variable display,
The second information indicates that the current second game state is continued after the end of the variable display,
The third information indicates that the gaming state becomes the first gaming state after the end of the variable display.

  According to such a gaming machine, the special game has at least a first special game and a second special game, and the game state has at least a first game state and a second game state. The game is a special game having more game profits that can be acquired than the first special game, and the second game state is a game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state. In addition, the game state after the first special game ends is the first game state, and the game state after the second special game ends is the second game state. The information display effect can be executed in the second game state (advantageous state), and among the information displayed in the information display effect, the first information indicates that the second special game is to be executed. The information indicates that the current second gaming state is continued after the end of the variable display, and the third information indicates that the gaming state becomes the first gaming state. For this reason, information (game development) after the game based on the game in the second game state (variation display of identification information) is displayed by the information display effect. As a result, it is possible to improve the game entertainment in the second game state.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-3 described above.
It is provided with a fluctuation effect execution means capable of executing the fluctuation effect during the fluctuation display of the identification information,
The fluctuation effect execution means can execute a fluctuation effect based on a predetermined fluctuation effect pattern,
The variable effect pattern includes at least a first variable effect pattern, a second variable effect pattern, and a third variable effect pattern,
When the display result of the change display of the identification information is the specific display result, the second special game can be executed, and the change effect based on the first change effect pattern can be executed during the change display,
When the first special game is executable by the display result of the variable display of the identification information being the specific display result, a variable effect based on the second variable effect pattern can be performed during the variable display,
When the display result of the variable display of the identification information is a non-specific display result, a variable effect based on the third variable effect pattern can be executed during the variable display,
The information display effect execution means,
The first information and the second information can be displayed when a variable effect based on the first variable effect pattern is executed and when a variable effect based on the third variable effect pattern is executed,
When a fluctuation effect based on the second fluctuation effect pattern is executed, the second information and the third information can be displayed.

  According to such a gaming machine, a variable effect based on the predetermined variable effect pattern can be executed during the variable display of the identification information, and at least the first variable effect pattern and the second variable effect are used as the variable effect patterns. It has a pattern and a third variation effect pattern. When the second special game can be executed when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result, the variable effect based on the first variable effect pattern is displayed during the variable display, When the first special game can be executed by the result being the specific display result, the variable effect based on the second variable effect pattern is displayed during the variable display, and the display result of the variable display of the identification information is the non-specific display result. In such a case, it is possible to execute a variation effect based on the third variation effect pattern during the variation display. Then, during the variable display of the identification information, when the variable effect based on the first variable effect pattern is executed and when the variable effect based on the third variable effect pattern is executed, the information display in the variable display is performed. When the effect is started, the first information and the second information can be displayed. When a variable effect based on the second variable effect pattern is executed, the first information and the second information are displayed at the start of the information display effect in the variable display. The second information and the third information can be displayed. For this reason, when the variable effect based on the second variable effect pattern is executed, the information display effect for displaying the first information and the second information is not performed. This makes it possible to match the information display effect and the variable effect performed during the variable display of the identification information.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 10-5 is the gaming machine according to any one of Reference Invention 10-1 to Reference Invention 10-4 described above,
The information display effect execution means is capable of changing a display mode of information by the information display effect after the start of the information display effect.

  According to such a gaming machine, after the information display effect is started during the change display of the identification information, the display mode of the information by the information display effect can be changed. Therefore, when the information display effect is started during the change display of the identification information, the player can recognize how the subsequent game development will be based on the subsequent information display mode. This makes it possible to attract the player's interest in the information display effect even after the start of the information display effect.

  According to the above-described Reference Invention 10, it is possible to realize an effect that can attract the interest of the player as an effect performed during the variable display of the identification information, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(Reference invention 11)
Conventionally, a gaming machine that performs variable display of identification information based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and when a display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result, a special game that can provide a predetermined game profit to a player can be executed. Is widely known. In this type of gaming machine, various effects are generally performed in accordance with the progress of a game such as a change display of identification information or a special game. In such a gaming machine, there is a game machine that performs an effect (reach effect or the like) indicating whether or not the display result of the change display of the identification information is a specific display result as a character effect of a predetermined character (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. H10-163873). 2016-154657).

  However, a configuration for performing a character effect in a reach effect or the like has already been adopted in many gaming machines, and the execution mode is uniform. For this reason, it has become difficult to enhance the entertainment interest of the game. The present invention 11 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and its purpose is to enhance the gaming interest of a gaming machine equipped with a character effect by giving a characteristic to the execution mode of the character effect. It is in.

A gaming machine according to Reference Invention 11-1 for solving the above-mentioned problem includes:
Variable display means capable of performing a variable display of identification information;
Special game execution means capable of executing a special game to which a predetermined game profit can be given based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information becoming the specific display result,
And a performance performing means capable of performing a predetermined performance, comprising:
The effect executing means,
As the effect, it is possible to execute a character effect by a character displayed on a predetermined display unit,
It is characterized in that there is a case where a character effect is executed in accordance with a change display of identification information, and a case where a character effect is executed in conjunction with a special game.

  According to such a gaming machine, there are a case where the character effect displayed by the character displayed on the predetermined display unit is executed in accordance with the change display of the identification information and a case where the character effect is executed in conjunction with the special game. As a result, it is possible to provide a relevance between the effect associated with the variable display of the identification information and the effect associated with the special game, and as a result, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 11-2 is a gaming machine according to Reference Invention 11-1 described above.
Equipped with state control means capable of controlling the game state,
The state control means is capable of controlling a game state when a change display of the identification information is performed to a specific game state,
When the specific game state is reached, a predetermined character is displayed on the predetermined display unit,
The effect executing means is capable of executing a character effect by a character displayed on the predetermined display unit in the specific game state.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the gaming state at the time of performing the variation display of the identification information becomes the specific gaming state, a predetermined character is displayed on the display unit, and the character effect by the character is displayed by the variation display of the identification information. , And may be executed in conjunction with a special game. As a result, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest in the specific gaming state.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 11-3 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 11-1 or Reference Invention 11-2 described above.
As the specific display result, a first specific display result and a second specific display result are included,
The first special game includes a first special game and a second special game,
The first special game can be executed based on the display result of the change display of the identification information being the first specific display result,
The second special game can be executed based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information being the second specific display result,
The first special game has more game profit that can be provided than the second special game,
The effect executing means,
When the display result of the change display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result and the first special game becomes executable, a character effect is executed along with the change display,
When the display result of the change display of the identification information becomes the second specific display result and the second special game becomes executable, a character effect is executed along with the second special game. It is.

  According to such a gaming machine, the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result, and the first special game in which the game profit that can be given to the player is relatively large is executed. When it becomes possible, a character effect is executed in accordance with the change display, and the display result of the change display of the identification information becomes the second specific display result, and the game profit that can be given to the player is relatively small. When the assumed second special game can be executed, a character effect is executed along with the second special game. Thereby, the game entertainment in the case where the change display of the identification information, which is the trigger of execution of the first special game (the display result of the change display becomes the first specific display result), or the case where the second special game is performed, is provided. It is possible to increase.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 11-4 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 11-3 described above.
A first variable entrance that can be changed between a state where the game ball cannot enter and a state where the game ball can enter,
A second variable entrance that can be changed between a state in which the game ball cannot enter and a state in which the game ball can enter,
In the first special game, it becomes possible to enter a game ball into the first variable entrance,
In the second special game, it is possible to enter a game ball into the second variable entrance,
In the specific game state, the frequency of game balls entering the second variable entrance according to the second special game is higher than in game states other than the specific game state,
The effect executing means,
In the specific game state, when the display result of the change display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result and the first special game becomes executable, a character effect is executed along with the change display,
In the specific game state, when the display result of the change display of the identification information becomes the second specific display result and the second special game becomes executable, a character effect is executed along with the second special game. It is characterized by the following.

  According to such a gaming machine, in the first special game executed when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result, entering of the game ball into the first variable entrance is performed. In the second special game executed when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the second specific display result, it becomes possible to enter a game ball into the second variable entrance, and In the specific game state, the frequency of game balls entering the second variable entrance according to the second special game is higher than in game states other than the specific game state. Thus, the second variable game associated with the second special game can be executed in a situation where the variable display of the identification information, which is an execution trigger of the first special game (the display result of the variable display becomes the first specific display result), can be executed. It is possible to attract the player's interest in entering the game ball into the ball opening and executing the character effect, and to enhance the interest in the game in the specific game state.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 11-5 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 11-3 or Reference Invention 11-4 described above,
The first special game is a big hit game, and the second special game is a small hit game.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first special game is a big hit game, and the second special game is a small hit game. As a result, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest of the gaming machine provided with the big hit game and the small hit game.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 11-6 is the gaming machine according to any one of Reference Invention 11-3 to Reference Invention 11-5 described above,
Probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability and a high probability higher than the predetermined probability as a probability that a display result of the variable display of the identification information is the first specific display result,
Probability of variable display of the display results of the identification information results second specific display is characterized in that higher than the high probability.

  According to such a gaming machine, a predetermined probability, a high probability higher than the predetermined probability, as a probability (execution probability of the first special game) that the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result, Can be set, and the probability that the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the second specific display result (the execution probability of the second special game) is higher than the high probability. Therefore, the possibility that the second special game is executed increases, and accordingly, the possibility that the character effect accompanying the second special game is executed increases. As a result, it is possible to enhance the game entertainment when the second special game is performed.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 11-7 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 11-6 described above,
In the specific game state, a probability that a display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result is set to the high probability.

  According to such a gaming machine, in the specific gaming state, the probability that the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result is high, so that the possibility of performing the character effect accompanying the second special game is high. It is possible to attract the player's interest in executing the character effect accompanying the variable display of the identification information in a situation where the game is high. As a result, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest in the specific gaming state.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 11-8 is the gaming machine according to any one of Reference Invention 11-1 to Reference Invention 11-7 described above,
The character displayed on the predetermined display unit includes a first character and a second character,
The character production has a first character production and a second character production,
The first character effect is an effect that includes a first effect by the first character and the second character, and a second effect by the first character and the second character after the first effect,
The second character effect is an effect by the first character and the second character and does not include the second effect,
The effect executing means,
When performing character presentation with the variable display of the identification information to perform the first character presentation,
In the case where a character effect is executed in association with the special game, the second character effect is executed.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first character and the second character are displayed on the display unit, and a character effect by the first character and the second character is executed. The character effects include a first character effect and a second character effect. The first character effect is a first effect by the first character and the second character and a first character and a second character after the first effect. The second character effect is an effect that includes the first character and the second character but does not include the second effect. Then, a first character effect is executed when the character effect is executed in accordance with the variable display of the identification information, and a second character effect is executed when the character effect is executed in conjunction with the special game. As a result, it is possible to execute the character effect in a mode suitable for the game situation, and to attract the interest of the player to the character effect.

  According to the above-described Reference Invention 11, it is possible to enhance the gaming attraction of a gaming machine having a character effect by giving a characteristic to the execution mode of the character effect.

(Reference Invention 12)
Conventionally, there is a gaming machine that performs a variable display of identification information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition and, based on that the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result, can execute a special game advantageous to a player. Are known. Some gaming machines of this type include a plurality of display means for performing variable display of identification information and other displays (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-240381).

  In a gaming machine provided with a plurality of display means as described above, the player proceeds with the game by paying attention to the display content of each display means. However, a configuration having a plurality of display means has already been adopted in many gaming machines, and the display mode by the plurality of display means is becoming uniform. For this reason, it has become difficult to increase the entertainment interest of this type of gaming machine. The present invention 12 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and its purpose is to provide a feature of a display mode by a plurality of display means, and to provide a gaming machine having a plurality of display means. The goal is to improve.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 12-1 for solving the above-mentioned problem includes:
A gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player based on a display result of a variable display of identification information being a specific display result,
First display means;
Second display means;
A variable display start unit capable of starting the variable display of the identification information by the first display unit based on satisfaction of a predetermined change start condition;
Suggestion display executing means capable of executing a suggestion display indicating that the display result of the variable display of the identification information may be a specific display result,
The suggestion display executing means is capable of executing a suggestion display on at least one of the first display means and the second display means.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the predetermined change start condition is satisfied, the change display of the identification information is started by the first display means, and it is suggested that the display result of the change display of the identification information may be a specific display result. The suggestion display can be executed by at least one of the first display means and the second display means. This allows the player to pay attention to the suggestion display provided by the first display means or the second display means, in addition to the change display of the identification information on the first display means.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-2 is the same as the gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-1 described above,
With a game board in which a game area is formed,
The first display means is provided inside the game area,
The second display means is provided outside the game area.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first display means is provided inside the game area formed on the game board, and the second display means is provided outside the game area, so that a wide display is provided inside and outside the game area. Becomes possible. As a result, a suggestive display with an impact can be made.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 12-3 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 12-2 described above.
The second display means includes left display means located on the left game area side of the game area, and right display means located on the right game area side of the game area,
The suggestion display executing means is capable of executing the suggestion display on at least one of the left display means and the right display means when executing the suggestion display on the second display means.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first display means provided inside the game area, the left display means (second display means) provided outside the game area and on the left game area side, and the game area The suggestion display can be executed by at least one of the three display units, that is, the right display unit (the second display unit) provided outside the right side and on the side of the right game area. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the suggestion display and enhance the interest in the case where the suggestion display is performed.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 12-4 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 12-3 described above.
When the suggestion display is executed by the second display means, the suggestion display execution means can execute the suggestion display in a different mode between the left display means and the right display means.

  According to such a gaming machine, different types of suggestion display can be performed by the left display means and the right display means, so that the suggestion display performed by the left display means and the suggestion display performed by the right display means are performed. Can attract the player's attention. This makes it possible to effectively increase the player's expectation.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 12-5 is the gaming machine according to any one of Reference Invention 12-1 to Reference Invention 12-4 described above,
When the suggestion display executing means does not execute the suggestion display on the second display means, a predetermined display executing means capable of executing another predetermined display on the second display means is provided.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the suggestion display is not executed on the second display means, another predetermined display can be executed on the second display means. This makes it possible to effectively utilize the second display means.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 12-6 is the gaming machine according to any one of Reference Invention 12-1 to Reference Invention 12-5 described above,
After the start of the variable display of the identification information, a specific display execution unit capable of executing a specific display indicating whether the display result of the variable display is a specific display result,
The specific display execution unit may execute the specific display on the first display unit, or may execute the specific display on the first display unit and the second display unit. is there.

  According to such a gaming machine, after the variable display of the identification information is started on the first display means, the specific display indicating whether the display result of the variable display is the specific display result is displayed on the first display means. And the first display means and the second display means. As a result, it is possible to increase the variations of the specific display and enhance the interest when the specific display is performed.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 12-7 is the gaming machine according to any one of Reference Invention 12-1 to Reference Invention 12-6 described above,
A stop display execution unit capable of executing the display of stop identification information when stopping the fluctuation display of the identification information,
The stop display execution unit may display stop identification information on the first display unit, or may display stop identification information on the first display unit and the second display unit. It is characterized by the following.

  According to such a gaming machine, after the variable display of the identification information is started on the first display means, the display of the stop identification information when the variable display is stopped is executed on the first display means. May be executed by the first display means and the second display means. Thereby, it is possible to increase the variation of the display of the stop identification information when the variable display of the identification information stops, and to enhance the interest in displaying the stop identification information.

  According to the twelfth aspect of the present invention, it is possible to provide a feature in a display mode by a plurality of display means, and to improve a gaming interest of a gaming machine having a plurality of display means.

(Reference Invention 13)
In addition, a gaming machine according to a reference invention 13-1 for solving the problem according to the aforementioned reference invention 12 is:
A gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player based on a display result of a variable display of identification information being a specific display result,
First display means;
Second display means;
A variable display start unit capable of starting the variable display of the identification information by the first display unit based on satisfaction of a predetermined change start condition;
Effect display execution means capable of executing an effect display related to the change display of the identification information,
The effect display execution means may be an effect display on the first display means or an effect display on the first display means and the second display means. is there.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the predetermined change start condition is satisfied, the change display of the identification information is started by the first display means, and the effect display related to the change display of the identification information is executed by the first display means. In some cases, the processing is performed by the first display means and the second display means. This makes it possible for the player to pay attention to the effect display by the first display means or the second display means, triggered by the start of the change display of the identification information on the first display means.

  The “effect display related to the variable display” is, for example, an effect display for changing the background when performing the variable display of the identification information, or an effect indicating whether the result of the variable display is a specific display result. This refers to various effect displays related to the variable display of the identification information, such as display, effect display indicating the possibility of the result of the variable display being the specific display result.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 13-2 is a gaming machine according to Reference Invention 13-1 described above,
As a mode in which the effect display is executed by the first display means and the second display means, a first mode in which the first display means and the second display means are executed from the beginning, and A second mode executed by the first display unit and thereafter executed by the second display unit.
The effect display executing means, when executing the effect display with the first display means and the second display means, by the end of the effect display based on the first aspect and the second display by the end of the change display of the identification information. One of the effect displays based on the mode can be executed.

  According to such a gaming machine, as a mode in which the effect display related to the variable display is executed by the first display means and the second display means, the effect display is performed by the first display means and the second display means from the beginning. And a second mode in which the effect display is first performed on the first display means, and then the effect display is also performed on the second display means. In the case where the effect display is executed by the first display means and the second display means, either the effect display based on the first mode or the effect display based on the second mode is performed until the change display of the identification information ends. Either one can be performed. Accordingly, it is possible to enhance the interest in the case where the effect display related to the variable display is performed, without making the execution mode of the effect display related to the variable display uniform.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 13-3 is a gaming machine according to Reference Invention 13-2 described above.
The effect display based on the second aspect is an effect display of an aspect in which a display area of the effect display executed by the first display means spreads stepwise to the second display means. is there.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the effect display related to the variable display is executed based on the second mode, that is, initially, the effect display is executed on the first display means, and thereafter, the effect display is also performed on the second display means. When the effect display is executed, the effect display is such that the display area of the effect display on the first display means spreads stepwise to the second display means. Accordingly, it is possible to perform an effect in which the display area of the effect display gradually expands from the first display means to the second display means, and it is possible to enhance the interest when the effect display related to the variable display is performed. Become.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 13-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of Reference Invention 13-1 to Reference Invention 13-3 described above,
With a game board in which a game area is formed,
The first display means is provided inside the game area,
The second display means is provided outside the game area.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first display means is provided inside the game area formed on the game board, and the second display means is provided outside the game area, so that a wide display is provided inside and outside the game area. Becomes possible. This makes it possible to display an effect with a high impact.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 13-5 is a gaming machine according to Reference Invention 13-4 described above,
The second display means includes left display means located on the left game area side of the game area, and right display means located on the right game area side of the game area,
The effect display executing means is capable of executing an effect display on at least one of the left display means and the right display means when executing the effect display on the second display means.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first display means provided inside the game area, the left display means (second display means) provided outside the game area and on the left game area side, and the game area And the right display means (second display means) provided on the outside of the right game area and on the side of the right game area, the effect display can be executed. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect display and increase the interest in the effect display.

  According to the above-described Reference Invention 13, it is possible to provide a feature in the display mode of the plurality of display means, and to improve the gaming interest of a gaming machine including the plurality of display means.

(Reference Invention 14)
Conventionally, there is a gaming machine that performs a variable display of identification information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition and, based on that the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result, can execute a special game advantageous to a player. Are known. In this type of gaming machine, a movable body (gimmick), an effect device such as an LED, a speaker, an effect display device, and the like are provided on a frame (front frame) constituting an outer shell of the game machine, and these effect devices are used for the progress of the game. There is an arrangement in which the effect is enhanced by driving together (for example, see JP-A-2006-195934).

  However, when providing the effect means on the frame of the gaming machine, for example, the relationship with the island equipment (CR unit, data display, etc.) in which the gaming machine is installed and other adjacent gaming machines installed, Opening and closing of the frame, etc., must be taken into account, and these are usually accompanied by restrictions. For this reason, in a gaming machine in which the production means is provided on the frame, the installation mode of the production means tends to be uniform and lacks novelty. The present invention 14 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of giving a characteristic to the installation mode of the production means and making the player feel novelty. It is in.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 14-1 for solving the above-mentioned problem is:
A game board with a game area formed on the front,
A front frame that covers a front surface of the game board and has a viewing window that allows the game area to be viewed from the front,
The front frame is provided so as to be openable and closable at one end thereof.
On the one end side of the front surface of the front frame, the first frame-side display unit capable of displaying a predetermined image, characterized in that is provided rotatably between the visual window side Things.

  According to such a gaming machine, the front frame that covers the front surface of the game board is provided so as to be openable and closable (rotatable) around an axis on one side end by being pivotally supported at one end side. . A first frame side display means capable of displaying a predetermined image is rotatable between the front side of the front frame and one of the front ends of the front side of the front frame, the display side being capable of displaying a predetermined image. It is provided in. The viewing window of the front frame that allows the game area formed on the front of the game board to be viewed is located on the inner side (center side) of the front frame with respect to one end side, which is the side on which the front frame is pivotally supported. By rotating the first frame-side display means toward the viewing window when opening the front frame, the first frame-side display means can be accommodated in the viewing window (inside the front frame). When the front frame is closed, the first frame side display means is rotated by rotating the first frame side display means in a direction opposite to the direction of opening the front frame (one side end of the front frame). Can be restored to the original state. For this reason, even if the display means (first frame side display means) is provided at one end of the front surface of the front frame on which the front frame is supported, the opening and closing of the front frame is not hindered. Therefore, it is possible to adopt a novel arrangement mode in which a display means (first frame side display means) is provided at one end of the front frame that is supported by the shaft. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows the user to feel a novelty that has not existed in the past.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 14-2 is a gaming machine according to Reference Invention 14-1 described above.
When the first frame side display means is in an initial state in which it does not rotate to the viewing window side, the display surface is configured to be in a state inclined to the viewing window side while being visible from the front,
And a maintenance means capable of maintaining the first frame side display means in the initial state.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the first frame side display means is in an initial state in which it is not turned to the viewing window side, its display surface is inclined toward the viewing window while being visible from the front. The first frame side display means can be maintained in that state (initial state). Since the display surface of the first frame side display means is inclined to the viewing window side, a player playing a game while visually recognizing the game area through the viewing window can display the first frame side display means with a small movement of the line of sight. The face (display content) can be visually recognized, and by maintaining the first frame side display means in such a state (initial state), the first frame can be played in a situation where the front frame can be closed and the game can be played. Good visibility of the display surface (display content) of the frame side display means can be ensured.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 14-3 is a gaming machine according to Reference Invention 14-2 described above.
The maintenance means is constituted by an urging means for urging the first frame side display means to the one side end side.

  According to such a gaming machine, the maintaining means capable of maintaining the first frame-side display means in the initial state urges the first frame-side display means toward one end (the side on which the front frame is supported). It is constituted by the urging means. For this reason, by rotating the first frame side display means to the viewing window side, the initial state of the first frame side display means is released, and by rotating the first frame side display means to the viewing window side, the first frame side display means becomes By the action of the urging means (maintenance means), the front frame is urged toward one end and returns to the initial state. Thus, when the first frame-side display device is not rotated toward the viewing window, the first frame-side display device can be automatically set to the initial state.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 14-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of Reference Invention 14-1 to Reference Invention 14-3 described above,
A second frame side display means capable of displaying a predetermined image is provided on the other side end side of the front surface of the front frame opposite to the one side end side.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second frame side display capable of displaying a predetermined image on the other side end side opposite to the one side end side provided with the first frame side display means on the front surface of the front frame. Means are provided. This makes it possible to provide a gaming machine having a novel frame (front frame) in which display means are disposed on both sides of one side end and the other side of the front frame.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-5 is the same as the gaming machine of Reference Invention 14-4 described above,
The second frame-side display means is characterized in that the display surface is inclined toward the viewing window while being visible from the front.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second frame side display means is configured such that its display surface is inclined toward the viewing window while being visible from the front. Thereby, a player who plays a game while visually recognizing the game area through the visual recognition window can visually recognize the display surface (display content) of the second frame side display means with a small movement of the line of sight, similarly to the first frame side display means. It is possible to do.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 14-6 is the gaming machine according to any one of Reference Invention 14-1 to Reference Invention 14-5 described above,
On the back side of the game board, board side display means capable of displaying a predetermined image and being visible from the front through the viewing window is provided.

  According to such a gaming machine, board-side display means capable of displaying a predetermined image is provided on the back side of the game board, and the board-side display means can be visually recognized from the front through the viewing window of the front frame. It has been. Thereby, various displays using the frame-side display means provided on the front surface (outside the game area) of the front frame and the board-side display means provided on the back side (inside the game area) of the game board become possible, It is possible to enhance the entertainment interest of the game.

  According to the above-described Reference Invention 14, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the installation mode of the effect means is characterized and the novelty can be felt.

(Reference Invention 15)
In the conventional game machine, based on input sphere to start opening, a symbol display varies performs propriety determination at a predetermined jackpot probability, the symbol is stopped and displayed at big hit symbol when propriety determination result is jackpot, large There was a game that executed a jackpot game that opened a winning opening. In addition, a game effect (reach effect, character effect, etc.) is executed in accordance with the change display of the symbol, and the result of the hit determination may be a big hit depending on the execution mode of the game effect, that is, the symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol. Had the potential to do so. In addition, the jackpot has a plurality of jackpots, a jackpot that is relatively advantageous to the player and a jackpot that is relatively disadvantageous for the player. Further, as game effects (reach effects, character effects, and the like), a plurality of game effects having different execution modes (effect modes) are provided, and different jackpot reliability levels are shown depending on the game effects to be executed. As a result, the gaming attraction of the player when the gaming performance with a high jackpot reliability is executed is increased, and when the gaming becomes an advantageous jackpot, the gaming attraction is further enhanced.

  In a conventional gaming machine, while a gaming effect with a high jackpot reliability is executed, the gaming attraction is enhanced. On the other hand, as a result of the gaming attraction, if the jackpot is relatively disadvantageous for the player, the gaming attraction is increased. There was a possibility that it would lower. The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and provides a gaming machine that can enhance a sense of security in a game and execute a game effect that enhances amusement of a game.

A gaming machine according to Reference Invention 15-1 for solving the above-mentioned problem is as follows:
Identification information display means for variably displaying identification information based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition;
Game effect execution means capable of executing a game effect with the change display of the identification information,
A variable entrance that can be changed to a state where a game ball can enter, and a state where a game ball cannot enter, and
Special game execution means capable of executing a special game in which the variable entrance is capable of entering the ball,
Game state setting means capable of setting a game state after the end of the special game to a first game state and a second game state;
With
A gaming machine capable of executing the special game when the result of the variable display of the identification information is a specific result,
The game production has a first special game production and a second special game production in which the production mode is different from the first special game production,
The first gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state,
As an effect mode that suggests a predetermined game state, it has a first effect mode that suggests the first game state, and a second effect mode that suggests the second game state,
When the first special game effect is executed in the first effect mode, when the first effect mode is continued without executing the special game, and when the special game is executed and the special game is terminated. Setting the effect mode to the second effect mode,
When the second special game effect is executed in the first effect mode, the special game is executed and the effect mode after the end of the special game is set to the first effect mode, and the special game is executed. Without performing the first effect mode without performing the special game and setting the effect mode after the end of the special game to the second effect mode. It is assumed that.

  According to such a gaming machine, as the effect mode indicating the gaming state, there are a first effect mode indicating the first game state and a second effect mode indicating the second game state, the first gaming state is advantageous gaming state to the player than the second game condition. Further, the game effects that can be executed in the first effect mode include a first special game effect in which a specific character appears, and a second special game effect in which the effect mode is different from the first special game effect. Then, when the first special game effect is executed in accordance with the change display of the identification information in the first effect mode, when the first effect mode is continued without executing the special game, and when the special game is executed. There is a time when the effect mode after the end of the special game is set to the second effect mode. Further, in the case of executing the second special game effects with the variable display of the identification information in the first effect mode, and when setting the running special game effects mode after the special game terminated in the first effect mode In some cases, the first game mode is continued without executing the special game, and the effect mode is not set to the second effect mode.

  Thus, in the first effect mode indicating the first game state relatively advantageous to the player, when the second special game effect is executed, the effect mode does not shift to the second effect mode. The player can play the game with a sense of security. Further, when the second special game effect is executed, the first effect mode is continued after the special game is executed, or the first effect mode is continued even when the special game is not executed. Thus, the player can play the game with a sense of expectation. In addition, even when the first special game effect that may shift to the second effect mode is executed, the special game is not executed, but the first effect mode is continued. It is possible to maintain the feeling and prevent a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game as much as possible.

Further, the gaming machine of the Reference Invention 15-2, in the gaming machine of the Reference Invention 15-1,
Executing the first special game effect in the first effect mode is a condition for shifting the effect mode from the first effect mode to the second effect mode.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the effect mode is set to the first effect mode indicating the first game state advantageous to the player, the first special game effect is executed in the first effect mode. Is a condition for shifting to the second effect mode. Thereby, the effect mode does not shift from the first effect mode to the second effect mode without passing through the first special game effect, and thus the player when a game effect other than the first special game effect is executed. And a sense of tension when the first special game effect is executed, and a sharp game can be provided.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 15-3 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 15-1 or Reference Invention 15-2,
The identification result includes a first identification result and a second identification result that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first identification result,
A third gaming state as the gaming state;
The second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the third gaming state,
As the effect mode, there is a third effect mode indicating the third game state,
In the first special game production, a specific character is assumed to appear,
The game production includes a third special game production in which the specific character appears,
In the third effect mode, when the third special game effect is executed in conjunction with the change display of the identification information, and the result of the change display of the identification information is the specific result, the specific result is the third result. One characteristic result is obtained.

  According to such a gaming machine, as the specific result for executing the special game, the first specific result and the second specific result which is more disadvantageous than the first specific result are provided. It has a third game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the game state. In addition, as a production mode, a third production mode indicating a third game state is provided, and a specific character common to a character appearing in the first special game production appears as a game production executable in the third production mode. Has a third special game effect. Then, when the third special game effect is executed in the third effect mode and the result of the variable display of the identification information is a specified result, the specified result is a first specified result advantageous to the player. .

  Thus, in the first effect mode, the first special game effect in which a specific character having an unfavorable result appears even in the case of a specific result, and in the third effect mode, the third special game in which a similar specific character appears. The game effect is set to a game effect that gives an advantageous result when the effect is a specific result. That is, a game effect in which the same specific character appears depending on the effect mode is a game effect having a different value for the player. In addition, this makes it possible to vary the sense of expectation for a game effect in which the same specific character appears depending on the effect mode, prevent the game from getting tired, and enhance the interest in the game.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 15-4 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 15-3,
In the third effect mode, when the third special game effect is executed along with the change display of the identification information, and when the result of the change display of the identification information is the specific result, the third special game effect is displayed after the end of the special game. The gaming state is set to the first gaming state.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the third special game effect is executed in the third effect mode and the result of the change display of the identification information is a specific result, the game state after the end of the special game is changed to the first state. It is assumed that the game state is set. This makes it possible to increase the value of the third special game effect in the third effect mode and increase the player's expectation when the third special game effect in which the specific character appears in the third effect mode is executed. Becomes This also makes it possible to make the expectation for a game effect in which the same specific character appears different depending on the effect mode, prevent the game from getting tired, and enhance the interest in the game. Further, the effect mode after the end of the special game may be set to the first effect mode indicating the first game state.

  When the first special game effect is executed in the first effect mode, the special game may be executed and the effect mode after the end of the special game may be set to the first effect mode. Further, when a predetermined game effect is executed in the first effect mode, the predetermined game effect is executed without executing the special game and shifting the effect mode after the end of the special game to the second effect mode. , A plurality of types. In addition, when the predetermined game effect is executed in the first effect mode, the predetermined game effect is executed without executing the special game and shifting the effect mode after the end of the special game to the second effect mode. The number of “the predetermined game effect in the first effect mode, when the special game is executed and the effect mode after the end of the special game may be shifted to the second effect mode. More than the number of "game effects".

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that executes a game effect that enhances the player's sense of security and enhances the gaming interest.

(Reference invention 16)
In the conventional gaming machine, although the amount of prize balls acquired during the extended play is indicated, it is difficult for the player to easily grasp the gaming profit amount acquired in different periods. As a result, there is a possibility that the entertainment interest of the game may be reduced. The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and provides a gaming machine capable of easily indicating a gained game profit amount by a player and preventing a decrease in gaming interest. It is.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 16-1 for solving the above-mentioned problem is as follows:
An identification information display unit that variably displays the identification information based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition;
Special game execution means capable of executing a special game capable of acquiring a game profit when the result of the variable display of the identification information is a specific result,
A first profit information display unit capable of displaying profit information indicating an amount of game profit obtained in the first period;
A second profit information display unit capable of displaying profit information indicating an amount of game profit obtained in a second period longer than the first period,
A first display device capable of displaying predetermined game information relating to the game, and (sub-liquid crystal)
A second display device provided separately from the first display device and capable of displaying predetermined game information relating to a game (main liquid crystal)
The first display device is provided with the first profit information display unit, and the second display device is provided with the second profit information display unit.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first profit information display portion capable of displaying profit information indicating the amount of game profit obtained in the first period, and the game profit obtained in the second period longer than the first period. A second profit information display unit capable of displaying profit information indicating the amount, a first profit information display unit is provided on the first display device, and a second profit information display unit is provided separately from the first display device. A profit information display section is provided. As a result, it is possible to display game profits acquired in different length periods on different display devices. This also allows the player to check the first display device when he wants to check the game profit obtained in the first period, and to display the second display device when he wants to check the game profit obtained in the second period. Since it is sufficient to confirm the game profit, it is easy to grasp the game profit obtained in the desired period.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 16-2 is a gaming machine of Reference Invention 16-1,
A game machine that executes a game by firing a game ball into a game area,
The first display device is provided outside a game area,
The second display device is provided inside a game area,
In a predetermined game situation, the first display device is provided with the first profit information display unit, and the second display device is provided with the second profit information display unit and the identification information display unit. Is what you do.

  According to such a gaming machine, in a predetermined gaming situation, the first display device provided with the first profit information display unit is provided outside the game area, and the second profit information display unit and the identification information display unit are provided. A second display device is provided inside the game area. Thereby, the player plays the game while checking the identification information and the game profit obtained in the second period on the second display device provided in the area inside the game area, and checks the game profit obtained in the first period. In this case, it is possible to confirm by looking at the first display device provided in the area outside the game area. In addition, since the first display device and the second display device are clearly separated from each other in the inside and outside regions of the game area, the player has obtained the desired period (the first period or the second period). It is possible to easily and reliably grasp the game profit.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 16-3 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 16-1 or Reference Invention 16-2,
When a plurality of special games occur in the second period,
The first period is a period including one special game,
The second period is a period including the plurality of special games.

  According to such a gaming machine, when a plurality of special games occur in the second period, the first period is a period including only one special game, and the second period is the plurality of special games. The period includes all of the special games. Thereby, when a plurality of special games have occurred in the second period, the second profit information display section displays profit information including the total amount of game profits obtained in the plurality of special games, In the one profit information display part, profit information including the game profit obtained in one special game is displayed. As a result, the player can easily and surely grasp the gaming profit obtained during a desired period (the first period or the second period).

  The “period including one special game” may be defined as the first period of the execution period of only one special game, or after the execution of the special game, in addition to the execution period of one special game. The first period may include the predetermined game state (excluding the special game). Similarly, in the “period including a plurality of special games”, only the execution period of the plurality of special games may be set as the second period, or in addition to the execution period of the plurality of special games, The second period may include a game state during the special game and a predetermined game state (excluding the special game) after the end of the last special game of the plurality of special games.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 16-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 16-1 to Reference Invention 16-3.
The game state includes a first game state (high-accuracy low-base state), a second game state less favorable to the player than the first game state (low-accuracy low-base state),
The second period starts when the special game is executed, and ends when the game state is set to the second game state in a period other than the special game,
In the second period, when a plurality of the special games occur, a plurality of the first profit information display sections are provided.

  According to such a gaming machine, the gaming state has a relatively advantageous first gaming state and a relatively disadvantageous second gaming state, and when the special gaming is executed during the second period. The game starts and ends when the game state is set to the second game state in a period other than the special game. When a special game occurs a plurality of times in the second period, a plurality of first profit information display sections for displaying profit information acquired in a period including one special game are provided. That is, when a special game occurs a plurality of times in the second period, it is possible to provide a first profit information display section corresponding to each special game. Thereby, the player can grasp the total amount of the game profit acquired in the second period and can grasp how much the game profit has been acquired in the first period including each special game. . Note that only one second profit information display section for displaying profit information acquired in the second period may be provided.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 16-5 is a gaming machine according to Reference Inventions 16-1 to 16-4.
A second special game execution means capable of executing a second special game capable of acquiring a game profit when a result of the change display of the identification information becomes a second specified result, (small hit game execution means)
The first gaming state is a gaming state in which a gaming profit can be obtained by executing the second special game,
The first period is a period until the first special game and the first game state set after the first special game is completed, and
The first profit information display unit displays game profit obtained in the first special game and profit information indicating an amount of game profit obtained in the second special game in the first game state. It is a feature.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first gaming state is a gaming state in which a gaming profit can be obtained by executing the second special game. Further, the first period is a period until the first special game and the first game state set after the end of the first special game are completed. The first profit information display unit displays profit information obtained by adding the game profit obtained in the first special game to the game profit obtained in the second special game in the first game state following the first special game. It shall be. Thus, by looking at the first profit information display portion, it is possible to confirm profit information indicating the amount of game profit obtained in one special game and the first game state set thereafter.

  In addition, in this case, when a plurality of first profit information display units are provided when a plurality of special games are generated in the second period, each first profit information display unit includes a special game of each time and a first game thereafter. Since it is possible to display the profit information in which the states are combined, it is possible to easily and reliably grasp the process of obtaining the profit information shown in the second profit information display section. Becomes

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 16-6 is a gaming machine according to Reference Invention 16-5,
A period information indicating an execution period of the first gaming state is added to the first profit information display section.

  According to such a gaming machine, period information indicating an execution period of the first gaming state is added to the first profit information display section. This makes it possible to grasp the length of the execution period of the first game state following the special game with respect to the profit information displayed on the first profit information display section. The profit information displayed on the first profit information display unit, that is, the profit information indicating one special game and the game profit obtained in the first game state after the end of the special game, It is possible to easily and reliably grasp whether the profit information has been obtained through the above.

  For example, when the profit information displayed on the predetermined first profit information display unit indicates an amount larger (or smaller) than the profit information displayed on another first profit information display unit, the first profit information display unit By looking at the added period information, it is possible to guess that this is due to the length of the period of the first game state in which the game profit can be obtained by the second special game. Also, when a plurality of special games occur in the second period, it is possible to grasp how long the first game state between the special games lasts and how much game profit can be obtained. Become.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily show the acquired game profit amount to a player and prevent a decrease in gaming interest.

  In the "special game execution means capable of executing a special game capable of acquiring a game profit when the result of the change display of the identification information becomes a specific result", the specific result is set to a big hit (stop of the big hit symbol), and the special game is set to the big hit. As a game, the special game execution means can be a big hit game execution means. Further, in the "second special game execution means capable of executing a second special game capable of acquiring a game profit when the result of the change display of the identification information becomes the second specific result", the second specific result is determined to be a small hit (small hit). (The symbol is stopped), the second special game can be a small hitting game, and the second special game executing means can be a small hitting game executing means.

  Further, the first game state can be set to the high-accuracy low-base state, and the second game state can be set to the low-accuracy low-base state (normal state). Then, the second period starts based on the execution of the big hit game in the second game state, and thereafter ends when the game state is set to the second game state (low-probability low base state) in a period other than the big hit game. You may do it. In addition, a third game state (low-probability base state) or a fourth game state may be provided (high-probability base state). Also in this case, even if the third game state or the fourth game state is entered after the start of the second period, the second period is continued, and the game state is changed to the second game state (low-probability low base state) in a period other than the big hit game. ) Is set to end. That is, this second period is also referred to as a “renjo period (special period)”.

  The second profit information display unit displays the total amount of the game profits obtained in the big hit game and the small hit game generated in the second period, and the first profit information display unit displays the big hit game in the second period. In addition, it is possible to display the game profit acquired in the small hit game until the next big hit game of the big hit game occurs. Also, from the game profits displayed on the first profit information display section and / or the second profit information display section, the game profit obtained in the specific jackpot game is not displayed (not added), that is, the game profit obtained in the specific jackpot game is obtained. The game profit may be excluded. For example, a jackpot game (2R fifth jackpot game, 2R sixth jackpot game, 2R seventh jackpot game, 2R eighth jackpot game of this embodiment) with a small amount of game profit that can be acquired is displayed in the first profit information display unit and And / or may be excluded from the display target of the second profit information display unit. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that such a jackpot game that is relatively disadvantageous to the player has occurred.

  Further, in a predetermined game situation (for example, in a high-accuracy low-base state, during a small hit game), a first profit information display section is provided on a first display device outside the game area, and a second profit information display section is provided on a second display device inside the game area. (2) A profit information display section may be provided. In another game situation (during a big hit game), the first profit information display section is provided on the first display device outside the game area, and the first profit information display section and the second profit information display section are provided on the second display device inside the game area. An information display unit may be provided. Further, in still another game situation (during a reach effect or character effect), the first profit information display portion and / or the second profit which have been displayed on the first display device and / or the second display device so far. There is a case where the information display unit is turned off and neither the first profit information display unit nor the second profit information display unit is displayed on the first display device and the second display device. Thereby, the reach effect and the like (specific effect) can be easily seen by the player, and the determination result can be easily notified to the player. Note that it is also possible to apply a situation different from these as the game situation.

(Reference Invention 17)
In a conventional gaming machine, while a gaming effect with a high jackpot reliability is executed, the gaming attraction is enhanced. On the other hand, as a result of the gaming attraction, if the jackpot is relatively disadvantageous for the player, the gaming attraction is increased. There was a possibility that it would lower.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and provides a gaming machine capable of executing a game effect that enhances a game entertainment.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 17-1 for solving the above-mentioned problem is:
Identification information display means for variably displaying identification information based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition;
Game effect execution means capable of executing a game effect with the change display of the identification information,
A variable entrance that can be changed to a state where a game ball can enter, and a state where a game ball cannot enter, and
Special game execution means capable of executing a special game that allows the variable entrance to enter the ball,
A gaming machine capable of executing the special game when the result of the variable display of the identification information is a specific result,
When the result of the change display of the identification information is a specific result, the predetermined identification information is set to a reach mode during the change display of the identification information, and then the predetermined identification information is stopped and displayed in a hit mode, and the identification information is displayed. If the result of the variable display is not a specific result, the predetermined identification information is set to the reach mode during the variable display of the identification information, and thereafter, the predetermined identification information is stopped and displayed in an off mode,
As the game effects, a plurality of game effects including a first game effect,
The identification information includes a plurality of identification information including first identification information,
When the first game effect is executed in accordance with the change display of the identification information, in the change display of the identification information, the reach mode is set to the first identification information,
If the result of the variable display of the identification information is a specific result, the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the hit mode. If the result of the variable display of the identification information is not the specific result, the first identification information is displayed. The reach mode is stopped and displayed in the out-of-way mode.

  According to such a gaming machine, it has a plurality of pieces of identification information including the first identification information as the identification information, and a plurality of games including the first game production as the game production executed along with the change display of the identification information. Has directing. If the first game effect is to be executed and the result of the change display of the identification information is a specific result, an effect that configures the reach mode with the first identification information is executed, and then the first identification information is executed. Is stopped and displayed in a hit manner. Thus, when the first game effect is executed and the specific result is obtained, the hit state is set by the first identification information. In addition, this makes it possible to increase the sense of security of the player when the first game effect is executed, and to enhance the game entertainment.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 17-2 is a gaming machine according to Reference Invention 17-1,
As result of said identification, it has a first identification result, and a second identification result, and
The first identification result is more advantageous to the player than the second identification result,
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the hit mode, the result of the variable display of the identification information is the first identification result.

  According to such a gaming machine, the specific result has the first specific result that is relatively advantageous to the player and the second specific result that is more disadvantageous than the first specific result. When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a hit manner, that is, when the first game effect is executed, the first identification result is relatively advantageous to the player. Thus, the player expects the execution of the first game effect, and when the first game effect is executed, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 17-3 is a gaming machine according to Reference Invention 17-2,
As the game production, there is a second game production,
Having second identification information as the identification information;
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the hit mode, the result of the variable display of the identification information may be the second identification result,
In the case where the second game effect is executed in accordance with the change display of the identification information, in the change display of the identification information, when the reach mode is set with the first identification information, and when the reach mode is set with the second identification information It has, and when to be,
When the reach mode is established with the first identification information and the result of the change display of the identification information is a specific result, the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the hit mode, and the change of the identification information is changed. If the result of the display is not a specific result, the reach mode of the first identification information is stopped and displayed in the deviated mode,
When the reach mode is reached with the second identification information, and the result of the change display of the identification information is a specific result, the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the hit mode, and the change of the identification information is changed. If the display result is not the specific result, the reach mode of the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the out-of-range mode.

  According to such a gaming machine, the game effects include the first game effect and the second game effect, and the identification information includes the first identification information and the second identification information. Then, in the case where the second game effect is executed, if the result of the variable display of the identification information is a specific result, an effect that configures the reach mode with the first identification information is executed, and then the first identification is performed. There is a case where the information is stopped and displayed in a hit mode, and a case where an effect that constitutes the reach mode is executed with the second identification information and then the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a hit mode. When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a hit manner, the second identification result is relatively disadvantageous for the player. Thus, when the second game effect is executed, even when the specific result is obtained, the specific result may be the first specific result or the second specific result. Thereby, the player expects that the first game effect is executed, and when the second game effect is executed, expects the first specified result to be a game, and performs the game. Can be increased.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 17-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 17-1 to Reference Invention 17-3,
In the case where the first game effect is executed in accordance with the variation display of the identification information, in the variation display of the identification information, when the reach mode is set in the second identification information,
Run the change effect of changing the second identification information to the first identification information, and is characterized in that said reach aspect in the first identification information.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the reach mode is established with the second identification information during the execution of the first game effect, a change effect of changing the second identification information to the first identification information is executed. , The reach mode based on the first identification information. Thus, when the first game effect is executed, even if the reach mode based on the second identification information occurs, the game effect is enhanced by the change effect, and the player's sense of security for the first game effect is enhanced. Becomes possible.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 17-5 is a gaming machine according to Reference Invention 17-4,
The change effect is executed at a second display position different from the first display position for displaying the second identification information,
After the change effect in the previous period, the first identification information is displayed in the reach mode at the first display position.

  According to such a gaming machine, the change effect is executed by moving from the first display position where the second identification information is displayed in the reach mode to the second display position. Then, the first identification information changed from the second identification information to the first identification information by the change effect is moved to the first display position and displayed in the reach mode. This allows the player to easily notice the occurrence of the change effect by moving the change effect from the first display position and executing the change effect. In addition, this allows the player to notice the occurrence of the change effect, and enhance the interest in the game.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 17-6 is a gaming machine according to Reference Invention 17-5,
In the identification information display area for displaying the identification information, the second display position is closer to the center position of the identification information display area than the first display position.

  According to such a gaming machine, the second display position at which the change effect is performed is closer to the center position of the identification information display area than the first display position. This makes it possible to make the change effect stand out and make it easier for the player to notice the occurrence of the change effect. In addition, this allows the player to notice the occurrence of the change effect, and enhance the interest in the game.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 17-7 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 17-5 or Reference Invention 17-6,
In the change effect, the first identification information displayed at the second display position is larger than the second identification information displayed at the first display position before the change.

  According to such a gaming machine, the changed first identification information displayed at the second display position in the change effect is displayed larger than the second identification information displayed at the first display position before the change effect is executed. This makes it possible to make the change effect stand out and make it easier for the player to notice the occurrence of the change effect. In addition, this allows the player to notice the occurrence of the change effect, and enhance the interest in the game.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that executes a game effect that enhances gaming interest.

(Reference Invention 18)
In the conventional game machine, based on input sphere to start opening, a symbol display varies performs propriety determination at a predetermined jackpot probability, the symbol is stopped and displayed at big hit symbol when propriety determination result is jackpot, large There was a game that executed a jackpot game that opened a winning opening. In addition, a game effect (reach effect, character effect, etc.) is executed in accordance with the change display of the symbol, and the result of the hit determination may be a big hit depending on the execution mode of the game effect, that is, the symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol. Had the potential to do so. Also, by displaying the amount of prize balls acquired by the jackpot game, if a series of jackpot games is executed in a short period of time, the amount of prize balls acquired during the series is displayed. There was a gaming machine that performed the effect shown. As a result, the expectation of the occurrence of the big hit by the game effect is increased, and the amusement of the game is enhanced by grasping the prize ball amount acquired in the big hit game.

  In the gaming machine described above, although the amount of prize balls acquired by the jackpot game is indicated, it is difficult to grasp whether the acquired amount is relatively large or small. As a result, there is a fear that the player may have a sense of distrust in the game, and may cause a decrease in the interest in the game.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and provides a gaming machine which can prevent a decrease in gaming interest while showing an obtained gaming profit.

The gaming machine according to the invention 18-1 of the invention for solving the above-mentioned problem is:
Identification information display means for variably displaying identification information based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition;
Special game execution means for executing a special game capable of obtaining a predetermined amount of game profit when the result of the variable display of the identification information is a specific result,
Along with the variation display of the identification information, a game effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined game effect,
A profit information display unit capable of displaying profit information indicating the amount of the acquired game profit,
The game production has a first game production and a second game production,
The first game effect indicates a higher possibility of the execution of the special game than the second game effect,
A specific character is displayed in the first game effect,
The specific character is displayed when the profit information displayed on the profit information display section reaches a specific amount.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first gaming effect and the second gaming effect, which are executed in accordance with the change display of the identification information and indicate the feasibility of the special game, are provided. In addition, the first game effect is a game effect that shows a higher possibility as a special game execution possibility than the second game effect, and is a game effect that displays a specific character. In addition, a profit information display unit that displays profit information indicating the amount of the acquired game profit is provided, and when the profit information displayed on the profit information display unit is a specific amount, the specific character is displayed. I do. Thereby, at the timing when the profit information becomes the specific amount, the specific character used in the first game production indicating the relatively high special game execution possibility is displayed, so that the player can obtain many game profits. This allows the player to easily recognize that many game profits have been obtained.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 18-2 is a gaming machine according to Reference Invention 18-1,
The profit information display unit is configured to be unable to display the profit information of the specific amount based on the game profit obtained in one special game, and to display the specific amount based on the game profit obtained in a plurality of special games. In which profit information can be displayed.

  According to such a gaming machine, a specific amount of profit information is not displayed only by the game profit obtained in one special game, and the specific amount is obtained by the game profit obtained in a plurality of special games. Profit information can be displayed. As a result, the specific amount of profit information is set to an amount that exceeds the game profit that can be acquired in one special game, and the profit information is displayed on the profit information display section, and the specific character is displayed. It is possible to enhance the entertainment interest of the player when the game is played.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 18-3 is the gaming machine according to Reference Invention 18-1 or Reference Invention 18-2,
The specific character displayed in the first game effect and the specific character displayed when the profit information displayed on the profit information display unit has a specific amount include characters having the same shape. It is characterized by being performed.

  According to such a gaming machine, the specific character indicating the feasibility of the special game displayed in the first game effect and the specific information indicating that the profit information displayed based on the acquired game profit has become a specific amount. And the character are configured to include the same shape. That is, the specific characters displayed in these two scenes are not only made to be the same characters, but are also displayed in the same display form. This also allows the player to easily (intuitively understand) that the specific characters appearing in both scenes are the same specific characters, and a situation advantageous to the player occurs in both scenes. ) Can be recognized.

The gaming machine according to Reference Invention 18-4 is the gaming machine according to Reference Inventions 18-1 to 18-3,
The specific character displayed in the first game effect is displayed during execution of the change display of the identification information,
The specific character profit information displayed on the income information display unit is displayed when a specific weight is characterized in that it is displayed during the execution of the special game.

  According to such a gaming machine, the specific character displayed in the first game effect is displayed during the execution of the variable display of the identification information, and the specific character displayed when the profit information reaches the specific amount is the special game. Displayed during the execution of. This allows the specific character to appear while the identification information is being changed and during the execution of the special game, and makes it possible to increase the appearance time of the specific character. In addition, this makes it possible for a specific character to appear even in different game situations, and to maintain a gaming interest for a long time.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine showing the acquired game profit amount and preventing a decrease in gaming interest.

  1 pachinko gaming machine, 7b effect symbol display area (effect symbol display section), 8 effect symbols, 20 first starting port, 21 second starting port, 30 first winning port, 35 second winning port, 39 specific area , 41a first special symbol display (first special symbol display), 41b second special symbol display (second special symbol display), 80 main control board (main control section), 90 sub control board (sub control Part), 100 image control board (image control unit), 103a third effect pending display, 103b fourth effect pending display.

Claims (1)

Identification information display means for variably displaying identification information based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition;
Special game execution means for executing a special game capable of obtaining a predetermined amount of game profit when the result of the variable display of the identification information is a specific result,
Along with the variation display of the identification information, a game effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined game effect,
A profit information display unit capable of displaying profit information indicating a total amount of game profit obtained when the game state is in a specific state advantageous to the player,
A specific profit display portion that is displayed when the total amount of game profits acquired when in the specific state is a specific amount ,
The specific amount of profit information cannot be obtained by executing the special game once, but can be obtained by executing the special game a plurality of times,
The game effect performed in accordance with the change display of the identification information includes a first game effect and a second game effect,
The first game effect indicates a higher possibility of the execution of the special game than the second game effect,
A specific character is displayed in the first game effect,
During the execution of the special game, when the total amount of the acquired game profits reaches the specific amount, the specific profit display section is displayed, and the specific profit display section includes information indicating the specific character and the game profit of the specific amount. Is displayed,
The profit information display unit and the specific profit display unit are both displayed,
The specific profit display unit is continuously displayed for a specific period while maintaining the display of the information indicating the specific character and a specific amount of game profit,
The game, wherein the profit information display unit updates the display of the profit information even when the game profit is obtained while the specific profit display unit is continuously displayed for the specific period. Machine.

Images